BraceAbility Fb Product Feed http://www.braceability.com Plus Size Large Compression Knee Sleeve (up to 6XL) http://www.braceability.com/products/plus-size-knee-sleeve?variant=7679042846773 Plus Size Large Compression Knee Sleeve (up to 6XL) XL Plus-Size Knee Sleeve for Compression and Support This knee compression sleeve in XXL and larger sizes is a simple solution for pain in the knee joint stemming from arthritis, knee strains/sprains , and other knee injuries . The plus-size knee compression sleeve is available in sizes from XL up to 6XL, fitting thigh circumferences (measured 6 inches above the kneecap) up to 33 inches. See more plus-size orthotics . The knee sleeve is constructed of premium-grade neoprene that is free of latex. This material is soft against the skin plus it provides warmth, which can be helpful for sore joints. This knee sleeve also provides compression, which reduces inflammation and promotes blood flow and healing. The arthritis knee sleeve has a closed patella and popliteal (back of knee) design for added support.  The XXXL neoprene knee sleeve provides minimal disruption to movement. And its sleek, 13-inch long design ensures a low-profile fit. The knee sleeve for joint pain also comes with an affordable price tag. For users’ convenience, this neoprene knee sleeve can be applied and taken off by simply pulling it onto the leg and positioning it so that the seam is at the back of the leg. Another benefit is that this XXL knee sleeve can be hand washed with warm water and mild soap. Plus-size Compression Leg Sleeves for Knee Pain Arthritis refers to swelling of the joints, which causes pain and stiffness. Not surprisingly, when this occurs in the knee joint, this can be quite disruptive of one’s day-to-day life. Simply walking or climbing a flight of stairs can become problematic. Millions of people deal with arthritis in its various forms. And those who are overweight or obese are at an even higher risk of experiencing various forms of knee joint pain, including arthritis. (Learn more about arthritis .) There is no treatment for arthritis, but there are steps one can take to manage one’s discomfort, maintain mobility and limit the subsequent damage. For one, using an assistive device such as this compression knee sleeve can help support the compromised knee and reduce painful inflammation. The warming function of this neoprene knee sleeve also helps with stiffness and the function of the knee.   Another option for knee joint pain relief is the use of unloader knee braces that shifts weight away from the problematic area. See BraceAbility’s full lineup of knee braces for arthritis treatment . Other non-surgical modes of treatment for knee joint pain stemming from arthritis include activity modification, physical therapy, heat/ice therapy and medication. Some also have success with alternative therapies like acupuncture. Extra-large Knee Sleeve Details This plus-size knee support is a popular product for numerous reasons. Following are some of its key features: Bariatric knee sleeve constructed of premium-grade neoprene that is soft against the skin Latex-free material Applies compression and warmth to reduce inflammation, swelling, and pain Sleeve for large people stabilizes the knee Closed patella and popliteal knee sleeve for added support Indications: knee joint pain, arthritis, knee strains or sprains (moderate) and other knee injuries Discreet black color Hassle-free pull-on applications Lightweight knee brace for arthritis and more Color: Black Length: 13 inches This lightweight knee sleeve is available in sizes up to 6XL. Sizes are based on the circumference of the leg 6" above the mid-patella and 6” below the mid-patella 621768507445 7679042846773 new 29.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03k1101-plus-size-large-compression-knee-sleeve-6xl_grande.jpg?v=1527631707 641061977391 BraceAbility 03K1101XL Plus Size Knee Braces XLUS Plus Size Large Compression Knee Sleeve (up to 6XL) http://www.braceability.com/products/plus-size-knee-sleeve?variant=7679076073525 Plus Size Large Compression Knee Sleeve (up to 6XL) 2XL Plus-Size Knee Sleeve for Compression and Support This knee compression sleeve in XXL and larger sizes is a simple solution for pain in the knee joint stemming from arthritis, knee strains/sprains , and other knee injuries . The plus-size knee compression sleeve is available in sizes from XL up to 6XL, fitting thigh circumferences (measured 6 inches above the kneecap) up to 33 inches. See more plus-size orthotics . The knee sleeve is constructed of premium-grade neoprene that is free of latex. This material is soft against the skin plus it provides warmth, which can be helpful for sore joints. This knee sleeve also provides compression, which reduces inflammation and promotes blood flow and healing. The arthritis knee sleeve has a closed patella and popliteal (back of knee) design for added support.  The XXXL neoprene knee sleeve provides minimal disruption to movement. And its sleek, 13-inch long design ensures a low-profile fit. The knee sleeve for joint pain also comes with an affordable price tag. For users’ convenience, this neoprene knee sleeve can be applied and taken off by simply pulling it onto the leg and positioning it so that the seam is at the back of the leg. Another benefit is that this XXL knee sleeve can be hand washed with warm water and mild soap. Plus-size Compression Leg Sleeves for Knee Pain Arthritis refers to swelling of the joints, which causes pain and stiffness. Not surprisingly, when this occurs in the knee joint, this can be quite disruptive of one’s day-to-day life. Simply walking or climbing a flight of stairs can become problematic. Millions of people deal with arthritis in its various forms. And those who are overweight or obese are at an even higher risk of experiencing various forms of knee joint pain, including arthritis. (Learn more about arthritis .) There is no treatment for arthritis, but there are steps one can take to manage one’s discomfort, maintain mobility and limit the subsequent damage. For one, using an assistive device such as this compression knee sleeve can help support the compromised knee and reduce painful inflammation. The warming function of this neoprene knee sleeve also helps with stiffness and the function of the knee.   Another option for knee joint pain relief is the use of unloader knee braces that shifts weight away from the problematic area. See BraceAbility’s full lineup of knee braces for arthritis treatment . Other non-surgical modes of treatment for knee joint pain stemming from arthritis include activity modification, physical therapy, heat/ice therapy and medication. Some also have success with alternative therapies like acupuncture. Extra-large Knee Sleeve Details This plus-size knee support is a popular product for numerous reasons. Following are some of its key features: Bariatric knee sleeve constructed of premium-grade neoprene that is soft against the skin Latex-free material Applies compression and warmth to reduce inflammation, swelling, and pain Sleeve for large people stabilizes the knee Closed patella and popliteal knee sleeve for added support Indications: knee joint pain, arthritis, knee strains or sprains (moderate) and other knee injuries Discreet black color Hassle-free pull-on applications Lightweight knee brace for arthritis and more Color: Black Length: 13 inches This lightweight knee sleeve is available in sizes up to 6XL. Sizes are based on the circumference of the leg 6" above the mid-patella and 6” below the mid-patella 621768507445 7679076073525 new 29.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03k1101-plus-size-large-compression-knee-sleeve-6xl_grande.jpg?v=1527631707 641061977407 BraceAbility 03K1101XXL Plus Size Knee Braces 2XLUS Plus Size Large Compression Knee Sleeve (up to 6XL) http://www.braceability.com/products/plus-size-knee-sleeve?variant=7679076106293 Plus Size Large Compression Knee Sleeve (up to 6XL) 3XL Plus-Size Knee Sleeve for Compression and Support This knee compression sleeve in XXL and larger sizes is a simple solution for pain in the knee joint stemming from arthritis, knee strains/sprains , and other knee injuries . The plus-size knee compression sleeve is available in sizes from XL up to 6XL, fitting thigh circumferences (measured 6 inches above the kneecap) up to 33 inches. See more plus-size orthotics . The knee sleeve is constructed of premium-grade neoprene that is free of latex. This material is soft against the skin plus it provides warmth, which can be helpful for sore joints. This knee sleeve also provides compression, which reduces inflammation and promotes blood flow and healing. The arthritis knee sleeve has a closed patella and popliteal (back of knee) design for added support.  The XXXL neoprene knee sleeve provides minimal disruption to movement. And its sleek, 13-inch long design ensures a low-profile fit. The knee sleeve for joint pain also comes with an affordable price tag. For users’ convenience, this neoprene knee sleeve can be applied and taken off by simply pulling it onto the leg and positioning it so that the seam is at the back of the leg. Another benefit is that this XXL knee sleeve can be hand washed with warm water and mild soap. Plus-size Compression Leg Sleeves for Knee Pain Arthritis refers to swelling of the joints, which causes pain and stiffness. Not surprisingly, when this occurs in the knee joint, this can be quite disruptive of one’s day-to-day life. Simply walking or climbing a flight of stairs can become problematic. Millions of people deal with arthritis in its various forms. And those who are overweight or obese are at an even higher risk of experiencing various forms of knee joint pain, including arthritis. (Learn more about arthritis .) There is no treatment for arthritis, but there are steps one can take to manage one’s discomfort, maintain mobility and limit the subsequent damage. For one, using an assistive device such as this compression knee sleeve can help support the compromised knee and reduce painful inflammation. The warming function of this neoprene knee sleeve also helps with stiffness and the function of the knee.   Another option for knee joint pain relief is the use of unloader knee braces that shifts weight away from the problematic area. See BraceAbility’s full lineup of knee braces for arthritis treatment . Other non-surgical modes of treatment for knee joint pain stemming from arthritis include activity modification, physical therapy, heat/ice therapy and medication. Some also have success with alternative therapies like acupuncture. Extra-large Knee Sleeve Details This plus-size knee support is a popular product for numerous reasons. Following are some of its key features: Bariatric knee sleeve constructed of premium-grade neoprene that is soft against the skin Latex-free material Applies compression and warmth to reduce inflammation, swelling, and pain Sleeve for large people stabilizes the knee Closed patella and popliteal knee sleeve for added support Indications: knee joint pain, arthritis, knee strains or sprains (moderate) and other knee injuries Discreet black color Hassle-free pull-on applications Lightweight knee brace for arthritis and more Color: Black Length: 13 inches This lightweight knee sleeve is available in sizes up to 6XL. Sizes are based on the circumference of the leg 6" above the mid-patella and 6” below the mid-patella 621768507445 7679076106293 new 29.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03k1101-plus-size-large-compression-knee-sleeve-6xl_grande.jpg?v=1527631707 641061977414 BraceAbility 03K1101XXXL Plus Size Knee Braces 3XLUS Plus Size Large Compression Knee Sleeve (up to 6XL) http://www.braceability.com/products/plus-size-knee-sleeve?variant=7679076139061 Plus Size Large Compression Knee Sleeve (up to 6XL) 4XL Plus-Size Knee Sleeve for Compression and Support This knee compression sleeve in XXL and larger sizes is a simple solution for pain in the knee joint stemming from arthritis, knee strains/sprains , and other knee injuries . The plus-size knee compression sleeve is available in sizes from XL up to 6XL, fitting thigh circumferences (measured 6 inches above the kneecap) up to 33 inches. See more plus-size orthotics . The knee sleeve is constructed of premium-grade neoprene that is free of latex. This material is soft against the skin plus it provides warmth, which can be helpful for sore joints. This knee sleeve also provides compression, which reduces inflammation and promotes blood flow and healing. The arthritis knee sleeve has a closed patella and popliteal (back of knee) design for added support.  The XXXL neoprene knee sleeve provides minimal disruption to movement. And its sleek, 13-inch long design ensures a low-profile fit. The knee sleeve for joint pain also comes with an affordable price tag. For users’ convenience, this neoprene knee sleeve can be applied and taken off by simply pulling it onto the leg and positioning it so that the seam is at the back of the leg. Another benefit is that this XXL knee sleeve can be hand washed with warm water and mild soap. Plus-size Compression Leg Sleeves for Knee Pain Arthritis refers to swelling of the joints, which causes pain and stiffness. Not surprisingly, when this occurs in the knee joint, this can be quite disruptive of one’s day-to-day life. Simply walking or climbing a flight of stairs can become problematic. Millions of people deal with arthritis in its various forms. And those who are overweight or obese are at an even higher risk of experiencing various forms of knee joint pain, including arthritis. (Learn more about arthritis .) There is no treatment for arthritis, but there are steps one can take to manage one’s discomfort, maintain mobility and limit the subsequent damage. For one, using an assistive device such as this compression knee sleeve can help support the compromised knee and reduce painful inflammation. The warming function of this neoprene knee sleeve also helps with stiffness and the function of the knee.   Another option for knee joint pain relief is the use of unloader knee braces that shifts weight away from the problematic area. See BraceAbility’s full lineup of knee braces for arthritis treatment . Other non-surgical modes of treatment for knee joint pain stemming from arthritis include activity modification, physical therapy, heat/ice therapy and medication. Some also have success with alternative therapies like acupuncture. Extra-large Knee Sleeve Details This plus-size knee support is a popular product for numerous reasons. Following are some of its key features: Bariatric knee sleeve constructed of premium-grade neoprene that is soft against the skin Latex-free material Applies compression and warmth to reduce inflammation, swelling, and pain Sleeve for large people stabilizes the knee Closed patella and popliteal knee sleeve for added support Indications: knee joint pain, arthritis, knee strains or sprains (moderate) and other knee injuries Discreet black color Hassle-free pull-on applications Lightweight knee brace for arthritis and more Color: Black Length: 13 inches This lightweight knee sleeve is available in sizes up to 6XL. Sizes are based on the circumference of the leg 6" above the mid-patella and 6” below the mid-patella 621768507445 7679076139061 new 29.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03k1101-plus-size-large-compression-knee-sleeve-6xl_grande.jpg?v=1527631707 641061977421 BraceAbility 03K1101XXXXL Plus Size Knee Braces 4XLUS Plus Size Large Compression Knee Sleeve (up to 6XL) http://www.braceability.com/products/plus-size-knee-sleeve?variant=7679076171829 Plus Size Large Compression Knee Sleeve (up to 6XL) 5XL Plus-Size Knee Sleeve for Compression and Support This knee compression sleeve in XXL and larger sizes is a simple solution for pain in the knee joint stemming from arthritis, knee strains/sprains , and other knee injuries . The plus-size knee compression sleeve is available in sizes from XL up to 6XL, fitting thigh circumferences (measured 6 inches above the kneecap) up to 33 inches. See more plus-size orthotics . The knee sleeve is constructed of premium-grade neoprene that is free of latex. This material is soft against the skin plus it provides warmth, which can be helpful for sore joints. This knee sleeve also provides compression, which reduces inflammation and promotes blood flow and healing. The arthritis knee sleeve has a closed patella and popliteal (back of knee) design for added support.  The XXXL neoprene knee sleeve provides minimal disruption to movement. And its sleek, 13-inch long design ensures a low-profile fit. The knee sleeve for joint pain also comes with an affordable price tag. For users’ convenience, this neoprene knee sleeve can be applied and taken off by simply pulling it onto the leg and positioning it so that the seam is at the back of the leg. Another benefit is that this XXL knee sleeve can be hand washed with warm water and mild soap. Plus-size Compression Leg Sleeves for Knee Pain Arthritis refers to swelling of the joints, which causes pain and stiffness. Not surprisingly, when this occurs in the knee joint, this can be quite disruptive of one’s day-to-day life. Simply walking or climbing a flight of stairs can become problematic. Millions of people deal with arthritis in its various forms. And those who are overweight or obese are at an even higher risk of experiencing various forms of knee joint pain, including arthritis. (Learn more about arthritis .) There is no treatment for arthritis, but there are steps one can take to manage one’s discomfort, maintain mobility and limit the subsequent damage. For one, using an assistive device such as this compression knee sleeve can help support the compromised knee and reduce painful inflammation. The warming function of this neoprene knee sleeve also helps with stiffness and the function of the knee.   Another option for knee joint pain relief is the use of unloader knee braces that shifts weight away from the problematic area. See BraceAbility’s full lineup of knee braces for arthritis treatment . Other non-surgical modes of treatment for knee joint pain stemming from arthritis include activity modification, physical therapy, heat/ice therapy and medication. Some also have success with alternative therapies like acupuncture. Extra-large Knee Sleeve Details This plus-size knee support is a popular product for numerous reasons. Following are some of its key features: Bariatric knee sleeve constructed of premium-grade neoprene that is soft against the skin Latex-free material Applies compression and warmth to reduce inflammation, swelling, and pain Sleeve for large people stabilizes the knee Closed patella and popliteal knee sleeve for added support Indications: knee joint pain, arthritis, knee strains or sprains (moderate) and other knee injuries Discreet black color Hassle-free pull-on applications Lightweight knee brace for arthritis and more Color: Black Length: 13 inches This lightweight knee sleeve is available in sizes up to 6XL. Sizes are based on the circumference of the leg 6" above the mid-patella and 6” below the mid-patella 621768507445 7679076171829 new 29.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03k1101-plus-size-large-compression-knee-sleeve-6xl_grande.jpg?v=1527631707 641061977438 BraceAbility 03K1101-5XL Plus Size Knee Braces 5XLUS Plus Size Large Compression Knee Sleeve (up to 6XL) http://www.braceability.com/products/plus-size-knee-sleeve?variant=7679076204597 Plus Size Large Compression Knee Sleeve (up to 6XL) 6XL Plus-Size Knee Sleeve for Compression and Support This knee compression sleeve in XXL and larger sizes is a simple solution for pain in the knee joint stemming from arthritis, knee strains/sprains , and other knee injuries . The plus-size knee compression sleeve is available in sizes from XL up to 6XL, fitting thigh circumferences (measured 6 inches above the kneecap) up to 33 inches. See more plus-size orthotics . The knee sleeve is constructed of premium-grade neoprene that is free of latex. This material is soft against the skin plus it provides warmth, which can be helpful for sore joints. This knee sleeve also provides compression, which reduces inflammation and promotes blood flow and healing. The arthritis knee sleeve has a closed patella and popliteal (back of knee) design for added support.  The XXXL neoprene knee sleeve provides minimal disruption to movement. And its sleek, 13-inch long design ensures a low-profile fit. The knee sleeve for joint pain also comes with an affordable price tag. For users’ convenience, this neoprene knee sleeve can be applied and taken off by simply pulling it onto the leg and positioning it so that the seam is at the back of the leg. Another benefit is that this XXL knee sleeve can be hand washed with warm water and mild soap. Plus-size Compression Leg Sleeves for Knee Pain Arthritis refers to swelling of the joints, which causes pain and stiffness. Not surprisingly, when this occurs in the knee joint, this can be quite disruptive of one’s day-to-day life. Simply walking or climbing a flight of stairs can become problematic. Millions of people deal with arthritis in its various forms. And those who are overweight or obese are at an even higher risk of experiencing various forms of knee joint pain, including arthritis. (Learn more about arthritis .) There is no treatment for arthritis, but there are steps one can take to manage one’s discomfort, maintain mobility and limit the subsequent damage. For one, using an assistive device such as this compression knee sleeve can help support the compromised knee and reduce painful inflammation. The warming function of this neoprene knee sleeve also helps with stiffness and the function of the knee.   Another option for knee joint pain relief is the use of unloader knee braces that shifts weight away from the problematic area. See BraceAbility’s full lineup of knee braces for arthritis treatment . Other non-surgical modes of treatment for knee joint pain stemming from arthritis include activity modification, physical therapy, heat/ice therapy and medication. Some also have success with alternative therapies like acupuncture. Extra-large Knee Sleeve Details This plus-size knee support is a popular product for numerous reasons. Following are some of its key features: Bariatric knee sleeve constructed of premium-grade neoprene that is soft against the skin Latex-free material Applies compression and warmth to reduce inflammation, swelling, and pain Sleeve for large people stabilizes the knee Closed patella and popliteal knee sleeve for added support Indications: knee joint pain, arthritis, knee strains or sprains (moderate) and other knee injuries Discreet black color Hassle-free pull-on applications Lightweight knee brace for arthritis and more Color: Black Length: 13 inches This lightweight knee sleeve is available in sizes up to 6XL. Sizes are based on the circumference of the leg 6" above the mid-patella and 6” below the mid-patella 621768507445 7679076204597 new 29.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03k1101-plus-size-large-compression-knee-sleeve-6xl_grande.jpg?v=1527631707 641061977445 BraceAbility 03K1101-6XL Plus Size Knee Braces 6XLUS Bariatric Plus Size Hinged Knee Brace for Meniscus & Joint Support http://www.braceability.com/products/bariatric-plus-size-knee-brace?variant=7285883535413 Bariatric Plus Size Hinged Knee Brace for Meniscus & Joint Support XL Hinged Knee Brace for Arthritis & Meniscus Tears This hinged knee brace is one of our most popular supports, fitting average to plus size men and women. Our orthopedic neoprene brace was designed to protect your knee from future injuries, alleviate pain, and provide comfortable all-day support. This hinged knee brace can help treat many causes of knee pain and conditions including: Meniscus tears Knee arthritis Moderate knee sprains and knee strains ACL and LCL injuries Knee tendonitis Patellar instability General knee pain Do I Need a Plus Size Knee Brace? About 1 in every 5 American adults suffer from knee pain, which makes sense considering over half of Americans are overweight to morbidly obese. Those extra pounds increase stress on your knees, which can cause chronic pain, leading to other knee-related complications, such as arthritis or osteoarthritis . Unfortunately, there is no cure for the aching pains and stiffness associated with osteoarthritis, outside of a knee replacement. However, there are steps you can take to ease the discomfort, including the use of a plus-size knee brace or exercises for overweight knee pain . This knee brace is especially helpful among bariatric patients because its hinges help remove excess strain on your joints, stabilizing your knee so additional inflammation and damage does not occur. 6 Reasons Why People Love This Neoprene Knee Brace for Men & Women Available in sizes XL - 6XL This bariatric support is available in the following knee brace sizes: XL, XXL, XXXL, 4XL, 5XL, and 6XL. But to say it is an “extra-large” brace is a bit misleading, as the size XL fits more like a medium. For smaller sizes, try our Torn Meniscus Knee Brace with full flexion and extension control. See our “sizing chart” for information on how to measure for the correct fit. Simple, Wrap-Around Application This hassle-free recovery knee splint can be worn interchangeably on your right or left knee. The adjustable, wraparound configuration makes this knee support easy for bigger people with larger legs to put on. Anterior medical-grade Velcro straps located above and below the kneecap also permit easy application and fit for overweight patients. Made of Premium-Grade Neoprene This discreet black knee brace is 12” tall and 1/8” thick, allowing the wrap to be worn under loose pants or over fitted leggings. The neoprene material provides soothing warmth and moderate elastic compression to your sore knee, reducing swelling and encouraging blood flow to speed up your healing process. Includes Dual Axis Polycentric Hinges Two hinges provide enhanced stability to the medial (inner) and lateral (outer) sides of your knee, which is especially useful if suffer from carrying around extra weight. Remove the hinges to create a low-profile knee support that is comfortable and discreet enough to wear all day. Can Help Jumpstart Weight Loss Trying to lose weight? The extra support provided by this brace can ease extra pressure placed on your knee joint during exercise and sports. Open-Patella & Open-Popliteal Design If you find solid neoprene knee supports or ACE bandages sweaty and uncomfortable, this brace is definitely a better fit for you. Although full coverage knee sleeves provide a little extra support, they tend to bunch behind your knee joint and slide down during physical activities and sports. An opening over your kneecap reduces pressure on your sore kneecap, making this plus size brace more breathable and flexible than a solid knee sleeve. In addition, a circular cutout behind your knee (popliteal) helps prevent the brace from bunching when walking or bending. Frequently Asked Questions about This Extra Large Knee Brace for Big Legs Who can wear it? With sizes from XL to 6XL, average to plus size adults can wear this knee brace. How do I know what size to get? Using a soft, flexible tape measure, find the circumference of your leg 6” above the center of your kneecap and 6” below the center of your kneecap. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our sizing graphic below to choose the right size. What conditions does this knee brace treat? This knee brace helps treat and prevent knee arthritis and osteoarthritis, meniscus tears, obesity knee pain, knee sprains and strains, ACL, LCL, MCL and PCL ligament injuries, knee tendonitis, athletic injuries, and surgery recovery. How do I put on this brace? Position behind your knee with the tag on top in your left hand. Wrap the bottom snugly around your leg, directly below your kneecap. Repeat to secure top portion. A circular opening should be around your kneecap. Feed the bottom Velcro strap through the D-ring and secure. Repeat with the top strap. Can I wear this brace over my pants? Yes, but this knee brace is meant to fit against your skin for a better grip. It can be worn above tight pants or leggings if necessary. How tall is this knee brace? 12”. What material is this support made of? Premium-grade neoprene, plastic hinges, nylon straps, and Velcro closures. All components are latex-free. When should I wear this knee brace? This lightweight knee brace can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during physical activity. However, you should check with your primary care physician before wearing any compression knee brace or sleeve while sleeping. Washing Instructions: Remove hinges. Close Velcro closures and hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Lay flat to air dry completely before reapplying. Other features: Hinges are removable if lesser stabilization is desired Good option for heavy people with a large calf and thigh Wraparound application for easy-to-adjust compression Color: Black. 565207564341 7285883535413 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10k0102-plus-size-knee-brace_grande.jpg?v=1529590515 641061974840 BraceAbility 10K0102XL Plus Size Knee Braces XLUS Bariatric Plus Size Hinged Knee Brace for Meniscus & Joint Support http://www.braceability.com/products/bariatric-plus-size-knee-brace?variant=7383827808309 Bariatric Plus Size Hinged Knee Brace for Meniscus & Joint Support 2XL Hinged Knee Brace for Arthritis & Meniscus Tears This hinged knee brace is one of our most popular supports, fitting average to plus size men and women. Our orthopedic neoprene brace was designed to protect your knee from future injuries, alleviate pain, and provide comfortable all-day support. This hinged knee brace can help treat many causes of knee pain and conditions including: Meniscus tears Knee arthritis Moderate knee sprains and knee strains ACL and LCL injuries Knee tendonitis Patellar instability General knee pain Do I Need a Plus Size Knee Brace? About 1 in every 5 American adults suffer from knee pain, which makes sense considering over half of Americans are overweight to morbidly obese. Those extra pounds increase stress on your knees, which can cause chronic pain, leading to other knee-related complications, such as arthritis or osteoarthritis . Unfortunately, there is no cure for the aching pains and stiffness associated with osteoarthritis, outside of a knee replacement. However, there are steps you can take to ease the discomfort, including the use of a plus-size knee brace or exercises for overweight knee pain . This knee brace is especially helpful among bariatric patients because its hinges help remove excess strain on your joints, stabilizing your knee so additional inflammation and damage does not occur. 6 Reasons Why People Love This Neoprene Knee Brace for Men & Women Available in sizes XL - 6XL This bariatric support is available in the following knee brace sizes: XL, XXL, XXXL, 4XL, 5XL, and 6XL. But to say it is an “extra-large” brace is a bit misleading, as the size XL fits more like a medium. For smaller sizes, try our Torn Meniscus Knee Brace with full flexion and extension control. See our “sizing chart” for information on how to measure for the correct fit. Simple, Wrap-Around Application This hassle-free recovery knee splint can be worn interchangeably on your right or left knee. The adjustable, wraparound configuration makes this knee support easy for bigger people with larger legs to put on. Anterior medical-grade Velcro straps located above and below the kneecap also permit easy application and fit for overweight patients. Made of Premium-Grade Neoprene This discreet black knee brace is 12” tall and 1/8” thick, allowing the wrap to be worn under loose pants or over fitted leggings. The neoprene material provides soothing warmth and moderate elastic compression to your sore knee, reducing swelling and encouraging blood flow to speed up your healing process. Includes Dual Axis Polycentric Hinges Two hinges provide enhanced stability to the medial (inner) and lateral (outer) sides of your knee, which is especially useful if suffer from carrying around extra weight. Remove the hinges to create a low-profile knee support that is comfortable and discreet enough to wear all day. Can Help Jumpstart Weight Loss Trying to lose weight? The extra support provided by this brace can ease extra pressure placed on your knee joint during exercise and sports. Open-Patella & Open-Popliteal Design If you find solid neoprene knee supports or ACE bandages sweaty and uncomfortable, this brace is definitely a better fit for you. Although full coverage knee sleeves provide a little extra support, they tend to bunch behind your knee joint and slide down during physical activities and sports. An opening over your kneecap reduces pressure on your sore kneecap, making this plus size brace more breathable and flexible than a solid knee sleeve. In addition, a circular cutout behind your knee (popliteal) helps prevent the brace from bunching when walking or bending. Frequently Asked Questions about This Extra Large Knee Brace for Big Legs Who can wear it? With sizes from XL to 6XL, average to plus size adults can wear this knee brace. How do I know what size to get? Using a soft, flexible tape measure, find the circumference of your leg 6” above the center of your kneecap and 6” below the center of your kneecap. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our sizing graphic below to choose the right size. What conditions does this knee brace treat? This knee brace helps treat and prevent knee arthritis and osteoarthritis, meniscus tears, obesity knee pain, knee sprains and strains, ACL, LCL, MCL and PCL ligament injuries, knee tendonitis, athletic injuries, and surgery recovery. How do I put on this brace? Position behind your knee with the tag on top in your left hand. Wrap the bottom snugly around your leg, directly below your kneecap. Repeat to secure top portion. A circular opening should be around your kneecap. Feed the bottom Velcro strap through the D-ring and secure. Repeat with the top strap. Can I wear this brace over my pants? Yes, but this knee brace is meant to fit against your skin for a better grip. It can be worn above tight pants or leggings if necessary. How tall is this knee brace? 12”. What material is this support made of? Premium-grade neoprene, plastic hinges, nylon straps, and Velcro closures. All components are latex-free. When should I wear this knee brace? This lightweight knee brace can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during physical activity. However, you should check with your primary care physician before wearing any compression knee brace or sleeve while sleeping. Washing Instructions: Remove hinges. Close Velcro closures and hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Lay flat to air dry completely before reapplying. Other features: Hinges are removable if lesser stabilization is desired Good option for heavy people with a large calf and thigh Wraparound application for easy-to-adjust compression Color: Black. 565207564341 7383827808309 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10k0102-plus-size-knee-brace_grande.jpg?v=1529590515 641061974857 BraceAbility 10K0102XXL Plus Size Knee Braces 2XLUS Bariatric Plus Size Hinged Knee Brace for Meniscus & Joint Support http://www.braceability.com/products/bariatric-plus-size-knee-brace?variant=7383827841077 Bariatric Plus Size Hinged Knee Brace for Meniscus & Joint Support 3XL Hinged Knee Brace for Arthritis & Meniscus Tears This hinged knee brace is one of our most popular supports, fitting average to plus size men and women. Our orthopedic neoprene brace was designed to protect your knee from future injuries, alleviate pain, and provide comfortable all-day support. This hinged knee brace can help treat many causes of knee pain and conditions including: Meniscus tears Knee arthritis Moderate knee sprains and knee strains ACL and LCL injuries Knee tendonitis Patellar instability General knee pain Do I Need a Plus Size Knee Brace? About 1 in every 5 American adults suffer from knee pain, which makes sense considering over half of Americans are overweight to morbidly obese. Those extra pounds increase stress on your knees, which can cause chronic pain, leading to other knee-related complications, such as arthritis or osteoarthritis . Unfortunately, there is no cure for the aching pains and stiffness associated with osteoarthritis, outside of a knee replacement. However, there are steps you can take to ease the discomfort, including the use of a plus-size knee brace or exercises for overweight knee pain . This knee brace is especially helpful among bariatric patients because its hinges help remove excess strain on your joints, stabilizing your knee so additional inflammation and damage does not occur. 6 Reasons Why People Love This Neoprene Knee Brace for Men & Women Available in sizes XL - 6XL This bariatric support is available in the following knee brace sizes: XL, XXL, XXXL, 4XL, 5XL, and 6XL. But to say it is an “extra-large” brace is a bit misleading, as the size XL fits more like a medium. For smaller sizes, try our Torn Meniscus Knee Brace with full flexion and extension control. See our “sizing chart” for information on how to measure for the correct fit. Simple, Wrap-Around Application This hassle-free recovery knee splint can be worn interchangeably on your right or left knee. The adjustable, wraparound configuration makes this knee support easy for bigger people with larger legs to put on. Anterior medical-grade Velcro straps located above and below the kneecap also permit easy application and fit for overweight patients. Made of Premium-Grade Neoprene This discreet black knee brace is 12” tall and 1/8” thick, allowing the wrap to be worn under loose pants or over fitted leggings. The neoprene material provides soothing warmth and moderate elastic compression to your sore knee, reducing swelling and encouraging blood flow to speed up your healing process. Includes Dual Axis Polycentric Hinges Two hinges provide enhanced stability to the medial (inner) and lateral (outer) sides of your knee, which is especially useful if suffer from carrying around extra weight. Remove the hinges to create a low-profile knee support that is comfortable and discreet enough to wear all day. Can Help Jumpstart Weight Loss Trying to lose weight? The extra support provided by this brace can ease extra pressure placed on your knee joint during exercise and sports. Open-Patella & Open-Popliteal Design If you find solid neoprene knee supports or ACE bandages sweaty and uncomfortable, this brace is definitely a better fit for you. Although full coverage knee sleeves provide a little extra support, they tend to bunch behind your knee joint and slide down during physical activities and sports. An opening over your kneecap reduces pressure on your sore kneecap, making this plus size brace more breathable and flexible than a solid knee sleeve. In addition, a circular cutout behind your knee (popliteal) helps prevent the brace from bunching when walking or bending. Frequently Asked Questions about This Extra Large Knee Brace for Big Legs Who can wear it? With sizes from XL to 6XL, average to plus size adults can wear this knee brace. How do I know what size to get? Using a soft, flexible tape measure, find the circumference of your leg 6” above the center of your kneecap and 6” below the center of your kneecap. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our sizing graphic below to choose the right size. What conditions does this knee brace treat? This knee brace helps treat and prevent knee arthritis and osteoarthritis, meniscus tears, obesity knee pain, knee sprains and strains, ACL, LCL, MCL and PCL ligament injuries, knee tendonitis, athletic injuries, and surgery recovery. How do I put on this brace? Position behind your knee with the tag on top in your left hand. Wrap the bottom snugly around your leg, directly below your kneecap. Repeat to secure top portion. A circular opening should be around your kneecap. Feed the bottom Velcro strap through the D-ring and secure. Repeat with the top strap. Can I wear this brace over my pants? Yes, but this knee brace is meant to fit against your skin for a better grip. It can be worn above tight pants or leggings if necessary. How tall is this knee brace? 12”. What material is this support made of? Premium-grade neoprene, plastic hinges, nylon straps, and Velcro closures. All components are latex-free. When should I wear this knee brace? This lightweight knee brace can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during physical activity. However, you should check with your primary care physician before wearing any compression knee brace or sleeve while sleeping. Washing Instructions: Remove hinges. Close Velcro closures and hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Lay flat to air dry completely before reapplying. Other features: Hinges are removable if lesser stabilization is desired Good option for heavy people with a large calf and thigh Wraparound application for easy-to-adjust compression Color: Black. 565207564341 7383827841077 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10k0102-plus-size-knee-brace_grande.jpg?v=1529590515 641061974864 BraceAbility 10K0102XXXL Plus Size Knee Braces 3XLUS Bariatric Plus Size Hinged Knee Brace for Meniscus & Joint Support http://www.braceability.com/products/bariatric-plus-size-knee-brace?variant=7383827873845 Bariatric Plus Size Hinged Knee Brace for Meniscus & Joint Support 4XL Hinged Knee Brace for Arthritis & Meniscus Tears This hinged knee brace is one of our most popular supports, fitting average to plus size men and women. Our orthopedic neoprene brace was designed to protect your knee from future injuries, alleviate pain, and provide comfortable all-day support. This hinged knee brace can help treat many causes of knee pain and conditions including: Meniscus tears Knee arthritis Moderate knee sprains and knee strains ACL and LCL injuries Knee tendonitis Patellar instability General knee pain Do I Need a Plus Size Knee Brace? About 1 in every 5 American adults suffer from knee pain, which makes sense considering over half of Americans are overweight to morbidly obese. Those extra pounds increase stress on your knees, which can cause chronic pain, leading to other knee-related complications, such as arthritis or osteoarthritis . Unfortunately, there is no cure for the aching pains and stiffness associated with osteoarthritis, outside of a knee replacement. However, there are steps you can take to ease the discomfort, including the use of a plus-size knee brace or exercises for overweight knee pain . This knee brace is especially helpful among bariatric patients because its hinges help remove excess strain on your joints, stabilizing your knee so additional inflammation and damage does not occur. 6 Reasons Why People Love This Neoprene Knee Brace for Men & Women Available in sizes XL - 6XL This bariatric support is available in the following knee brace sizes: XL, XXL, XXXL, 4XL, 5XL, and 6XL. But to say it is an “extra-large” brace is a bit misleading, as the size XL fits more like a medium. For smaller sizes, try our Torn Meniscus Knee Brace with full flexion and extension control. See our “sizing chart” for information on how to measure for the correct fit. Simple, Wrap-Around Application This hassle-free recovery knee splint can be worn interchangeably on your right or left knee. The adjustable, wraparound configuration makes this knee support easy for bigger people with larger legs to put on. Anterior medical-grade Velcro straps located above and below the kneecap also permit easy application and fit for overweight patients. Made of Premium-Grade Neoprene This discreet black knee brace is 12” tall and 1/8” thick, allowing the wrap to be worn under loose pants or over fitted leggings. The neoprene material provides soothing warmth and moderate elastic compression to your sore knee, reducing swelling and encouraging blood flow to speed up your healing process. Includes Dual Axis Polycentric Hinges Two hinges provide enhanced stability to the medial (inner) and lateral (outer) sides of your knee, which is especially useful if suffer from carrying around extra weight. Remove the hinges to create a low-profile knee support that is comfortable and discreet enough to wear all day. Can Help Jumpstart Weight Loss Trying to lose weight? The extra support provided by this brace can ease extra pressure placed on your knee joint during exercise and sports. Open-Patella & Open-Popliteal Design If you find solid neoprene knee supports or ACE bandages sweaty and uncomfortable, this brace is definitely a better fit for you. Although full coverage knee sleeves provide a little extra support, they tend to bunch behind your knee joint and slide down during physical activities and sports. An opening over your kneecap reduces pressure on your sore kneecap, making this plus size brace more breathable and flexible than a solid knee sleeve. In addition, a circular cutout behind your knee (popliteal) helps prevent the brace from bunching when walking or bending. Frequently Asked Questions about This Extra Large Knee Brace for Big Legs Who can wear it? With sizes from XL to 6XL, average to plus size adults can wear this knee brace. How do I know what size to get? Using a soft, flexible tape measure, find the circumference of your leg 6” above the center of your kneecap and 6” below the center of your kneecap. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our sizing graphic below to choose the right size. What conditions does this knee brace treat? This knee brace helps treat and prevent knee arthritis and osteoarthritis, meniscus tears, obesity knee pain, knee sprains and strains, ACL, LCL, MCL and PCL ligament injuries, knee tendonitis, athletic injuries, and surgery recovery. How do I put on this brace? Position behind your knee with the tag on top in your left hand. Wrap the bottom snugly around your leg, directly below your kneecap. Repeat to secure top portion. A circular opening should be around your kneecap. Feed the bottom Velcro strap through the D-ring and secure. Repeat with the top strap. Can I wear this brace over my pants? Yes, but this knee brace is meant to fit against your skin for a better grip. It can be worn above tight pants or leggings if necessary. How tall is this knee brace? 12”. What material is this support made of? Premium-grade neoprene, plastic hinges, nylon straps, and Velcro closures. All components are latex-free. When should I wear this knee brace? This lightweight knee brace can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during physical activity. However, you should check with your primary care physician before wearing any compression knee brace or sleeve while sleeping. Washing Instructions: Remove hinges. Close Velcro closures and hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Lay flat to air dry completely before reapplying. Other features: Hinges are removable if lesser stabilization is desired Good option for heavy people with a large calf and thigh Wraparound application for easy-to-adjust compression Color: Black. 565207564341 7383827873845 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10k0102-plus-size-knee-brace_grande.jpg?v=1529590515 641061974871 BraceAbility 10K0102XXXXL Plus Size Knee Braces 4XLUS Bariatric Plus Size Hinged Knee Brace for Meniscus & Joint Support http://www.braceability.com/products/bariatric-plus-size-knee-brace?variant=7383827906613 Bariatric Plus Size Hinged Knee Brace for Meniscus & Joint Support 5XL Hinged Knee Brace for Arthritis & Meniscus Tears This hinged knee brace is one of our most popular supports, fitting average to plus size men and women. Our orthopedic neoprene brace was designed to protect your knee from future injuries, alleviate pain, and provide comfortable all-day support. This hinged knee brace can help treat many causes of knee pain and conditions including: Meniscus tears Knee arthritis Moderate knee sprains and knee strains ACL and LCL injuries Knee tendonitis Patellar instability General knee pain Do I Need a Plus Size Knee Brace? About 1 in every 5 American adults suffer from knee pain, which makes sense considering over half of Americans are overweight to morbidly obese. Those extra pounds increase stress on your knees, which can cause chronic pain, leading to other knee-related complications, such as arthritis or osteoarthritis . Unfortunately, there is no cure for the aching pains and stiffness associated with osteoarthritis, outside of a knee replacement. However, there are steps you can take to ease the discomfort, including the use of a plus-size knee brace or exercises for overweight knee pain . This knee brace is especially helpful among bariatric patients because its hinges help remove excess strain on your joints, stabilizing your knee so additional inflammation and damage does not occur. 6 Reasons Why People Love This Neoprene Knee Brace for Men & Women Available in sizes XL - 6XL This bariatric support is available in the following knee brace sizes: XL, XXL, XXXL, 4XL, 5XL, and 6XL. But to say it is an “extra-large” brace is a bit misleading, as the size XL fits more like a medium. For smaller sizes, try our Torn Meniscus Knee Brace with full flexion and extension control. See our “sizing chart” for information on how to measure for the correct fit. Simple, Wrap-Around Application This hassle-free recovery knee splint can be worn interchangeably on your right or left knee. The adjustable, wraparound configuration makes this knee support easy for bigger people with larger legs to put on. Anterior medical-grade Velcro straps located above and below the kneecap also permit easy application and fit for overweight patients. Made of Premium-Grade Neoprene This discreet black knee brace is 12” tall and 1/8” thick, allowing the wrap to be worn under loose pants or over fitted leggings. The neoprene material provides soothing warmth and moderate elastic compression to your sore knee, reducing swelling and encouraging blood flow to speed up your healing process. Includes Dual Axis Polycentric Hinges Two hinges provide enhanced stability to the medial (inner) and lateral (outer) sides of your knee, which is especially useful if suffer from carrying around extra weight. Remove the hinges to create a low-profile knee support that is comfortable and discreet enough to wear all day. Can Help Jumpstart Weight Loss Trying to lose weight? The extra support provided by this brace can ease extra pressure placed on your knee joint during exercise and sports. Open-Patella & Open-Popliteal Design If you find solid neoprene knee supports or ACE bandages sweaty and uncomfortable, this brace is definitely a better fit for you. Although full coverage knee sleeves provide a little extra support, they tend to bunch behind your knee joint and slide down during physical activities and sports. An opening over your kneecap reduces pressure on your sore kneecap, making this plus size brace more breathable and flexible than a solid knee sleeve. In addition, a circular cutout behind your knee (popliteal) helps prevent the brace from bunching when walking or bending. Frequently Asked Questions about This Extra Large Knee Brace for Big Legs Who can wear it? With sizes from XL to 6XL, average to plus size adults can wear this knee brace. How do I know what size to get? Using a soft, flexible tape measure, find the circumference of your leg 6” above the center of your kneecap and 6” below the center of your kneecap. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our sizing graphic below to choose the right size. What conditions does this knee brace treat? This knee brace helps treat and prevent knee arthritis and osteoarthritis, meniscus tears, obesity knee pain, knee sprains and strains, ACL, LCL, MCL and PCL ligament injuries, knee tendonitis, athletic injuries, and surgery recovery. How do I put on this brace? Position behind your knee with the tag on top in your left hand. Wrap the bottom snugly around your leg, directly below your kneecap. Repeat to secure top portion. A circular opening should be around your kneecap. Feed the bottom Velcro strap through the D-ring and secure. Repeat with the top strap. Can I wear this brace over my pants? Yes, but this knee brace is meant to fit against your skin for a better grip. It can be worn above tight pants or leggings if necessary. How tall is this knee brace? 12”. What material is this support made of? Premium-grade neoprene, plastic hinges, nylon straps, and Velcro closures. All components are latex-free. When should I wear this knee brace? This lightweight knee brace can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during physical activity. However, you should check with your primary care physician before wearing any compression knee brace or sleeve while sleeping. Washing Instructions: Remove hinges. Close Velcro closures and hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Lay flat to air dry completely before reapplying. Other features: Hinges are removable if lesser stabilization is desired Good option for heavy people with a large calf and thigh Wraparound application for easy-to-adjust compression Color: Black. 565207564341 7383827906613 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10k0102-plus-size-knee-brace_grande.jpg?v=1529590515 641061974888 BraceAbility 10K0102-5XL Plus Size Knee Braces 5XLUS Bariatric Plus Size Hinged Knee Brace for Meniscus & Joint Support http://www.braceability.com/products/bariatric-plus-size-knee-brace?variant=7383827939381 Bariatric Plus Size Hinged Knee Brace for Meniscus & Joint Support 6XL Hinged Knee Brace for Arthritis & Meniscus Tears This hinged knee brace is one of our most popular supports, fitting average to plus size men and women. Our orthopedic neoprene brace was designed to protect your knee from future injuries, alleviate pain, and provide comfortable all-day support. This hinged knee brace can help treat many causes of knee pain and conditions including: Meniscus tears Knee arthritis Moderate knee sprains and knee strains ACL and LCL injuries Knee tendonitis Patellar instability General knee pain Do I Need a Plus Size Knee Brace? About 1 in every 5 American adults suffer from knee pain, which makes sense considering over half of Americans are overweight to morbidly obese. Those extra pounds increase stress on your knees, which can cause chronic pain, leading to other knee-related complications, such as arthritis or osteoarthritis . Unfortunately, there is no cure for the aching pains and stiffness associated with osteoarthritis, outside of a knee replacement. However, there are steps you can take to ease the discomfort, including the use of a plus-size knee brace or exercises for overweight knee pain . This knee brace is especially helpful among bariatric patients because its hinges help remove excess strain on your joints, stabilizing your knee so additional inflammation and damage does not occur. 6 Reasons Why People Love This Neoprene Knee Brace for Men & Women Available in sizes XL - 6XL This bariatric support is available in the following knee brace sizes: XL, XXL, XXXL, 4XL, 5XL, and 6XL. But to say it is an “extra-large” brace is a bit misleading, as the size XL fits more like a medium. For smaller sizes, try our Torn Meniscus Knee Brace with full flexion and extension control. See our “sizing chart” for information on how to measure for the correct fit. Simple, Wrap-Around Application This hassle-free recovery knee splint can be worn interchangeably on your right or left knee. The adjustable, wraparound configuration makes this knee support easy for bigger people with larger legs to put on. Anterior medical-grade Velcro straps located above and below the kneecap also permit easy application and fit for overweight patients. Made of Premium-Grade Neoprene This discreet black knee brace is 12” tall and 1/8” thick, allowing the wrap to be worn under loose pants or over fitted leggings. The neoprene material provides soothing warmth and moderate elastic compression to your sore knee, reducing swelling and encouraging blood flow to speed up your healing process. Includes Dual Axis Polycentric Hinges Two hinges provide enhanced stability to the medial (inner) and lateral (outer) sides of your knee, which is especially useful if suffer from carrying around extra weight. Remove the hinges to create a low-profile knee support that is comfortable and discreet enough to wear all day. Can Help Jumpstart Weight Loss Trying to lose weight? The extra support provided by this brace can ease extra pressure placed on your knee joint during exercise and sports. Open-Patella & Open-Popliteal Design If you find solid neoprene knee supports or ACE bandages sweaty and uncomfortable, this brace is definitely a better fit for you. Although full coverage knee sleeves provide a little extra support, they tend to bunch behind your knee joint and slide down during physical activities and sports. An opening over your kneecap reduces pressure on your sore kneecap, making this plus size brace more breathable and flexible than a solid knee sleeve. In addition, a circular cutout behind your knee (popliteal) helps prevent the brace from bunching when walking or bending. Frequently Asked Questions about This Extra Large Knee Brace for Big Legs Who can wear it? With sizes from XL to 6XL, average to plus size adults can wear this knee brace. How do I know what size to get? Using a soft, flexible tape measure, find the circumference of your leg 6” above the center of your kneecap and 6” below the center of your kneecap. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our sizing graphic below to choose the right size. What conditions does this knee brace treat? This knee brace helps treat and prevent knee arthritis and osteoarthritis, meniscus tears, obesity knee pain, knee sprains and strains, ACL, LCL, MCL and PCL ligament injuries, knee tendonitis, athletic injuries, and surgery recovery. How do I put on this brace? Position behind your knee with the tag on top in your left hand. Wrap the bottom snugly around your leg, directly below your kneecap. Repeat to secure top portion. A circular opening should be around your kneecap. Feed the bottom Velcro strap through the D-ring and secure. Repeat with the top strap. Can I wear this brace over my pants? Yes, but this knee brace is meant to fit against your skin for a better grip. It can be worn above tight pants or leggings if necessary. How tall is this knee brace? 12”. What material is this support made of? Premium-grade neoprene, plastic hinges, nylon straps, and Velcro closures. All components are latex-free. When should I wear this knee brace? This lightweight knee brace can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during physical activity. However, you should check with your primary care physician before wearing any compression knee brace or sleeve while sleeping. Washing Instructions: Remove hinges. Close Velcro closures and hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Lay flat to air dry completely before reapplying. Other features: Hinges are removable if lesser stabilization is desired Good option for heavy people with a large calf and thigh Wraparound application for easy-to-adjust compression Color: Black. 565207564341 7383827939381 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10k0102-plus-size-knee-brace_grande.jpg?v=1529590515 641061982821 BraceAbility 10K0102-6XL Plus Size Knee Braces 6XLUS Obesity Knee Pain Brace http://www.braceability.com/products/obesity-knee-pain-brace?variant=7678370545717 Obesity Knee Pain Brace L Why Do I Need This Plus Size Knee Brace for Obesity Knee Joint Pain and Arthritis Treatment? Every pound of body weight adds about five pounds of force on your knee joint. So, it’s not surprising that being overweight increases your risk of experiencing knee-related injuries and can cause your knees to wear out faster than they might otherwise. For example, research shows being overweight or obese significantly increases your risk of suffering from osteoarthritis or the acceleration of existing arthritis. Unfortunately, obesity-related knee pain can make it difficult to exercise or play sports, which along with a healthy diet is very important for fat/weight loss. This plus-size, arthritic knee brace helps address this problem as it adds support to your knee and reduces stress on your knee. This medical knee brace helps manage pain from a number of knee conditions, including: Medial or lateral kneecap instability Muscle weakness or injury Ligament weakness or injury Arthritic knees Knee osteoarthritis (bone on bone contact) General knee pain 4 Reasons People Love This Big and Tall Knee Brace For Large Legs Lightweight, Moisture-Wicking Material This plus size knee brace is constructed out of a latex-free, neoprene alternative material. If you find solid neoprene knee supports or tommie copper knee braces sweaty and uncomfortable, this knee brace is a more breathable and comfortable alternative to wear. Open Patella and Popliteal Design This knee brace was designed with openings around your patella (kneecap) and popliteal (back of knee) for comfortable, extended use among overweight, obese, and morbidly obese patients. The open patella (kneecap) design eliminates pressure over your sore kneecap, increases mobility, and reduces sweat build up, while still providing support around your kneecap. The cut out behind your knee (popliteal) is a subtle feature, which increases mobility, prevents bunching behind your knee, and reduces excessive rubbing as you move. Heavy Duty Hinges The heavy duty, side hinges provide medial and lateral stability to your knee and limit your range of motion in the side-to-side direction. Side-to-side movements can lead to LCL (lateral collateral ligament) or MCL (medial collateral ligament) tears , which are the ligaments that run up the sides of your knee joints. What if I don’t need additional support on the medial and lateral sides of my knee? This type knee brace is fairly unique in that you can actually remove the metal hinges, which effectively turns it into a nice lightweight wrap that offers a little bit of support, but not as much as when the hinges are in. Wrap-Around Design for Easy Application This support for bad knees features a simple wrap-around design, which makes it a breeze to put on and take off, according to reviews. Plus, the Velcro straps are durable and adjustable, so you can adjust your brace to a custom fit after you select the size that works best for you. Frequently Asked Questions About This Extra Large Knee Brace Who can wear it?  With sizes ranging from L-6XL, this knee brace fits overweight to morbidly obese men and women.   How do I know what size to get?  Using a fabric tape measure, measure the circumference of your leg 6” above the center of your kneecap and 6” below the center of your kneecap. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our sizing graphic in the pictures above to choose the right size. What conditions does this bariatric knee brace treat?  This brace helps ease pain from degenerative joint disease (osteoarthritis), muscle / ligament weakness or injury, medial / lateral instability, meniscus tears, post-surgery recovery, and general obesity knee joint pain. How do I put on this knee wrap? Open knee wrap and all straps Position wrap with openings around your kneecap (patella) and at the back of your knee (popliteal) - (The BraceAbility brand logo should be on the front of your leg above your kneecap) Fasten the Velcro strap around your calf first Then, fasten the remaining Velcro strap around your thigh Can I wear this support over my pants?  Yes, if necessary How tall is this orthopedic knee brace?  13” What material is this knee stabilizer made of?  Latex-free, 1/4” thick, padded neoprene alternative material When should I wear this knee brace?  This knee brace can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during mild physical activity. However, you should consult with your doctor before wearing any compression knee brace for extended periods of time, such as sleeping. Washing Instructions:  Remove metal stays, close all Velcro closures and hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Air dry completely for about 24 hours. Other Features:  Removable medial and lateral hinges. Wrap-around design.  Affordable.  Color:  Black 621632127029 7678370545717 new 59.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03k0401-obesity-knee-pain-brace-for-knee-pain_grande.jpg?v=1527630780 641061974796 BraceAbility 03K0401L Plus Size Knee Braces LUS Obesity Knee Pain Brace http://www.braceability.com/products/obesity-knee-pain-brace?variant=7678405410869 Obesity Knee Pain Brace XL Why Do I Need This Plus Size Knee Brace for Obesity Knee Joint Pain and Arthritis Treatment? Every pound of body weight adds about five pounds of force on your knee joint. So, it’s not surprising that being overweight increases your risk of experiencing knee-related injuries and can cause your knees to wear out faster than they might otherwise. For example, research shows being overweight or obese significantly increases your risk of suffering from osteoarthritis or the acceleration of existing arthritis. Unfortunately, obesity-related knee pain can make it difficult to exercise or play sports, which along with a healthy diet is very important for fat/weight loss. This plus-size, arthritic knee brace helps address this problem as it adds support to your knee and reduces stress on your knee. This medical knee brace helps manage pain from a number of knee conditions, including: Medial or lateral kneecap instability Muscle weakness or injury Ligament weakness or injury Arthritic knees Knee osteoarthritis (bone on bone contact) General knee pain 4 Reasons People Love This Big and Tall Knee Brace For Large Legs Lightweight, Moisture-Wicking Material This plus size knee brace is constructed out of a latex-free, neoprene alternative material. If you find solid neoprene knee supports or tommie copper knee braces sweaty and uncomfortable, this knee brace is a more breathable and comfortable alternative to wear. Open Patella and Popliteal Design This knee brace was designed with openings around your patella (kneecap) and popliteal (back of knee) for comfortable, extended use among overweight, obese, and morbidly obese patients. The open patella (kneecap) design eliminates pressure over your sore kneecap, increases mobility, and reduces sweat build up, while still providing support around your kneecap. The cut out behind your knee (popliteal) is a subtle feature, which increases mobility, prevents bunching behind your knee, and reduces excessive rubbing as you move. Heavy Duty Hinges The heavy duty, side hinges provide medial and lateral stability to your knee and limit your range of motion in the side-to-side direction. Side-to-side movements can lead to LCL (lateral collateral ligament) or MCL (medial collateral ligament) tears , which are the ligaments that run up the sides of your knee joints. What if I don’t need additional support on the medial and lateral sides of my knee? This type knee brace is fairly unique in that you can actually remove the metal hinges, which effectively turns it into a nice lightweight wrap that offers a little bit of support, but not as much as when the hinges are in. Wrap-Around Design for Easy Application This support for bad knees features a simple wrap-around design, which makes it a breeze to put on and take off, according to reviews. Plus, the Velcro straps are durable and adjustable, so you can adjust your brace to a custom fit after you select the size that works best for you. Frequently Asked Questions About This Extra Large Knee Brace Who can wear it?  With sizes ranging from L-6XL, this knee brace fits overweight to morbidly obese men and women.   How do I know what size to get?  Using a fabric tape measure, measure the circumference of your leg 6” above the center of your kneecap and 6” below the center of your kneecap. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our sizing graphic in the pictures above to choose the right size. What conditions does this bariatric knee brace treat?  This brace helps ease pain from degenerative joint disease (osteoarthritis), muscle / ligament weakness or injury, medial / lateral instability, meniscus tears, post-surgery recovery, and general obesity knee joint pain. How do I put on this knee wrap? Open knee wrap and all straps Position wrap with openings around your kneecap (patella) and at the back of your knee (popliteal) - (The BraceAbility brand logo should be on the front of your leg above your kneecap) Fasten the Velcro strap around your calf first Then, fasten the remaining Velcro strap around your thigh Can I wear this support over my pants?  Yes, if necessary How tall is this orthopedic knee brace?  13” What material is this knee stabilizer made of?  Latex-free, 1/4” thick, padded neoprene alternative material When should I wear this knee brace?  This knee brace can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during mild physical activity. However, you should consult with your doctor before wearing any compression knee brace for extended periods of time, such as sleeping. Washing Instructions:  Remove metal stays, close all Velcro closures and hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Air dry completely for about 24 hours. Other Features:  Removable medial and lateral hinges. Wrap-around design.  Affordable.  Color:  Black 621632127029 7678405410869 new 59.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03k0401-obesity-knee-pain-brace-for-knee-pain_grande.jpg?v=1527630780 641061974802 BraceAbility 03K0401XL Plus Size Knee Braces XLUS Obesity Knee Pain Brace http://www.braceability.com/products/obesity-knee-pain-brace?variant=7678405443637 Obesity Knee Pain Brace 2XL Why Do I Need This Plus Size Knee Brace for Obesity Knee Joint Pain and Arthritis Treatment? Every pound of body weight adds about five pounds of force on your knee joint. So, it’s not surprising that being overweight increases your risk of experiencing knee-related injuries and can cause your knees to wear out faster than they might otherwise. For example, research shows being overweight or obese significantly increases your risk of suffering from osteoarthritis or the acceleration of existing arthritis. Unfortunately, obesity-related knee pain can make it difficult to exercise or play sports, which along with a healthy diet is very important for fat/weight loss. This plus-size, arthritic knee brace helps address this problem as it adds support to your knee and reduces stress on your knee. This medical knee brace helps manage pain from a number of knee conditions, including: Medial or lateral kneecap instability Muscle weakness or injury Ligament weakness or injury Arthritic knees Knee osteoarthritis (bone on bone contact) General knee pain 4 Reasons People Love This Big and Tall Knee Brace For Large Legs Lightweight, Moisture-Wicking Material This plus size knee brace is constructed out of a latex-free, neoprene alternative material. If you find solid neoprene knee supports or tommie copper knee braces sweaty and uncomfortable, this knee brace is a more breathable and comfortable alternative to wear. Open Patella and Popliteal Design This knee brace was designed with openings around your patella (kneecap) and popliteal (back of knee) for comfortable, extended use among overweight, obese, and morbidly obese patients. The open patella (kneecap) design eliminates pressure over your sore kneecap, increases mobility, and reduces sweat build up, while still providing support around your kneecap. The cut out behind your knee (popliteal) is a subtle feature, which increases mobility, prevents bunching behind your knee, and reduces excessive rubbing as you move. Heavy Duty Hinges The heavy duty, side hinges provide medial and lateral stability to your knee and limit your range of motion in the side-to-side direction. Side-to-side movements can lead to LCL (lateral collateral ligament) or MCL (medial collateral ligament) tears , which are the ligaments that run up the sides of your knee joints. What if I don’t need additional support on the medial and lateral sides of my knee? This type knee brace is fairly unique in that you can actually remove the metal hinges, which effectively turns it into a nice lightweight wrap that offers a little bit of support, but not as much as when the hinges are in. Wrap-Around Design for Easy Application This support for bad knees features a simple wrap-around design, which makes it a breeze to put on and take off, according to reviews. Plus, the Velcro straps are durable and adjustable, so you can adjust your brace to a custom fit after you select the size that works best for you. Frequently Asked Questions About This Extra Large Knee Brace Who can wear it?  With sizes ranging from L-6XL, this knee brace fits overweight to morbidly obese men and women.   How do I know what size to get?  Using a fabric tape measure, measure the circumference of your leg 6” above the center of your kneecap and 6” below the center of your kneecap. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our sizing graphic in the pictures above to choose the right size. What conditions does this bariatric knee brace treat?  This brace helps ease pain from degenerative joint disease (osteoarthritis), muscle / ligament weakness or injury, medial / lateral instability, meniscus tears, post-surgery recovery, and general obesity knee joint pain. How do I put on this knee wrap? Open knee wrap and all straps Position wrap with openings around your kneecap (patella) and at the back of your knee (popliteal) - (The BraceAbility brand logo should be on the front of your leg above your kneecap) Fasten the Velcro strap around your calf first Then, fasten the remaining Velcro strap around your thigh Can I wear this support over my pants?  Yes, if necessary How tall is this orthopedic knee brace?  13” What material is this knee stabilizer made of?  Latex-free, 1/4” thick, padded neoprene alternative material When should I wear this knee brace?  This knee brace can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during mild physical activity. However, you should consult with your doctor before wearing any compression knee brace for extended periods of time, such as sleeping. Washing Instructions:  Remove metal stays, close all Velcro closures and hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Air dry completely for about 24 hours. Other Features:  Removable medial and lateral hinges. Wrap-around design.  Affordable.  Color:  Black 621632127029 7678405443637 new 59.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03k0401-obesity-knee-pain-brace-for-knee-pain_grande.jpg?v=1527630780 641061974819 BraceAbility 03K0401XXL Plus Size Knee Braces 2XLUS Obesity Knee Pain Brace http://www.braceability.com/products/obesity-knee-pain-brace?variant=7678405476405 Obesity Knee Pain Brace 3XL Why Do I Need This Plus Size Knee Brace for Obesity Knee Joint Pain and Arthritis Treatment? Every pound of body weight adds about five pounds of force on your knee joint. So, it’s not surprising that being overweight increases your risk of experiencing knee-related injuries and can cause your knees to wear out faster than they might otherwise. For example, research shows being overweight or obese significantly increases your risk of suffering from osteoarthritis or the acceleration of existing arthritis. Unfortunately, obesity-related knee pain can make it difficult to exercise or play sports, which along with a healthy diet is very important for fat/weight loss. This plus-size, arthritic knee brace helps address this problem as it adds support to your knee and reduces stress on your knee. This medical knee brace helps manage pain from a number of knee conditions, including: Medial or lateral kneecap instability Muscle weakness or injury Ligament weakness or injury Arthritic knees Knee osteoarthritis (bone on bone contact) General knee pain 4 Reasons People Love This Big and Tall Knee Brace For Large Legs Lightweight, Moisture-Wicking Material This plus size knee brace is constructed out of a latex-free, neoprene alternative material. If you find solid neoprene knee supports or tommie copper knee braces sweaty and uncomfortable, this knee brace is a more breathable and comfortable alternative to wear. Open Patella and Popliteal Design This knee brace was designed with openings around your patella (kneecap) and popliteal (back of knee) for comfortable, extended use among overweight, obese, and morbidly obese patients. The open patella (kneecap) design eliminates pressure over your sore kneecap, increases mobility, and reduces sweat build up, while still providing support around your kneecap. The cut out behind your knee (popliteal) is a subtle feature, which increases mobility, prevents bunching behind your knee, and reduces excessive rubbing as you move. Heavy Duty Hinges The heavy duty, side hinges provide medial and lateral stability to your knee and limit your range of motion in the side-to-side direction. Side-to-side movements can lead to LCL (lateral collateral ligament) or MCL (medial collateral ligament) tears , which are the ligaments that run up the sides of your knee joints. What if I don’t need additional support on the medial and lateral sides of my knee? This type knee brace is fairly unique in that you can actually remove the metal hinges, which effectively turns it into a nice lightweight wrap that offers a little bit of support, but not as much as when the hinges are in. Wrap-Around Design for Easy Application This support for bad knees features a simple wrap-around design, which makes it a breeze to put on and take off, according to reviews. Plus, the Velcro straps are durable and adjustable, so you can adjust your brace to a custom fit after you select the size that works best for you. Frequently Asked Questions About This Extra Large Knee Brace Who can wear it?  With sizes ranging from L-6XL, this knee brace fits overweight to morbidly obese men and women.   How do I know what size to get?  Using a fabric tape measure, measure the circumference of your leg 6” above the center of your kneecap and 6” below the center of your kneecap. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our sizing graphic in the pictures above to choose the right size. What conditions does this bariatric knee brace treat?  This brace helps ease pain from degenerative joint disease (osteoarthritis), muscle / ligament weakness or injury, medial / lateral instability, meniscus tears, post-surgery recovery, and general obesity knee joint pain. How do I put on this knee wrap? Open knee wrap and all straps Position wrap with openings around your kneecap (patella) and at the back of your knee (popliteal) - (The BraceAbility brand logo should be on the front of your leg above your kneecap) Fasten the Velcro strap around your calf first Then, fasten the remaining Velcro strap around your thigh Can I wear this support over my pants?  Yes, if necessary How tall is this orthopedic knee brace?  13” What material is this knee stabilizer made of?  Latex-free, 1/4” thick, padded neoprene alternative material When should I wear this knee brace?  This knee brace can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during mild physical activity. However, you should consult with your doctor before wearing any compression knee brace for extended periods of time, such as sleeping. Washing Instructions:  Remove metal stays, close all Velcro closures and hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Air dry completely for about 24 hours. Other Features:  Removable medial and lateral hinges. Wrap-around design.  Affordable.  Color:  Black 621632127029 7678405476405 new 59.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03k0401-obesity-knee-pain-brace-for-knee-pain_grande.jpg?v=1527630780 641061974826 BraceAbility 03K0401XXXL Plus Size Knee Braces 3XLUS Obesity Knee Pain Brace http://www.braceability.com/products/obesity-knee-pain-brace?variant=7678405509173 Obesity Knee Pain Brace 4XL Why Do I Need This Plus Size Knee Brace for Obesity Knee Joint Pain and Arthritis Treatment? Every pound of body weight adds about five pounds of force on your knee joint. So, it’s not surprising that being overweight increases your risk of experiencing knee-related injuries and can cause your knees to wear out faster than they might otherwise. For example, research shows being overweight or obese significantly increases your risk of suffering from osteoarthritis or the acceleration of existing arthritis. Unfortunately, obesity-related knee pain can make it difficult to exercise or play sports, which along with a healthy diet is very important for fat/weight loss. This plus-size, arthritic knee brace helps address this problem as it adds support to your knee and reduces stress on your knee. This medical knee brace helps manage pain from a number of knee conditions, including: Medial or lateral kneecap instability Muscle weakness or injury Ligament weakness or injury Arthritic knees Knee osteoarthritis (bone on bone contact) General knee pain 4 Reasons People Love This Big and Tall Knee Brace For Large Legs Lightweight, Moisture-Wicking Material This plus size knee brace is constructed out of a latex-free, neoprene alternative material. If you find solid neoprene knee supports or tommie copper knee braces sweaty and uncomfortable, this knee brace is a more breathable and comfortable alternative to wear. Open Patella and Popliteal Design This knee brace was designed with openings around your patella (kneecap) and popliteal (back of knee) for comfortable, extended use among overweight, obese, and morbidly obese patients. The open patella (kneecap) design eliminates pressure over your sore kneecap, increases mobility, and reduces sweat build up, while still providing support around your kneecap. The cut out behind your knee (popliteal) is a subtle feature, which increases mobility, prevents bunching behind your knee, and reduces excessive rubbing as you move. Heavy Duty Hinges The heavy duty, side hinges provide medial and lateral stability to your knee and limit your range of motion in the side-to-side direction. Side-to-side movements can lead to LCL (lateral collateral ligament) or MCL (medial collateral ligament) tears , which are the ligaments that run up the sides of your knee joints. What if I don’t need additional support on the medial and lateral sides of my knee? This type knee brace is fairly unique in that you can actually remove the metal hinges, which effectively turns it into a nice lightweight wrap that offers a little bit of support, but not as much as when the hinges are in. Wrap-Around Design for Easy Application This support for bad knees features a simple wrap-around design, which makes it a breeze to put on and take off, according to reviews. Plus, the Velcro straps are durable and adjustable, so you can adjust your brace to a custom fit after you select the size that works best for you. Frequently Asked Questions About This Extra Large Knee Brace Who can wear it?  With sizes ranging from L-6XL, this knee brace fits overweight to morbidly obese men and women.   How do I know what size to get?  Using a fabric tape measure, measure the circumference of your leg 6” above the center of your kneecap and 6” below the center of your kneecap. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our sizing graphic in the pictures above to choose the right size. What conditions does this bariatric knee brace treat?  This brace helps ease pain from degenerative joint disease (osteoarthritis), muscle / ligament weakness or injury, medial / lateral instability, meniscus tears, post-surgery recovery, and general obesity knee joint pain. How do I put on this knee wrap? Open knee wrap and all straps Position wrap with openings around your kneecap (patella) and at the back of your knee (popliteal) - (The BraceAbility brand logo should be on the front of your leg above your kneecap) Fasten the Velcro strap around your calf first Then, fasten the remaining Velcro strap around your thigh Can I wear this support over my pants?  Yes, if necessary How tall is this orthopedic knee brace?  13” What material is this knee stabilizer made of?  Latex-free, 1/4” thick, padded neoprene alternative material When should I wear this knee brace?  This knee brace can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during mild physical activity. However, you should consult with your doctor before wearing any compression knee brace for extended periods of time, such as sleeping. Washing Instructions:  Remove metal stays, close all Velcro closures and hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Air dry completely for about 24 hours. Other Features:  Removable medial and lateral hinges. Wrap-around design.  Affordable.  Color:  Black 621632127029 7678405509173 new 59.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03k0401-obesity-knee-pain-brace-for-knee-pain_grande.jpg?v=1527630780 641061974833 BraceAbility 03K0401XXXXL Plus Size Knee Braces 4XLUS Obesity Knee Pain Brace http://www.braceability.com/products/obesity-knee-pain-brace?variant=7678405574709 Obesity Knee Pain Brace 5XL Why Do I Need This Plus Size Knee Brace for Obesity Knee Joint Pain and Arthritis Treatment? Every pound of body weight adds about five pounds of force on your knee joint. So, it’s not surprising that being overweight increases your risk of experiencing knee-related injuries and can cause your knees to wear out faster than they might otherwise. For example, research shows being overweight or obese significantly increases your risk of suffering from osteoarthritis or the acceleration of existing arthritis. Unfortunately, obesity-related knee pain can make it difficult to exercise or play sports, which along with a healthy diet is very important for fat/weight loss. This plus-size, arthritic knee brace helps address this problem as it adds support to your knee and reduces stress on your knee. This medical knee brace helps manage pain from a number of knee conditions, including: Medial or lateral kneecap instability Muscle weakness or injury Ligament weakness or injury Arthritic knees Knee osteoarthritis (bone on bone contact) General knee pain 4 Reasons People Love This Big and Tall Knee Brace For Large Legs Lightweight, Moisture-Wicking Material This plus size knee brace is constructed out of a latex-free, neoprene alternative material. If you find solid neoprene knee supports or tommie copper knee braces sweaty and uncomfortable, this knee brace is a more breathable and comfortable alternative to wear. Open Patella and Popliteal Design This knee brace was designed with openings around your patella (kneecap) and popliteal (back of knee) for comfortable, extended use among overweight, obese, and morbidly obese patients. The open patella (kneecap) design eliminates pressure over your sore kneecap, increases mobility, and reduces sweat build up, while still providing support around your kneecap. The cut out behind your knee (popliteal) is a subtle feature, which increases mobility, prevents bunching behind your knee, and reduces excessive rubbing as you move. Heavy Duty Hinges The heavy duty, side hinges provide medial and lateral stability to your knee and limit your range of motion in the side-to-side direction. Side-to-side movements can lead to LCL (lateral collateral ligament) or MCL (medial collateral ligament) tears , which are the ligaments that run up the sides of your knee joints. What if I don’t need additional support on the medial and lateral sides of my knee? This type knee brace is fairly unique in that you can actually remove the metal hinges, which effectively turns it into a nice lightweight wrap that offers a little bit of support, but not as much as when the hinges are in. Wrap-Around Design for Easy Application This support for bad knees features a simple wrap-around design, which makes it a breeze to put on and take off, according to reviews. Plus, the Velcro straps are durable and adjustable, so you can adjust your brace to a custom fit after you select the size that works best for you. Frequently Asked Questions About This Extra Large Knee Brace Who can wear it?  With sizes ranging from L-6XL, this knee brace fits overweight to morbidly obese men and women.   How do I know what size to get?  Using a fabric tape measure, measure the circumference of your leg 6” above the center of your kneecap and 6” below the center of your kneecap. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our sizing graphic in the pictures above to choose the right size. What conditions does this bariatric knee brace treat?  This brace helps ease pain from degenerative joint disease (osteoarthritis), muscle / ligament weakness or injury, medial / lateral instability, meniscus tears, post-surgery recovery, and general obesity knee joint pain. How do I put on this knee wrap? Open knee wrap and all straps Position wrap with openings around your kneecap (patella) and at the back of your knee (popliteal) - (The BraceAbility brand logo should be on the front of your leg above your kneecap) Fasten the Velcro strap around your calf first Then, fasten the remaining Velcro strap around your thigh Can I wear this support over my pants?  Yes, if necessary How tall is this orthopedic knee brace?  13” What material is this knee stabilizer made of?  Latex-free, 1/4” thick, padded neoprene alternative material When should I wear this knee brace?  This knee brace can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during mild physical activity. However, you should consult with your doctor before wearing any compression knee brace for extended periods of time, such as sleeping. Washing Instructions:  Remove metal stays, close all Velcro closures and hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Air dry completely for about 24 hours. Other Features:  Removable medial and lateral hinges. Wrap-around design.  Affordable.  Color:  Black 621632127029 7678405574709 new 59.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03k0401-obesity-knee-pain-brace-for-knee-pain_grande.jpg?v=1527630780 641061977483 BraceAbility 03K0401-5XL Plus Size Knee Braces 5XLUS Obesity Knee Pain Brace http://www.braceability.com/products/obesity-knee-pain-brace?variant=7678405640245 Obesity Knee Pain Brace 6XL Why Do I Need This Plus Size Knee Brace for Obesity Knee Joint Pain and Arthritis Treatment? Every pound of body weight adds about five pounds of force on your knee joint. So, it’s not surprising that being overweight increases your risk of experiencing knee-related injuries and can cause your knees to wear out faster than they might otherwise. For example, research shows being overweight or obese significantly increases your risk of suffering from osteoarthritis or the acceleration of existing arthritis. Unfortunately, obesity-related knee pain can make it difficult to exercise or play sports, which along with a healthy diet is very important for fat/weight loss. This plus-size, arthritic knee brace helps address this problem as it adds support to your knee and reduces stress on your knee. This medical knee brace helps manage pain from a number of knee conditions, including: Medial or lateral kneecap instability Muscle weakness or injury Ligament weakness or injury Arthritic knees Knee osteoarthritis (bone on bone contact) General knee pain 4 Reasons People Love This Big and Tall Knee Brace For Large Legs Lightweight, Moisture-Wicking Material This plus size knee brace is constructed out of a latex-free, neoprene alternative material. If you find solid neoprene knee supports or tommie copper knee braces sweaty and uncomfortable, this knee brace is a more breathable and comfortable alternative to wear. Open Patella and Popliteal Design This knee brace was designed with openings around your patella (kneecap) and popliteal (back of knee) for comfortable, extended use among overweight, obese, and morbidly obese patients. The open patella (kneecap) design eliminates pressure over your sore kneecap, increases mobility, and reduces sweat build up, while still providing support around your kneecap. The cut out behind your knee (popliteal) is a subtle feature, which increases mobility, prevents bunching behind your knee, and reduces excessive rubbing as you move. Heavy Duty Hinges The heavy duty, side hinges provide medial and lateral stability to your knee and limit your range of motion in the side-to-side direction. Side-to-side movements can lead to LCL (lateral collateral ligament) or MCL (medial collateral ligament) tears , which are the ligaments that run up the sides of your knee joints. What if I don’t need additional support on the medial and lateral sides of my knee? This type knee brace is fairly unique in that you can actually remove the metal hinges, which effectively turns it into a nice lightweight wrap that offers a little bit of support, but not as much as when the hinges are in. Wrap-Around Design for Easy Application This support for bad knees features a simple wrap-around design, which makes it a breeze to put on and take off, according to reviews. Plus, the Velcro straps are durable and adjustable, so you can adjust your brace to a custom fit after you select the size that works best for you. Frequently Asked Questions About This Extra Large Knee Brace Who can wear it?  With sizes ranging from L-6XL, this knee brace fits overweight to morbidly obese men and women.   How do I know what size to get?  Using a fabric tape measure, measure the circumference of your leg 6” above the center of your kneecap and 6” below the center of your kneecap. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our sizing graphic in the pictures above to choose the right size. What conditions does this bariatric knee brace treat?  This brace helps ease pain from degenerative joint disease (osteoarthritis), muscle / ligament weakness or injury, medial / lateral instability, meniscus tears, post-surgery recovery, and general obesity knee joint pain. How do I put on this knee wrap? Open knee wrap and all straps Position wrap with openings around your kneecap (patella) and at the back of your knee (popliteal) - (The BraceAbility brand logo should be on the front of your leg above your kneecap) Fasten the Velcro strap around your calf first Then, fasten the remaining Velcro strap around your thigh Can I wear this support over my pants?  Yes, if necessary How tall is this orthopedic knee brace?  13” What material is this knee stabilizer made of?  Latex-free, 1/4” thick, padded neoprene alternative material When should I wear this knee brace?  This knee brace can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during mild physical activity. However, you should consult with your doctor before wearing any compression knee brace for extended periods of time, such as sleeping. Washing Instructions:  Remove metal stays, close all Velcro closures and hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Air dry completely for about 24 hours. Other Features:  Removable medial and lateral hinges. Wrap-around design.  Affordable.  Color:  Black 621632127029 7678405640245 new 59.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03k0401-obesity-knee-pain-brace-for-knee-pain_grande.jpg?v=1527630780 641061977490 BraceAbility 03K0401-6XL Plus Size Knee Braces 6XLUS Big Knee Brace for Large Legs with Patella Support http://www.braceability.com/products/knee-brace-for-large-legs?variant=7676799746101 Big Knee Brace for Large Legs with Patella Support L Why You Need This Orthopedic Knee Brace for Large Thighs Knee pain is a relatively common phenomenon that is even more prominent among those struggling with obesity. Each pound of body weight puts five pounds of force on your knee. Therefore, it is easy to understand why being overweight or obese can lead to or accelerate knee problems and pain. Unfortunately, this knee pain can prevent obese people from living a more active lifestyle, making weight loss even more difficult. For this reason, BraceAbility is happy to offer this plus-size knee support that comes in a variety of sizes as large as an XXXXL knee brace, which fits leg circumferences up to 31 inches. Plus, you’ll pay the same affordable price for the size 3XL or 4XL, as you would purchasing a medium or large knee brace! See more bariatric braces and supports . BraceAbility’s plus size knee sleeve for large legs was designed to protect your knee from future injuries, alleviate your knee pain, and provide comfortable support to your knees. This knee brace can help treat many causes of knee pain and knee conditions including: Knee arthritis (knee osteoarthritis ) Meniscus tears Grade I collateral ligament sprain Patellar subluxation Chondromalacia Patellar tendonitis Patellofemoral tracking dysfunction Patellar dislocation Plica syndrome 5 Reasons Why You'll Love This Plus Size Knee Support for Big Legs This neoprene knee brace is one of BraceAbility’s best and most popular knee supports thanks to several innovative features, which allow overweight patients to enjoy a more active, pain-free lifestyle, in addition to protecting their knee against injury. Comfortable, Open-Patella Design With an opening around your patella (kneecap), this extra large knee support is more flexible and breathable than solid knee sleeves or ACE bandage wrap. The open patella design also eliminates pressure over your sore or swollen kneecap, making it comfortable for all-day wear. Made out of a Soothing, Premium-Grade Neoprene Material The material of this bariatric knee stabilizer is also comfortable against your skin. Plus, the flexible material and lightweight fit make it easy for you to move about and engage in light physical activity while wearing this comfortable knee support for obesity.  Reduces Swelling and Promotes Healing This neoprene fabric provides warmth and moderate elastic compression to your sore knee, which reduces swelling and encourages blood flow to speed up your recovery process. View more of our neoprene knee braces . Plus, at only 13” long and 3/16” thick, this discreet black knee sleeve is not too flashy and flat enough to fit under ordinary pants, such as jeans, but still thick enough to provide the necessary amount of compression and support. Customizable Tubular Buttress and Spiral Stays This extra-large knee brace features a sewn-in, tubular buttress. The solid tubular buttress encircles your entire kneecap, promoting proper patellar tracking and movement. However, you can also trim the buttress for customizable support over, under, or on either side of your kneecap, if desired. Learn more about why you might be experiencing anterior, posterior, medial, or lateral knee pain . In addition, aluminum spiral stays are located on the medial (inside) and lateral (outside) sides of your knee to help provide stability. These stays reduce pressure on your kneecap and improve patellar tracking, which helps treat conditions such as patella instability, patellar subluxation , and kneecap dislocation . Easily Adjustable Pressure Straps Two adjustable pressure straps located above and below your kneecap prevent your knee brace for thick quads from slipping around or sliding down. As an added bonus, the Velcro closures found on these straps is medical-grade, making it 10 times stronger than the standard, retail-grade Velcro you will find on other braces purchased at Walgreens, Target, or other online retailers, for example.   Frequently Asked Questions About This XXXL Bariatric Knee Brace What conditions does this knee brace treat? Helps to manage pain from injuries like knee arthritis, knee osteoarthritis (OA), grade I collateral ligament sprains, patellar subluxation, chondromalacia, patellar tendonitis, patellofemoral tracking dysfunction, patellar dislocation, quadricep tendonitis, and plica syndrome. Who can wear it? With sizes from L all the way up to 4XL, overweight and plus size men and women can wear this knee support for big legs. How do I know what size to get? Using a fabric tape measure, measure the circumference of your leg 6” above the center of your kneecap and 6” below the center of your kneecap. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our sizing graphic in the photos above to choose the right size. How do I put on this plus size knee brace? With all Velcro straps undone, insert your foot into the largest end (logo should be on top) and pull the sleeve up your leg. Center the circular opening over your kneecap. The stitched seam should run down the backside of your leg, centered behind your kneecap. Starting at the bottom, feed the strap through the d-ring. Then, pull the strap and secure Velcro closure at your desired tension level. Repeat with the top strap. Tighten or loosen the straps throughout the day if necessary. Can I wear this brace over my pants? Yes, but this knee brace is meant to fit against your skin for a better grip. It can be worn above tight pants or leggings if necessary. How tall is this knee brace? 13.5”. What material is this sleeve made of? Latex-free, 3/16” thick, premium-grade neoprene, Velcro closures, and aluminum spiral stays. When should I wear this oversized knee brace? This lightweight knee brace can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during physical activity. However, you should check with your primary care physician before wearing any compression knee sleeve or orthopedic support while sleeping. Washing Instructions: Close Velcro closures and hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Then, lay it flat to air dry completely before reapplying. Other features: An enclosed trimmable tubular buttress is included. Hinge-free design for comfortable support. A good option for heavy people with larger calfs and thighs. Color: Black. 621485162549 7676799746101 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/06k0101-knee-brace-for-large-legs-with-patella-support_grande.jpg?v=1527625509 641061974628 BraceAbility 06K0101L Plus Size Knee Braces LUS Big Knee Brace for Large Legs with Patella Support http://www.braceability.com/products/knee-brace-for-large-legs?variant=7676825337909 Big Knee Brace for Large Legs with Patella Support XL Why You Need This Orthopedic Knee Brace for Large Thighs Knee pain is a relatively common phenomenon that is even more prominent among those struggling with obesity. Each pound of body weight puts five pounds of force on your knee. Therefore, it is easy to understand why being overweight or obese can lead to or accelerate knee problems and pain. Unfortunately, this knee pain can prevent obese people from living a more active lifestyle, making weight loss even more difficult. For this reason, BraceAbility is happy to offer this plus-size knee support that comes in a variety of sizes as large as an XXXXL knee brace, which fits leg circumferences up to 31 inches. Plus, you’ll pay the same affordable price for the size 3XL or 4XL, as you would purchasing a medium or large knee brace! See more bariatric braces and supports . BraceAbility’s plus size knee sleeve for large legs was designed to protect your knee from future injuries, alleviate your knee pain, and provide comfortable support to your knees. This knee brace can help treat many causes of knee pain and knee conditions including: Knee arthritis (knee osteoarthritis ) Meniscus tears Grade I collateral ligament sprain Patellar subluxation Chondromalacia Patellar tendonitis Patellofemoral tracking dysfunction Patellar dislocation Plica syndrome 5 Reasons Why You'll Love This Plus Size Knee Support for Big Legs This neoprene knee brace is one of BraceAbility’s best and most popular knee supports thanks to several innovative features, which allow overweight patients to enjoy a more active, pain-free lifestyle, in addition to protecting their knee against injury. Comfortable, Open-Patella Design With an opening around your patella (kneecap), this extra large knee support is more flexible and breathable than solid knee sleeves or ACE bandage wrap. The open patella design also eliminates pressure over your sore or swollen kneecap, making it comfortable for all-day wear. Made out of a Soothing, Premium-Grade Neoprene Material The material of this bariatric knee stabilizer is also comfortable against your skin. Plus, the flexible material and lightweight fit make it easy for you to move about and engage in light physical activity while wearing this comfortable knee support for obesity.  Reduces Swelling and Promotes Healing This neoprene fabric provides warmth and moderate elastic compression to your sore knee, which reduces swelling and encourages blood flow to speed up your recovery process. View more of our neoprene knee braces . Plus, at only 13” long and 3/16” thick, this discreet black knee sleeve is not too flashy and flat enough to fit under ordinary pants, such as jeans, but still thick enough to provide the necessary amount of compression and support. Customizable Tubular Buttress and Spiral Stays This extra-large knee brace features a sewn-in, tubular buttress. The solid tubular buttress encircles your entire kneecap, promoting proper patellar tracking and movement. However, you can also trim the buttress for customizable support over, under, or on either side of your kneecap, if desired. Learn more about why you might be experiencing anterior, posterior, medial, or lateral knee pain . In addition, aluminum spiral stays are located on the medial (inside) and lateral (outside) sides of your knee to help provide stability. These stays reduce pressure on your kneecap and improve patellar tracking, which helps treat conditions such as patella instability, patellar subluxation , and kneecap dislocation . Easily Adjustable Pressure Straps Two adjustable pressure straps located above and below your kneecap prevent your knee brace for thick quads from slipping around or sliding down. As an added bonus, the Velcro closures found on these straps is medical-grade, making it 10 times stronger than the standard, retail-grade Velcro you will find on other braces purchased at Walgreens, Target, or other online retailers, for example.   Frequently Asked Questions About This XXXL Bariatric Knee Brace What conditions does this knee brace treat? Helps to manage pain from injuries like knee arthritis, knee osteoarthritis (OA), grade I collateral ligament sprains, patellar subluxation, chondromalacia, patellar tendonitis, patellofemoral tracking dysfunction, patellar dislocation, quadricep tendonitis, and plica syndrome. Who can wear it? With sizes from L all the way up to 4XL, overweight and plus size men and women can wear this knee support for big legs. How do I know what size to get? Using a fabric tape measure, measure the circumference of your leg 6” above the center of your kneecap and 6” below the center of your kneecap. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our sizing graphic in the photos above to choose the right size. How do I put on this plus size knee brace? With all Velcro straps undone, insert your foot into the largest end (logo should be on top) and pull the sleeve up your leg. Center the circular opening over your kneecap. The stitched seam should run down the backside of your leg, centered behind your kneecap. Starting at the bottom, feed the strap through the d-ring. Then, pull the strap and secure Velcro closure at your desired tension level. Repeat with the top strap. Tighten or loosen the straps throughout the day if necessary. Can I wear this brace over my pants? Yes, but this knee brace is meant to fit against your skin for a better grip. It can be worn above tight pants or leggings if necessary. How tall is this knee brace? 13.5”. What material is this sleeve made of? Latex-free, 3/16” thick, premium-grade neoprene, Velcro closures, and aluminum spiral stays. When should I wear this oversized knee brace? This lightweight knee brace can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during physical activity. However, you should check with your primary care physician before wearing any compression knee sleeve or orthopedic support while sleeping. Washing Instructions: Close Velcro closures and hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Then, lay it flat to air dry completely before reapplying. Other features: An enclosed trimmable tubular buttress is included. Hinge-free design for comfortable support. A good option for heavy people with larger calfs and thighs. Color: Black. 621485162549 7676825337909 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/06k0101-knee-brace-for-large-legs-with-patella-support_grande.jpg?v=1527625509 641061974635 BraceAbility 06K0101XL Plus Size Knee Braces XLUS Big Knee Brace for Large Legs with Patella Support http://www.braceability.com/products/knee-brace-for-large-legs?variant=7676825370677 Big Knee Brace for Large Legs with Patella Support 2XL Why You Need This Orthopedic Knee Brace for Large Thighs Knee pain is a relatively common phenomenon that is even more prominent among those struggling with obesity. Each pound of body weight puts five pounds of force on your knee. Therefore, it is easy to understand why being overweight or obese can lead to or accelerate knee problems and pain. Unfortunately, this knee pain can prevent obese people from living a more active lifestyle, making weight loss even more difficult. For this reason, BraceAbility is happy to offer this plus-size knee support that comes in a variety of sizes as large as an XXXXL knee brace, which fits leg circumferences up to 31 inches. Plus, you’ll pay the same affordable price for the size 3XL or 4XL, as you would purchasing a medium or large knee brace! See more bariatric braces and supports . BraceAbility’s plus size knee sleeve for large legs was designed to protect your knee from future injuries, alleviate your knee pain, and provide comfortable support to your knees. This knee brace can help treat many causes of knee pain and knee conditions including: Knee arthritis (knee osteoarthritis ) Meniscus tears Grade I collateral ligament sprain Patellar subluxation Chondromalacia Patellar tendonitis Patellofemoral tracking dysfunction Patellar dislocation Plica syndrome 5 Reasons Why You'll Love This Plus Size Knee Support for Big Legs This neoprene knee brace is one of BraceAbility’s best and most popular knee supports thanks to several innovative features, which allow overweight patients to enjoy a more active, pain-free lifestyle, in addition to protecting their knee against injury. Comfortable, Open-Patella Design With an opening around your patella (kneecap), this extra large knee support is more flexible and breathable than solid knee sleeves or ACE bandage wrap. The open patella design also eliminates pressure over your sore or swollen kneecap, making it comfortable for all-day wear. Made out of a Soothing, Premium-Grade Neoprene Material The material of this bariatric knee stabilizer is also comfortable against your skin. Plus, the flexible material and lightweight fit make it easy for you to move about and engage in light physical activity while wearing this comfortable knee support for obesity.  Reduces Swelling and Promotes Healing This neoprene fabric provides warmth and moderate elastic compression to your sore knee, which reduces swelling and encourages blood flow to speed up your recovery process. View more of our neoprene knee braces . Plus, at only 13” long and 3/16” thick, this discreet black knee sleeve is not too flashy and flat enough to fit under ordinary pants, such as jeans, but still thick enough to provide the necessary amount of compression and support. Customizable Tubular Buttress and Spiral Stays This extra-large knee brace features a sewn-in, tubular buttress. The solid tubular buttress encircles your entire kneecap, promoting proper patellar tracking and movement. However, you can also trim the buttress for customizable support over, under, or on either side of your kneecap, if desired. Learn more about why you might be experiencing anterior, posterior, medial, or lateral knee pain . In addition, aluminum spiral stays are located on the medial (inside) and lateral (outside) sides of your knee to help provide stability. These stays reduce pressure on your kneecap and improve patellar tracking, which helps treat conditions such as patella instability, patellar subluxation , and kneecap dislocation . Easily Adjustable Pressure Straps Two adjustable pressure straps located above and below your kneecap prevent your knee brace for thick quads from slipping around or sliding down. As an added bonus, the Velcro closures found on these straps is medical-grade, making it 10 times stronger than the standard, retail-grade Velcro you will find on other braces purchased at Walgreens, Target, or other online retailers, for example.   Frequently Asked Questions About This XXXL Bariatric Knee Brace What conditions does this knee brace treat? Helps to manage pain from injuries like knee arthritis, knee osteoarthritis (OA), grade I collateral ligament sprains, patellar subluxation, chondromalacia, patellar tendonitis, patellofemoral tracking dysfunction, patellar dislocation, quadricep tendonitis, and plica syndrome. Who can wear it? With sizes from L all the way up to 4XL, overweight and plus size men and women can wear this knee support for big legs. How do I know what size to get? Using a fabric tape measure, measure the circumference of your leg 6” above the center of your kneecap and 6” below the center of your kneecap. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our sizing graphic in the photos above to choose the right size. How do I put on this plus size knee brace? With all Velcro straps undone, insert your foot into the largest end (logo should be on top) and pull the sleeve up your leg. Center the circular opening over your kneecap. The stitched seam should run down the backside of your leg, centered behind your kneecap. Starting at the bottom, feed the strap through the d-ring. Then, pull the strap and secure Velcro closure at your desired tension level. Repeat with the top strap. Tighten or loosen the straps throughout the day if necessary. Can I wear this brace over my pants? Yes, but this knee brace is meant to fit against your skin for a better grip. It can be worn above tight pants or leggings if necessary. How tall is this knee brace? 13.5”. What material is this sleeve made of? Latex-free, 3/16” thick, premium-grade neoprene, Velcro closures, and aluminum spiral stays. When should I wear this oversized knee brace? This lightweight knee brace can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during physical activity. However, you should check with your primary care physician before wearing any compression knee sleeve or orthopedic support while sleeping. Washing Instructions: Close Velcro closures and hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Then, lay it flat to air dry completely before reapplying. Other features: An enclosed trimmable tubular buttress is included. Hinge-free design for comfortable support. A good option for heavy people with larger calfs and thighs. Color: Black. 621485162549 7676825370677 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/06k0101-knee-brace-for-large-legs-with-patella-support_grande.jpg?v=1527625509 641061974642 BraceAbility 06K0101XXL Plus Size Knee Braces 2XLUS Big Knee Brace for Large Legs with Patella Support http://www.braceability.com/products/knee-brace-for-large-legs?variant=7676825403445 Big Knee Brace for Large Legs with Patella Support 3XL Why You Need This Orthopedic Knee Brace for Large Thighs Knee pain is a relatively common phenomenon that is even more prominent among those struggling with obesity. Each pound of body weight puts five pounds of force on your knee. Therefore, it is easy to understand why being overweight or obese can lead to or accelerate knee problems and pain. Unfortunately, this knee pain can prevent obese people from living a more active lifestyle, making weight loss even more difficult. For this reason, BraceAbility is happy to offer this plus-size knee support that comes in a variety of sizes as large as an XXXXL knee brace, which fits leg circumferences up to 31 inches. Plus, you’ll pay the same affordable price for the size 3XL or 4XL, as you would purchasing a medium or large knee brace! See more bariatric braces and supports . BraceAbility’s plus size knee sleeve for large legs was designed to protect your knee from future injuries, alleviate your knee pain, and provide comfortable support to your knees. This knee brace can help treat many causes of knee pain and knee conditions including: Knee arthritis (knee osteoarthritis ) Meniscus tears Grade I collateral ligament sprain Patellar subluxation Chondromalacia Patellar tendonitis Patellofemoral tracking dysfunction Patellar dislocation Plica syndrome 5 Reasons Why You'll Love This Plus Size Knee Support for Big Legs This neoprene knee brace is one of BraceAbility’s best and most popular knee supports thanks to several innovative features, which allow overweight patients to enjoy a more active, pain-free lifestyle, in addition to protecting their knee against injury. Comfortable, Open-Patella Design With an opening around your patella (kneecap), this extra large knee support is more flexible and breathable than solid knee sleeves or ACE bandage wrap. The open patella design also eliminates pressure over your sore or swollen kneecap, making it comfortable for all-day wear. Made out of a Soothing, Premium-Grade Neoprene Material The material of this bariatric knee stabilizer is also comfortable against your skin. Plus, the flexible material and lightweight fit make it easy for you to move about and engage in light physical activity while wearing this comfortable knee support for obesity.  Reduces Swelling and Promotes Healing This neoprene fabric provides warmth and moderate elastic compression to your sore knee, which reduces swelling and encourages blood flow to speed up your recovery process. View more of our neoprene knee braces . Plus, at only 13” long and 3/16” thick, this discreet black knee sleeve is not too flashy and flat enough to fit under ordinary pants, such as jeans, but still thick enough to provide the necessary amount of compression and support. Customizable Tubular Buttress and Spiral Stays This extra-large knee brace features a sewn-in, tubular buttress. The solid tubular buttress encircles your entire kneecap, promoting proper patellar tracking and movement. However, you can also trim the buttress for customizable support over, under, or on either side of your kneecap, if desired. Learn more about why you might be experiencing anterior, posterior, medial, or lateral knee pain . In addition, aluminum spiral stays are located on the medial (inside) and lateral (outside) sides of your knee to help provide stability. These stays reduce pressure on your kneecap and improve patellar tracking, which helps treat conditions such as patella instability, patellar subluxation , and kneecap dislocation . Easily Adjustable Pressure Straps Two adjustable pressure straps located above and below your kneecap prevent your knee brace for thick quads from slipping around or sliding down. As an added bonus, the Velcro closures found on these straps is medical-grade, making it 10 times stronger than the standard, retail-grade Velcro you will find on other braces purchased at Walgreens, Target, or other online retailers, for example.   Frequently Asked Questions About This XXXL Bariatric Knee Brace What conditions does this knee brace treat? Helps to manage pain from injuries like knee arthritis, knee osteoarthritis (OA), grade I collateral ligament sprains, patellar subluxation, chondromalacia, patellar tendonitis, patellofemoral tracking dysfunction, patellar dislocation, quadricep tendonitis, and plica syndrome. Who can wear it? With sizes from L all the way up to 4XL, overweight and plus size men and women can wear this knee support for big legs. How do I know what size to get? Using a fabric tape measure, measure the circumference of your leg 6” above the center of your kneecap and 6” below the center of your kneecap. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our sizing graphic in the photos above to choose the right size. How do I put on this plus size knee brace? With all Velcro straps undone, insert your foot into the largest end (logo should be on top) and pull the sleeve up your leg. Center the circular opening over your kneecap. The stitched seam should run down the backside of your leg, centered behind your kneecap. Starting at the bottom, feed the strap through the d-ring. Then, pull the strap and secure Velcro closure at your desired tension level. Repeat with the top strap. Tighten or loosen the straps throughout the day if necessary. Can I wear this brace over my pants? Yes, but this knee brace is meant to fit against your skin for a better grip. It can be worn above tight pants or leggings if necessary. How tall is this knee brace? 13.5”. What material is this sleeve made of? Latex-free, 3/16” thick, premium-grade neoprene, Velcro closures, and aluminum spiral stays. When should I wear this oversized knee brace? This lightweight knee brace can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during physical activity. However, you should check with your primary care physician before wearing any compression knee sleeve or orthopedic support while sleeping. Washing Instructions: Close Velcro closures and hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Then, lay it flat to air dry completely before reapplying. Other features: An enclosed trimmable tubular buttress is included. Hinge-free design for comfortable support. A good option for heavy people with larger calfs and thighs. Color: Black. 621485162549 7676825403445 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/06k0101-knee-brace-for-large-legs-with-patella-support_grande.jpg?v=1527625509 641061974659 BraceAbility 06K0101XXXL Plus Size Knee Braces 3XLUS Big Knee Brace for Large Legs with Patella Support http://www.braceability.com/products/knee-brace-for-large-legs?variant=7676825436213 Big Knee Brace for Large Legs with Patella Support 4XL Why You Need This Orthopedic Knee Brace for Large Thighs Knee pain is a relatively common phenomenon that is even more prominent among those struggling with obesity. Each pound of body weight puts five pounds of force on your knee. Therefore, it is easy to understand why being overweight or obese can lead to or accelerate knee problems and pain. Unfortunately, this knee pain can prevent obese people from living a more active lifestyle, making weight loss even more difficult. For this reason, BraceAbility is happy to offer this plus-size knee support that comes in a variety of sizes as large as an XXXXL knee brace, which fits leg circumferences up to 31 inches. Plus, you’ll pay the same affordable price for the size 3XL or 4XL, as you would purchasing a medium or large knee brace! See more bariatric braces and supports . BraceAbility’s plus size knee sleeve for large legs was designed to protect your knee from future injuries, alleviate your knee pain, and provide comfortable support to your knees. This knee brace can help treat many causes of knee pain and knee conditions including: Knee arthritis (knee osteoarthritis ) Meniscus tears Grade I collateral ligament sprain Patellar subluxation Chondromalacia Patellar tendonitis Patellofemoral tracking dysfunction Patellar dislocation Plica syndrome 5 Reasons Why You'll Love This Plus Size Knee Support for Big Legs This neoprene knee brace is one of BraceAbility’s best and most popular knee supports thanks to several innovative features, which allow overweight patients to enjoy a more active, pain-free lifestyle, in addition to protecting their knee against injury. Comfortable, Open-Patella Design With an opening around your patella (kneecap), this extra large knee support is more flexible and breathable than solid knee sleeves or ACE bandage wrap. The open patella design also eliminates pressure over your sore or swollen kneecap, making it comfortable for all-day wear. Made out of a Soothing, Premium-Grade Neoprene Material The material of this bariatric knee stabilizer is also comfortable against your skin. Plus, the flexible material and lightweight fit make it easy for you to move about and engage in light physical activity while wearing this comfortable knee support for obesity.  Reduces Swelling and Promotes Healing This neoprene fabric provides warmth and moderate elastic compression to your sore knee, which reduces swelling and encourages blood flow to speed up your recovery process. View more of our neoprene knee braces . Plus, at only 13” long and 3/16” thick, this discreet black knee sleeve is not too flashy and flat enough to fit under ordinary pants, such as jeans, but still thick enough to provide the necessary amount of compression and support. Customizable Tubular Buttress and Spiral Stays This extra-large knee brace features a sewn-in, tubular buttress. The solid tubular buttress encircles your entire kneecap, promoting proper patellar tracking and movement. However, you can also trim the buttress for customizable support over, under, or on either side of your kneecap, if desired. Learn more about why you might be experiencing anterior, posterior, medial, or lateral knee pain . In addition, aluminum spiral stays are located on the medial (inside) and lateral (outside) sides of your knee to help provide stability. These stays reduce pressure on your kneecap and improve patellar tracking, which helps treat conditions such as patella instability, patellar subluxation , and kneecap dislocation . Easily Adjustable Pressure Straps Two adjustable pressure straps located above and below your kneecap prevent your knee brace for thick quads from slipping around or sliding down. As an added bonus, the Velcro closures found on these straps is medical-grade, making it 10 times stronger than the standard, retail-grade Velcro you will find on other braces purchased at Walgreens, Target, or other online retailers, for example.   Frequently Asked Questions About This XXXL Bariatric Knee Brace What conditions does this knee brace treat? Helps to manage pain from injuries like knee arthritis, knee osteoarthritis (OA), grade I collateral ligament sprains, patellar subluxation, chondromalacia, patellar tendonitis, patellofemoral tracking dysfunction, patellar dislocation, quadricep tendonitis, and plica syndrome. Who can wear it? With sizes from L all the way up to 4XL, overweight and plus size men and women can wear this knee support for big legs. How do I know what size to get? Using a fabric tape measure, measure the circumference of your leg 6” above the center of your kneecap and 6” below the center of your kneecap. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our sizing graphic in the photos above to choose the right size. How do I put on this plus size knee brace? With all Velcro straps undone, insert your foot into the largest end (logo should be on top) and pull the sleeve up your leg. Center the circular opening over your kneecap. The stitched seam should run down the backside of your leg, centered behind your kneecap. Starting at the bottom, feed the strap through the d-ring. Then, pull the strap and secure Velcro closure at your desired tension level. Repeat with the top strap. Tighten or loosen the straps throughout the day if necessary. Can I wear this brace over my pants? Yes, but this knee brace is meant to fit against your skin for a better grip. It can be worn above tight pants or leggings if necessary. How tall is this knee brace? 13.5”. What material is this sleeve made of? Latex-free, 3/16” thick, premium-grade neoprene, Velcro closures, and aluminum spiral stays. When should I wear this oversized knee brace? This lightweight knee brace can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during physical activity. However, you should check with your primary care physician before wearing any compression knee sleeve or orthopedic support while sleeping. Washing Instructions: Close Velcro closures and hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Then, lay it flat to air dry completely before reapplying. Other features: An enclosed trimmable tubular buttress is included. Hinge-free design for comfortable support. A good option for heavy people with larger calfs and thighs. Color: Black. 621485162549 7676825436213 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/06k0101-knee-brace-for-large-legs-with-patella-support_grande.jpg?v=1527625509 641427944548 BraceAbility 06K0101XXXXL Plus Size Knee Braces 4XLUS Plus Size Bariatric Back Brace in Big & Tall Extra Large Sizes up to 6XL http://www.braceability.com/products/plus-size-back-brace?variant=7609895649333 Plus Size Bariatric Back Brace in Big & Tall Extra Large Sizes up to 6XL XL How is Obesity Directly Correlated with Lower Back Pain? According to the Centers for Disease Control, over one-third (35.7%) of Americans are considered obese. This number has been increasing in the last few years - making health problems related to obesity a large issue. To be considered ‘obese,’ you have too much excess of body fat, which can threaten your health. If you’re unsure if you’re considered a heavy individual, we’ve created an easy BMI calculator to help you understand what your current weight / fat ratio is. Negative health effects of becoming obese include: High blood pressure Diabetes Osteoarthritis Cancer (breast, pancreas, colon, rectum, esophagus, and endometrium) Gout Heart disease Sleeping issues (sleep apnea) Aside from the conditions listed above, another common negative health effect of being plus size is having spinal/back issues . It’s been proven that the higher your BMI level is, the higher chance you have of experiencing lumbar back pain or injury. Carrying around extra weight can take a huge toll on the mechanisms of your back, especially your spinal discs, muscles, and bones. This excess weight shifts your center of gravity, resulting in your back working harder to hold your body in an upright position. To read more about why back pain is a side effect of obesity, check out our blog post ! 7 Reasons Why People Love This Lower Plus Size Back Brace Support Since many people are struggling with obesity, we understand the need for a brace that not only completely supports the back region, but helps make day-to-day activities easier. Wearing an obesity support belt can do wonders in relieving some of that tension placed on your spine due to the excess weight you’ve been carrying around. The numerous features of this low back garment for overweight individuals help it stand out from the alternative products you can buy at the big box stores. Obesity Back Support Tapers in Length in the Front This elastic back brace for males and females tapers from 10 ½” tall in the back to 6” in the front, giving your back full coverage and support while also preventing irritation in your abdomen region. Big and Tall Back Brace is Great for Those Ranging in Sizes XL-6XL One of the best features of this plus size belt is that it fits all ranges of large individuals. You no longer have to be frustrated in finding a size that’s large enough for your specific body shape/size. The soft back girdle fits hip circumferences of 42” up to 68”. If you’re looking for a smaller size, check out our large selection of back support belts to find the perfect brace for you! Plus Size Back Brace is Comprised of Premium Elastic and Cotton Flannel / Foam Material The front and sides of the belt are made of a premium elastic material, allowing it to stretch and conform to your body. The adjustable elastic material is durable enough for everyday activities, such as walking or exercising. The back side of the brace is comprised of a soft, breathable foam / cloth laminate with polyurethane foam and cotton flannel fabric covering, making it comfortable against your skin. The lightweight aspect of the brace prevents sweating and allows you to wear it over or under your clothes, depending on your preference. All parts are latex free. Bariatric Back Brace Has Double-Pull Elastic Tension Straps to Provide Extra Compression This back support brace features double-pull elastic tension straps in front to help increase the amount of confinement of the xxx brace. The straps are easily adjusted on your own by pulling them out and away from your body until you reach the amount of compression you desire then simply secure the straps by the Velcro closures. Back Brace for Overweight Features Removable Aluminum Stays Prevent Brace from Rolling/Bunching Up There is four removable aluminum stays located on the back side of this back support belt for large men and women. These stays help prevent any uncomfortable rolling or bunching up of the brace. The stays enable you to wear the brace throughout your entire day without having to adjust or reposition the lumbosacral orthopedic brace. Aluminum Stays in the XL Back Brace Can Be Contoured to Your Specific Body Shape The aluminum stays mentioned above can be bent to fit the shape of your lower back and add support to your lumbar spine. This feature adds to the customization of this bariatric support for a plus size lady. Velcro Back Support is Easily Adjusted and Applied This obese back corset is simple and quick to apply! To put on the waist trainer, you secure the front Velcro closures first, then adjust the double-pull tension straps to add compression. You can apply this waist trimmer by yourself, without any assistance. Can This Extra Large Back Brace Help Promote Weight Loss? Yes! This extra large back brace not only helps slim and trim down your stomach, but makes you more active and energized. This supporter helps lift and compress your stomach to help lower the amount of stress placed on your spine -  in turn, making your body feel healthier! You will no longer feel pain when trying to lose weight. Wearing plus size back braces can help prevent fatigue and shortness of breath while exercising or doing the activities you love. This big and tall brace also helps promote good posture , which relieves the weight on the joints in your knees. If you’re experiencing knee pain due to being overweight, wearing an obesity knee sleeve is another pain relief option. Additionally, this 4x large back brace is a great post weight loss surgery brace because it helps compress the incision site to promote healing. Many individuals undergoing bariatric surgery find wearing a lower back / abdomen brace after the procedure can help tremendously during the recovery process. Frequently Asked Questions About This Big and Tall Back Brace Support What conditions / injuries does this SI joint stabilizer treat? This obese belly support band can help treat moderate lower back pain, muscle strains, tears, or pulls, bulging discs, herniated discs, scoliosis, sciatica, and hip pain. It helps those morbidly obese individuals suffering from excess pain in their lumbar spine. How does it work? This lumbar support is specifically designed to provide superior lower back and abdominal support, treating and easing mild to chronic back pain. When should I wear it? Thanks to the lightweight, latex-free material it's possible for you to wear this brace 24/7 if advised by your doctor. You can also sleep comfortably in this brace due to its soft material. It’s advised to speak with a medical professional before wearing a brace for an extended amount of time.   What is it made of? Front of the brace and tension straps: elastic Back panel: soft and breathable foam/cloth laminate with polyurethane foam and polyester fabric covering Removable stays: aluminum All parts are latex free Who can wear this brace? Men and women of all ages can benefit from this binder, so long as the circumference of their hips falls within a range of 44 inches to 80 inches. A pregnant woman can even wear this support so long as her belly does not take her past the size limit. We also offer maternity support belts and postpartum binders. What size should I buy? Using a soft / flexible tape measure, find the circumference around your hips, in inches. This obese medical support accommodates large waists and fits wide hip circumferences of 44” up to 80”. How do I put it on? Unhook all Velcro closures and lay the brace flat on the floor to identify the topside. The top has openings, which allow you to remove the metal stays. Next, position the brace behind your body so it’s centered on your back with the bottom of the brace sitting at the widest part of your hips. Fold the left side of the brace towards the middle of your stomach. Wrap around the right side but pull firmly and secure the Velcro closure. Repeat this process with the double-pull tension straps for your desired compression level. How do I adjust the brace? Grab the double-pull tension straps (located on the outside of the brace) and adjust them to make it either tighter or looser, then re-apply the Velcro closures. How tall is this brace? The brace tapers from 10 ½” tall in the back to 6” in the front. Washing Instructions: To wash the brace, first, remove stays and close all Velcro closures. Hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Do not use bleach. The brace should be air-dried. Do not use high temperatures to wash or dry. Other features: The 60-inch belt is flexible and breathable, making it ideal for active use. Unisex brace fits overweight to morbidly obese men and women. Provided compression stimulates healing, reducing inflammation. Color: White. 609044168757 7609895649333 new 44.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03b0101-plus-size-bariatric-back-brace-up-to-6xl-main_grande.jpg?v=1523565017 641061974550 BraceAbility 03B0101XL Back Braces (Plus Size) XLUS Plus Size Bariatric Back Brace in Big & Tall Extra Large Sizes up to 6XL http://www.braceability.com/products/plus-size-back-brace?variant=7609895682101 Plus Size Bariatric Back Brace in Big & Tall Extra Large Sizes up to 6XL 2XL How is Obesity Directly Correlated with Lower Back Pain? According to the Centers for Disease Control, over one-third (35.7%) of Americans are considered obese. This number has been increasing in the last few years - making health problems related to obesity a large issue. To be considered ‘obese,’ you have too much excess of body fat, which can threaten your health. If you’re unsure if you’re considered a heavy individual, we’ve created an easy BMI calculator to help you understand what your current weight / fat ratio is. Negative health effects of becoming obese include: High blood pressure Diabetes Osteoarthritis Cancer (breast, pancreas, colon, rectum, esophagus, and endometrium) Gout Heart disease Sleeping issues (sleep apnea) Aside from the conditions listed above, another common negative health effect of being plus size is having spinal/back issues . It’s been proven that the higher your BMI level is, the higher chance you have of experiencing lumbar back pain or injury. Carrying around extra weight can take a huge toll on the mechanisms of your back, especially your spinal discs, muscles, and bones. This excess weight shifts your center of gravity, resulting in your back working harder to hold your body in an upright position. To read more about why back pain is a side effect of obesity, check out our blog post ! 7 Reasons Why People Love This Lower Plus Size Back Brace Support Since many people are struggling with obesity, we understand the need for a brace that not only completely supports the back region, but helps make day-to-day activities easier. Wearing an obesity support belt can do wonders in relieving some of that tension placed on your spine due to the excess weight you’ve been carrying around. The numerous features of this low back garment for overweight individuals help it stand out from the alternative products you can buy at the big box stores. Obesity Back Support Tapers in Length in the Front This elastic back brace for males and females tapers from 10 ½” tall in the back to 6” in the front, giving your back full coverage and support while also preventing irritation in your abdomen region. Big and Tall Back Brace is Great for Those Ranging in Sizes XL-6XL One of the best features of this plus size belt is that it fits all ranges of large individuals. You no longer have to be frustrated in finding a size that’s large enough for your specific body shape/size. The soft back girdle fits hip circumferences of 42” up to 68”. If you’re looking for a smaller size, check out our large selection of back support belts to find the perfect brace for you! Plus Size Back Brace is Comprised of Premium Elastic and Cotton Flannel / Foam Material The front and sides of the belt are made of a premium elastic material, allowing it to stretch and conform to your body. The adjustable elastic material is durable enough for everyday activities, such as walking or exercising. The back side of the brace is comprised of a soft, breathable foam / cloth laminate with polyurethane foam and cotton flannel fabric covering, making it comfortable against your skin. The lightweight aspect of the brace prevents sweating and allows you to wear it over or under your clothes, depending on your preference. All parts are latex free. Bariatric Back Brace Has Double-Pull Elastic Tension Straps to Provide Extra Compression This back support brace features double-pull elastic tension straps in front to help increase the amount of confinement of the xxx brace. The straps are easily adjusted on your own by pulling them out and away from your body until you reach the amount of compression you desire then simply secure the straps by the Velcro closures. Back Brace for Overweight Features Removable Aluminum Stays Prevent Brace from Rolling/Bunching Up There is four removable aluminum stays located on the back side of this back support belt for large men and women. These stays help prevent any uncomfortable rolling or bunching up of the brace. The stays enable you to wear the brace throughout your entire day without having to adjust or reposition the lumbosacral orthopedic brace. Aluminum Stays in the XL Back Brace Can Be Contoured to Your Specific Body Shape The aluminum stays mentioned above can be bent to fit the shape of your lower back and add support to your lumbar spine. This feature adds to the customization of this bariatric support for a plus size lady. Velcro Back Support is Easily Adjusted and Applied This obese back corset is simple and quick to apply! To put on the waist trainer, you secure the front Velcro closures first, then adjust the double-pull tension straps to add compression. You can apply this waist trimmer by yourself, without any assistance. Can This Extra Large Back Brace Help Promote Weight Loss? Yes! This extra large back brace not only helps slim and trim down your stomach, but makes you more active and energized. This supporter helps lift and compress your stomach to help lower the amount of stress placed on your spine -  in turn, making your body feel healthier! You will no longer feel pain when trying to lose weight. Wearing plus size back braces can help prevent fatigue and shortness of breath while exercising or doing the activities you love. This big and tall brace also helps promote good posture , which relieves the weight on the joints in your knees. If you’re experiencing knee pain due to being overweight, wearing an obesity knee sleeve is another pain relief option. Additionally, this 4x large back brace is a great post weight loss surgery brace because it helps compress the incision site to promote healing. Many individuals undergoing bariatric surgery find wearing a lower back / abdomen brace after the procedure can help tremendously during the recovery process. Frequently Asked Questions About This Big and Tall Back Brace Support What conditions / injuries does this SI joint stabilizer treat? This obese belly support band can help treat moderate lower back pain, muscle strains, tears, or pulls, bulging discs, herniated discs, scoliosis, sciatica, and hip pain. It helps those morbidly obese individuals suffering from excess pain in their lumbar spine. How does it work? This lumbar support is specifically designed to provide superior lower back and abdominal support, treating and easing mild to chronic back pain. When should I wear it? Thanks to the lightweight, latex-free material it's possible for you to wear this brace 24/7 if advised by your doctor. You can also sleep comfortably in this brace due to its soft material. It’s advised to speak with a medical professional before wearing a brace for an extended amount of time.   What is it made of? Front of the brace and tension straps: elastic Back panel: soft and breathable foam/cloth laminate with polyurethane foam and polyester fabric covering Removable stays: aluminum All parts are latex free Who can wear this brace? Men and women of all ages can benefit from this binder, so long as the circumference of their hips falls within a range of 44 inches to 80 inches. A pregnant woman can even wear this support so long as her belly does not take her past the size limit. We also offer maternity support belts and postpartum binders. What size should I buy? Using a soft / flexible tape measure, find the circumference around your hips, in inches. This obese medical support accommodates large waists and fits wide hip circumferences of 44” up to 80”. How do I put it on? Unhook all Velcro closures and lay the brace flat on the floor to identify the topside. The top has openings, which allow you to remove the metal stays. Next, position the brace behind your body so it’s centered on your back with the bottom of the brace sitting at the widest part of your hips. Fold the left side of the brace towards the middle of your stomach. Wrap around the right side but pull firmly and secure the Velcro closure. Repeat this process with the double-pull tension straps for your desired compression level. How do I adjust the brace? Grab the double-pull tension straps (located on the outside of the brace) and adjust them to make it either tighter or looser, then re-apply the Velcro closures. How tall is this brace? The brace tapers from 10 ½” tall in the back to 6” in the front. Washing Instructions: To wash the brace, first, remove stays and close all Velcro closures. Hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Do not use bleach. The brace should be air-dried. Do not use high temperatures to wash or dry. Other features: The 60-inch belt is flexible and breathable, making it ideal for active use. Unisex brace fits overweight to morbidly obese men and women. Provided compression stimulates healing, reducing inflammation. Color: White. 609044168757 7609895682101 new 44.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03b0101-plus-size-bariatric-back-brace-up-to-6xl-main_grande.jpg?v=1523565017 641061974567 BraceAbility 03B0101XXL Back Braces (Plus Size) 2XLUS Plus Size Bariatric Back Brace in Big & Tall Extra Large Sizes up to 6XL http://www.braceability.com/products/plus-size-back-brace?variant=7609895714869 Plus Size Bariatric Back Brace in Big & Tall Extra Large Sizes up to 6XL 3XL How is Obesity Directly Correlated with Lower Back Pain? According to the Centers for Disease Control, over one-third (35.7%) of Americans are considered obese. This number has been increasing in the last few years - making health problems related to obesity a large issue. To be considered ‘obese,’ you have too much excess of body fat, which can threaten your health. If you’re unsure if you’re considered a heavy individual, we’ve created an easy BMI calculator to help you understand what your current weight / fat ratio is. Negative health effects of becoming obese include: High blood pressure Diabetes Osteoarthritis Cancer (breast, pancreas, colon, rectum, esophagus, and endometrium) Gout Heart disease Sleeping issues (sleep apnea) Aside from the conditions listed above, another common negative health effect of being plus size is having spinal/back issues . It’s been proven that the higher your BMI level is, the higher chance you have of experiencing lumbar back pain or injury. Carrying around extra weight can take a huge toll on the mechanisms of your back, especially your spinal discs, muscles, and bones. This excess weight shifts your center of gravity, resulting in your back working harder to hold your body in an upright position. To read more about why back pain is a side effect of obesity, check out our blog post ! 7 Reasons Why People Love This Lower Plus Size Back Brace Support Since many people are struggling with obesity, we understand the need for a brace that not only completely supports the back region, but helps make day-to-day activities easier. Wearing an obesity support belt can do wonders in relieving some of that tension placed on your spine due to the excess weight you’ve been carrying around. The numerous features of this low back garment for overweight individuals help it stand out from the alternative products you can buy at the big box stores. Obesity Back Support Tapers in Length in the Front This elastic back brace for males and females tapers from 10 ½” tall in the back to 6” in the front, giving your back full coverage and support while also preventing irritation in your abdomen region. Big and Tall Back Brace is Great for Those Ranging in Sizes XL-6XL One of the best features of this plus size belt is that it fits all ranges of large individuals. You no longer have to be frustrated in finding a size that’s large enough for your specific body shape/size. The soft back girdle fits hip circumferences of 42” up to 68”. If you’re looking for a smaller size, check out our large selection of back support belts to find the perfect brace for you! Plus Size Back Brace is Comprised of Premium Elastic and Cotton Flannel / Foam Material The front and sides of the belt are made of a premium elastic material, allowing it to stretch and conform to your body. The adjustable elastic material is durable enough for everyday activities, such as walking or exercising. The back side of the brace is comprised of a soft, breathable foam / cloth laminate with polyurethane foam and cotton flannel fabric covering, making it comfortable against your skin. The lightweight aspect of the brace prevents sweating and allows you to wear it over or under your clothes, depending on your preference. All parts are latex free. Bariatric Back Brace Has Double-Pull Elastic Tension Straps to Provide Extra Compression This back support brace features double-pull elastic tension straps in front to help increase the amount of confinement of the xxx brace. The straps are easily adjusted on your own by pulling them out and away from your body until you reach the amount of compression you desire then simply secure the straps by the Velcro closures. Back Brace for Overweight Features Removable Aluminum Stays Prevent Brace from Rolling/Bunching Up There is four removable aluminum stays located on the back side of this back support belt for large men and women. These stays help prevent any uncomfortable rolling or bunching up of the brace. The stays enable you to wear the brace throughout your entire day without having to adjust or reposition the lumbosacral orthopedic brace. Aluminum Stays in the XL Back Brace Can Be Contoured to Your Specific Body Shape The aluminum stays mentioned above can be bent to fit the shape of your lower back and add support to your lumbar spine. This feature adds to the customization of this bariatric support for a plus size lady. Velcro Back Support is Easily Adjusted and Applied This obese back corset is simple and quick to apply! To put on the waist trainer, you secure the front Velcro closures first, then adjust the double-pull tension straps to add compression. You can apply this waist trimmer by yourself, without any assistance. Can This Extra Large Back Brace Help Promote Weight Loss? Yes! This extra large back brace not only helps slim and trim down your stomach, but makes you more active and energized. This supporter helps lift and compress your stomach to help lower the amount of stress placed on your spine -  in turn, making your body feel healthier! You will no longer feel pain when trying to lose weight. Wearing plus size back braces can help prevent fatigue and shortness of breath while exercising or doing the activities you love. This big and tall brace also helps promote good posture , which relieves the weight on the joints in your knees. If you’re experiencing knee pain due to being overweight, wearing an obesity knee sleeve is another pain relief option. Additionally, this 4x large back brace is a great post weight loss surgery brace because it helps compress the incision site to promote healing. Many individuals undergoing bariatric surgery find wearing a lower back / abdomen brace after the procedure can help tremendously during the recovery process. Frequently Asked Questions About This Big and Tall Back Brace Support What conditions / injuries does this SI joint stabilizer treat? This obese belly support band can help treat moderate lower back pain, muscle strains, tears, or pulls, bulging discs, herniated discs, scoliosis, sciatica, and hip pain. It helps those morbidly obese individuals suffering from excess pain in their lumbar spine. How does it work? This lumbar support is specifically designed to provide superior lower back and abdominal support, treating and easing mild to chronic back pain. When should I wear it? Thanks to the lightweight, latex-free material it's possible for you to wear this brace 24/7 if advised by your doctor. You can also sleep comfortably in this brace due to its soft material. It’s advised to speak with a medical professional before wearing a brace for an extended amount of time.   What is it made of? Front of the brace and tension straps: elastic Back panel: soft and breathable foam/cloth laminate with polyurethane foam and polyester fabric covering Removable stays: aluminum All parts are latex free Who can wear this brace? Men and women of all ages can benefit from this binder, so long as the circumference of their hips falls within a range of 44 inches to 80 inches. A pregnant woman can even wear this support so long as her belly does not take her past the size limit. We also offer maternity support belts and postpartum binders. What size should I buy? Using a soft / flexible tape measure, find the circumference around your hips, in inches. This obese medical support accommodates large waists and fits wide hip circumferences of 44” up to 80”. How do I put it on? Unhook all Velcro closures and lay the brace flat on the floor to identify the topside. The top has openings, which allow you to remove the metal stays. Next, position the brace behind your body so it’s centered on your back with the bottom of the brace sitting at the widest part of your hips. Fold the left side of the brace towards the middle of your stomach. Wrap around the right side but pull firmly and secure the Velcro closure. Repeat this process with the double-pull tension straps for your desired compression level. How do I adjust the brace? Grab the double-pull tension straps (located on the outside of the brace) and adjust them to make it either tighter or looser, then re-apply the Velcro closures. How tall is this brace? The brace tapers from 10 ½” tall in the back to 6” in the front. Washing Instructions: To wash the brace, first, remove stays and close all Velcro closures. Hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Do not use bleach. The brace should be air-dried. Do not use high temperatures to wash or dry. Other features: The 60-inch belt is flexible and breathable, making it ideal for active use. Unisex brace fits overweight to morbidly obese men and women. Provided compression stimulates healing, reducing inflammation. Color: White. 609044168757 7609895714869 new 44.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03b0101-plus-size-bariatric-back-brace-up-to-6xl-main_grande.jpg?v=1523565017 641061974574 BraceAbility 03B0101XXXL Back Braces (Plus Size) 3XLUS Plus Size Bariatric Back Brace in Big & Tall Extra Large Sizes up to 6XL http://www.braceability.com/products/plus-size-back-brace?variant=7609895747637 Plus Size Bariatric Back Brace in Big & Tall Extra Large Sizes up to 6XL 4XL How is Obesity Directly Correlated with Lower Back Pain? According to the Centers for Disease Control, over one-third (35.7%) of Americans are considered obese. This number has been increasing in the last few years - making health problems related to obesity a large issue. To be considered ‘obese,’ you have too much excess of body fat, which can threaten your health. If you’re unsure if you’re considered a heavy individual, we’ve created an easy BMI calculator to help you understand what your current weight / fat ratio is. Negative health effects of becoming obese include: High blood pressure Diabetes Osteoarthritis Cancer (breast, pancreas, colon, rectum, esophagus, and endometrium) Gout Heart disease Sleeping issues (sleep apnea) Aside from the conditions listed above, another common negative health effect of being plus size is having spinal/back issues . It’s been proven that the higher your BMI level is, the higher chance you have of experiencing lumbar back pain or injury. Carrying around extra weight can take a huge toll on the mechanisms of your back, especially your spinal discs, muscles, and bones. This excess weight shifts your center of gravity, resulting in your back working harder to hold your body in an upright position. To read more about why back pain is a side effect of obesity, check out our blog post ! 7 Reasons Why People Love This Lower Plus Size Back Brace Support Since many people are struggling with obesity, we understand the need for a brace that not only completely supports the back region, but helps make day-to-day activities easier. Wearing an obesity support belt can do wonders in relieving some of that tension placed on your spine due to the excess weight you’ve been carrying around. The numerous features of this low back garment for overweight individuals help it stand out from the alternative products you can buy at the big box stores. Obesity Back Support Tapers in Length in the Front This elastic back brace for males and females tapers from 10 ½” tall in the back to 6” in the front, giving your back full coverage and support while also preventing irritation in your abdomen region. Big and Tall Back Brace is Great for Those Ranging in Sizes XL-6XL One of the best features of this plus size belt is that it fits all ranges of large individuals. You no longer have to be frustrated in finding a size that’s large enough for your specific body shape/size. The soft back girdle fits hip circumferences of 42” up to 68”. If you’re looking for a smaller size, check out our large selection of back support belts to find the perfect brace for you! Plus Size Back Brace is Comprised of Premium Elastic and Cotton Flannel / Foam Material The front and sides of the belt are made of a premium elastic material, allowing it to stretch and conform to your body. The adjustable elastic material is durable enough for everyday activities, such as walking or exercising. The back side of the brace is comprised of a soft, breathable foam / cloth laminate with polyurethane foam and cotton flannel fabric covering, making it comfortable against your skin. The lightweight aspect of the brace prevents sweating and allows you to wear it over or under your clothes, depending on your preference. All parts are latex free. Bariatric Back Brace Has Double-Pull Elastic Tension Straps to Provide Extra Compression This back support brace features double-pull elastic tension straps in front to help increase the amount of confinement of the xxx brace. The straps are easily adjusted on your own by pulling them out and away from your body until you reach the amount of compression you desire then simply secure the straps by the Velcro closures. Back Brace for Overweight Features Removable Aluminum Stays Prevent Brace from Rolling/Bunching Up There is four removable aluminum stays located on the back side of this back support belt for large men and women. These stays help prevent any uncomfortable rolling or bunching up of the brace. The stays enable you to wear the brace throughout your entire day without having to adjust or reposition the lumbosacral orthopedic brace. Aluminum Stays in the XL Back Brace Can Be Contoured to Your Specific Body Shape The aluminum stays mentioned above can be bent to fit the shape of your lower back and add support to your lumbar spine. This feature adds to the customization of this bariatric support for a plus size lady. Velcro Back Support is Easily Adjusted and Applied This obese back corset is simple and quick to apply! To put on the waist trainer, you secure the front Velcro closures first, then adjust the double-pull tension straps to add compression. You can apply this waist trimmer by yourself, without any assistance. Can This Extra Large Back Brace Help Promote Weight Loss? Yes! This extra large back brace not only helps slim and trim down your stomach, but makes you more active and energized. This supporter helps lift and compress your stomach to help lower the amount of stress placed on your spine -  in turn, making your body feel healthier! You will no longer feel pain when trying to lose weight. Wearing plus size back braces can help prevent fatigue and shortness of breath while exercising or doing the activities you love. This big and tall brace also helps promote good posture , which relieves the weight on the joints in your knees. If you’re experiencing knee pain due to being overweight, wearing an obesity knee sleeve is another pain relief option. Additionally, this 4x large back brace is a great post weight loss surgery brace because it helps compress the incision site to promote healing. Many individuals undergoing bariatric surgery find wearing a lower back / abdomen brace after the procedure can help tremendously during the recovery process. Frequently Asked Questions About This Big and Tall Back Brace Support What conditions / injuries does this SI joint stabilizer treat? This obese belly support band can help treat moderate lower back pain, muscle strains, tears, or pulls, bulging discs, herniated discs, scoliosis, sciatica, and hip pain. It helps those morbidly obese individuals suffering from excess pain in their lumbar spine. How does it work? This lumbar support is specifically designed to provide superior lower back and abdominal support, treating and easing mild to chronic back pain. When should I wear it? Thanks to the lightweight, latex-free material it's possible for you to wear this brace 24/7 if advised by your doctor. You can also sleep comfortably in this brace due to its soft material. It’s advised to speak with a medical professional before wearing a brace for an extended amount of time.   What is it made of? Front of the brace and tension straps: elastic Back panel: soft and breathable foam/cloth laminate with polyurethane foam and polyester fabric covering Removable stays: aluminum All parts are latex free Who can wear this brace? Men and women of all ages can benefit from this binder, so long as the circumference of their hips falls within a range of 44 inches to 80 inches. A pregnant woman can even wear this support so long as her belly does not take her past the size limit. We also offer maternity support belts and postpartum binders. What size should I buy? Using a soft / flexible tape measure, find the circumference around your hips, in inches. This obese medical support accommodates large waists and fits wide hip circumferences of 44” up to 80”. How do I put it on? Unhook all Velcro closures and lay the brace flat on the floor to identify the topside. The top has openings, which allow you to remove the metal stays. Next, position the brace behind your body so it’s centered on your back with the bottom of the brace sitting at the widest part of your hips. Fold the left side of the brace towards the middle of your stomach. Wrap around the right side but pull firmly and secure the Velcro closure. Repeat this process with the double-pull tension straps for your desired compression level. How do I adjust the brace? Grab the double-pull tension straps (located on the outside of the brace) and adjust them to make it either tighter or looser, then re-apply the Velcro closures. How tall is this brace? The brace tapers from 10 ½” tall in the back to 6” in the front. Washing Instructions: To wash the brace, first, remove stays and close all Velcro closures. Hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Do not use bleach. The brace should be air-dried. Do not use high temperatures to wash or dry. Other features: The 60-inch belt is flexible and breathable, making it ideal for active use. Unisex brace fits overweight to morbidly obese men and women. Provided compression stimulates healing, reducing inflammation. Color: White. 609044168757 7609895747637 new 44.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03b0101-plus-size-bariatric-back-brace-up-to-6xl-main_grande.jpg?v=1523565017 641061974581 BraceAbility 03B0101XXXXL Back Braces (Plus Size) 4XLUS Plus Size Bariatric Back Brace in Big & Tall Extra Large Sizes up to 6XL http://www.braceability.com/products/plus-size-back-brace?variant=7609895780405 Plus Size Bariatric Back Brace in Big & Tall Extra Large Sizes up to 6XL 5XL How is Obesity Directly Correlated with Lower Back Pain? According to the Centers for Disease Control, over one-third (35.7%) of Americans are considered obese. This number has been increasing in the last few years - making health problems related to obesity a large issue. To be considered ‘obese,’ you have too much excess of body fat, which can threaten your health. If you’re unsure if you’re considered a heavy individual, we’ve created an easy BMI calculator to help you understand what your current weight / fat ratio is. Negative health effects of becoming obese include: High blood pressure Diabetes Osteoarthritis Cancer (breast, pancreas, colon, rectum, esophagus, and endometrium) Gout Heart disease Sleeping issues (sleep apnea) Aside from the conditions listed above, another common negative health effect of being plus size is having spinal/back issues . It’s been proven that the higher your BMI level is, the higher chance you have of experiencing lumbar back pain or injury. Carrying around extra weight can take a huge toll on the mechanisms of your back, especially your spinal discs, muscles, and bones. This excess weight shifts your center of gravity, resulting in your back working harder to hold your body in an upright position. To read more about why back pain is a side effect of obesity, check out our blog post ! 7 Reasons Why People Love This Lower Plus Size Back Brace Support Since many people are struggling with obesity, we understand the need for a brace that not only completely supports the back region, but helps make day-to-day activities easier. Wearing an obesity support belt can do wonders in relieving some of that tension placed on your spine due to the excess weight you’ve been carrying around. The numerous features of this low back garment for overweight individuals help it stand out from the alternative products you can buy at the big box stores. Obesity Back Support Tapers in Length in the Front This elastic back brace for males and females tapers from 10 ½” tall in the back to 6” in the front, giving your back full coverage and support while also preventing irritation in your abdomen region. Big and Tall Back Brace is Great for Those Ranging in Sizes XL-6XL One of the best features of this plus size belt is that it fits all ranges of large individuals. You no longer have to be frustrated in finding a size that’s large enough for your specific body shape/size. The soft back girdle fits hip circumferences of 42” up to 68”. If you’re looking for a smaller size, check out our large selection of back support belts to find the perfect brace for you! Plus Size Back Brace is Comprised of Premium Elastic and Cotton Flannel / Foam Material The front and sides of the belt are made of a premium elastic material, allowing it to stretch and conform to your body. The adjustable elastic material is durable enough for everyday activities, such as walking or exercising. The back side of the brace is comprised of a soft, breathable foam / cloth laminate with polyurethane foam and cotton flannel fabric covering, making it comfortable against your skin. The lightweight aspect of the brace prevents sweating and allows you to wear it over or under your clothes, depending on your preference. All parts are latex free. Bariatric Back Brace Has Double-Pull Elastic Tension Straps to Provide Extra Compression This back support brace features double-pull elastic tension straps in front to help increase the amount of confinement of the xxx brace. The straps are easily adjusted on your own by pulling them out and away from your body until you reach the amount of compression you desire then simply secure the straps by the Velcro closures. Back Brace for Overweight Features Removable Aluminum Stays Prevent Brace from Rolling/Bunching Up There is four removable aluminum stays located on the back side of this back support belt for large men and women. These stays help prevent any uncomfortable rolling or bunching up of the brace. The stays enable you to wear the brace throughout your entire day without having to adjust or reposition the lumbosacral orthopedic brace. Aluminum Stays in the XL Back Brace Can Be Contoured to Your Specific Body Shape The aluminum stays mentioned above can be bent to fit the shape of your lower back and add support to your lumbar spine. This feature adds to the customization of this bariatric support for a plus size lady. Velcro Back Support is Easily Adjusted and Applied This obese back corset is simple and quick to apply! To put on the waist trainer, you secure the front Velcro closures first, then adjust the double-pull tension straps to add compression. You can apply this waist trimmer by yourself, without any assistance. Can This Extra Large Back Brace Help Promote Weight Loss? Yes! This extra large back brace not only helps slim and trim down your stomach, but makes you more active and energized. This supporter helps lift and compress your stomach to help lower the amount of stress placed on your spine -  in turn, making your body feel healthier! You will no longer feel pain when trying to lose weight. Wearing plus size back braces can help prevent fatigue and shortness of breath while exercising or doing the activities you love. This big and tall brace also helps promote good posture , which relieves the weight on the joints in your knees. If you’re experiencing knee pain due to being overweight, wearing an obesity knee sleeve is another pain relief option. Additionally, this 4x large back brace is a great post weight loss surgery brace because it helps compress the incision site to promote healing. Many individuals undergoing bariatric surgery find wearing a lower back / abdomen brace after the procedure can help tremendously during the recovery process. Frequently Asked Questions About This Big and Tall Back Brace Support What conditions / injuries does this SI joint stabilizer treat? This obese belly support band can help treat moderate lower back pain, muscle strains, tears, or pulls, bulging discs, herniated discs, scoliosis, sciatica, and hip pain. It helps those morbidly obese individuals suffering from excess pain in their lumbar spine. How does it work? This lumbar support is specifically designed to provide superior lower back and abdominal support, treating and easing mild to chronic back pain. When should I wear it? Thanks to the lightweight, latex-free material it's possible for you to wear this brace 24/7 if advised by your doctor. You can also sleep comfortably in this brace due to its soft material. It’s advised to speak with a medical professional before wearing a brace for an extended amount of time.   What is it made of? Front of the brace and tension straps: elastic Back panel: soft and breathable foam/cloth laminate with polyurethane foam and polyester fabric covering Removable stays: aluminum All parts are latex free Who can wear this brace? Men and women of all ages can benefit from this binder, so long as the circumference of their hips falls within a range of 44 inches to 80 inches. A pregnant woman can even wear this support so long as her belly does not take her past the size limit. We also offer maternity support belts and postpartum binders. What size should I buy? Using a soft / flexible tape measure, find the circumference around your hips, in inches. This obese medical support accommodates large waists and fits wide hip circumferences of 44” up to 80”. How do I put it on? Unhook all Velcro closures and lay the brace flat on the floor to identify the topside. The top has openings, which allow you to remove the metal stays. Next, position the brace behind your body so it’s centered on your back with the bottom of the brace sitting at the widest part of your hips. Fold the left side of the brace towards the middle of your stomach. Wrap around the right side but pull firmly and secure the Velcro closure. Repeat this process with the double-pull tension straps for your desired compression level. How do I adjust the brace? Grab the double-pull tension straps (located on the outside of the brace) and adjust them to make it either tighter or looser, then re-apply the Velcro closures. How tall is this brace? The brace tapers from 10 ½” tall in the back to 6” in the front. Washing Instructions: To wash the brace, first, remove stays and close all Velcro closures. Hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Do not use bleach. The brace should be air-dried. Do not use high temperatures to wash or dry. Other features: The 60-inch belt is flexible and breathable, making it ideal for active use. Unisex brace fits overweight to morbidly obese men and women. Provided compression stimulates healing, reducing inflammation. Color: White. 609044168757 7609895780405 new 44.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03b0101-plus-size-bariatric-back-brace-up-to-6xl-main_grande.jpg?v=1523565017 641061974598 BraceAbility 03B0101XXXXXL Back Braces (Plus Size) 5XLUS Plus Size Bariatric Back Brace in Big & Tall Extra Large Sizes up to 6XL http://www.braceability.com/products/plus-size-back-brace?variant=7609895813173 Plus Size Bariatric Back Brace in Big & Tall Extra Large Sizes up to 6XL 6XL How is Obesity Directly Correlated with Lower Back Pain? According to the Centers for Disease Control, over one-third (35.7%) of Americans are considered obese. This number has been increasing in the last few years - making health problems related to obesity a large issue. To be considered ‘obese,’ you have too much excess of body fat, which can threaten your health. If you’re unsure if you’re considered a heavy individual, we’ve created an easy BMI calculator to help you understand what your current weight / fat ratio is. Negative health effects of becoming obese include: High blood pressure Diabetes Osteoarthritis Cancer (breast, pancreas, colon, rectum, esophagus, and endometrium) Gout Heart disease Sleeping issues (sleep apnea) Aside from the conditions listed above, another common negative health effect of being plus size is having spinal/back issues . It’s been proven that the higher your BMI level is, the higher chance you have of experiencing lumbar back pain or injury. Carrying around extra weight can take a huge toll on the mechanisms of your back, especially your spinal discs, muscles, and bones. This excess weight shifts your center of gravity, resulting in your back working harder to hold your body in an upright position. To read more about why back pain is a side effect of obesity, check out our blog post ! 7 Reasons Why People Love This Lower Plus Size Back Brace Support Since many people are struggling with obesity, we understand the need for a brace that not only completely supports the back region, but helps make day-to-day activities easier. Wearing an obesity support belt can do wonders in relieving some of that tension placed on your spine due to the excess weight you’ve been carrying around. The numerous features of this low back garment for overweight individuals help it stand out from the alternative products you can buy at the big box stores. Obesity Back Support Tapers in Length in the Front This elastic back brace for males and females tapers from 10 ½” tall in the back to 6” in the front, giving your back full coverage and support while also preventing irritation in your abdomen region. Big and Tall Back Brace is Great for Those Ranging in Sizes XL-6XL One of the best features of this plus size belt is that it fits all ranges of large individuals. You no longer have to be frustrated in finding a size that’s large enough for your specific body shape/size. The soft back girdle fits hip circumferences of 42” up to 68”. If you’re looking for a smaller size, check out our large selection of back support belts to find the perfect brace for you! Plus Size Back Brace is Comprised of Premium Elastic and Cotton Flannel / Foam Material The front and sides of the belt are made of a premium elastic material, allowing it to stretch and conform to your body. The adjustable elastic material is durable enough for everyday activities, such as walking or exercising. The back side of the brace is comprised of a soft, breathable foam / cloth laminate with polyurethane foam and cotton flannel fabric covering, making it comfortable against your skin. The lightweight aspect of the brace prevents sweating and allows you to wear it over or under your clothes, depending on your preference. All parts are latex free. Bariatric Back Brace Has Double-Pull Elastic Tension Straps to Provide Extra Compression This back support brace features double-pull elastic tension straps in front to help increase the amount of confinement of the xxx brace. The straps are easily adjusted on your own by pulling them out and away from your body until you reach the amount of compression you desire then simply secure the straps by the Velcro closures. Back Brace for Overweight Features Removable Aluminum Stays Prevent Brace from Rolling/Bunching Up There is four removable aluminum stays located on the back side of this back support belt for large men and women. These stays help prevent any uncomfortable rolling or bunching up of the brace. The stays enable you to wear the brace throughout your entire day without having to adjust or reposition the lumbosacral orthopedic brace. Aluminum Stays in the XL Back Brace Can Be Contoured to Your Specific Body Shape The aluminum stays mentioned above can be bent to fit the shape of your lower back and add support to your lumbar spine. This feature adds to the customization of this bariatric support for a plus size lady. Velcro Back Support is Easily Adjusted and Applied This obese back corset is simple and quick to apply! To put on the waist trainer, you secure the front Velcro closures first, then adjust the double-pull tension straps to add compression. You can apply this waist trimmer by yourself, without any assistance. Can This Extra Large Back Brace Help Promote Weight Loss? Yes! This extra large back brace not only helps slim and trim down your stomach, but makes you more active and energized. This supporter helps lift and compress your stomach to help lower the amount of stress placed on your spine -  in turn, making your body feel healthier! You will no longer feel pain when trying to lose weight. Wearing plus size back braces can help prevent fatigue and shortness of breath while exercising or doing the activities you love. This big and tall brace also helps promote good posture , which relieves the weight on the joints in your knees. If you’re experiencing knee pain due to being overweight, wearing an obesity knee sleeve is another pain relief option. Additionally, this 4x large back brace is a great post weight loss surgery brace because it helps compress the incision site to promote healing. Many individuals undergoing bariatric surgery find wearing a lower back / abdomen brace after the procedure can help tremendously during the recovery process. Frequently Asked Questions About This Big and Tall Back Brace Support What conditions / injuries does this SI joint stabilizer treat? This obese belly support band can help treat moderate lower back pain, muscle strains, tears, or pulls, bulging discs, herniated discs, scoliosis, sciatica, and hip pain. It helps those morbidly obese individuals suffering from excess pain in their lumbar spine. How does it work? This lumbar support is specifically designed to provide superior lower back and abdominal support, treating and easing mild to chronic back pain. When should I wear it? Thanks to the lightweight, latex-free material it's possible for you to wear this brace 24/7 if advised by your doctor. You can also sleep comfortably in this brace due to its soft material. It’s advised to speak with a medical professional before wearing a brace for an extended amount of time.   What is it made of? Front of the brace and tension straps: elastic Back panel: soft and breathable foam/cloth laminate with polyurethane foam and polyester fabric covering Removable stays: aluminum All parts are latex free Who can wear this brace? Men and women of all ages can benefit from this binder, so long as the circumference of their hips falls within a range of 44 inches to 80 inches. A pregnant woman can even wear this support so long as her belly does not take her past the size limit. We also offer maternity support belts and postpartum binders. What size should I buy? Using a soft / flexible tape measure, find the circumference around your hips, in inches. This obese medical support accommodates large waists and fits wide hip circumferences of 44” up to 80”. How do I put it on? Unhook all Velcro closures and lay the brace flat on the floor to identify the topside. The top has openings, which allow you to remove the metal stays. Next, position the brace behind your body so it’s centered on your back with the bottom of the brace sitting at the widest part of your hips. Fold the left side of the brace towards the middle of your stomach. Wrap around the right side but pull firmly and secure the Velcro closure. Repeat this process with the double-pull tension straps for your desired compression level. How do I adjust the brace? Grab the double-pull tension straps (located on the outside of the brace) and adjust them to make it either tighter or looser, then re-apply the Velcro closures. How tall is this brace? The brace tapers from 10 ½” tall in the back to 6” in the front. Washing Instructions: To wash the brace, first, remove stays and close all Velcro closures. Hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Do not use bleach. The brace should be air-dried. Do not use high temperatures to wash or dry. Other features: The 60-inch belt is flexible and breathable, making it ideal for active use. Unisex brace fits overweight to morbidly obese men and women. Provided compression stimulates healing, reducing inflammation. Color: White. 609044168757 7609895813173 new 44.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03b0101-plus-size-bariatric-back-brace-up-to-6xl-main_grande.jpg?v=1523565017 641061974604 BraceAbility 03B0101XXXXXXL Back Braces (Plus Size) 6XLUS Plus Size Bariatric Abdominal Binder & Stomach Support http://www.braceability.com/products/plus-size-abdominal-binder?variant=7671931404341 Plus Size Bariatric Abdominal Binder & Stomach Support XL Why You Need This Bariatric Abdominal Binder for Weight Loss and Post-Surgical Care There are a number of situations where a stomach binder brace is a useful tool. A binder brace for the stomach applies compression to your low-back as well as the upper and lower abdomen. These actions have a number of benefits that make this plus-size belly wrap great for treating a variety of things, including: Abdominal muscle strain or cramping Weak abdominal muscles Hernias Post-surgical care Diastasis recti (stomach muscle separation) Obesity-related discomfort Back pain Bladder problems Some examples of post-surgical care include after liposuction, hysterectomy or tummy tuck surgery, postnatal (after pregnancy), especially if you had a Cesarean section or multiple birth delivery, or following hernia surgery (see more hernia supports ). If you are looking for support during pregnancy, you should check out BraceAbility’s maternity braces . Otherwise, check out BraceAbility’s full line of plus-size bariatric supports ! 5 Reasons Why People Love This Plus-Size Abdominal Binder Made of Breathable, Premium Panel Elastic Regardless of what this plus-size ab binder is used for, you can be assured it will provide comfortable support and compression. The extra-large abdominal binder is constructed of premium panel elastic, with soft plush backing on the inside. Plus, the discreet white color and low-profile fit of the tummy wrap for large people means it easily fits beneath your clothes. Stitching Between Panels Prevents It from Rolling Up Special faggoted stitching between the panels allows this binder to conform to your body shape, making it comfortable to sit, stand, or lay down in. The stitching also prevents this abdominal belt for large people from rolling or bunching up. Entire Binder is Velcro Compatible for Adjustable Compression Its single Velcro closure is easy to use and can be applied anywhere on this surgical abdominal binder for custom support and compression. Many users describe the flexible fit as being so comfortable you forget you’re even wearing an abdominal wrap. It also helps hold in excess or hanging stomach fat like a girdle, providing a slimming effect to your belly. Promotes Blood and Oxygen Flow to Encourage Healing The comfortable compression this extra-large ab binder provides help reduce swelling and boost blood circulation. This, in turn, encourages healing, while also protecting your incision site after surgery. And the quicker you heal, the sooner you can return to a mobile lifestyle, further advancing your recovery process. But remember, it’s important to consult with your doctor or physical therapist about using abdominal supports after surgery, as splinting is not right for everyone. Helps Diminish Back Pain In addition to speeding up your recovery process, the compression also helps transfer stress away from your lower back, diminishing back pain and protecting against further damage. The 12-inch abdominal support also promotes better posture, which in and of itself can help ease pain. Frequently Asked Questions About This Extra Large Stomach Wrap Who can wear it? Available in sizes XL through 4XL, fitting a wide range of body circumferences, so anyone from average to overweight and morbidly obese adults can wear this abdominal band. How do I know what size to get? Using a fabric tape measure, stand up and measure the circumference of your abdomen at its widest point. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our sizing graphic in the photos above to choose the correct size. What conditions does this stomach brace treat? This belly binder helps treat and provide support for lower back pain, hernias, bladder problems, obesity-related pain, and abdominal muscle strain / injury. The splint also promotes healing postpartum or following hysterectomy, C section, gastroplasty, liposuction, or abdominoplasty surgery. How do I put it on? Unfold the abdominal binder and lay it out to identify the top vs. bottom. The slightly wider end is the bottom, this will sit on your hips. Position the binder behind your body making sure the Velcro strip is facing inward. Wrap the binder around your core and secure with Velcro strip once you’ve reached a nice, snug fit. For some, it may be easier to lay down on top of the flat binder and then wrap it around yourself. If it is still too difficult, have somebody help you apply the binder. Can I wear this binder over my shirt? Yes. How tall is this support? 12” tall. What material is this brace made of? Made of latex-free, premium panel elastic and a Velcro closure. When should I wear it? This abdominal binder can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during physical activity. However, you should consult with your doctor before wearing any abdominal support for extended periods of time, such as while sleeping. Washing Instructions: Hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Allow binder to air dry completely before reapplying. Do not use bleach or high temperatures to wash or dry. Other features: Unisex design means this abdominal binder can be worn by men or women. Faggoted stitching between panels prevents the belt from rolling up. Fits those with larger waist and hip circumferences. Color: White. 620816203829 7671931404341 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10w0101-plus-size-bariatric-abdominal-binder_grande.jpg?v=1527624548 641061974512 BraceAbility 10W0101XL Abdominal (Plus Size) XLUS Plus Size Bariatric Abdominal Binder & Stomach Support http://www.braceability.com/products/plus-size-abdominal-binder?variant=7671969710133 Plus Size Bariatric Abdominal Binder & Stomach Support 2XL Why You Need This Bariatric Abdominal Binder for Weight Loss and Post-Surgical Care There are a number of situations where a stomach binder brace is a useful tool. A binder brace for the stomach applies compression to your low-back as well as the upper and lower abdomen. These actions have a number of benefits that make this plus-size belly wrap great for treating a variety of things, including: Abdominal muscle strain or cramping Weak abdominal muscles Hernias Post-surgical care Diastasis recti (stomach muscle separation) Obesity-related discomfort Back pain Bladder problems Some examples of post-surgical care include after liposuction, hysterectomy or tummy tuck surgery, postnatal (after pregnancy), especially if you had a Cesarean section or multiple birth delivery, or following hernia surgery (see more hernia supports ). If you are looking for support during pregnancy, you should check out BraceAbility’s maternity braces . Otherwise, check out BraceAbility’s full line of plus-size bariatric supports ! 5 Reasons Why People Love This Plus-Size Abdominal Binder Made of Breathable, Premium Panel Elastic Regardless of what this plus-size ab binder is used for, you can be assured it will provide comfortable support and compression. The extra-large abdominal binder is constructed of premium panel elastic, with soft plush backing on the inside. Plus, the discreet white color and low-profile fit of the tummy wrap for large people means it easily fits beneath your clothes. Stitching Between Panels Prevents It from Rolling Up Special faggoted stitching between the panels allows this binder to conform to your body shape, making it comfortable to sit, stand, or lay down in. The stitching also prevents this abdominal belt for large people from rolling or bunching up. Entire Binder is Velcro Compatible for Adjustable Compression Its single Velcro closure is easy to use and can be applied anywhere on this surgical abdominal binder for custom support and compression. Many users describe the flexible fit as being so comfortable you forget you’re even wearing an abdominal wrap. It also helps hold in excess or hanging stomach fat like a girdle, providing a slimming effect to your belly. Promotes Blood and Oxygen Flow to Encourage Healing The comfortable compression this extra-large ab binder provides help reduce swelling and boost blood circulation. This, in turn, encourages healing, while also protecting your incision site after surgery. And the quicker you heal, the sooner you can return to a mobile lifestyle, further advancing your recovery process. But remember, it’s important to consult with your doctor or physical therapist about using abdominal supports after surgery, as splinting is not right for everyone. Helps Diminish Back Pain In addition to speeding up your recovery process, the compression also helps transfer stress away from your lower back, diminishing back pain and protecting against further damage. The 12-inch abdominal support also promotes better posture, which in and of itself can help ease pain. Frequently Asked Questions About This Extra Large Stomach Wrap Who can wear it? Available in sizes XL through 4XL, fitting a wide range of body circumferences, so anyone from average to overweight and morbidly obese adults can wear this abdominal band. How do I know what size to get? Using a fabric tape measure, stand up and measure the circumference of your abdomen at its widest point. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our sizing graphic in the photos above to choose the correct size. What conditions does this stomach brace treat? This belly binder helps treat and provide support for lower back pain, hernias, bladder problems, obesity-related pain, and abdominal muscle strain / injury. The splint also promotes healing postpartum or following hysterectomy, C section, gastroplasty, liposuction, or abdominoplasty surgery. How do I put it on? Unfold the abdominal binder and lay it out to identify the top vs. bottom. The slightly wider end is the bottom, this will sit on your hips. Position the binder behind your body making sure the Velcro strip is facing inward. Wrap the binder around your core and secure with Velcro strip once you’ve reached a nice, snug fit. For some, it may be easier to lay down on top of the flat binder and then wrap it around yourself. If it is still too difficult, have somebody help you apply the binder. Can I wear this binder over my shirt? Yes. How tall is this support? 12” tall. What material is this brace made of? Made of latex-free, premium panel elastic and a Velcro closure. When should I wear it? This abdominal binder can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during physical activity. However, you should consult with your doctor before wearing any abdominal support for extended periods of time, such as while sleeping. Washing Instructions: Hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Allow binder to air dry completely before reapplying. Do not use bleach or high temperatures to wash or dry. Other features: Unisex design means this abdominal binder can be worn by men or women. Faggoted stitching between panels prevents the belt from rolling up. Fits those with larger waist and hip circumferences. Color: White. 620816203829 7671969710133 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10w0101-plus-size-bariatric-abdominal-binder_grande.jpg?v=1527624548 641061974529 BraceAbility 10W0101XXL Abdominal (Plus Size) 2XLUS Plus Size Bariatric Abdominal Binder & Stomach Support http://www.braceability.com/products/plus-size-abdominal-binder?variant=7671969742901 Plus Size Bariatric Abdominal Binder & Stomach Support 3XL Why You Need This Bariatric Abdominal Binder for Weight Loss and Post-Surgical Care There are a number of situations where a stomach binder brace is a useful tool. A binder brace for the stomach applies compression to your low-back as well as the upper and lower abdomen. These actions have a number of benefits that make this plus-size belly wrap great for treating a variety of things, including: Abdominal muscle strain or cramping Weak abdominal muscles Hernias Post-surgical care Diastasis recti (stomach muscle separation) Obesity-related discomfort Back pain Bladder problems Some examples of post-surgical care include after liposuction, hysterectomy or tummy tuck surgery, postnatal (after pregnancy), especially if you had a Cesarean section or multiple birth delivery, or following hernia surgery (see more hernia supports ). If you are looking for support during pregnancy, you should check out BraceAbility’s maternity braces . Otherwise, check out BraceAbility’s full line of plus-size bariatric supports ! 5 Reasons Why People Love This Plus-Size Abdominal Binder Made of Breathable, Premium Panel Elastic Regardless of what this plus-size ab binder is used for, you can be assured it will provide comfortable support and compression. The extra-large abdominal binder is constructed of premium panel elastic, with soft plush backing on the inside. Plus, the discreet white color and low-profile fit of the tummy wrap for large people means it easily fits beneath your clothes. Stitching Between Panels Prevents It from Rolling Up Special faggoted stitching between the panels allows this binder to conform to your body shape, making it comfortable to sit, stand, or lay down in. The stitching also prevents this abdominal belt for large people from rolling or bunching up. Entire Binder is Velcro Compatible for Adjustable Compression Its single Velcro closure is easy to use and can be applied anywhere on this surgical abdominal binder for custom support and compression. Many users describe the flexible fit as being so comfortable you forget you’re even wearing an abdominal wrap. It also helps hold in excess or hanging stomach fat like a girdle, providing a slimming effect to your belly. Promotes Blood and Oxygen Flow to Encourage Healing The comfortable compression this extra-large ab binder provides help reduce swelling and boost blood circulation. This, in turn, encourages healing, while also protecting your incision site after surgery. And the quicker you heal, the sooner you can return to a mobile lifestyle, further advancing your recovery process. But remember, it’s important to consult with your doctor or physical therapist about using abdominal supports after surgery, as splinting is not right for everyone. Helps Diminish Back Pain In addition to speeding up your recovery process, the compression also helps transfer stress away from your lower back, diminishing back pain and protecting against further damage. The 12-inch abdominal support also promotes better posture, which in and of itself can help ease pain. Frequently Asked Questions About This Extra Large Stomach Wrap Who can wear it? Available in sizes XL through 4XL, fitting a wide range of body circumferences, so anyone from average to overweight and morbidly obese adults can wear this abdominal band. How do I know what size to get? Using a fabric tape measure, stand up and measure the circumference of your abdomen at its widest point. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our sizing graphic in the photos above to choose the correct size. What conditions does this stomach brace treat? This belly binder helps treat and provide support for lower back pain, hernias, bladder problems, obesity-related pain, and abdominal muscle strain / injury. The splint also promotes healing postpartum or following hysterectomy, C section, gastroplasty, liposuction, or abdominoplasty surgery. How do I put it on? Unfold the abdominal binder and lay it out to identify the top vs. bottom. The slightly wider end is the bottom, this will sit on your hips. Position the binder behind your body making sure the Velcro strip is facing inward. Wrap the binder around your core and secure with Velcro strip once you’ve reached a nice, snug fit. For some, it may be easier to lay down on top of the flat binder and then wrap it around yourself. If it is still too difficult, have somebody help you apply the binder. Can I wear this binder over my shirt? Yes. How tall is this support? 12” tall. What material is this brace made of? Made of latex-free, premium panel elastic and a Velcro closure. When should I wear it? This abdominal binder can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during physical activity. However, you should consult with your doctor before wearing any abdominal support for extended periods of time, such as while sleeping. Washing Instructions: Hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Allow binder to air dry completely before reapplying. Do not use bleach or high temperatures to wash or dry. Other features: Unisex design means this abdominal binder can be worn by men or women. Faggoted stitching between panels prevents the belt from rolling up. Fits those with larger waist and hip circumferences. Color: White. 620816203829 7671969742901 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10w0101-plus-size-bariatric-abdominal-binder_grande.jpg?v=1527624548 641061974536 BraceAbility 10W0101XXXL Abdominal (Plus Size) 3XLUS Plus Size Bariatric Abdominal Binder & Stomach Support http://www.braceability.com/products/plus-size-abdominal-binder?variant=7671969808437 Plus Size Bariatric Abdominal Binder & Stomach Support 4XL Why You Need This Bariatric Abdominal Binder for Weight Loss and Post-Surgical Care There are a number of situations where a stomach binder brace is a useful tool. A binder brace for the stomach applies compression to your low-back as well as the upper and lower abdomen. These actions have a number of benefits that make this plus-size belly wrap great for treating a variety of things, including: Abdominal muscle strain or cramping Weak abdominal muscles Hernias Post-surgical care Diastasis recti (stomach muscle separation) Obesity-related discomfort Back pain Bladder problems Some examples of post-surgical care include after liposuction, hysterectomy or tummy tuck surgery, postnatal (after pregnancy), especially if you had a Cesarean section or multiple birth delivery, or following hernia surgery (see more hernia supports ). If you are looking for support during pregnancy, you should check out BraceAbility’s maternity braces . Otherwise, check out BraceAbility’s full line of plus-size bariatric supports ! 5 Reasons Why People Love This Plus-Size Abdominal Binder Made of Breathable, Premium Panel Elastic Regardless of what this plus-size ab binder is used for, you can be assured it will provide comfortable support and compression. The extra-large abdominal binder is constructed of premium panel elastic, with soft plush backing on the inside. Plus, the discreet white color and low-profile fit of the tummy wrap for large people means it easily fits beneath your clothes. Stitching Between Panels Prevents It from Rolling Up Special faggoted stitching between the panels allows this binder to conform to your body shape, making it comfortable to sit, stand, or lay down in. The stitching also prevents this abdominal belt for large people from rolling or bunching up. Entire Binder is Velcro Compatible for Adjustable Compression Its single Velcro closure is easy to use and can be applied anywhere on this surgical abdominal binder for custom support and compression. Many users describe the flexible fit as being so comfortable you forget you’re even wearing an abdominal wrap. It also helps hold in excess or hanging stomach fat like a girdle, providing a slimming effect to your belly. Promotes Blood and Oxygen Flow to Encourage Healing The comfortable compression this extra-large ab binder provides help reduce swelling and boost blood circulation. This, in turn, encourages healing, while also protecting your incision site after surgery. And the quicker you heal, the sooner you can return to a mobile lifestyle, further advancing your recovery process. But remember, it’s important to consult with your doctor or physical therapist about using abdominal supports after surgery, as splinting is not right for everyone. Helps Diminish Back Pain In addition to speeding up your recovery process, the compression also helps transfer stress away from your lower back, diminishing back pain and protecting against further damage. The 12-inch abdominal support also promotes better posture, which in and of itself can help ease pain. Frequently Asked Questions About This Extra Large Stomach Wrap Who can wear it? Available in sizes XL through 4XL, fitting a wide range of body circumferences, so anyone from average to overweight and morbidly obese adults can wear this abdominal band. How do I know what size to get? Using a fabric tape measure, stand up and measure the circumference of your abdomen at its widest point. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our sizing graphic in the photos above to choose the correct size. What conditions does this stomach brace treat? This belly binder helps treat and provide support for lower back pain, hernias, bladder problems, obesity-related pain, and abdominal muscle strain / injury. The splint also promotes healing postpartum or following hysterectomy, C section, gastroplasty, liposuction, or abdominoplasty surgery. How do I put it on? Unfold the abdominal binder and lay it out to identify the top vs. bottom. The slightly wider end is the bottom, this will sit on your hips. Position the binder behind your body making sure the Velcro strip is facing inward. Wrap the binder around your core and secure with Velcro strip once you’ve reached a nice, snug fit. For some, it may be easier to lay down on top of the flat binder and then wrap it around yourself. If it is still too difficult, have somebody help you apply the binder. Can I wear this binder over my shirt? Yes. How tall is this support? 12” tall. What material is this brace made of? Made of latex-free, premium panel elastic and a Velcro closure. When should I wear it? This abdominal binder can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during physical activity. However, you should consult with your doctor before wearing any abdominal support for extended periods of time, such as while sleeping. Washing Instructions: Hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Allow binder to air dry completely before reapplying. Do not use bleach or high temperatures to wash or dry. Other features: Unisex design means this abdominal binder can be worn by men or women. Faggoted stitching between panels prevents the belt from rolling up. Fits those with larger waist and hip circumferences. Color: White. 620816203829 7671969808437 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10w0101-plus-size-bariatric-abdominal-binder_grande.jpg?v=1527624548 641061974543 BraceAbility 10W0101XXXXL Abdominal (Plus Size) 4XLUS Hard Thumb Arthritis Treatment Splint & CMC Basal Joint Immobilizer http://www.braceability.com/products/hard-thumb-splint?variant=7695132590133 Hard Thumb Arthritis Treatment Splint & CMC Basal Joint Immobilizer Right / S Why Do I Need a Brace to Help with Thumb Arthritis and Other Injuries? Your thumb joint has a rather large range of motion, making it one of the most mobile joints in your entire body. Unfortunately, this extra mobility can cause increased stress on your thumb joint. When you stop to think about how often you use your thumbs, it's easy to understand why you might be experiencing pain. BraceAbility’s rigid, thumb splint is one of the most popular thumb support braces on the market for good reason. It was designed to protect your thumb, provide pain relief, and offer comfortable immobilization to your metacarpophalangeal (MCP) and carpometacarpal (CMC or saddle) thumb joints, leaving your IP joint free bend as usual for enhanced mobility. This thumb joint stabilizer can help treat many causes of thumb pain and conditions including: Trigger thumb Thumb arthritis (rheumatoid and osteoarthritis) Post-surgery recovery De Quervain’s tenosynovitis (thumb tendonitis) Fractured thumb (broken thumb) Dislocated thumb Hyperextended (stretched ligaments) Sprained thumb (jammed or torn ligaments) Gamekeeper's / skier’s thumb CMC Joint Brace for Arthritis Treatment As mentioned, this comfortable thumb splint can help with arthritis. Thumb arthritis, often referred to as basal joint arthritis or thumb rhizarthrosis, is actually the most common form of arthritis in the hand. It typically causes swelling, stiffness, and pain at the base of your thumb, as well as a diminished range of motion and grip. Trauma or injury can increase your risk of developing thumb arthritis, or you might experience wear-and-tear osteoarthritis. Top-Rated Features of This Hard Plastic Thumb Splint As mentioned previously, your thumbs help you accomplish an incredible amount of the activities and tasks you perform every day. It can’t be stressed enough how important your thumbs are in your ability to go about your daily activities (even the most basic ones). Following we detail why this thumb brace stands out from similar immobilizers. Low-Profile Design for Everyday Use This rigid thumb splint has a low profile design, allowing you to wear this brace during most daily activities (leisure and vigorous), as it stays in place quite well. Plus it’s lightweight, so you don’t feel like you’re lugging around a cast all day. While still immobilizing your lower thumb joints, this brace does let your top thumb knuckle flex a little bit, and your fingers have a full range of motion too! The freedom of this brace allows you to perform activities, hobbies, and sports such as basketball, tennis, gaming, sleeping, gardening, writing, typing , driving and cooking. However, it’s important to note that everybody is different and you might not be able to wear the brace depending on what hobby you're performing or the anatomy of your hand. Can I wear gloves over this thumb stabilizer? If necessary, you can also wear this thumb stabilizer under most loose-fitting gloves, think gardening, winter, or work gloves. Durable, Waterproof Thumb Splint This resilient, brace for arthritis and more offers a lot of support for your thumb by keeping it in the correct position and taking pressure off of damaged areas. Made out of a hard, hypoallergenic plastic material, it can withstand a lot of wear, which is great because you will probably be wearing it a lot. Hypoallergenic means it’s completely latex and neoprene free (some people can react to neoprene and it’s the material used in a large number of braces). Protective Glove and Extra padding Included to Enhance Comfort The rigid plastic that this thumb brace is constructed out of can become somewhat uncomfortable against your skin over the course of the day. To eliminate any discomfort you might experience, a soft, universally sized, polyester undersock and an extra padded piece are included with your purchase. The glove and extra adhesive pad help prevent the thumb brace from rubbing or chafing against your skin. Although the brace comes with one thumb / hand sleeve, some people prefer to have at least two on hand for alternating while washing, or wearing two at a time for extra support, warmth, or protection. If needed, extra protective gloves are available for purchase here . Medical-Grade Velcro Strap Featuring just one high quality, Velcro strap, this guard for your thumb joint is a breeze to apply and easy to adjust. The strap is constructed out of medical-grade Velcro, making it 10 times stronger than most retail-grade braces on the market. Retail-grade Velcro closures are only made to open and close 90 times, as opposed to our medical-grade Velcro closures, which is made to open and close at least 900 times. Perforated Holes for Breathability The perforated holes in this thumb spica splint offer additional comfort and breathability, especially, so your hand can breathe and will not get sweaty. The hand support for arthritis also has a special raised edge at the thumb and forefinger area to avoid unwanted pressure. Frequently Asked Questions About This Hand Support for Thumb Pain What conditions / injuries does this thumb splint treat? It’s great for post-surgery recovery, arthritic thumb joints, De Quervain’s tenosynovitis (thumb tendonitis), trigger thumb, fractures (broken thumbs), dislocations, sprains, stretched, jammed or torn ligaments, gamekeeper's thumb, and skier’s thumb. How does it work? This rigid, thumb splint is designed to protect your thumb, alleviate pain, and provide comfortable immobilization, allowing your MCP and CMC thumb joints to heal, leaving your IP joint free bend as usual. Who can wear this brace? It’s great for adult men and women of all shapes and sizes, as well as some teenagers. It comes in sizes ranging from small to large, which fit a wide variety of thumb knuckle circumferences. What size should I get? To choose your size, carefully measure the circumference around your thumb knuckle at the widest point, in inches. This thumb splint is NOT universal, so you’ll need to choose if it’s for your right or left hand when ordering. Size S fits thumb knuckle circumferences between 2"- 2⅝ ”. Size M fits thumb knuckle circumferences between 2⅝”-3”. Size L fits thumb knuckle circumferences between 3”-3½ ”. When should I wear it? Use any time your thumb needs to be immobilized. Can be worn throughout the day and while sleeping for support. What is it made of? This thumb brace is made out of a perforated polyamide plastic and an elastic / Velcro wrist strap, making it both durable and waterproof. A soft, polyester undersleeve is also included. All components are latex-free. How tall is this thumb splint? Size S is 4.5” tall. Size M is 5” tall. Size L is 5.5” tall. How do I put it on? If desired, pull on the polyester undersleeve for added comfort. Unhook the Velcro wrist strap and slide your thumb into the splint. Tighten the wrist strap to your comfort level and secure the Velcro closure. Washing Instructions: Hand wash the thumb splint and undersleeve in warm water with mild soap, lay flat to air dry completely before reapplying. Other features: Waterproof design. Natural, non-invasive fix for many sources of thumb pain. Solid thumb splint protects your thumb from further injury during recovery. Easy to put on, take off and adjust. A padded adhesive strip and undersleeve are included with your purchase. Color: Black. 623896297525 7695132590133 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/11f0201-hard-thumb-splint-main_grande.jpg?v=1524167137 641427944975 BraceAbility 11F0201SR Finger / Thumb SUS Hard Thumb Arthritis Treatment Splint & CMC Basal Joint Immobilizer http://www.braceability.com/products/hard-thumb-splint?variant=7695132655669 Hard Thumb Arthritis Treatment Splint & CMC Basal Joint Immobilizer Right / M Why Do I Need a Brace to Help with Thumb Arthritis and Other Injuries? Your thumb joint has a rather large range of motion, making it one of the most mobile joints in your entire body. Unfortunately, this extra mobility can cause increased stress on your thumb joint. When you stop to think about how often you use your thumbs, it's easy to understand why you might be experiencing pain. BraceAbility’s rigid, thumb splint is one of the most popular thumb support braces on the market for good reason. It was designed to protect your thumb, provide pain relief, and offer comfortable immobilization to your metacarpophalangeal (MCP) and carpometacarpal (CMC or saddle) thumb joints, leaving your IP joint free bend as usual for enhanced mobility. This thumb joint stabilizer can help treat many causes of thumb pain and conditions including: Trigger thumb Thumb arthritis (rheumatoid and osteoarthritis) Post-surgery recovery De Quervain’s tenosynovitis (thumb tendonitis) Fractured thumb (broken thumb) Dislocated thumb Hyperextended (stretched ligaments) Sprained thumb (jammed or torn ligaments) Gamekeeper's / skier’s thumb CMC Joint Brace for Arthritis Treatment As mentioned, this comfortable thumb splint can help with arthritis. Thumb arthritis, often referred to as basal joint arthritis or thumb rhizarthrosis, is actually the most common form of arthritis in the hand. It typically causes swelling, stiffness, and pain at the base of your thumb, as well as a diminished range of motion and grip. Trauma or injury can increase your risk of developing thumb arthritis, or you might experience wear-and-tear osteoarthritis. Top-Rated Features of This Hard Plastic Thumb Splint As mentioned previously, your thumbs help you accomplish an incredible amount of the activities and tasks you perform every day. It can’t be stressed enough how important your thumbs are in your ability to go about your daily activities (even the most basic ones). Following we detail why this thumb brace stands out from similar immobilizers. Low-Profile Design for Everyday Use This rigid thumb splint has a low profile design, allowing you to wear this brace during most daily activities (leisure and vigorous), as it stays in place quite well. Plus it’s lightweight, so you don’t feel like you’re lugging around a cast all day. While still immobilizing your lower thumb joints, this brace does let your top thumb knuckle flex a little bit, and your fingers have a full range of motion too! The freedom of this brace allows you to perform activities, hobbies, and sports such as basketball, tennis, gaming, sleeping, gardening, writing, typing , driving and cooking. However, it’s important to note that everybody is different and you might not be able to wear the brace depending on what hobby you're performing or the anatomy of your hand. Can I wear gloves over this thumb stabilizer? If necessary, you can also wear this thumb stabilizer under most loose-fitting gloves, think gardening, winter, or work gloves. Durable, Waterproof Thumb Splint This resilient, brace for arthritis and more offers a lot of support for your thumb by keeping it in the correct position and taking pressure off of damaged areas. Made out of a hard, hypoallergenic plastic material, it can withstand a lot of wear, which is great because you will probably be wearing it a lot. Hypoallergenic means it’s completely latex and neoprene free (some people can react to neoprene and it’s the material used in a large number of braces). Protective Glove and Extra padding Included to Enhance Comfort The rigid plastic that this thumb brace is constructed out of can become somewhat uncomfortable against your skin over the course of the day. To eliminate any discomfort you might experience, a soft, universally sized, polyester undersock and an extra padded piece are included with your purchase. The glove and extra adhesive pad help prevent the thumb brace from rubbing or chafing against your skin. Although the brace comes with one thumb / hand sleeve, some people prefer to have at least two on hand for alternating while washing, or wearing two at a time for extra support, warmth, or protection. If needed, extra protective gloves are available for purchase here . Medical-Grade Velcro Strap Featuring just one high quality, Velcro strap, this guard for your thumb joint is a breeze to apply and easy to adjust. The strap is constructed out of medical-grade Velcro, making it 10 times stronger than most retail-grade braces on the market. Retail-grade Velcro closures are only made to open and close 90 times, as opposed to our medical-grade Velcro closures, which is made to open and close at least 900 times. Perforated Holes for Breathability The perforated holes in this thumb spica splint offer additional comfort and breathability, especially, so your hand can breathe and will not get sweaty. The hand support for arthritis also has a special raised edge at the thumb and forefinger area to avoid unwanted pressure. Frequently Asked Questions About This Hand Support for Thumb Pain What conditions / injuries does this thumb splint treat? It’s great for post-surgery recovery, arthritic thumb joints, De Quervain’s tenosynovitis (thumb tendonitis), trigger thumb, fractures (broken thumbs), dislocations, sprains, stretched, jammed or torn ligaments, gamekeeper's thumb, and skier’s thumb. How does it work? This rigid, thumb splint is designed to protect your thumb, alleviate pain, and provide comfortable immobilization, allowing your MCP and CMC thumb joints to heal, leaving your IP joint free bend as usual. Who can wear this brace? It’s great for adult men and women of all shapes and sizes, as well as some teenagers. It comes in sizes ranging from small to large, which fit a wide variety of thumb knuckle circumferences. What size should I get? To choose your size, carefully measure the circumference around your thumb knuckle at the widest point, in inches. This thumb splint is NOT universal, so you’ll need to choose if it’s for your right or left hand when ordering. Size S fits thumb knuckle circumferences between 2"- 2⅝ ”. Size M fits thumb knuckle circumferences between 2⅝”-3”. Size L fits thumb knuckle circumferences between 3”-3½ ”. When should I wear it? Use any time your thumb needs to be immobilized. Can be worn throughout the day and while sleeping for support. What is it made of? This thumb brace is made out of a perforated polyamide plastic and an elastic / Velcro wrist strap, making it both durable and waterproof. A soft, polyester undersleeve is also included. All components are latex-free. How tall is this thumb splint? Size S is 4.5” tall. Size M is 5” tall. Size L is 5.5” tall. How do I put it on? If desired, pull on the polyester undersleeve for added comfort. Unhook the Velcro wrist strap and slide your thumb into the splint. Tighten the wrist strap to your comfort level and secure the Velcro closure. Washing Instructions: Hand wash the thumb splint and undersleeve in warm water with mild soap, lay flat to air dry completely before reapplying. Other features: Waterproof design. Natural, non-invasive fix for many sources of thumb pain. Solid thumb splint protects your thumb from further injury during recovery. Easy to put on, take off and adjust. A padded adhesive strip and undersleeve are included with your purchase. Color: Black. 623896297525 7695132655669 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/11f0201-hard-thumb-splint-main_grande.jpg?v=1524167137 641427944982 BraceAbility 11F0201MR Finger / Thumb MUS Hard Thumb Arthritis Treatment Splint & CMC Basal Joint Immobilizer http://www.braceability.com/products/hard-thumb-splint?variant=7695132721205 Hard Thumb Arthritis Treatment Splint & CMC Basal Joint Immobilizer Right / L Why Do I Need a Brace to Help with Thumb Arthritis and Other Injuries? Your thumb joint has a rather large range of motion, making it one of the most mobile joints in your entire body. Unfortunately, this extra mobility can cause increased stress on your thumb joint. When you stop to think about how often you use your thumbs, it's easy to understand why you might be experiencing pain. BraceAbility’s rigid, thumb splint is one of the most popular thumb support braces on the market for good reason. It was designed to protect your thumb, provide pain relief, and offer comfortable immobilization to your metacarpophalangeal (MCP) and carpometacarpal (CMC or saddle) thumb joints, leaving your IP joint free bend as usual for enhanced mobility. This thumb joint stabilizer can help treat many causes of thumb pain and conditions including: Trigger thumb Thumb arthritis (rheumatoid and osteoarthritis) Post-surgery recovery De Quervain’s tenosynovitis (thumb tendonitis) Fractured thumb (broken thumb) Dislocated thumb Hyperextended (stretched ligaments) Sprained thumb (jammed or torn ligaments) Gamekeeper's / skier’s thumb CMC Joint Brace for Arthritis Treatment As mentioned, this comfortable thumb splint can help with arthritis. Thumb arthritis, often referred to as basal joint arthritis or thumb rhizarthrosis, is actually the most common form of arthritis in the hand. It typically causes swelling, stiffness, and pain at the base of your thumb, as well as a diminished range of motion and grip. Trauma or injury can increase your risk of developing thumb arthritis, or you might experience wear-and-tear osteoarthritis. Top-Rated Features of This Hard Plastic Thumb Splint As mentioned previously, your thumbs help you accomplish an incredible amount of the activities and tasks you perform every day. It can’t be stressed enough how important your thumbs are in your ability to go about your daily activities (even the most basic ones). Following we detail why this thumb brace stands out from similar immobilizers. Low-Profile Design for Everyday Use This rigid thumb splint has a low profile design, allowing you to wear this brace during most daily activities (leisure and vigorous), as it stays in place quite well. Plus it’s lightweight, so you don’t feel like you’re lugging around a cast all day. While still immobilizing your lower thumb joints, this brace does let your top thumb knuckle flex a little bit, and your fingers have a full range of motion too! The freedom of this brace allows you to perform activities, hobbies, and sports such as basketball, tennis, gaming, sleeping, gardening, writing, typing , driving and cooking. However, it’s important to note that everybody is different and you might not be able to wear the brace depending on what hobby you're performing or the anatomy of your hand. Can I wear gloves over this thumb stabilizer? If necessary, you can also wear this thumb stabilizer under most loose-fitting gloves, think gardening, winter, or work gloves. Durable, Waterproof Thumb Splint This resilient, brace for arthritis and more offers a lot of support for your thumb by keeping it in the correct position and taking pressure off of damaged areas. Made out of a hard, hypoallergenic plastic material, it can withstand a lot of wear, which is great because you will probably be wearing it a lot. Hypoallergenic means it’s completely latex and neoprene free (some people can react to neoprene and it’s the material used in a large number of braces). Protective Glove and Extra padding Included to Enhance Comfort The rigid plastic that this thumb brace is constructed out of can become somewhat uncomfortable against your skin over the course of the day. To eliminate any discomfort you might experience, a soft, universally sized, polyester undersock and an extra padded piece are included with your purchase. The glove and extra adhesive pad help prevent the thumb brace from rubbing or chafing against your skin. Although the brace comes with one thumb / hand sleeve, some people prefer to have at least two on hand for alternating while washing, or wearing two at a time for extra support, warmth, or protection. If needed, extra protective gloves are available for purchase here . Medical-Grade Velcro Strap Featuring just one high quality, Velcro strap, this guard for your thumb joint is a breeze to apply and easy to adjust. The strap is constructed out of medical-grade Velcro, making it 10 times stronger than most retail-grade braces on the market. Retail-grade Velcro closures are only made to open and close 90 times, as opposed to our medical-grade Velcro closures, which is made to open and close at least 900 times. Perforated Holes for Breathability The perforated holes in this thumb spica splint offer additional comfort and breathability, especially, so your hand can breathe and will not get sweaty. The hand support for arthritis also has a special raised edge at the thumb and forefinger area to avoid unwanted pressure. Frequently Asked Questions About This Hand Support for Thumb Pain What conditions / injuries does this thumb splint treat? It’s great for post-surgery recovery, arthritic thumb joints, De Quervain’s tenosynovitis (thumb tendonitis), trigger thumb, fractures (broken thumbs), dislocations, sprains, stretched, jammed or torn ligaments, gamekeeper's thumb, and skier’s thumb. How does it work? This rigid, thumb splint is designed to protect your thumb, alleviate pain, and provide comfortable immobilization, allowing your MCP and CMC thumb joints to heal, leaving your IP joint free bend as usual. Who can wear this brace? It’s great for adult men and women of all shapes and sizes, as well as some teenagers. It comes in sizes ranging from small to large, which fit a wide variety of thumb knuckle circumferences. What size should I get? To choose your size, carefully measure the circumference around your thumb knuckle at the widest point, in inches. This thumb splint is NOT universal, so you’ll need to choose if it’s for your right or left hand when ordering. Size S fits thumb knuckle circumferences between 2"- 2⅝ ”. Size M fits thumb knuckle circumferences between 2⅝”-3”. Size L fits thumb knuckle circumferences between 3”-3½ ”. When should I wear it? Use any time your thumb needs to be immobilized. Can be worn throughout the day and while sleeping for support. What is it made of? This thumb brace is made out of a perforated polyamide plastic and an elastic / Velcro wrist strap, making it both durable and waterproof. A soft, polyester undersleeve is also included. All components are latex-free. How tall is this thumb splint? Size S is 4.5” tall. Size M is 5” tall. Size L is 5.5” tall. How do I put it on? If desired, pull on the polyester undersleeve for added comfort. Unhook the Velcro wrist strap and slide your thumb into the splint. Tighten the wrist strap to your comfort level and secure the Velcro closure. Washing Instructions: Hand wash the thumb splint and undersleeve in warm water with mild soap, lay flat to air dry completely before reapplying. Other features: Waterproof design. Natural, non-invasive fix for many sources of thumb pain. Solid thumb splint protects your thumb from further injury during recovery. Easy to put on, take off and adjust. A padded adhesive strip and undersleeve are included with your purchase. Color: Black. 623896297525 7695132721205 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/11f0201-hard-thumb-splint-main_grande.jpg?v=1524167137 641427944999 BraceAbility 11F0201LR Finger / Thumb LUS Hard Thumb Arthritis Treatment Splint & CMC Basal Joint Immobilizer http://www.braceability.com/products/hard-thumb-splint?variant=7695132557365 Hard Thumb Arthritis Treatment Splint & CMC Basal Joint Immobilizer Left / S Why Do I Need a Brace to Help with Thumb Arthritis and Other Injuries? Your thumb joint has a rather large range of motion, making it one of the most mobile joints in your entire body. Unfortunately, this extra mobility can cause increased stress on your thumb joint. When you stop to think about how often you use your thumbs, it's easy to understand why you might be experiencing pain. BraceAbility’s rigid, thumb splint is one of the most popular thumb support braces on the market for good reason. It was designed to protect your thumb, provide pain relief, and offer comfortable immobilization to your metacarpophalangeal (MCP) and carpometacarpal (CMC or saddle) thumb joints, leaving your IP joint free bend as usual for enhanced mobility. This thumb joint stabilizer can help treat many causes of thumb pain and conditions including: Trigger thumb Thumb arthritis (rheumatoid and osteoarthritis) Post-surgery recovery De Quervain’s tenosynovitis (thumb tendonitis) Fractured thumb (broken thumb) Dislocated thumb Hyperextended (stretched ligaments) Sprained thumb (jammed or torn ligaments) Gamekeeper's / skier’s thumb CMC Joint Brace for Arthritis Treatment As mentioned, this comfortable thumb splint can help with arthritis. Thumb arthritis, often referred to as basal joint arthritis or thumb rhizarthrosis, is actually the most common form of arthritis in the hand. It typically causes swelling, stiffness, and pain at the base of your thumb, as well as a diminished range of motion and grip. Trauma or injury can increase your risk of developing thumb arthritis, or you might experience wear-and-tear osteoarthritis. Top-Rated Features of This Hard Plastic Thumb Splint As mentioned previously, your thumbs help you accomplish an incredible amount of the activities and tasks you perform every day. It can’t be stressed enough how important your thumbs are in your ability to go about your daily activities (even the most basic ones). Following we detail why this thumb brace stands out from similar immobilizers. Low-Profile Design for Everyday Use This rigid thumb splint has a low profile design, allowing you to wear this brace during most daily activities (leisure and vigorous), as it stays in place quite well. Plus it’s lightweight, so you don’t feel like you’re lugging around a cast all day. While still immobilizing your lower thumb joints, this brace does let your top thumb knuckle flex a little bit, and your fingers have a full range of motion too! The freedom of this brace allows you to perform activities, hobbies, and sports such as basketball, tennis, gaming, sleeping, gardening, writing, typing , driving and cooking. However, it’s important to note that everybody is different and you might not be able to wear the brace depending on what hobby you're performing or the anatomy of your hand. Can I wear gloves over this thumb stabilizer? If necessary, you can also wear this thumb stabilizer under most loose-fitting gloves, think gardening, winter, or work gloves. Durable, Waterproof Thumb Splint This resilient, brace for arthritis and more offers a lot of support for your thumb by keeping it in the correct position and taking pressure off of damaged areas. Made out of a hard, hypoallergenic plastic material, it can withstand a lot of wear, which is great because you will probably be wearing it a lot. Hypoallergenic means it’s completely latex and neoprene free (some people can react to neoprene and it’s the material used in a large number of braces). Protective Glove and Extra padding Included to Enhance Comfort The rigid plastic that this thumb brace is constructed out of can become somewhat uncomfortable against your skin over the course of the day. To eliminate any discomfort you might experience, a soft, universally sized, polyester undersock and an extra padded piece are included with your purchase. The glove and extra adhesive pad help prevent the thumb brace from rubbing or chafing against your skin. Although the brace comes with one thumb / hand sleeve, some people prefer to have at least two on hand for alternating while washing, or wearing two at a time for extra support, warmth, or protection. If needed, extra protective gloves are available for purchase here . Medical-Grade Velcro Strap Featuring just one high quality, Velcro strap, this guard for your thumb joint is a breeze to apply and easy to adjust. The strap is constructed out of medical-grade Velcro, making it 10 times stronger than most retail-grade braces on the market. Retail-grade Velcro closures are only made to open and close 90 times, as opposed to our medical-grade Velcro closures, which is made to open and close at least 900 times. Perforated Holes for Breathability The perforated holes in this thumb spica splint offer additional comfort and breathability, especially, so your hand can breathe and will not get sweaty. The hand support for arthritis also has a special raised edge at the thumb and forefinger area to avoid unwanted pressure. Frequently Asked Questions About This Hand Support for Thumb Pain What conditions / injuries does this thumb splint treat? It’s great for post-surgery recovery, arthritic thumb joints, De Quervain’s tenosynovitis (thumb tendonitis), trigger thumb, fractures (broken thumbs), dislocations, sprains, stretched, jammed or torn ligaments, gamekeeper's thumb, and skier’s thumb. How does it work? This rigid, thumb splint is designed to protect your thumb, alleviate pain, and provide comfortable immobilization, allowing your MCP and CMC thumb joints to heal, leaving your IP joint free bend as usual. Who can wear this brace? It’s great for adult men and women of all shapes and sizes, as well as some teenagers. It comes in sizes ranging from small to large, which fit a wide variety of thumb knuckle circumferences. What size should I get? To choose your size, carefully measure the circumference around your thumb knuckle at the widest point, in inches. This thumb splint is NOT universal, so you’ll need to choose if it’s for your right or left hand when ordering. Size S fits thumb knuckle circumferences between 2"- 2⅝ ”. Size M fits thumb knuckle circumferences between 2⅝”-3”. Size L fits thumb knuckle circumferences between 3”-3½ ”. When should I wear it? Use any time your thumb needs to be immobilized. Can be worn throughout the day and while sleeping for support. What is it made of? This thumb brace is made out of a perforated polyamide plastic and an elastic / Velcro wrist strap, making it both durable and waterproof. A soft, polyester undersleeve is also included. All components are latex-free. How tall is this thumb splint? Size S is 4.5” tall. Size M is 5” tall. Size L is 5.5” tall. How do I put it on? If desired, pull on the polyester undersleeve for added comfort. Unhook the Velcro wrist strap and slide your thumb into the splint. Tighten the wrist strap to your comfort level and secure the Velcro closure. Washing Instructions: Hand wash the thumb splint and undersleeve in warm water with mild soap, lay flat to air dry completely before reapplying. Other features: Waterproof design. Natural, non-invasive fix for many sources of thumb pain. Solid thumb splint protects your thumb from further injury during recovery. Easy to put on, take off and adjust. A padded adhesive strip and undersleeve are included with your purchase. Color: Black. 623896297525 7695132557365 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/11f0201-hard-thumb-splint-main_grande.jpg?v=1524167137 641427944944 BraceAbility 11F0201SL Finger / Thumb SUS Hard Thumb Arthritis Treatment Splint & CMC Basal Joint Immobilizer http://www.braceability.com/products/hard-thumb-splint?variant=7695132622901 Hard Thumb Arthritis Treatment Splint & CMC Basal Joint Immobilizer Left / M Why Do I Need a Brace to Help with Thumb Arthritis and Other Injuries? Your thumb joint has a rather large range of motion, making it one of the most mobile joints in your entire body. Unfortunately, this extra mobility can cause increased stress on your thumb joint. When you stop to think about how often you use your thumbs, it's easy to understand why you might be experiencing pain. BraceAbility’s rigid, thumb splint is one of the most popular thumb support braces on the market for good reason. It was designed to protect your thumb, provide pain relief, and offer comfortable immobilization to your metacarpophalangeal (MCP) and carpometacarpal (CMC or saddle) thumb joints, leaving your IP joint free bend as usual for enhanced mobility. This thumb joint stabilizer can help treat many causes of thumb pain and conditions including: Trigger thumb Thumb arthritis (rheumatoid and osteoarthritis) Post-surgery recovery De Quervain’s tenosynovitis (thumb tendonitis) Fractured thumb (broken thumb) Dislocated thumb Hyperextended (stretched ligaments) Sprained thumb (jammed or torn ligaments) Gamekeeper's / skier’s thumb CMC Joint Brace for Arthritis Treatment As mentioned, this comfortable thumb splint can help with arthritis. Thumb arthritis, often referred to as basal joint arthritis or thumb rhizarthrosis, is actually the most common form of arthritis in the hand. It typically causes swelling, stiffness, and pain at the base of your thumb, as well as a diminished range of motion and grip. Trauma or injury can increase your risk of developing thumb arthritis, or you might experience wear-and-tear osteoarthritis. Top-Rated Features of This Hard Plastic Thumb Splint As mentioned previously, your thumbs help you accomplish an incredible amount of the activities and tasks you perform every day. It can’t be stressed enough how important your thumbs are in your ability to go about your daily activities (even the most basic ones). Following we detail why this thumb brace stands out from similar immobilizers. Low-Profile Design for Everyday Use This rigid thumb splint has a low profile design, allowing you to wear this brace during most daily activities (leisure and vigorous), as it stays in place quite well. Plus it’s lightweight, so you don’t feel like you’re lugging around a cast all day. While still immobilizing your lower thumb joints, this brace does let your top thumb knuckle flex a little bit, and your fingers have a full range of motion too! The freedom of this brace allows you to perform activities, hobbies, and sports such as basketball, tennis, gaming, sleeping, gardening, writing, typing , driving and cooking. However, it’s important to note that everybody is different and you might not be able to wear the brace depending on what hobby you're performing or the anatomy of your hand. Can I wear gloves over this thumb stabilizer? If necessary, you can also wear this thumb stabilizer under most loose-fitting gloves, think gardening, winter, or work gloves. Durable, Waterproof Thumb Splint This resilient, brace for arthritis and more offers a lot of support for your thumb by keeping it in the correct position and taking pressure off of damaged areas. Made out of a hard, hypoallergenic plastic material, it can withstand a lot of wear, which is great because you will probably be wearing it a lot. Hypoallergenic means it’s completely latex and neoprene free (some people can react to neoprene and it’s the material used in a large number of braces). Protective Glove and Extra padding Included to Enhance Comfort The rigid plastic that this thumb brace is constructed out of can become somewhat uncomfortable against your skin over the course of the day. To eliminate any discomfort you might experience, a soft, universally sized, polyester undersock and an extra padded piece are included with your purchase. The glove and extra adhesive pad help prevent the thumb brace from rubbing or chafing against your skin. Although the brace comes with one thumb / hand sleeve, some people prefer to have at least two on hand for alternating while washing, or wearing two at a time for extra support, warmth, or protection. If needed, extra protective gloves are available for purchase here . Medical-Grade Velcro Strap Featuring just one high quality, Velcro strap, this guard for your thumb joint is a breeze to apply and easy to adjust. The strap is constructed out of medical-grade Velcro, making it 10 times stronger than most retail-grade braces on the market. Retail-grade Velcro closures are only made to open and close 90 times, as opposed to our medical-grade Velcro closures, which is made to open and close at least 900 times. Perforated Holes for Breathability The perforated holes in this thumb spica splint offer additional comfort and breathability, especially, so your hand can breathe and will not get sweaty. The hand support for arthritis also has a special raised edge at the thumb and forefinger area to avoid unwanted pressure. Frequently Asked Questions About This Hand Support for Thumb Pain What conditions / injuries does this thumb splint treat? It’s great for post-surgery recovery, arthritic thumb joints, De Quervain’s tenosynovitis (thumb tendonitis), trigger thumb, fractures (broken thumbs), dislocations, sprains, stretched, jammed or torn ligaments, gamekeeper's thumb, and skier’s thumb. How does it work? This rigid, thumb splint is designed to protect your thumb, alleviate pain, and provide comfortable immobilization, allowing your MCP and CMC thumb joints to heal, leaving your IP joint free bend as usual. Who can wear this brace? It’s great for adult men and women of all shapes and sizes, as well as some teenagers. It comes in sizes ranging from small to large, which fit a wide variety of thumb knuckle circumferences. What size should I get? To choose your size, carefully measure the circumference around your thumb knuckle at the widest point, in inches. This thumb splint is NOT universal, so you’ll need to choose if it’s for your right or left hand when ordering. Size S fits thumb knuckle circumferences between 2"- 2⅝ ”. Size M fits thumb knuckle circumferences between 2⅝”-3”. Size L fits thumb knuckle circumferences between 3”-3½ ”. When should I wear it? Use any time your thumb needs to be immobilized. Can be worn throughout the day and while sleeping for support. What is it made of? This thumb brace is made out of a perforated polyamide plastic and an elastic / Velcro wrist strap, making it both durable and waterproof. A soft, polyester undersleeve is also included. All components are latex-free. How tall is this thumb splint? Size S is 4.5” tall. Size M is 5” tall. Size L is 5.5” tall. How do I put it on? If desired, pull on the polyester undersleeve for added comfort. Unhook the Velcro wrist strap and slide your thumb into the splint. Tighten the wrist strap to your comfort level and secure the Velcro closure. Washing Instructions: Hand wash the thumb splint and undersleeve in warm water with mild soap, lay flat to air dry completely before reapplying. Other features: Waterproof design. Natural, non-invasive fix for many sources of thumb pain. Solid thumb splint protects your thumb from further injury during recovery. Easy to put on, take off and adjust. A padded adhesive strip and undersleeve are included with your purchase. Color: Black. 623896297525 7695132622901 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/11f0201-hard-thumb-splint-main_grande.jpg?v=1524167137 641427944951 BraceAbility 11F0201ML Finger / Thumb MUS Hard Thumb Arthritis Treatment Splint & CMC Basal Joint Immobilizer http://www.braceability.com/products/hard-thumb-splint?variant=7695132688437 Hard Thumb Arthritis Treatment Splint & CMC Basal Joint Immobilizer Left / L Why Do I Need a Brace to Help with Thumb Arthritis and Other Injuries? Your thumb joint has a rather large range of motion, making it one of the most mobile joints in your entire body. Unfortunately, this extra mobility can cause increased stress on your thumb joint. When you stop to think about how often you use your thumbs, it's easy to understand why you might be experiencing pain. BraceAbility’s rigid, thumb splint is one of the most popular thumb support braces on the market for good reason. It was designed to protect your thumb, provide pain relief, and offer comfortable immobilization to your metacarpophalangeal (MCP) and carpometacarpal (CMC or saddle) thumb joints, leaving your IP joint free bend as usual for enhanced mobility. This thumb joint stabilizer can help treat many causes of thumb pain and conditions including: Trigger thumb Thumb arthritis (rheumatoid and osteoarthritis) Post-surgery recovery De Quervain’s tenosynovitis (thumb tendonitis) Fractured thumb (broken thumb) Dislocated thumb Hyperextended (stretched ligaments) Sprained thumb (jammed or torn ligaments) Gamekeeper's / skier’s thumb CMC Joint Brace for Arthritis Treatment As mentioned, this comfortable thumb splint can help with arthritis. Thumb arthritis, often referred to as basal joint arthritis or thumb rhizarthrosis, is actually the most common form of arthritis in the hand. It typically causes swelling, stiffness, and pain at the base of your thumb, as well as a diminished range of motion and grip. Trauma or injury can increase your risk of developing thumb arthritis, or you might experience wear-and-tear osteoarthritis. Top-Rated Features of This Hard Plastic Thumb Splint As mentioned previously, your thumbs help you accomplish an incredible amount of the activities and tasks you perform every day. It can’t be stressed enough how important your thumbs are in your ability to go about your daily activities (even the most basic ones). Following we detail why this thumb brace stands out from similar immobilizers. Low-Profile Design for Everyday Use This rigid thumb splint has a low profile design, allowing you to wear this brace during most daily activities (leisure and vigorous), as it stays in place quite well. Plus it’s lightweight, so you don’t feel like you’re lugging around a cast all day. While still immobilizing your lower thumb joints, this brace does let your top thumb knuckle flex a little bit, and your fingers have a full range of motion too! The freedom of this brace allows you to perform activities, hobbies, and sports such as basketball, tennis, gaming, sleeping, gardening, writing, typing , driving and cooking. However, it’s important to note that everybody is different and you might not be able to wear the brace depending on what hobby you're performing or the anatomy of your hand. Can I wear gloves over this thumb stabilizer? If necessary, you can also wear this thumb stabilizer under most loose-fitting gloves, think gardening, winter, or work gloves. Durable, Waterproof Thumb Splint This resilient, brace for arthritis and more offers a lot of support for your thumb by keeping it in the correct position and taking pressure off of damaged areas. Made out of a hard, hypoallergenic plastic material, it can withstand a lot of wear, which is great because you will probably be wearing it a lot. Hypoallergenic means it’s completely latex and neoprene free (some people can react to neoprene and it’s the material used in a large number of braces). Protective Glove and Extra padding Included to Enhance Comfort The rigid plastic that this thumb brace is constructed out of can become somewhat uncomfortable against your skin over the course of the day. To eliminate any discomfort you might experience, a soft, universally sized, polyester undersock and an extra padded piece are included with your purchase. The glove and extra adhesive pad help prevent the thumb brace from rubbing or chafing against your skin. Although the brace comes with one thumb / hand sleeve, some people prefer to have at least two on hand for alternating while washing, or wearing two at a time for extra support, warmth, or protection. If needed, extra protective gloves are available for purchase here . Medical-Grade Velcro Strap Featuring just one high quality, Velcro strap, this guard for your thumb joint is a breeze to apply and easy to adjust. The strap is constructed out of medical-grade Velcro, making it 10 times stronger than most retail-grade braces on the market. Retail-grade Velcro closures are only made to open and close 90 times, as opposed to our medical-grade Velcro closures, which is made to open and close at least 900 times. Perforated Holes for Breathability The perforated holes in this thumb spica splint offer additional comfort and breathability, especially, so your hand can breathe and will not get sweaty. The hand support for arthritis also has a special raised edge at the thumb and forefinger area to avoid unwanted pressure. Frequently Asked Questions About This Hand Support for Thumb Pain What conditions / injuries does this thumb splint treat? It’s great for post-surgery recovery, arthritic thumb joints, De Quervain’s tenosynovitis (thumb tendonitis), trigger thumb, fractures (broken thumbs), dislocations, sprains, stretched, jammed or torn ligaments, gamekeeper's thumb, and skier’s thumb. How does it work? This rigid, thumb splint is designed to protect your thumb, alleviate pain, and provide comfortable immobilization, allowing your MCP and CMC thumb joints to heal, leaving your IP joint free bend as usual. Who can wear this brace? It’s great for adult men and women of all shapes and sizes, as well as some teenagers. It comes in sizes ranging from small to large, which fit a wide variety of thumb knuckle circumferences. What size should I get? To choose your size, carefully measure the circumference around your thumb knuckle at the widest point, in inches. This thumb splint is NOT universal, so you’ll need to choose if it’s for your right or left hand when ordering. Size S fits thumb knuckle circumferences between 2"- 2⅝ ”. Size M fits thumb knuckle circumferences between 2⅝”-3”. Size L fits thumb knuckle circumferences between 3”-3½ ”. When should I wear it? Use any time your thumb needs to be immobilized. Can be worn throughout the day and while sleeping for support. What is it made of? This thumb brace is made out of a perforated polyamide plastic and an elastic / Velcro wrist strap, making it both durable and waterproof. A soft, polyester undersleeve is also included. All components are latex-free. How tall is this thumb splint? Size S is 4.5” tall. Size M is 5” tall. Size L is 5.5” tall. How do I put it on? If desired, pull on the polyester undersleeve for added comfort. Unhook the Velcro wrist strap and slide your thumb into the splint. Tighten the wrist strap to your comfort level and secure the Velcro closure. Washing Instructions: Hand wash the thumb splint and undersleeve in warm water with mild soap, lay flat to air dry completely before reapplying. Other features: Waterproof design. Natural, non-invasive fix for many sources of thumb pain. Solid thumb splint protects your thumb from further injury during recovery. Easy to put on, take off and adjust. A padded adhesive strip and undersleeve are included with your purchase. Color: Black. 623896297525 7695132688437 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/11f0201-hard-thumb-splint-main_grande.jpg?v=1524167137 641427944968 BraceAbility 11F0201LL Finger / Thumb LUS Metatarsal Stress Fracture Foot Brace Walking Boot http://www.braceability.com/products/stress-fracture-walking-boot?variant=7661206536245 Metatarsal Stress Fracture Foot Brace Walking Boot XS Foot Stress Fracture Boot This walking boot for a stress fracture in the foot bones (metatarsals) has metal reinforced uprights that provide ultimate protection and support to the ankle and foot. When these areas are injured, they are vulnerable to additional damage. This stress fracture foot boot keeps this from occurring. Metal is not the most comfortable material to have rubbing against one’s skin. Therefore, this metatarsal stress fracture boot has a deluxe foam liner that acts as a buffer between the hard components of the boot and one’s skin. The liner of this boot for a stress fracture in the foot does not enclose the toe. The open-toe design increases the breathability of the boot for metatarsal stress fractures and it prevents any rubbing of the toes against the end of the boot. This also makes it an ideal walking boot for stress fracture of the toes. The footbed of this foot brace for metatarsal stress fracture care is wide to allow for swelling or bandaging and simply to make the foot orthotic more comfortable. There is also an extra strap for additional padding at the ankle where more movement is required. The bottom of the boot is rounded in an arched rocker fashion. This enables one to move about in a more natural, energy-efficient way than one might in a flat-bottomed boot. The low-profile of this walking boot is also helpful to that end. This particular BraceAbility stress fracture boot is 11 inches tall and surprisingly lightweight. Besides stress fracture foot treatment, this cam (controlled ankle movement) walker boot can also help with strains and sprains of the foot or ankle, diabetic ulcers, after a bunion surgery and for other less serious foot and ankle injuries . Foot Brace for Stress Fracture Care and More A metatarsal stress fracture refers to a tiny crack or a severe bruise within one of the bones of the foot (typically the second or third metatarsal). This is a relatively common injury, especially among runners or those in sports that involve a lot of running, such as soccer or basketball .  A stress fracture in the metatarsal is usually caused by overuse or repetitive activities. Specifically, a sudden increase in physical activity is often to blame. Metatarsal stress fracture treatment is typically conservative in nature. But note—it is important to undergo treatment for stress fracture foot injuries, as ignoring the injury can lead to a full-blown break to the foot bone and a recovery period that is longer, more complicated and more expensive. Resting, icing , compressing and elevating the foot are good initial steps for stress fracture metatarsal treatment. Such methods provide pain relief for the stress fracture in the foot by reducing inflammation and swelling. A doctor might recommend a brief period on crutches for non- or limited weight bearing, as well as the use of a foot boot for stress fracture care.  Using a stress fracture foot treatment boot can reduce stress on the foot and ankle and lower the chance of additional injury setting back one’s recovery. A period of rest and orthotic usage can give the weight bearing bones and their supporting tissues a chance to heal. Indeed, not doing so is often the culprit for this foot injury in the first place. Avoiding activities that stress the feet and legs is also an important component of treatment for a stress fracture in the foot. In the rare case that surgery is necessary, this surgical shoe for stress fracture care can also protect one’s foot and help during the recovery process. Boots for stress fractures can also treat sprains of the ankle or foot. Treatment for such injuries often involves following the steps of RICE and possibly a period where one limits pressure on the foot and ankle via a walking boot for foot stress fracture care. A doctor can recommend whether a high-top or short walking boot for stress fractures is more appropriate for one’s ankle sprain. The metatarsal stress fracture brace’s ability to reduce pressure on the foot also makes it useful for the treatment of diabetic plantar ulcers. Pressure on the foot can make it difficult for such wounds to heal.  Shoe insoles can also help with the treatment of ulcers by more evenly distributing pressure across the foot. The medical boot is also helpful following some surgeries, such as a bunion removal (bunionectomy). This is because the post-operative shoe for stress fractures and more immobilizes the foot and reduces pressure on it. Orthotics for treating bunions are also available for those wishing to forego the knife. Key Features of BraceAbility’s Short Fracture Boot Finding the best walking boot for metatarsal stress fracture treatment is no easy task, but this particular foot splint for stress fractures checks many boxes in users’ wish list. Following is a breakdown of the features of this brace for foot stress fracture treatment: Stress fracture walking boot has a lightweight, low-profile design Wide footbed of this stress fracture foot brace/walking boot allows for bandaging and swelling Wide foot area also makes this boot helpful after surgery to repair a bunion Open-toe design of this orthotic for foot stress fracture treatment increases its breathability and will not irritate the toes Metatarsal stress fracture shoe has an added ankle strap for additional padding Easy-to-adjust Velcro straps allow for quick and easy application and adjustment of metatarsal stress fracture cast Arching rocker design of cam boot for stress fractures enables a smooth, energy-efficient gait Metal reinforced uprights make this stress fracture foot brace durable Metal components of this stress fracture metatarsal boot enhance its protective qualities Deluxe foam liner makes this shoe/boot for stress fractures more comfortable The liner of the boot can be adjusted for less or more stress fracture foot compression This stress fracture foot support can also help with fractured toes, sprained feet or ankles, plantar ulcers, after a bunionectomy and for other less serious foot and ankle injuries Relatively affordable medical boot for a stress fracture on the foot 618764501045 7661206536245 new 39.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10a1301-metatarsal-stress-fracture-foot-brace-walking-boot_grande.jpg?v=1527627071 641061977070 BraceAbility 10A1301XS Walker Boots XSUS Metatarsal Stress Fracture Foot Brace Walking Boot http://www.braceability.com/products/stress-fracture-walking-boot?variant=7661237239861 Metatarsal Stress Fracture Foot Brace Walking Boot S Foot Stress Fracture Boot This walking boot for a stress fracture in the foot bones (metatarsals) has metal reinforced uprights that provide ultimate protection and support to the ankle and foot. When these areas are injured, they are vulnerable to additional damage. This stress fracture foot boot keeps this from occurring. Metal is not the most comfortable material to have rubbing against one’s skin. Therefore, this metatarsal stress fracture boot has a deluxe foam liner that acts as a buffer between the hard components of the boot and one’s skin. The liner of this boot for a stress fracture in the foot does not enclose the toe. The open-toe design increases the breathability of the boot for metatarsal stress fractures and it prevents any rubbing of the toes against the end of the boot. This also makes it an ideal walking boot for stress fracture of the toes. The footbed of this foot brace for metatarsal stress fracture care is wide to allow for swelling or bandaging and simply to make the foot orthotic more comfortable. There is also an extra strap for additional padding at the ankle where more movement is required. The bottom of the boot is rounded in an arched rocker fashion. This enables one to move about in a more natural, energy-efficient way than one might in a flat-bottomed boot. The low-profile of this walking boot is also helpful to that end. This particular BraceAbility stress fracture boot is 11 inches tall and surprisingly lightweight. Besides stress fracture foot treatment, this cam (controlled ankle movement) walker boot can also help with strains and sprains of the foot or ankle, diabetic ulcers, after a bunion surgery and for other less serious foot and ankle injuries . Foot Brace for Stress Fracture Care and More A metatarsal stress fracture refers to a tiny crack or a severe bruise within one of the bones of the foot (typically the second or third metatarsal). This is a relatively common injury, especially among runners or those in sports that involve a lot of running, such as soccer or basketball .  A stress fracture in the metatarsal is usually caused by overuse or repetitive activities. Specifically, a sudden increase in physical activity is often to blame. Metatarsal stress fracture treatment is typically conservative in nature. But note—it is important to undergo treatment for stress fracture foot injuries, as ignoring the injury can lead to a full-blown break to the foot bone and a recovery period that is longer, more complicated and more expensive. Resting, icing , compressing and elevating the foot are good initial steps for stress fracture metatarsal treatment. Such methods provide pain relief for the stress fracture in the foot by reducing inflammation and swelling. A doctor might recommend a brief period on crutches for non- or limited weight bearing, as well as the use of a foot boot for stress fracture care.  Using a stress fracture foot treatment boot can reduce stress on the foot and ankle and lower the chance of additional injury setting back one’s recovery. A period of rest and orthotic usage can give the weight bearing bones and their supporting tissues a chance to heal. Indeed, not doing so is often the culprit for this foot injury in the first place. Avoiding activities that stress the feet and legs is also an important component of treatment for a stress fracture in the foot. In the rare case that surgery is necessary, this surgical shoe for stress fracture care can also protect one’s foot and help during the recovery process. Boots for stress fractures can also treat sprains of the ankle or foot. Treatment for such injuries often involves following the steps of RICE and possibly a period where one limits pressure on the foot and ankle via a walking boot for foot stress fracture care. A doctor can recommend whether a high-top or short walking boot for stress fractures is more appropriate for one’s ankle sprain. The metatarsal stress fracture brace’s ability to reduce pressure on the foot also makes it useful for the treatment of diabetic plantar ulcers. Pressure on the foot can make it difficult for such wounds to heal.  Shoe insoles can also help with the treatment of ulcers by more evenly distributing pressure across the foot. The medical boot is also helpful following some surgeries, such as a bunion removal (bunionectomy). This is because the post-operative shoe for stress fractures and more immobilizes the foot and reduces pressure on it. Orthotics for treating bunions are also available for those wishing to forego the knife. Key Features of BraceAbility’s Short Fracture Boot Finding the best walking boot for metatarsal stress fracture treatment is no easy task, but this particular foot splint for stress fractures checks many boxes in users’ wish list. Following is a breakdown of the features of this brace for foot stress fracture treatment: Stress fracture walking boot has a lightweight, low-profile design Wide footbed of this stress fracture foot brace/walking boot allows for bandaging and swelling Wide foot area also makes this boot helpful after surgery to repair a bunion Open-toe design of this orthotic for foot stress fracture treatment increases its breathability and will not irritate the toes Metatarsal stress fracture shoe has an added ankle strap for additional padding Easy-to-adjust Velcro straps allow for quick and easy application and adjustment of metatarsal stress fracture cast Arching rocker design of cam boot for stress fractures enables a smooth, energy-efficient gait Metal reinforced uprights make this stress fracture foot brace durable Metal components of this stress fracture metatarsal boot enhance its protective qualities Deluxe foam liner makes this shoe/boot for stress fractures more comfortable The liner of the boot can be adjusted for less or more stress fracture foot compression This stress fracture foot support can also help with fractured toes, sprained feet or ankles, plantar ulcers, after a bunionectomy and for other less serious foot and ankle injuries Relatively affordable medical boot for a stress fracture on the foot 618764501045 7661237239861 new 39.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10a1301-metatarsal-stress-fracture-foot-brace-walking-boot_grande.jpg?v=1527627071 641061977063 BraceAbility 10A1301S Walker Boots SUS Metatarsal Stress Fracture Foot Brace Walking Boot http://www.braceability.com/products/stress-fracture-walking-boot?variant=7661237272629 Metatarsal Stress Fracture Foot Brace Walking Boot M Foot Stress Fracture Boot This walking boot for a stress fracture in the foot bones (metatarsals) has metal reinforced uprights that provide ultimate protection and support to the ankle and foot. When these areas are injured, they are vulnerable to additional damage. This stress fracture foot boot keeps this from occurring. Metal is not the most comfortable material to have rubbing against one’s skin. Therefore, this metatarsal stress fracture boot has a deluxe foam liner that acts as a buffer between the hard components of the boot and one’s skin. The liner of this boot for a stress fracture in the foot does not enclose the toe. The open-toe design increases the breathability of the boot for metatarsal stress fractures and it prevents any rubbing of the toes against the end of the boot. This also makes it an ideal walking boot for stress fracture of the toes. The footbed of this foot brace for metatarsal stress fracture care is wide to allow for swelling or bandaging and simply to make the foot orthotic more comfortable. There is also an extra strap for additional padding at the ankle where more movement is required. The bottom of the boot is rounded in an arched rocker fashion. This enables one to move about in a more natural, energy-efficient way than one might in a flat-bottomed boot. The low-profile of this walking boot is also helpful to that end. This particular BraceAbility stress fracture boot is 11 inches tall and surprisingly lightweight. Besides stress fracture foot treatment, this cam (controlled ankle movement) walker boot can also help with strains and sprains of the foot or ankle, diabetic ulcers, after a bunion surgery and for other less serious foot and ankle injuries . Foot Brace for Stress Fracture Care and More A metatarsal stress fracture refers to a tiny crack or a severe bruise within one of the bones of the foot (typically the second or third metatarsal). This is a relatively common injury, especially among runners or those in sports that involve a lot of running, such as soccer or basketball .  A stress fracture in the metatarsal is usually caused by overuse or repetitive activities. Specifically, a sudden increase in physical activity is often to blame. Metatarsal stress fracture treatment is typically conservative in nature. But note—it is important to undergo treatment for stress fracture foot injuries, as ignoring the injury can lead to a full-blown break to the foot bone and a recovery period that is longer, more complicated and more expensive. Resting, icing , compressing and elevating the foot are good initial steps for stress fracture metatarsal treatment. Such methods provide pain relief for the stress fracture in the foot by reducing inflammation and swelling. A doctor might recommend a brief period on crutches for non- or limited weight bearing, as well as the use of a foot boot for stress fracture care.  Using a stress fracture foot treatment boot can reduce stress on the foot and ankle and lower the chance of additional injury setting back one’s recovery. A period of rest and orthotic usage can give the weight bearing bones and their supporting tissues a chance to heal. Indeed, not doing so is often the culprit for this foot injury in the first place. Avoiding activities that stress the feet and legs is also an important component of treatment for a stress fracture in the foot. In the rare case that surgery is necessary, this surgical shoe for stress fracture care can also protect one’s foot and help during the recovery process. Boots for stress fractures can also treat sprains of the ankle or foot. Treatment for such injuries often involves following the steps of RICE and possibly a period where one limits pressure on the foot and ankle via a walking boot for foot stress fracture care. A doctor can recommend whether a high-top or short walking boot for stress fractures is more appropriate for one’s ankle sprain. The metatarsal stress fracture brace’s ability to reduce pressure on the foot also makes it useful for the treatment of diabetic plantar ulcers. Pressure on the foot can make it difficult for such wounds to heal.  Shoe insoles can also help with the treatment of ulcers by more evenly distributing pressure across the foot. The medical boot is also helpful following some surgeries, such as a bunion removal (bunionectomy). This is because the post-operative shoe for stress fractures and more immobilizes the foot and reduces pressure on it. Orthotics for treating bunions are also available for those wishing to forego the knife. Key Features of BraceAbility’s Short Fracture Boot Finding the best walking boot for metatarsal stress fracture treatment is no easy task, but this particular foot splint for stress fractures checks many boxes in users’ wish list. Following is a breakdown of the features of this brace for foot stress fracture treatment: Stress fracture walking boot has a lightweight, low-profile design Wide footbed of this stress fracture foot brace/walking boot allows for bandaging and swelling Wide foot area also makes this boot helpful after surgery to repair a bunion Open-toe design of this orthotic for foot stress fracture treatment increases its breathability and will not irritate the toes Metatarsal stress fracture shoe has an added ankle strap for additional padding Easy-to-adjust Velcro straps allow for quick and easy application and adjustment of metatarsal stress fracture cast Arching rocker design of cam boot for stress fractures enables a smooth, energy-efficient gait Metal reinforced uprights make this stress fracture foot brace durable Metal components of this stress fracture metatarsal boot enhance its protective qualities Deluxe foam liner makes this shoe/boot for stress fractures more comfortable The liner of the boot can be adjusted for less or more stress fracture foot compression This stress fracture foot support can also help with fractured toes, sprained feet or ankles, plantar ulcers, after a bunionectomy and for other less serious foot and ankle injuries Relatively affordable medical boot for a stress fracture on the foot 618764501045 7661237272629 new 39.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10a1301-metatarsal-stress-fracture-foot-brace-walking-boot_grande.jpg?v=1527627071 641061977056 BraceAbility 10A1301M Walker Boots MUS Metatarsal Stress Fracture Foot Brace Walking Boot http://www.braceability.com/products/stress-fracture-walking-boot?variant=7661237305397 Metatarsal Stress Fracture Foot Brace Walking Boot L Foot Stress Fracture Boot This walking boot for a stress fracture in the foot bones (metatarsals) has metal reinforced uprights that provide ultimate protection and support to the ankle and foot. When these areas are injured, they are vulnerable to additional damage. This stress fracture foot boot keeps this from occurring. Metal is not the most comfortable material to have rubbing against one’s skin. Therefore, this metatarsal stress fracture boot has a deluxe foam liner that acts as a buffer between the hard components of the boot and one’s skin. The liner of this boot for a stress fracture in the foot does not enclose the toe. The open-toe design increases the breathability of the boot for metatarsal stress fractures and it prevents any rubbing of the toes against the end of the boot. This also makes it an ideal walking boot for stress fracture of the toes. The footbed of this foot brace for metatarsal stress fracture care is wide to allow for swelling or bandaging and simply to make the foot orthotic more comfortable. There is also an extra strap for additional padding at the ankle where more movement is required. The bottom of the boot is rounded in an arched rocker fashion. This enables one to move about in a more natural, energy-efficient way than one might in a flat-bottomed boot. The low-profile of this walking boot is also helpful to that end. This particular BraceAbility stress fracture boot is 11 inches tall and surprisingly lightweight. Besides stress fracture foot treatment, this cam (controlled ankle movement) walker boot can also help with strains and sprains of the foot or ankle, diabetic ulcers, after a bunion surgery and for other less serious foot and ankle injuries . Foot Brace for Stress Fracture Care and More A metatarsal stress fracture refers to a tiny crack or a severe bruise within one of the bones of the foot (typically the second or third metatarsal). This is a relatively common injury, especially among runners or those in sports that involve a lot of running, such as soccer or basketball .  A stress fracture in the metatarsal is usually caused by overuse or repetitive activities. Specifically, a sudden increase in physical activity is often to blame. Metatarsal stress fracture treatment is typically conservative in nature. But note—it is important to undergo treatment for stress fracture foot injuries, as ignoring the injury can lead to a full-blown break to the foot bone and a recovery period that is longer, more complicated and more expensive. Resting, icing , compressing and elevating the foot are good initial steps for stress fracture metatarsal treatment. Such methods provide pain relief for the stress fracture in the foot by reducing inflammation and swelling. A doctor might recommend a brief period on crutches for non- or limited weight bearing, as well as the use of a foot boot for stress fracture care.  Using a stress fracture foot treatment boot can reduce stress on the foot and ankle and lower the chance of additional injury setting back one’s recovery. A period of rest and orthotic usage can give the weight bearing bones and their supporting tissues a chance to heal. Indeed, not doing so is often the culprit for this foot injury in the first place. Avoiding activities that stress the feet and legs is also an important component of treatment for a stress fracture in the foot. In the rare case that surgery is necessary, this surgical shoe for stress fracture care can also protect one’s foot and help during the recovery process. Boots for stress fractures can also treat sprains of the ankle or foot. Treatment for such injuries often involves following the steps of RICE and possibly a period where one limits pressure on the foot and ankle via a walking boot for foot stress fracture care. A doctor can recommend whether a high-top or short walking boot for stress fractures is more appropriate for one’s ankle sprain. The metatarsal stress fracture brace’s ability to reduce pressure on the foot also makes it useful for the treatment of diabetic plantar ulcers. Pressure on the foot can make it difficult for such wounds to heal.  Shoe insoles can also help with the treatment of ulcers by more evenly distributing pressure across the foot. The medical boot is also helpful following some surgeries, such as a bunion removal (bunionectomy). This is because the post-operative shoe for stress fractures and more immobilizes the foot and reduces pressure on it. Orthotics for treating bunions are also available for those wishing to forego the knife. Key Features of BraceAbility’s Short Fracture Boot Finding the best walking boot for metatarsal stress fracture treatment is no easy task, but this particular foot splint for stress fractures checks many boxes in users’ wish list. Following is a breakdown of the features of this brace for foot stress fracture treatment: Stress fracture walking boot has a lightweight, low-profile design Wide footbed of this stress fracture foot brace/walking boot allows for bandaging and swelling Wide foot area also makes this boot helpful after surgery to repair a bunion Open-toe design of this orthotic for foot stress fracture treatment increases its breathability and will not irritate the toes Metatarsal stress fracture shoe has an added ankle strap for additional padding Easy-to-adjust Velcro straps allow for quick and easy application and adjustment of metatarsal stress fracture cast Arching rocker design of cam boot for stress fractures enables a smooth, energy-efficient gait Metal reinforced uprights make this stress fracture foot brace durable Metal components of this stress fracture metatarsal boot enhance its protective qualities Deluxe foam liner makes this shoe/boot for stress fractures more comfortable The liner of the boot can be adjusted for less or more stress fracture foot compression This stress fracture foot support can also help with fractured toes, sprained feet or ankles, plantar ulcers, after a bunionectomy and for other less serious foot and ankle injuries Relatively affordable medical boot for a stress fracture on the foot 618764501045 7661237305397 new 39.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10a1301-metatarsal-stress-fracture-foot-brace-walking-boot_grande.jpg?v=1527627071 641061977049 BraceAbility 10A1301L Walker Boots LUS Metatarsal Stress Fracture Foot Brace Walking Boot http://www.braceability.com/products/stress-fracture-walking-boot?variant=7661237338165 Metatarsal Stress Fracture Foot Brace Walking Boot XL Foot Stress Fracture Boot This walking boot for a stress fracture in the foot bones (metatarsals) has metal reinforced uprights that provide ultimate protection and support to the ankle and foot. When these areas are injured, they are vulnerable to additional damage. This stress fracture foot boot keeps this from occurring. Metal is not the most comfortable material to have rubbing against one’s skin. Therefore, this metatarsal stress fracture boot has a deluxe foam liner that acts as a buffer between the hard components of the boot and one’s skin. The liner of this boot for a stress fracture in the foot does not enclose the toe. The open-toe design increases the breathability of the boot for metatarsal stress fractures and it prevents any rubbing of the toes against the end of the boot. This also makes it an ideal walking boot for stress fracture of the toes. The footbed of this foot brace for metatarsal stress fracture care is wide to allow for swelling or bandaging and simply to make the foot orthotic more comfortable. There is also an extra strap for additional padding at the ankle where more movement is required. The bottom of the boot is rounded in an arched rocker fashion. This enables one to move about in a more natural, energy-efficient way than one might in a flat-bottomed boot. The low-profile of this walking boot is also helpful to that end. This particular BraceAbility stress fracture boot is 11 inches tall and surprisingly lightweight. Besides stress fracture foot treatment, this cam (controlled ankle movement) walker boot can also help with strains and sprains of the foot or ankle, diabetic ulcers, after a bunion surgery and for other less serious foot and ankle injuries . Foot Brace for Stress Fracture Care and More A metatarsal stress fracture refers to a tiny crack or a severe bruise within one of the bones of the foot (typically the second or third metatarsal). This is a relatively common injury, especially among runners or those in sports that involve a lot of running, such as soccer or basketball .  A stress fracture in the metatarsal is usually caused by overuse or repetitive activities. Specifically, a sudden increase in physical activity is often to blame. Metatarsal stress fracture treatment is typically conservative in nature. But note—it is important to undergo treatment for stress fracture foot injuries, as ignoring the injury can lead to a full-blown break to the foot bone and a recovery period that is longer, more complicated and more expensive. Resting, icing , compressing and elevating the foot are good initial steps for stress fracture metatarsal treatment. Such methods provide pain relief for the stress fracture in the foot by reducing inflammation and swelling. A doctor might recommend a brief period on crutches for non- or limited weight bearing, as well as the use of a foot boot for stress fracture care.  Using a stress fracture foot treatment boot can reduce stress on the foot and ankle and lower the chance of additional injury setting back one’s recovery. A period of rest and orthotic usage can give the weight bearing bones and their supporting tissues a chance to heal. Indeed, not doing so is often the culprit for this foot injury in the first place. Avoiding activities that stress the feet and legs is also an important component of treatment for a stress fracture in the foot. In the rare case that surgery is necessary, this surgical shoe for stress fracture care can also protect one’s foot and help during the recovery process. Boots for stress fractures can also treat sprains of the ankle or foot. Treatment for such injuries often involves following the steps of RICE and possibly a period where one limits pressure on the foot and ankle via a walking boot for foot stress fracture care. A doctor can recommend whether a high-top or short walking boot for stress fractures is more appropriate for one’s ankle sprain. The metatarsal stress fracture brace’s ability to reduce pressure on the foot also makes it useful for the treatment of diabetic plantar ulcers. Pressure on the foot can make it difficult for such wounds to heal.  Shoe insoles can also help with the treatment of ulcers by more evenly distributing pressure across the foot. The medical boot is also helpful following some surgeries, such as a bunion removal (bunionectomy). This is because the post-operative shoe for stress fractures and more immobilizes the foot and reduces pressure on it. Orthotics for treating bunions are also available for those wishing to forego the knife. Key Features of BraceAbility’s Short Fracture Boot Finding the best walking boot for metatarsal stress fracture treatment is no easy task, but this particular foot splint for stress fractures checks many boxes in users’ wish list. Following is a breakdown of the features of this brace for foot stress fracture treatment: Stress fracture walking boot has a lightweight, low-profile design Wide footbed of this stress fracture foot brace/walking boot allows for bandaging and swelling Wide foot area also makes this boot helpful after surgery to repair a bunion Open-toe design of this orthotic for foot stress fracture treatment increases its breathability and will not irritate the toes Metatarsal stress fracture shoe has an added ankle strap for additional padding Easy-to-adjust Velcro straps allow for quick and easy application and adjustment of metatarsal stress fracture cast Arching rocker design of cam boot for stress fractures enables a smooth, energy-efficient gait Metal reinforced uprights make this stress fracture foot brace durable Metal components of this stress fracture metatarsal boot enhance its protective qualities Deluxe foam liner makes this shoe/boot for stress fractures more comfortable The liner of the boot can be adjusted for less or more stress fracture foot compression This stress fracture foot support can also help with fractured toes, sprained feet or ankles, plantar ulcers, after a bunionectomy and for other less serious foot and ankle injuries Relatively affordable medical boot for a stress fracture on the foot 618764501045 7661237338165 new 39.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10a1301-metatarsal-stress-fracture-foot-brace-walking-boot_grande.jpg?v=1527627071 641427941806 BraceAbility 10A1301XL Walker Boots XLUS Short & Lightweight Patella Tracking Brace for Runner's Kneecap Pain, Dislocation & Subluxation http://www.braceability.com/products/short-patella-tracking-brace?variant=7693842251829 Short & Lightweight Patella Tracking Brace for Runner's Kneecap Pain, Dislocation & Subluxation S Why You Need This Short Knee Brace for Patellar Tracking Every day, your knees experience a lot of stress , especially if you’re an athlete. Over time, this stress can take a toll on the muscles, ligaments, tendons, and bone that make up your knee joints, causing them to be susceptible to pain and injuries. This versatile, lightweight knee stabilizer provides maximum support to your unstable patella (kneecap). Although it’s short, thin, and lightweight enough to be worn under clothes so you can maintain your day-to-day activities without interference, this patella brace protects against knee instability and pain , as well as further damage and injury. These qualities and more make this support brace great for treating many knee conditions that cause patellar tracking issues and kneecap pain, including: Patellar tracking disorder Kneecap subluxation Patellar dislocation Patellofemoral pain syndrome Knee sprains Patellar tendon injuries including runner’s knee , jumper’s knee , and patellar tendonitis Meniscus pain MCL and LCL injuries 5 Reasons Why People Love This Lightweight Knee Brace for Running This exercise knee support has several features that help it stand out from other short knee braces. Following we list the top five reasons people love this knee brace for running, climbing stairs, jogging, walking, and more. Lightweight, Heat-Releasing Material The 3/16” thick moisture-wicking material is lightweight and specially engineered out of a latex-free, neoprene alternative. Making this knee support for running smooth, soft, and very breathable. C-Shaped Buttress for Enhanced Support The buttress of this sleek knee compression sleeve stabilizes your knee, which is especially helpful if you’re in need of knee support while walking downhill or uphill, running on uneven surfaces, such as while hiking or trail running. The C-shaped buttress is compression molded and textured, helping prevent it from sliding out of position. Plus, by simply flipping this knee brace, the C-shaped buttress can be easily adjusted for either lateral (outside) or medial (inside) knee support. Best Knee Brace for Sports, Including Dance, Gymnastics, and More Many people who subject their knees to high levels of stress, such as dancers, basketball players, or avid runners , choose to wear a knee brace while exercising to help prevent or heal from a knee injury. This sleek, sweat-wicking athletic knee brace is a great solution for the many causes of knee pain when walking, running, hiking, jogging or engaging in other types of physical activity. Exercising is important to maintain good health but only if your kneecap is stabilized so that injuries and additional damage doesn’t occur. Low-Profile Open Patella Design At just 6” tall in the front and 3.5” tall in the back, this lightweight, open patella knee sleeve covers no more of your leg than necessary. The open-patella design of this small and short knee support improves its flexibility and keeps pressure off your sore kneecap, while the popliteal area at the back of your knee is closed for added support and compression. Innovative, Velcro Strapping System Another outstanding feature of this patella tracking brace is its advanced D-ring and Velcro strapping system, which makes it easy to apply, remove, and adjust. Simply loosen or tighten the Velcro straps to change the level of compression. The medical-grade Velcro straps are 10 times stronger than the retail-grade Velcro you’ll find on braces at Target, Walmart, your local drugstore, or other online orthopedic brace retailers. Medical-grade Velcro is meant to open and close 900 times, unlike retail-grade Velcro, which is only meant to open and close 90 times. Frequently Asked Questions About This Knee Support Brace Who can wear it? With sizes ranging from S to 4XL, anyone from kids and teens to plus size adults can wear this knee brace. How do I know what size to get? Using a fabric tape measure, stand up and measure the circumference around the center of your kneecap. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our sizing graphic in the photos above to choose the right size. What conditions does this knee brace treat? Use for patellar tracking disorder, patella subluxation or dislocation, patellofemoral pain syndrome, light MCL and LCL injury prevention, meniscus pain, knee sprains, knee arthritis, runner’s knee, jumper’s knee, chondromalacia, patellar tendonitis, and more. How do I put it on? First, loosen the straps; make sure they remain in the rings. Next, position the brace on the affected side and slide it over the knee. Make sure the seam is placed on the back of the knee. Also, your kneecap should be centered in the opening with the support placed on the rim of your kneecap. Finally, adjust each strap to a desired tension or comfort level. Can I wear this brace over my pants? Yes, but this knee brace is meant to fit against your skin for a better grip. It can be worn above tight pants or leggings if necessary. How tall is this patella tracker knee brace? 6” tall in the front and 3.5” tall in the back. What material is this brace made of? 3/16” thick, latex-free, breathable neoprene alternative and a rubber compression mold buttress. Elastic strap is made with medical-grade Velcro closures. When should I wear this athletic knee wrap? This lightweight knee brace can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during physical activity. Washing Instructions: We recommend hand washing this knee brace in warm water with mild soap and then laying flat to air dry completely before reapplying. Other features: The seam of this athletic knee support is at the back, minimizing irritation. This knee brace for sports releases heat and moisture for a cool, dry fit. The compression-molded, textured buttress keeps this brace elevated on your leg. Color: Black 623658172469 7693842251829 new 44.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03k0102-short-and-lightweight-walking-knee-support-brace_grande.jpg?v=1527632891 641427942995 BraceAbility 03K0102S Knee Braces SUS Short & Lightweight Patella Tracking Brace for Runner's Kneecap Pain, Dislocation & Subluxation http://www.braceability.com/products/short-patella-tracking-brace?variant=7693849952309 Short & Lightweight Patella Tracking Brace for Runner's Kneecap Pain, Dislocation & Subluxation M Why You Need This Short Knee Brace for Patellar Tracking Every day, your knees experience a lot of stress , especially if you’re an athlete. Over time, this stress can take a toll on the muscles, ligaments, tendons, and bone that make up your knee joints, causing them to be susceptible to pain and injuries. This versatile, lightweight knee stabilizer provides maximum support to your unstable patella (kneecap). Although it’s short, thin, and lightweight enough to be worn under clothes so you can maintain your day-to-day activities without interference, this patella brace protects against knee instability and pain , as well as further damage and injury. These qualities and more make this support brace great for treating many knee conditions that cause patellar tracking issues and kneecap pain, including: Patellar tracking disorder Kneecap subluxation Patellar dislocation Patellofemoral pain syndrome Knee sprains Patellar tendon injuries including runner’s knee , jumper’s knee , and patellar tendonitis Meniscus pain MCL and LCL injuries 5 Reasons Why People Love This Lightweight Knee Brace for Running This exercise knee support has several features that help it stand out from other short knee braces. Following we list the top five reasons people love this knee brace for running, climbing stairs, jogging, walking, and more. Lightweight, Heat-Releasing Material The 3/16” thick moisture-wicking material is lightweight and specially engineered out of a latex-free, neoprene alternative. Making this knee support for running smooth, soft, and very breathable. C-Shaped Buttress for Enhanced Support The buttress of this sleek knee compression sleeve stabilizes your knee, which is especially helpful if you’re in need of knee support while walking downhill or uphill, running on uneven surfaces, such as while hiking or trail running. The C-shaped buttress is compression molded and textured, helping prevent it from sliding out of position. Plus, by simply flipping this knee brace, the C-shaped buttress can be easily adjusted for either lateral (outside) or medial (inside) knee support. Best Knee Brace for Sports, Including Dance, Gymnastics, and More Many people who subject their knees to high levels of stress, such as dancers, basketball players, or avid runners , choose to wear a knee brace while exercising to help prevent or heal from a knee injury. This sleek, sweat-wicking athletic knee brace is a great solution for the many causes of knee pain when walking, running, hiking, jogging or engaging in other types of physical activity. Exercising is important to maintain good health but only if your kneecap is stabilized so that injuries and additional damage doesn’t occur. Low-Profile Open Patella Design At just 6” tall in the front and 3.5” tall in the back, this lightweight, open patella knee sleeve covers no more of your leg than necessary. The open-patella design of this small and short knee support improves its flexibility and keeps pressure off your sore kneecap, while the popliteal area at the back of your knee is closed for added support and compression. Innovative, Velcro Strapping System Another outstanding feature of this patella tracking brace is its advanced D-ring and Velcro strapping system, which makes it easy to apply, remove, and adjust. Simply loosen or tighten the Velcro straps to change the level of compression. The medical-grade Velcro straps are 10 times stronger than the retail-grade Velcro you’ll find on braces at Target, Walmart, your local drugstore, or other online orthopedic brace retailers. Medical-grade Velcro is meant to open and close 900 times, unlike retail-grade Velcro, which is only meant to open and close 90 times. Frequently Asked Questions About This Knee Support Brace Who can wear it? With sizes ranging from S to 4XL, anyone from kids and teens to plus size adults can wear this knee brace. How do I know what size to get? Using a fabric tape measure, stand up and measure the circumference around the center of your kneecap. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our sizing graphic in the photos above to choose the right size. What conditions does this knee brace treat? Use for patellar tracking disorder, patella subluxation or dislocation, patellofemoral pain syndrome, light MCL and LCL injury prevention, meniscus pain, knee sprains, knee arthritis, runner’s knee, jumper’s knee, chondromalacia, patellar tendonitis, and more. How do I put it on? First, loosen the straps; make sure they remain in the rings. Next, position the brace on the affected side and slide it over the knee. Make sure the seam is placed on the back of the knee. Also, your kneecap should be centered in the opening with the support placed on the rim of your kneecap. Finally, adjust each strap to a desired tension or comfort level. Can I wear this brace over my pants? Yes, but this knee brace is meant to fit against your skin for a better grip. It can be worn above tight pants or leggings if necessary. How tall is this patella tracker knee brace? 6” tall in the front and 3.5” tall in the back. What material is this brace made of? 3/16” thick, latex-free, breathable neoprene alternative and a rubber compression mold buttress. Elastic strap is made with medical-grade Velcro closures. When should I wear this athletic knee wrap? This lightweight knee brace can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during physical activity. Washing Instructions: We recommend hand washing this knee brace in warm water with mild soap and then laying flat to air dry completely before reapplying. Other features: The seam of this athletic knee support is at the back, minimizing irritation. This knee brace for sports releases heat and moisture for a cool, dry fit. The compression-molded, textured buttress keeps this brace elevated on your leg. Color: Black 623658172469 7693849952309 new 44.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03k0102-short-and-lightweight-walking-knee-support-brace_grande.jpg?v=1527632891 641427943008 BraceAbility 03K0102M Knee Braces MUS Short & Lightweight Patella Tracking Brace for Runner's Kneecap Pain, Dislocation & Subluxation http://www.braceability.com/products/short-patella-tracking-brace?variant=7693849985077 Short & Lightweight Patella Tracking Brace for Runner's Kneecap Pain, Dislocation & Subluxation L Why You Need This Short Knee Brace for Patellar Tracking Every day, your knees experience a lot of stress , especially if you’re an athlete. Over time, this stress can take a toll on the muscles, ligaments, tendons, and bone that make up your knee joints, causing them to be susceptible to pain and injuries. This versatile, lightweight knee stabilizer provides maximum support to your unstable patella (kneecap). Although it’s short, thin, and lightweight enough to be worn under clothes so you can maintain your day-to-day activities without interference, this patella brace protects against knee instability and pain , as well as further damage and injury. These qualities and more make this support brace great for treating many knee conditions that cause patellar tracking issues and kneecap pain, including: Patellar tracking disorder Kneecap subluxation Patellar dislocation Patellofemoral pain syndrome Knee sprains Patellar tendon injuries including runner’s knee , jumper’s knee , and patellar tendonitis Meniscus pain MCL and LCL injuries 5 Reasons Why People Love This Lightweight Knee Brace for Running This exercise knee support has several features that help it stand out from other short knee braces. Following we list the top five reasons people love this knee brace for running, climbing stairs, jogging, walking, and more. Lightweight, Heat-Releasing Material The 3/16” thick moisture-wicking material is lightweight and specially engineered out of a latex-free, neoprene alternative. Making this knee support for running smooth, soft, and very breathable. C-Shaped Buttress for Enhanced Support The buttress of this sleek knee compression sleeve stabilizes your knee, which is especially helpful if you’re in need of knee support while walking downhill or uphill, running on uneven surfaces, such as while hiking or trail running. The C-shaped buttress is compression molded and textured, helping prevent it from sliding out of position. Plus, by simply flipping this knee brace, the C-shaped buttress can be easily adjusted for either lateral (outside) or medial (inside) knee support. Best Knee Brace for Sports, Including Dance, Gymnastics, and More Many people who subject their knees to high levels of stress, such as dancers, basketball players, or avid runners , choose to wear a knee brace while exercising to help prevent or heal from a knee injury. This sleek, sweat-wicking athletic knee brace is a great solution for the many causes of knee pain when walking, running, hiking, jogging or engaging in other types of physical activity. Exercising is important to maintain good health but only if your kneecap is stabilized so that injuries and additional damage doesn’t occur. Low-Profile Open Patella Design At just 6” tall in the front and 3.5” tall in the back, this lightweight, open patella knee sleeve covers no more of your leg than necessary. The open-patella design of this small and short knee support improves its flexibility and keeps pressure off your sore kneecap, while the popliteal area at the back of your knee is closed for added support and compression. Innovative, Velcro Strapping System Another outstanding feature of this patella tracking brace is its advanced D-ring and Velcro strapping system, which makes it easy to apply, remove, and adjust. Simply loosen or tighten the Velcro straps to change the level of compression. The medical-grade Velcro straps are 10 times stronger than the retail-grade Velcro you’ll find on braces at Target, Walmart, your local drugstore, or other online orthopedic brace retailers. Medical-grade Velcro is meant to open and close 900 times, unlike retail-grade Velcro, which is only meant to open and close 90 times. Frequently Asked Questions About This Knee Support Brace Who can wear it? With sizes ranging from S to 4XL, anyone from kids and teens to plus size adults can wear this knee brace. How do I know what size to get? Using a fabric tape measure, stand up and measure the circumference around the center of your kneecap. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our sizing graphic in the photos above to choose the right size. What conditions does this knee brace treat? Use for patellar tracking disorder, patella subluxation or dislocation, patellofemoral pain syndrome, light MCL and LCL injury prevention, meniscus pain, knee sprains, knee arthritis, runner’s knee, jumper’s knee, chondromalacia, patellar tendonitis, and more. How do I put it on? First, loosen the straps; make sure they remain in the rings. Next, position the brace on the affected side and slide it over the knee. Make sure the seam is placed on the back of the knee. Also, your kneecap should be centered in the opening with the support placed on the rim of your kneecap. Finally, adjust each strap to a desired tension or comfort level. Can I wear this brace over my pants? Yes, but this knee brace is meant to fit against your skin for a better grip. It can be worn above tight pants or leggings if necessary. How tall is this patella tracker knee brace? 6” tall in the front and 3.5” tall in the back. What material is this brace made of? 3/16” thick, latex-free, breathable neoprene alternative and a rubber compression mold buttress. Elastic strap is made with medical-grade Velcro closures. When should I wear this athletic knee wrap? This lightweight knee brace can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during physical activity. Washing Instructions: We recommend hand washing this knee brace in warm water with mild soap and then laying flat to air dry completely before reapplying. Other features: The seam of this athletic knee support is at the back, minimizing irritation. This knee brace for sports releases heat and moisture for a cool, dry fit. The compression-molded, textured buttress keeps this brace elevated on your leg. Color: Black 623658172469 7693849985077 new 44.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03k0102-short-and-lightweight-walking-knee-support-brace_grande.jpg?v=1527632891 641427943015 BraceAbility 03K0102L Knee Braces LUS Short & Lightweight Patella Tracking Brace for Runner's Kneecap Pain, Dislocation & Subluxation http://www.braceability.com/products/short-patella-tracking-brace?variant=7693850017845 Short & Lightweight Patella Tracking Brace for Runner's Kneecap Pain, Dislocation & Subluxation XL Why You Need This Short Knee Brace for Patellar Tracking Every day, your knees experience a lot of stress , especially if you’re an athlete. Over time, this stress can take a toll on the muscles, ligaments, tendons, and bone that make up your knee joints, causing them to be susceptible to pain and injuries. This versatile, lightweight knee stabilizer provides maximum support to your unstable patella (kneecap). Although it’s short, thin, and lightweight enough to be worn under clothes so you can maintain your day-to-day activities without interference, this patella brace protects against knee instability and pain , as well as further damage and injury. These qualities and more make this support brace great for treating many knee conditions that cause patellar tracking issues and kneecap pain, including: Patellar tracking disorder Kneecap subluxation Patellar dislocation Patellofemoral pain syndrome Knee sprains Patellar tendon injuries including runner’s knee , jumper’s knee , and patellar tendonitis Meniscus pain MCL and LCL injuries 5 Reasons Why People Love This Lightweight Knee Brace for Running This exercise knee support has several features that help it stand out from other short knee braces. Following we list the top five reasons people love this knee brace for running, climbing stairs, jogging, walking, and more. Lightweight, Heat-Releasing Material The 3/16” thick moisture-wicking material is lightweight and specially engineered out of a latex-free, neoprene alternative. Making this knee support for running smooth, soft, and very breathable. C-Shaped Buttress for Enhanced Support The buttress of this sleek knee compression sleeve stabilizes your knee, which is especially helpful if you’re in need of knee support while walking downhill or uphill, running on uneven surfaces, such as while hiking or trail running. The C-shaped buttress is compression molded and textured, helping prevent it from sliding out of position. Plus, by simply flipping this knee brace, the C-shaped buttress can be easily adjusted for either lateral (outside) or medial (inside) knee support. Best Knee Brace for Sports, Including Dance, Gymnastics, and More Many people who subject their knees to high levels of stress, such as dancers, basketball players, or avid runners , choose to wear a knee brace while exercising to help prevent or heal from a knee injury. This sleek, sweat-wicking athletic knee brace is a great solution for the many causes of knee pain when walking, running, hiking, jogging or engaging in other types of physical activity. Exercising is important to maintain good health but only if your kneecap is stabilized so that injuries and additional damage doesn’t occur. Low-Profile Open Patella Design At just 6” tall in the front and 3.5” tall in the back, this lightweight, open patella knee sleeve covers no more of your leg than necessary. The open-patella design of this small and short knee support improves its flexibility and keeps pressure off your sore kneecap, while the popliteal area at the back of your knee is closed for added support and compression. Innovative, Velcro Strapping System Another outstanding feature of this patella tracking brace is its advanced D-ring and Velcro strapping system, which makes it easy to apply, remove, and adjust. Simply loosen or tighten the Velcro straps to change the level of compression. The medical-grade Velcro straps are 10 times stronger than the retail-grade Velcro you’ll find on braces at Target, Walmart, your local drugstore, or other online orthopedic brace retailers. Medical-grade Velcro is meant to open and close 900 times, unlike retail-grade Velcro, which is only meant to open and close 90 times. Frequently Asked Questions About This Knee Support Brace Who can wear it? With sizes ranging from S to 4XL, anyone from kids and teens to plus size adults can wear this knee brace. How do I know what size to get? Using a fabric tape measure, stand up and measure the circumference around the center of your kneecap. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our sizing graphic in the photos above to choose the right size. What conditions does this knee brace treat? Use for patellar tracking disorder, patella subluxation or dislocation, patellofemoral pain syndrome, light MCL and LCL injury prevention, meniscus pain, knee sprains, knee arthritis, runner’s knee, jumper’s knee, chondromalacia, patellar tendonitis, and more. How do I put it on? First, loosen the straps; make sure they remain in the rings. Next, position the brace on the affected side and slide it over the knee. Make sure the seam is placed on the back of the knee. Also, your kneecap should be centered in the opening with the support placed on the rim of your kneecap. Finally, adjust each strap to a desired tension or comfort level. Can I wear this brace over my pants? Yes, but this knee brace is meant to fit against your skin for a better grip. It can be worn above tight pants or leggings if necessary. How tall is this patella tracker knee brace? 6” tall in the front and 3.5” tall in the back. What material is this brace made of? 3/16” thick, latex-free, breathable neoprene alternative and a rubber compression mold buttress. Elastic strap is made with medical-grade Velcro closures. When should I wear this athletic knee wrap? This lightweight knee brace can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during physical activity. Washing Instructions: We recommend hand washing this knee brace in warm water with mild soap and then laying flat to air dry completely before reapplying. Other features: The seam of this athletic knee support is at the back, minimizing irritation. This knee brace for sports releases heat and moisture for a cool, dry fit. The compression-molded, textured buttress keeps this brace elevated on your leg. Color: Black 623658172469 7693850017845 new 44.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03k0102-short-and-lightweight-walking-knee-support-brace_grande.jpg?v=1527632891 641427943022 BraceAbility 03K0102XL Knee Braces XLUS Short & Lightweight Patella Tracking Brace for Runner's Kneecap Pain, Dislocation & Subluxation http://www.braceability.com/products/short-patella-tracking-brace?variant=7693850050613 Short & Lightweight Patella Tracking Brace for Runner's Kneecap Pain, Dislocation & Subluxation 2XL Why You Need This Short Knee Brace for Patellar Tracking Every day, your knees experience a lot of stress , especially if you’re an athlete. Over time, this stress can take a toll on the muscles, ligaments, tendons, and bone that make up your knee joints, causing them to be susceptible to pain and injuries. This versatile, lightweight knee stabilizer provides maximum support to your unstable patella (kneecap). Although it’s short, thin, and lightweight enough to be worn under clothes so you can maintain your day-to-day activities without interference, this patella brace protects against knee instability and pain , as well as further damage and injury. These qualities and more make this support brace great for treating many knee conditions that cause patellar tracking issues and kneecap pain, including: Patellar tracking disorder Kneecap subluxation Patellar dislocation Patellofemoral pain syndrome Knee sprains Patellar tendon injuries including runner’s knee , jumper’s knee , and patellar tendonitis Meniscus pain MCL and LCL injuries 5 Reasons Why People Love This Lightweight Knee Brace for Running This exercise knee support has several features that help it stand out from other short knee braces. Following we list the top five reasons people love this knee brace for running, climbing stairs, jogging, walking, and more. Lightweight, Heat-Releasing Material The 3/16” thick moisture-wicking material is lightweight and specially engineered out of a latex-free, neoprene alternative. Making this knee support for running smooth, soft, and very breathable. C-Shaped Buttress for Enhanced Support The buttress of this sleek knee compression sleeve stabilizes your knee, which is especially helpful if you’re in need of knee support while walking downhill or uphill, running on uneven surfaces, such as while hiking or trail running. The C-shaped buttress is compression molded and textured, helping prevent it from sliding out of position. Plus, by simply flipping this knee brace, the C-shaped buttress can be easily adjusted for either lateral (outside) or medial (inside) knee support. Best Knee Brace for Sports, Including Dance, Gymnastics, and More Many people who subject their knees to high levels of stress, such as dancers, basketball players, or avid runners , choose to wear a knee brace while exercising to help prevent or heal from a knee injury. This sleek, sweat-wicking athletic knee brace is a great solution for the many causes of knee pain when walking, running, hiking, jogging or engaging in other types of physical activity. Exercising is important to maintain good health but only if your kneecap is stabilized so that injuries and additional damage doesn’t occur. Low-Profile Open Patella Design At just 6” tall in the front and 3.5” tall in the back, this lightweight, open patella knee sleeve covers no more of your leg than necessary. The open-patella design of this small and short knee support improves its flexibility and keeps pressure off your sore kneecap, while the popliteal area at the back of your knee is closed for added support and compression. Innovative, Velcro Strapping System Another outstanding feature of this patella tracking brace is its advanced D-ring and Velcro strapping system, which makes it easy to apply, remove, and adjust. Simply loosen or tighten the Velcro straps to change the level of compression. The medical-grade Velcro straps are 10 times stronger than the retail-grade Velcro you’ll find on braces at Target, Walmart, your local drugstore, or other online orthopedic brace retailers. Medical-grade Velcro is meant to open and close 900 times, unlike retail-grade Velcro, which is only meant to open and close 90 times. Frequently Asked Questions About This Knee Support Brace Who can wear it? With sizes ranging from S to 4XL, anyone from kids and teens to plus size adults can wear this knee brace. How do I know what size to get? Using a fabric tape measure, stand up and measure the circumference around the center of your kneecap. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our sizing graphic in the photos above to choose the right size. What conditions does this knee brace treat? Use for patellar tracking disorder, patella subluxation or dislocation, patellofemoral pain syndrome, light MCL and LCL injury prevention, meniscus pain, knee sprains, knee arthritis, runner’s knee, jumper’s knee, chondromalacia, patellar tendonitis, and more. How do I put it on? First, loosen the straps; make sure they remain in the rings. Next, position the brace on the affected side and slide it over the knee. Make sure the seam is placed on the back of the knee. Also, your kneecap should be centered in the opening with the support placed on the rim of your kneecap. Finally, adjust each strap to a desired tension or comfort level. Can I wear this brace over my pants? Yes, but this knee brace is meant to fit against your skin for a better grip. It can be worn above tight pants or leggings if necessary. How tall is this patella tracker knee brace? 6” tall in the front and 3.5” tall in the back. What material is this brace made of? 3/16” thick, latex-free, breathable neoprene alternative and a rubber compression mold buttress. Elastic strap is made with medical-grade Velcro closures. When should I wear this athletic knee wrap? This lightweight knee brace can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during physical activity. Washing Instructions: We recommend hand washing this knee brace in warm water with mild soap and then laying flat to air dry completely before reapplying. Other features: The seam of this athletic knee support is at the back, minimizing irritation. This knee brace for sports releases heat and moisture for a cool, dry fit. The compression-molded, textured buttress keeps this brace elevated on your leg. Color: Black 623658172469 7693850050613 new 44.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03k0102-short-and-lightweight-walking-knee-support-brace_grande.jpg?v=1527632891 641427943039 BraceAbility 03K0102XXL Knee Braces 2XLUS Short & Lightweight Patella Tracking Brace for Runner's Kneecap Pain, Dislocation & Subluxation http://www.braceability.com/products/short-patella-tracking-brace?variant=7693850083381 Short & Lightweight Patella Tracking Brace for Runner's Kneecap Pain, Dislocation & Subluxation 3XL Why You Need This Short Knee Brace for Patellar Tracking Every day, your knees experience a lot of stress , especially if you’re an athlete. Over time, this stress can take a toll on the muscles, ligaments, tendons, and bone that make up your knee joints, causing them to be susceptible to pain and injuries. This versatile, lightweight knee stabilizer provides maximum support to your unstable patella (kneecap). Although it’s short, thin, and lightweight enough to be worn under clothes so you can maintain your day-to-day activities without interference, this patella brace protects against knee instability and pain , as well as further damage and injury. These qualities and more make this support brace great for treating many knee conditions that cause patellar tracking issues and kneecap pain, including: Patellar tracking disorder Kneecap subluxation Patellar dislocation Patellofemoral pain syndrome Knee sprains Patellar tendon injuries including runner’s knee , jumper’s knee , and patellar tendonitis Meniscus pain MCL and LCL injuries 5 Reasons Why People Love This Lightweight Knee Brace for Running This exercise knee support has several features that help it stand out from other short knee braces. Following we list the top five reasons people love this knee brace for running, climbing stairs, jogging, walking, and more. Lightweight, Heat-Releasing Material The 3/16” thick moisture-wicking material is lightweight and specially engineered out of a latex-free, neoprene alternative. Making this knee support for running smooth, soft, and very breathable. C-Shaped Buttress for Enhanced Support The buttress of this sleek knee compression sleeve stabilizes your knee, which is especially helpful if you’re in need of knee support while walking downhill or uphill, running on uneven surfaces, such as while hiking or trail running. The C-shaped buttress is compression molded and textured, helping prevent it from sliding out of position. Plus, by simply flipping this knee brace, the C-shaped buttress can be easily adjusted for either lateral (outside) or medial (inside) knee support. Best Knee Brace for Sports, Including Dance, Gymnastics, and More Many people who subject their knees to high levels of stress, such as dancers, basketball players, or avid runners , choose to wear a knee brace while exercising to help prevent or heal from a knee injury. This sleek, sweat-wicking athletic knee brace is a great solution for the many causes of knee pain when walking, running, hiking, jogging or engaging in other types of physical activity. Exercising is important to maintain good health but only if your kneecap is stabilized so that injuries and additional damage doesn’t occur. Low-Profile Open Patella Design At just 6” tall in the front and 3.5” tall in the back, this lightweight, open patella knee sleeve covers no more of your leg than necessary. The open-patella design of this small and short knee support improves its flexibility and keeps pressure off your sore kneecap, while the popliteal area at the back of your knee is closed for added support and compression. Innovative, Velcro Strapping System Another outstanding feature of this patella tracking brace is its advanced D-ring and Velcro strapping system, which makes it easy to apply, remove, and adjust. Simply loosen or tighten the Velcro straps to change the level of compression. The medical-grade Velcro straps are 10 times stronger than the retail-grade Velcro you’ll find on braces at Target, Walmart, your local drugstore, or other online orthopedic brace retailers. Medical-grade Velcro is meant to open and close 900 times, unlike retail-grade Velcro, which is only meant to open and close 90 times. Frequently Asked Questions About This Knee Support Brace Who can wear it? With sizes ranging from S to 4XL, anyone from kids and teens to plus size adults can wear this knee brace. How do I know what size to get? Using a fabric tape measure, stand up and measure the circumference around the center of your kneecap. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our sizing graphic in the photos above to choose the right size. What conditions does this knee brace treat? Use for patellar tracking disorder, patella subluxation or dislocation, patellofemoral pain syndrome, light MCL and LCL injury prevention, meniscus pain, knee sprains, knee arthritis, runner’s knee, jumper’s knee, chondromalacia, patellar tendonitis, and more. How do I put it on? First, loosen the straps; make sure they remain in the rings. Next, position the brace on the affected side and slide it over the knee. Make sure the seam is placed on the back of the knee. Also, your kneecap should be centered in the opening with the support placed on the rim of your kneecap. Finally, adjust each strap to a desired tension or comfort level. Can I wear this brace over my pants? Yes, but this knee brace is meant to fit against your skin for a better grip. It can be worn above tight pants or leggings if necessary. How tall is this patella tracker knee brace? 6” tall in the front and 3.5” tall in the back. What material is this brace made of? 3/16” thick, latex-free, breathable neoprene alternative and a rubber compression mold buttress. Elastic strap is made with medical-grade Velcro closures. When should I wear this athletic knee wrap? This lightweight knee brace can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during physical activity. Washing Instructions: We recommend hand washing this knee brace in warm water with mild soap and then laying flat to air dry completely before reapplying. Other features: The seam of this athletic knee support is at the back, minimizing irritation. This knee brace for sports releases heat and moisture for a cool, dry fit. The compression-molded, textured buttress keeps this brace elevated on your leg. Color: Black 623658172469 7693850083381 new 44.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03k0102-short-and-lightweight-walking-knee-support-brace_grande.jpg?v=1527632891 641427943046 BraceAbility 03K0102XXXL Knee Braces 3XLUS Short & Lightweight Patella Tracking Brace for Runner's Kneecap Pain, Dislocation & Subluxation http://www.braceability.com/products/short-patella-tracking-brace?variant=7693850116149 Short & Lightweight Patella Tracking Brace for Runner's Kneecap Pain, Dislocation & Subluxation 4XL Why You Need This Short Knee Brace for Patellar Tracking Every day, your knees experience a lot of stress , especially if you’re an athlete. Over time, this stress can take a toll on the muscles, ligaments, tendons, and bone that make up your knee joints, causing them to be susceptible to pain and injuries. This versatile, lightweight knee stabilizer provides maximum support to your unstable patella (kneecap). Although it’s short, thin, and lightweight enough to be worn under clothes so you can maintain your day-to-day activities without interference, this patella brace protects against knee instability and pain , as well as further damage and injury. These qualities and more make this support brace great for treating many knee conditions that cause patellar tracking issues and kneecap pain, including: Patellar tracking disorder Kneecap subluxation Patellar dislocation Patellofemoral pain syndrome Knee sprains Patellar tendon injuries including runner’s knee , jumper’s knee , and patellar tendonitis Meniscus pain MCL and LCL injuries 5 Reasons Why People Love This Lightweight Knee Brace for Running This exercise knee support has several features that help it stand out from other short knee braces. Following we list the top five reasons people love this knee brace for running, climbing stairs, jogging, walking, and more. Lightweight, Heat-Releasing Material The 3/16” thick moisture-wicking material is lightweight and specially engineered out of a latex-free, neoprene alternative. Making this knee support for running smooth, soft, and very breathable. C-Shaped Buttress for Enhanced Support The buttress of this sleek knee compression sleeve stabilizes your knee, which is especially helpful if you’re in need of knee support while walking downhill or uphill, running on uneven surfaces, such as while hiking or trail running. The C-shaped buttress is compression molded and textured, helping prevent it from sliding out of position. Plus, by simply flipping this knee brace, the C-shaped buttress can be easily adjusted for either lateral (outside) or medial (inside) knee support. Best Knee Brace for Sports, Including Dance, Gymnastics, and More Many people who subject their knees to high levels of stress, such as dancers, basketball players, or avid runners , choose to wear a knee brace while exercising to help prevent or heal from a knee injury. This sleek, sweat-wicking athletic knee brace is a great solution for the many causes of knee pain when walking, running, hiking, jogging or engaging in other types of physical activity. Exercising is important to maintain good health but only if your kneecap is stabilized so that injuries and additional damage doesn’t occur. Low-Profile Open Patella Design At just 6” tall in the front and 3.5” tall in the back, this lightweight, open patella knee sleeve covers no more of your leg than necessary. The open-patella design of this small and short knee support improves its flexibility and keeps pressure off your sore kneecap, while the popliteal area at the back of your knee is closed for added support and compression. Innovative, Velcro Strapping System Another outstanding feature of this patella tracking brace is its advanced D-ring and Velcro strapping system, which makes it easy to apply, remove, and adjust. Simply loosen or tighten the Velcro straps to change the level of compression. The medical-grade Velcro straps are 10 times stronger than the retail-grade Velcro you’ll find on braces at Target, Walmart, your local drugstore, or other online orthopedic brace retailers. Medical-grade Velcro is meant to open and close 900 times, unlike retail-grade Velcro, which is only meant to open and close 90 times. Frequently Asked Questions About This Knee Support Brace Who can wear it? With sizes ranging from S to 4XL, anyone from kids and teens to plus size adults can wear this knee brace. How do I know what size to get? Using a fabric tape measure, stand up and measure the circumference around the center of your kneecap. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our sizing graphic in the photos above to choose the right size. What conditions does this knee brace treat? Use for patellar tracking disorder, patella subluxation or dislocation, patellofemoral pain syndrome, light MCL and LCL injury prevention, meniscus pain, knee sprains, knee arthritis, runner’s knee, jumper’s knee, chondromalacia, patellar tendonitis, and more. How do I put it on? First, loosen the straps; make sure they remain in the rings. Next, position the brace on the affected side and slide it over the knee. Make sure the seam is placed on the back of the knee. Also, your kneecap should be centered in the opening with the support placed on the rim of your kneecap. Finally, adjust each strap to a desired tension or comfort level. Can I wear this brace over my pants? Yes, but this knee brace is meant to fit against your skin for a better grip. It can be worn above tight pants or leggings if necessary. How tall is this patella tracker knee brace? 6” tall in the front and 3.5” tall in the back. What material is this brace made of? 3/16” thick, latex-free, breathable neoprene alternative and a rubber compression mold buttress. Elastic strap is made with medical-grade Velcro closures. When should I wear this athletic knee wrap? This lightweight knee brace can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during physical activity. Washing Instructions: We recommend hand washing this knee brace in warm water with mild soap and then laying flat to air dry completely before reapplying. Other features: The seam of this athletic knee support is at the back, minimizing irritation. This knee brace for sports releases heat and moisture for a cool, dry fit. The compression-molded, textured buttress keeps this brace elevated on your leg. Color: Black 623658172469 7693850116149 new 44.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03k0102-short-and-lightweight-walking-knee-support-brace_grande.jpg?v=1527632891 641427943053 BraceAbility 03K0102XXXXL Knee Braces 4XLUS Posture Corrector Upper Back Straightener & Shoulder Support Brace http://www.braceability.com/products/posture-back-shoulder-brace?variant=7676778610741 Posture Corrector Upper Back Straightener & Shoulder Support Brace S A Newly Designed Back Brace for Improving Posture Good posture can provide an individual with higher energy levels (because it allows oxygen to travel to your head), more confidence, relief of neck tension, prevention of future back problems and alleviation of already existing back pain. The posture corrector upper back & shoulder support does this all while being both customizable, durable and comfortable. This brace for better back and spinal alignment is easy to wear with a backpack like design, making application a breeze. In fact, you no longer have to rely on another person to apply the brace. The adjustable straps allow for a person to find the perfect fit for their body type. After you’ve found your perfect fit, feel free to trim off any excess material as no portion of the brace will ever fray (including the back piece, straps, sleeves, shoulder padding, etc.). The "alligator” hook pieces are removable, so you can trim the ends of the straps and re-attach them no matter the length.  The easy to adjust design allows for you to be able to tighten and release the brace as you choose. The straps wrap only around your arms, leaving your torso open and not constrained. Our back straightener brace comes pre assembled, just adjust to your perfect fit and trim where needed. The brace is made of latex free nylon and polyester material. Looking for something to wear both under and over clothing? This posture correcting upper back and & shoulder support is sleek enough to hide underneath most clothing. The perfect amount of padding exists between and around the armpit area of the brace, providing a relatively comfortable fit and no chafing. However, because the brace is intended to correct your posture, some level of discomfort should be expected. Rectangle D-rings located on the back of the brace prevent any type of twisting of the straps, meaning you’ll never have to worry about readjusting a twisted strap throughout the day. What are the Health Benefits of Good Posture? The health benefits of proper posture are endless. Beginning with confidence, good posture makes an individual not only appear healthier but become healthier. By practicing correct posture in your daily life you can prevent back pain that may come with age or an incorrect stance. For example, practicing the correct posture technique will prevent you from the aches and pains your back feels after a long day at your desk job. Without being addressed these aches and pains can become long term issues for a person. Keeping an upright posture allows your airways to open up helping you to breathe properly. As you begin to open up, more oxygen will travel to your head. This will allow for the blood to carry a sufficient amount of oxygen to your entire body, creating a healthier individual. Low levels of oxygen can create countless health issues for a person including- migraines, strong pains throughout the body, low energy levels, and even heart problems. Good posture also has the potential to help you with weight lose by taking tension off of your body. As your practice better posture your core muscles will strengthen by the extension of the mid back. This extension allows your core muscles to engage better, which in return will slim your frame and improve your appearance. What Other Health Issues can this Back Straightening Brace Treat? Post surgery recovery - keeping your spine aligned after back surgery, spinal disc fusions, c-sections and more. Muscle spasms - keeping your spine in the proper position eases tension on your muscles Prevention of spine curvature problems like kyphosis, hyperkyphosis, lordosis, hunchback “Text neck - the damaged sustain from the stance held while using a cellphone Scoliosis, if surgery is not an option or if you have a mild case. Frequently Asked Questions How long do you need to wear your posture brace? Initially, we recommend easing into the duration of time you wear the brace. Start out in thirty minute increments and gradually increase up to three hours, depending on your comfort preference. If you experience any pain or discomfort, remove or loosen the straps. You can also reduce the amount of time you wear it.   How do I know which size to get? Using a fabric or flexible tape measure, find the circumference around your chest at the bottom of your sternum. This brace fits 30-50” chest circumferences. How do I adjust the brace to make it smaller or bigger? To adjust the straps, undo the Velcro closures and tighten or loosen them for your ideal comfort. If the straps are still too long, trim the ends (after removing the alligator clips) and then re-attach the clips. How do I put on the brace? Unfold the brace to figure out which is the left and right strap. Feed the right end of the strap through the plastic triangle buckle, attaching the Velcro closure. Do the same for the left side of strap. Slip the straps over your shoulder like a backpack, ensure the triangle buckle points down on your back. To adjust to your comfort level, use the Velcro closures to pull the straps tighter or until your desired level of posture support is reached. If you feel any discomfort, loosen or remove the brace. Can I wash the brace? Yes, unstrap the Velcro pieces, then hand wash the straps in warm water with mild soap. Brace should be air-dried, do not use high temperatures to wash or dry. Can you sleep in the brace? For the greatest impact on your posture and pain relief we recommend wearing it during the day. During the day wear will allow you to correct your posture when you are finding discomfort from natural slouching. However, if you want to wear it at night it will not hurt you in anyway but you will find more results from daytime use. Can this be used as a clavicle brace? Although this brace can be used to treat a clavicle fracture or break, the narrow straps of the posture brace are not ideal for such injuries. Instead, the clavicle brace is a better option for this condition.    621483851829 7676778610741 new 29.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10b0501-posture-corrector-upper-back-straightener_grande.jpg?v=1529597330 641427942964 BraceAbility 10B0501S Clavicle & Posture SUS Posture Corrector Upper Back Straightener & Shoulder Support Brace http://www.braceability.com/products/posture-back-shoulder-brace?variant=7676813770805 Posture Corrector Upper Back Straightener & Shoulder Support Brace L A Newly Designed Back Brace for Improving Posture Good posture can provide an individual with higher energy levels (because it allows oxygen to travel to your head), more confidence, relief of neck tension, prevention of future back problems and alleviation of already existing back pain. The posture corrector upper back & shoulder support does this all while being both customizable, durable and comfortable. This brace for better back and spinal alignment is easy to wear with a backpack like design, making application a breeze. In fact, you no longer have to rely on another person to apply the brace. The adjustable straps allow for a person to find the perfect fit for their body type. After you’ve found your perfect fit, feel free to trim off any excess material as no portion of the brace will ever fray (including the back piece, straps, sleeves, shoulder padding, etc.). The "alligator” hook pieces are removable, so you can trim the ends of the straps and re-attach them no matter the length.  The easy to adjust design allows for you to be able to tighten and release the brace as you choose. The straps wrap only around your arms, leaving your torso open and not constrained. Our back straightener brace comes pre assembled, just adjust to your perfect fit and trim where needed. The brace is made of latex free nylon and polyester material. Looking for something to wear both under and over clothing? This posture correcting upper back and & shoulder support is sleek enough to hide underneath most clothing. The perfect amount of padding exists between and around the armpit area of the brace, providing a relatively comfortable fit and no chafing. However, because the brace is intended to correct your posture, some level of discomfort should be expected. Rectangle D-rings located on the back of the brace prevent any type of twisting of the straps, meaning you’ll never have to worry about readjusting a twisted strap throughout the day. What are the Health Benefits of Good Posture? The health benefits of proper posture are endless. Beginning with confidence, good posture makes an individual not only appear healthier but become healthier. By practicing correct posture in your daily life you can prevent back pain that may come with age or an incorrect stance. For example, practicing the correct posture technique will prevent you from the aches and pains your back feels after a long day at your desk job. Without being addressed these aches and pains can become long term issues for a person. Keeping an upright posture allows your airways to open up helping you to breathe properly. As you begin to open up, more oxygen will travel to your head. This will allow for the blood to carry a sufficient amount of oxygen to your entire body, creating a healthier individual. Low levels of oxygen can create countless health issues for a person including- migraines, strong pains throughout the body, low energy levels, and even heart problems. Good posture also has the potential to help you with weight lose by taking tension off of your body. As your practice better posture your core muscles will strengthen by the extension of the mid back. This extension allows your core muscles to engage better, which in return will slim your frame and improve your appearance. What Other Health Issues can this Back Straightening Brace Treat? Post surgery recovery - keeping your spine aligned after back surgery, spinal disc fusions, c-sections and more. Muscle spasms - keeping your spine in the proper position eases tension on your muscles Prevention of spine curvature problems like kyphosis, hyperkyphosis, lordosis, hunchback “Text neck - the damaged sustain from the stance held while using a cellphone Scoliosis, if surgery is not an option or if you have a mild case. Frequently Asked Questions How long do you need to wear your posture brace? Initially, we recommend easing into the duration of time you wear the brace. Start out in thirty minute increments and gradually increase up to three hours, depending on your comfort preference. If you experience any pain or discomfort, remove or loosen the straps. You can also reduce the amount of time you wear it.   How do I know which size to get? Using a fabric or flexible tape measure, find the circumference around your chest at the bottom of your sternum. This brace fits 30-50” chest circumferences. How do I adjust the brace to make it smaller or bigger? To adjust the straps, undo the Velcro closures and tighten or loosen them for your ideal comfort. If the straps are still too long, trim the ends (after removing the alligator clips) and then re-attach the clips. How do I put on the brace? Unfold the brace to figure out which is the left and right strap. Feed the right end of the strap through the plastic triangle buckle, attaching the Velcro closure. Do the same for the left side of strap. Slip the straps over your shoulder like a backpack, ensure the triangle buckle points down on your back. To adjust to your comfort level, use the Velcro closures to pull the straps tighter or until your desired level of posture support is reached. If you feel any discomfort, loosen or remove the brace. Can I wash the brace? Yes, unstrap the Velcro pieces, then hand wash the straps in warm water with mild soap. Brace should be air-dried, do not use high temperatures to wash or dry. Can you sleep in the brace? For the greatest impact on your posture and pain relief we recommend wearing it during the day. During the day wear will allow you to correct your posture when you are finding discomfort from natural slouching. However, if you want to wear it at night it will not hurt you in anyway but you will find more results from daytime use. Can this be used as a clavicle brace? Although this brace can be used to treat a clavicle fracture or break, the narrow straps of the posture brace are not ideal for such injuries. Instead, the clavicle brace is a better option for this condition.    621483851829 7676813770805 new 29.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10b0501-posture-corrector-upper-back-straightener_grande.jpg?v=1529597330 641427942230 BraceAbility 10B0501L Clavicle & Posture LUS Plantar Fasciitis Soft Night Sock Stretching Splint http://www.braceability.com/products/plantar-fasciitis-soft-night-sock?variant=7609316573237 Plantar Fasciitis Soft Night Sock Stretching Splint S Foot Brace for Plantar Fasciitis Stretch This plantar fasciitis sock stands out from other plantar fasciitis treatment braces thanks to its sleek design. Many night braces for plantar fasciitis are designed like a boot that makes late-night trips to the bathroom difficult. Plus these products are often hot and uncomfortable to sleep in. While getting used to sleeping with the foot in dorsiflexion will likely take some time, a night splint sock for plantar fasciitis therapy is likely easier to get used to than sleeping with a rigid plantar fasciitis boot. If the sock is uncomfortable, it is recommended to lessen the degree of stretch that you use. Another option would be to only wear the splint for a short period of time and work up to wearing it for longer periods of time. This stretching splint should be worn at night or while one is resting during the day. If you are looking for something to wear throughout the day, check out this plantar fasciitis day splint brace . Obviously, stretching the foot at night is a way to relieve plantar fasciitis foot pain, but this method can also help with other injuries such as achilles tendonitis, plantar flexion contractures, heel spurs, and other lower leg overuse injuries. How Does a Sock Stretch the Plantar Fascia? The key with this plantar fasciitis night splint sock is its dorsiflexion assist strap that stretches from the ankle to the toes. The Velcro closure of this strap threads through a buckle, so one can easily adjust how much the plantar fascia stretches during the night. A medical professional can provide more specific advice when it comes to the appropriate amount of plantar fasciitis stretching needed for relief from plantar fasciitis pain. But generally speaking, just a mild dorsiflexion foot stretch will suffice. Another great feature of this stretching splint is that it includes an alligator Velcro clip that allows for full customization. This Velcro piece is removable so one can make the straps shorter for a greater stretch. As seen in the photos above, you can fold the strap over and attach the alligator Velcro clip back onto the strap  The support for plantar fasciitis is constructed of premium-grade neoprene. This material is soft against the skin and free of latex. Another convenient feature of this plantar fasciitis soft night splint is that it has grip-friendly material on the bottom, so one is at less risk of slipping due to the plantar fascia sock when moving about at night. Also, one can easily unhook the dorsiflexion strap for more comfortable walking in this scenario. This treatment sock splint leaves the heel of the foot open for improved breathability and user comfort. It is available in four different sizes that fit a wide range of shoe sizes. Both men and women can benefit from using this plantar fasciitis sock night splint. A contact closure around the ankle means this component of the foot sock for plantar fasciitis arch pain is highly adjustable for a comfortable fit at the ankle, too. Remedies for Plantar Fasciitis Plantar fasciitis is a common reason for pain in the heel and arch of the foot, particularly at the start of the day or when moving about after a long period seated. Arch pain from plantar fasciitis is caused by repetitive stretching and tearing of the plantar fascia that forms the arch of the foot. This causes plantar fascia ligament pain, especially where it attaches to the heel of the foot. (Learn more about the symptoms and causes of plantar fasciitis .) This is typically brought on by overusing or overloading this ligament. It is quite common among runners, overweight people or those who wear non-supportive shoes. Treatment involves stretching the plantar fascia, oftentimes with the help of plantar fasciitis aids. One of the simplest steps when it comes to how to deal with plantar fasciitis is to hold the foot at a 90-degree angle or in mild dorsiflexion at night to prevent the plantar fascia from contracting and stiffening while one is asleep. Doing so helps for plantar fasciitis pain when one gets up in the morning. BraceAbility offers a number of plantar fasciitis night splints that can help to that end. This particular night splint sock for plantar fasciitis stands out from many plantar fasciitis therapy braces thanks to its low-profile, easy-to-apply design. This soft night splint for plantar fasciitis is comfortable, upping the odds one will keep it on and benefit from the nighttime foot stretch for plantar fasciitis. Wearing arch and heel supports that can reduce strain and discomfort on the plantar fascia throughout the day or while doing high-impact activities. Other treatment steps besides wearing a sock/splint for plantar fasciitis might include engaging in exercises and stretches to improve the strength and flexibility of the foot and ankle, which can lessen strain on the plantar fascia. There are a number of resources online regarding plantar fascia stretching techniques and appropriate exercises. But one may want to consult a medical professional so that one’s stretching for plantar fasciitis treatment does not cause further injury. Medications and applying ice to reduce inflammation can also help ease pain. Maintaining a healthy weight and wearing shoes that provide a proper amount of support is also important when it comes to easing plantar fasciitis pain. Key Features of Night Sock for Plantar Fascia Stretch This soft night splint for plantar fasciitis is a unique solution for this overuse injury that meets a need for a more comfortable nighttime aid. Following is a breakdown of its features. Dorsiflexion strap provides a continuous foot stretch for plantar fasciitis Soft splint for plantar fasciitis is lightweight and low-profile Comfortable night splint leaves the heel open for improved breathability Easy to apply and adjust thanks to contact closures for the dorsiflexion strap and the ankle component Can easily unhook the dorsiflexion strap for a trip to the bathroom Features a removable alligator Velcro clip that allows for full customization The night socks for plantar fasciitis are constructed of premium-grade neoprene The sock for plantar fasciitis treatment is free of latex Plantar fasciitis night brace comes in a simple black color Indications: Plantar fasciitis, achilles tendonitis, plantar flexion contractures, heel spurs, and other lower leg overuse injuries This night sock has a grip-friendly, non-slip tread along the bottom of your foot so you can safely walk short distances in it at night, like when getting up to go to the bathroom. Materials: neoprene sock with soft polyester cover, foam and cloth laminate ankle strap, nylon / polyester blend toe strap with Velcro closure - embossed neoprene non-slip tread, and ABS plastic foot plate. All components are latex-free. Flexible night splint comes in numerous sizes based on the following U.S. shoe sizes (fits left or right foot) Can be hand washed in warm water with a mild detergent  608818135093 7609316573237 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03a05-plantar-fasciitis-soft-night-sock-stretching-splint-main_grande.jpg?v=1523481993 641427942872 BraceAbility 03A0501S Foot - Plantar Fasciitis SUS Plantar Fasciitis Soft Night Sock Stretching Splint http://www.braceability.com/products/plantar-fasciitis-soft-night-sock?variant=7609316606005 Plantar Fasciitis Soft Night Sock Stretching Splint M Foot Brace for Plantar Fasciitis Stretch This plantar fasciitis sock stands out from other plantar fasciitis treatment braces thanks to its sleek design. Many night braces for plantar fasciitis are designed like a boot that makes late-night trips to the bathroom difficult. Plus these products are often hot and uncomfortable to sleep in. While getting used to sleeping with the foot in dorsiflexion will likely take some time, a night splint sock for plantar fasciitis therapy is likely easier to get used to than sleeping with a rigid plantar fasciitis boot. If the sock is uncomfortable, it is recommended to lessen the degree of stretch that you use. Another option would be to only wear the splint for a short period of time and work up to wearing it for longer periods of time. This stretching splint should be worn at night or while one is resting during the day. If you are looking for something to wear throughout the day, check out this plantar fasciitis day splint brace . Obviously, stretching the foot at night is a way to relieve plantar fasciitis foot pain, but this method can also help with other injuries such as achilles tendonitis, plantar flexion contractures, heel spurs, and other lower leg overuse injuries. How Does a Sock Stretch the Plantar Fascia? The key with this plantar fasciitis night splint sock is its dorsiflexion assist strap that stretches from the ankle to the toes. The Velcro closure of this strap threads through a buckle, so one can easily adjust how much the plantar fascia stretches during the night. A medical professional can provide more specific advice when it comes to the appropriate amount of plantar fasciitis stretching needed for relief from plantar fasciitis pain. But generally speaking, just a mild dorsiflexion foot stretch will suffice. Another great feature of this stretching splint is that it includes an alligator Velcro clip that allows for full customization. This Velcro piece is removable so one can make the straps shorter for a greater stretch. As seen in the photos above, you can fold the strap over and attach the alligator Velcro clip back onto the strap  The support for plantar fasciitis is constructed of premium-grade neoprene. This material is soft against the skin and free of latex. Another convenient feature of this plantar fasciitis soft night splint is that it has grip-friendly material on the bottom, so one is at less risk of slipping due to the plantar fascia sock when moving about at night. Also, one can easily unhook the dorsiflexion strap for more comfortable walking in this scenario. This treatment sock splint leaves the heel of the foot open for improved breathability and user comfort. It is available in four different sizes that fit a wide range of shoe sizes. Both men and women can benefit from using this plantar fasciitis sock night splint. A contact closure around the ankle means this component of the foot sock for plantar fasciitis arch pain is highly adjustable for a comfortable fit at the ankle, too. Remedies for Plantar Fasciitis Plantar fasciitis is a common reason for pain in the heel and arch of the foot, particularly at the start of the day or when moving about after a long period seated. Arch pain from plantar fasciitis is caused by repetitive stretching and tearing of the plantar fascia that forms the arch of the foot. This causes plantar fascia ligament pain, especially where it attaches to the heel of the foot. (Learn more about the symptoms and causes of plantar fasciitis .) This is typically brought on by overusing or overloading this ligament. It is quite common among runners, overweight people or those who wear non-supportive shoes. Treatment involves stretching the plantar fascia, oftentimes with the help of plantar fasciitis aids. One of the simplest steps when it comes to how to deal with plantar fasciitis is to hold the foot at a 90-degree angle or in mild dorsiflexion at night to prevent the plantar fascia from contracting and stiffening while one is asleep. Doing so helps for plantar fasciitis pain when one gets up in the morning. BraceAbility offers a number of plantar fasciitis night splints that can help to that end. This particular night splint sock for plantar fasciitis stands out from many plantar fasciitis therapy braces thanks to its low-profile, easy-to-apply design. This soft night splint for plantar fasciitis is comfortable, upping the odds one will keep it on and benefit from the nighttime foot stretch for plantar fasciitis. Wearing arch and heel supports that can reduce strain and discomfort on the plantar fascia throughout the day or while doing high-impact activities. Other treatment steps besides wearing a sock/splint for plantar fasciitis might include engaging in exercises and stretches to improve the strength and flexibility of the foot and ankle, which can lessen strain on the plantar fascia. There are a number of resources online regarding plantar fascia stretching techniques and appropriate exercises. But one may want to consult a medical professional so that one’s stretching for plantar fasciitis treatment does not cause further injury. Medications and applying ice to reduce inflammation can also help ease pain. Maintaining a healthy weight and wearing shoes that provide a proper amount of support is also important when it comes to easing plantar fasciitis pain. Key Features of Night Sock for Plantar Fascia Stretch This soft night splint for plantar fasciitis is a unique solution for this overuse injury that meets a need for a more comfortable nighttime aid. Following is a breakdown of its features. Dorsiflexion strap provides a continuous foot stretch for plantar fasciitis Soft splint for plantar fasciitis is lightweight and low-profile Comfortable night splint leaves the heel open for improved breathability Easy to apply and adjust thanks to contact closures for the dorsiflexion strap and the ankle component Can easily unhook the dorsiflexion strap for a trip to the bathroom Features a removable alligator Velcro clip that allows for full customization The night socks for plantar fasciitis are constructed of premium-grade neoprene The sock for plantar fasciitis treatment is free of latex Plantar fasciitis night brace comes in a simple black color Indications: Plantar fasciitis, achilles tendonitis, plantar flexion contractures, heel spurs, and other lower leg overuse injuries This night sock has a grip-friendly, non-slip tread along the bottom of your foot so you can safely walk short distances in it at night, like when getting up to go to the bathroom. Materials: neoprene sock with soft polyester cover, foam and cloth laminate ankle strap, nylon / polyester blend toe strap with Velcro closure - embossed neoprene non-slip tread, and ABS plastic foot plate. All components are latex-free. Flexible night splint comes in numerous sizes based on the following U.S. shoe sizes (fits left or right foot) Can be hand washed in warm water with a mild detergent  608818135093 7609316606005 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03a05-plantar-fasciitis-soft-night-sock-stretching-splint-main_grande.jpg?v=1523481993 641427942889 BraceAbility 03A0501M Foot - Plantar Fasciitis MUS Plantar Fasciitis Soft Night Sock Stretching Splint http://www.braceability.com/products/plantar-fasciitis-soft-night-sock?variant=7609316638773 Plantar Fasciitis Soft Night Sock Stretching Splint L Foot Brace for Plantar Fasciitis Stretch This plantar fasciitis sock stands out from other plantar fasciitis treatment braces thanks to its sleek design. Many night braces for plantar fasciitis are designed like a boot that makes late-night trips to the bathroom difficult. Plus these products are often hot and uncomfortable to sleep in. While getting used to sleeping with the foot in dorsiflexion will likely take some time, a night splint sock for plantar fasciitis therapy is likely easier to get used to than sleeping with a rigid plantar fasciitis boot. If the sock is uncomfortable, it is recommended to lessen the degree of stretch that you use. Another option would be to only wear the splint for a short period of time and work up to wearing it for longer periods of time. This stretching splint should be worn at night or while one is resting during the day. If you are looking for something to wear throughout the day, check out this plantar fasciitis day splint brace . Obviously, stretching the foot at night is a way to relieve plantar fasciitis foot pain, but this method can also help with other injuries such as achilles tendonitis, plantar flexion contractures, heel spurs, and other lower leg overuse injuries. How Does a Sock Stretch the Plantar Fascia? The key with this plantar fasciitis night splint sock is its dorsiflexion assist strap that stretches from the ankle to the toes. The Velcro closure of this strap threads through a buckle, so one can easily adjust how much the plantar fascia stretches during the night. A medical professional can provide more specific advice when it comes to the appropriate amount of plantar fasciitis stretching needed for relief from plantar fasciitis pain. But generally speaking, just a mild dorsiflexion foot stretch will suffice. Another great feature of this stretching splint is that it includes an alligator Velcro clip that allows for full customization. This Velcro piece is removable so one can make the straps shorter for a greater stretch. As seen in the photos above, you can fold the strap over and attach the alligator Velcro clip back onto the strap  The support for plantar fasciitis is constructed of premium-grade neoprene. This material is soft against the skin and free of latex. Another convenient feature of this plantar fasciitis soft night splint is that it has grip-friendly material on the bottom, so one is at less risk of slipping due to the plantar fascia sock when moving about at night. Also, one can easily unhook the dorsiflexion strap for more comfortable walking in this scenario. This treatment sock splint leaves the heel of the foot open for improved breathability and user comfort. It is available in four different sizes that fit a wide range of shoe sizes. Both men and women can benefit from using this plantar fasciitis sock night splint. A contact closure around the ankle means this component of the foot sock for plantar fasciitis arch pain is highly adjustable for a comfortable fit at the ankle, too. Remedies for Plantar Fasciitis Plantar fasciitis is a common reason for pain in the heel and arch of the foot, particularly at the start of the day or when moving about after a long period seated. Arch pain from plantar fasciitis is caused by repetitive stretching and tearing of the plantar fascia that forms the arch of the foot. This causes plantar fascia ligament pain, especially where it attaches to the heel of the foot. (Learn more about the symptoms and causes of plantar fasciitis .) This is typically brought on by overusing or overloading this ligament. It is quite common among runners, overweight people or those who wear non-supportive shoes. Treatment involves stretching the plantar fascia, oftentimes with the help of plantar fasciitis aids. One of the simplest steps when it comes to how to deal with plantar fasciitis is to hold the foot at a 90-degree angle or in mild dorsiflexion at night to prevent the plantar fascia from contracting and stiffening while one is asleep. Doing so helps for plantar fasciitis pain when one gets up in the morning. BraceAbility offers a number of plantar fasciitis night splints that can help to that end. This particular night splint sock for plantar fasciitis stands out from many plantar fasciitis therapy braces thanks to its low-profile, easy-to-apply design. This soft night splint for plantar fasciitis is comfortable, upping the odds one will keep it on and benefit from the nighttime foot stretch for plantar fasciitis. Wearing arch and heel supports that can reduce strain and discomfort on the plantar fascia throughout the day or while doing high-impact activities. Other treatment steps besides wearing a sock/splint for plantar fasciitis might include engaging in exercises and stretches to improve the strength and flexibility of the foot and ankle, which can lessen strain on the plantar fascia. There are a number of resources online regarding plantar fascia stretching techniques and appropriate exercises. But one may want to consult a medical professional so that one’s stretching for plantar fasciitis treatment does not cause further injury. Medications and applying ice to reduce inflammation can also help ease pain. Maintaining a healthy weight and wearing shoes that provide a proper amount of support is also important when it comes to easing plantar fasciitis pain. Key Features of Night Sock for Plantar Fascia Stretch This soft night splint for plantar fasciitis is a unique solution for this overuse injury that meets a need for a more comfortable nighttime aid. Following is a breakdown of its features. Dorsiflexion strap provides a continuous foot stretch for plantar fasciitis Soft splint for plantar fasciitis is lightweight and low-profile Comfortable night splint leaves the heel open for improved breathability Easy to apply and adjust thanks to contact closures for the dorsiflexion strap and the ankle component Can easily unhook the dorsiflexion strap for a trip to the bathroom Features a removable alligator Velcro clip that allows for full customization The night socks for plantar fasciitis are constructed of premium-grade neoprene The sock for plantar fasciitis treatment is free of latex Plantar fasciitis night brace comes in a simple black color Indications: Plantar fasciitis, achilles tendonitis, plantar flexion contractures, heel spurs, and other lower leg overuse injuries This night sock has a grip-friendly, non-slip tread along the bottom of your foot so you can safely walk short distances in it at night, like when getting up to go to the bathroom. Materials: neoprene sock with soft polyester cover, foam and cloth laminate ankle strap, nylon / polyester blend toe strap with Velcro closure - embossed neoprene non-slip tread, and ABS plastic foot plate. All components are latex-free. Flexible night splint comes in numerous sizes based on the following U.S. shoe sizes (fits left or right foot) Can be hand washed in warm water with a mild detergent  608818135093 7609316638773 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03a05-plantar-fasciitis-soft-night-sock-stretching-splint-main_grande.jpg?v=1523481993 641427942896 BraceAbility 03A0501L Foot - Plantar Fasciitis LUS Plantar Fasciitis Soft Night Sock Stretching Splint http://www.braceability.com/products/plantar-fasciitis-soft-night-sock?variant=7609316671541 Plantar Fasciitis Soft Night Sock Stretching Splint XL Foot Brace for Plantar Fasciitis Stretch This plantar fasciitis sock stands out from other plantar fasciitis treatment braces thanks to its sleek design. Many night braces for plantar fasciitis are designed like a boot that makes late-night trips to the bathroom difficult. Plus these products are often hot and uncomfortable to sleep in. While getting used to sleeping with the foot in dorsiflexion will likely take some time, a night splint sock for plantar fasciitis therapy is likely easier to get used to than sleeping with a rigid plantar fasciitis boot. If the sock is uncomfortable, it is recommended to lessen the degree of stretch that you use. Another option would be to only wear the splint for a short period of time and work up to wearing it for longer periods of time. This stretching splint should be worn at night or while one is resting during the day. If you are looking for something to wear throughout the day, check out this plantar fasciitis day splint brace . Obviously, stretching the foot at night is a way to relieve plantar fasciitis foot pain, but this method can also help with other injuries such as achilles tendonitis, plantar flexion contractures, heel spurs, and other lower leg overuse injuries. How Does a Sock Stretch the Plantar Fascia? The key with this plantar fasciitis night splint sock is its dorsiflexion assist strap that stretches from the ankle to the toes. The Velcro closure of this strap threads through a buckle, so one can easily adjust how much the plantar fascia stretches during the night. A medical professional can provide more specific advice when it comes to the appropriate amount of plantar fasciitis stretching needed for relief from plantar fasciitis pain. But generally speaking, just a mild dorsiflexion foot stretch will suffice. Another great feature of this stretching splint is that it includes an alligator Velcro clip that allows for full customization. This Velcro piece is removable so one can make the straps shorter for a greater stretch. As seen in the photos above, you can fold the strap over and attach the alligator Velcro clip back onto the strap  The support for plantar fasciitis is constructed of premium-grade neoprene. This material is soft against the skin and free of latex. Another convenient feature of this plantar fasciitis soft night splint is that it has grip-friendly material on the bottom, so one is at less risk of slipping due to the plantar fascia sock when moving about at night. Also, one can easily unhook the dorsiflexion strap for more comfortable walking in this scenario. This treatment sock splint leaves the heel of the foot open for improved breathability and user comfort. It is available in four different sizes that fit a wide range of shoe sizes. Both men and women can benefit from using this plantar fasciitis sock night splint. A contact closure around the ankle means this component of the foot sock for plantar fasciitis arch pain is highly adjustable for a comfortable fit at the ankle, too. Remedies for Plantar Fasciitis Plantar fasciitis is a common reason for pain in the heel and arch of the foot, particularly at the start of the day or when moving about after a long period seated. Arch pain from plantar fasciitis is caused by repetitive stretching and tearing of the plantar fascia that forms the arch of the foot. This causes plantar fascia ligament pain, especially where it attaches to the heel of the foot. (Learn more about the symptoms and causes of plantar fasciitis .) This is typically brought on by overusing or overloading this ligament. It is quite common among runners, overweight people or those who wear non-supportive shoes. Treatment involves stretching the plantar fascia, oftentimes with the help of plantar fasciitis aids. One of the simplest steps when it comes to how to deal with plantar fasciitis is to hold the foot at a 90-degree angle or in mild dorsiflexion at night to prevent the plantar fascia from contracting and stiffening while one is asleep. Doing so helps for plantar fasciitis pain when one gets up in the morning. BraceAbility offers a number of plantar fasciitis night splints that can help to that end. This particular night splint sock for plantar fasciitis stands out from many plantar fasciitis therapy braces thanks to its low-profile, easy-to-apply design. This soft night splint for plantar fasciitis is comfortable, upping the odds one will keep it on and benefit from the nighttime foot stretch for plantar fasciitis. Wearing arch and heel supports that can reduce strain and discomfort on the plantar fascia throughout the day or while doing high-impact activities. Other treatment steps besides wearing a sock/splint for plantar fasciitis might include engaging in exercises and stretches to improve the strength and flexibility of the foot and ankle, which can lessen strain on the plantar fascia. There are a number of resources online regarding plantar fascia stretching techniques and appropriate exercises. But one may want to consult a medical professional so that one’s stretching for plantar fasciitis treatment does not cause further injury. Medications and applying ice to reduce inflammation can also help ease pain. Maintaining a healthy weight and wearing shoes that provide a proper amount of support is also important when it comes to easing plantar fasciitis pain. Key Features of Night Sock for Plantar Fascia Stretch This soft night splint for plantar fasciitis is a unique solution for this overuse injury that meets a need for a more comfortable nighttime aid. Following is a breakdown of its features. Dorsiflexion strap provides a continuous foot stretch for plantar fasciitis Soft splint for plantar fasciitis is lightweight and low-profile Comfortable night splint leaves the heel open for improved breathability Easy to apply and adjust thanks to contact closures for the dorsiflexion strap and the ankle component Can easily unhook the dorsiflexion strap for a trip to the bathroom Features a removable alligator Velcro clip that allows for full customization The night socks for plantar fasciitis are constructed of premium-grade neoprene The sock for plantar fasciitis treatment is free of latex Plantar fasciitis night brace comes in a simple black color Indications: Plantar fasciitis, achilles tendonitis, plantar flexion contractures, heel spurs, and other lower leg overuse injuries This night sock has a grip-friendly, non-slip tread along the bottom of your foot so you can safely walk short distances in it at night, like when getting up to go to the bathroom. Materials: neoprene sock with soft polyester cover, foam and cloth laminate ankle strap, nylon / polyester blend toe strap with Velcro closure - embossed neoprene non-slip tread, and ABS plastic foot plate. All components are latex-free. Flexible night splint comes in numerous sizes based on the following U.S. shoe sizes (fits left or right foot) Can be hand washed in warm water with a mild detergent  608818135093 7609316671541 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03a05-plantar-fasciitis-soft-night-sock-stretching-splint-main_grande.jpg?v=1523481993 641427942902 BraceAbility 03A0501XL Foot - Plantar Fasciitis XLUS Neoprene Open Patella / Open Back Athletic Knee Sleeve http://www.braceability.com/products/open-patella-knee-sleeve?variant=7678440636469 Neoprene Open Patella / Open Back Athletic Knee Sleeve S   Why Do I Need an Open Patella / Open Back Knee Sleeve? This neoprene knee sleeve is one of BraceAbility’s most popular knee braces with an opening around your patella (kneecap) and popliteal (behind your kneecap). BraceAbility’s open patella neoprene knee support was designed to protect your knee from future injuries, alleviate your knee pain, and provide comfortable support to your knees. This knee sleeve can help treat many causes of knee pain and knee conditions including: Knee arthritis (knee osteoarthritis (OA) ) Moderate knee sprains and knee strains Patellofemoral pain syndrome (runner’s knee and jumper’s knee ) Meniscus tear General knee pain 6 Reasons Why People Love This Neoprene Knee Sleeve It’s simple This hassle-free slip-on recovery knee sleeve can be worn interchangeably on your right or left knee. There are no adjustable straps, closures, or fastens to deal with, making application quick and simple for athletes and non-athletes alike. The open patella and open popliteal design prevents bunching If you find solid neoprene knee supports or ACE bandages sweaty and uncomfortable, this brace is definitely a better fit for you. Although full coverage knee sleeves provide a little extra support, they tend to bunch behind your knee joint and slide down during physical activities and sports. This open front/back neoprene knee sleeve is a more breathable option and stays put without bunching, giving your knees the support they really need. Great for athletes The extra support provided by this knee brace allows athletes suffering from sports-related injuries to continue their normal fitness routine. However, powerlifters and bodybuilders often favor BraceAbility’s closed patella knee sleeve for its extra support. Made from 3/16” thick premium-grade neoprene This discreet black knee sleeve is 13” long and 3/16” thick, making it not too flashy and flat enough to fit under ordinary pants, such as jeans, but still thick enough to provide adequate compression and support. Water resistant This water-resistant knee brace is perfect for swimming, a great exercise for people trying to lose weight and much easier on your knees than running if you have knee problems. Reduces swelling and promotes healing This neoprene material provides warmth and moderate elastic compression to your sore knee, which reduces swelling and encourages blood flow to speed up your healing process. Is This Black Neoprene Knee Sleeve Waterproof? Similar to the wetsuits scuba divers wear, this open patellar knee sleeve is unique because it is made out of premium-grade 3/16” thick neoprene, which is water-resistant. Meaning, this neoprene knee sleeve able to resist the penetration of water to some degree but not entirely. If you do wear this knee sleeve when you are sweating profusely, showering, or for a swim, it is important to lay this knee sleeve flat to dry out completely before using it again for swimming, rowing, sailing, waterskiing, wakeboarding or surfing, for example. For more knee supports that can be worn in the water, see BraceAbility’s full line of neoprene knee braces . Frequently Asked Questions about this Knee Sleeve Who can wear it? With sizes from S all the way up to 4XL, anyone from kids and teens to adults can wear this knee sleeve. Our larger sizes will even fit plus size or overweight men and women. How do I know what size to get? Using a fabric tape measure, measure the circumference of your leg 6” above the center of your kneecap and 6” below the center of your kneecap. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our detailed sizing instructions to choose the right size. What conditions does this knee brace treat? Helps to manage pain from injuries like knee arthritis, knee osteoarthritis (OA), knee sprains, knee strains, patellofemoral pain syndrome, runner's knee, jumper's knee, and general knee pain.  How do I put on this knee sleeve? Insert your foot into the largest end of the knee sleeve. The stitched seam should run down the backside of your leg, centered behind your kneecap Continue pulling up until there is approximately 6” of material above your kneecap. There should be opening around your kneecap (patella) and at the back of your knee (popliteal) Can I wear this brace over my pants? Yes, but this knee brace is meant to fit against your skin for a better grip. It can be worn above tight pants or leggings if necessary. How tall is this knee sleeve? 13” What material is this sleeve made of? Latex-free, 3/16” thick premium-grade neoprene When should I wear this knee sleeve? This lightweight knee brace can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during physical activity. However, you should check with your primary care physician before wearing any compression knee sleeve while sleeping. Can I wash this neoprene knee brace?  Yes. We recommend hand washing this knee brace with mild soap and then lay flat to air dry completely for about 24 hours. 621642940469 7678440636469 new 24.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03k0501-neoprene-open-patella-open-back-athletic-knee-sleeve_grande.jpg?v=1529684692 641061979609 BraceAbility 03K0501S Knee Braces SUS Neoprene Open Patella / Open Back Athletic Knee Sleeve http://www.braceability.com/products/open-patella-knee-sleeve?variant=7678469111861 Neoprene Open Patella / Open Back Athletic Knee Sleeve M   Why Do I Need an Open Patella / Open Back Knee Sleeve? This neoprene knee sleeve is one of BraceAbility’s most popular knee braces with an opening around your patella (kneecap) and popliteal (behind your kneecap). BraceAbility’s open patella neoprene knee support was designed to protect your knee from future injuries, alleviate your knee pain, and provide comfortable support to your knees. This knee sleeve can help treat many causes of knee pain and knee conditions including: Knee arthritis (knee osteoarthritis (OA) ) Moderate knee sprains and knee strains Patellofemoral pain syndrome (runner’s knee and jumper’s knee ) Meniscus tear General knee pain 6 Reasons Why People Love This Neoprene Knee Sleeve It’s simple This hassle-free slip-on recovery knee sleeve can be worn interchangeably on your right or left knee. There are no adjustable straps, closures, or fastens to deal with, making application quick and simple for athletes and non-athletes alike. The open patella and open popliteal design prevents bunching If you find solid neoprene knee supports or ACE bandages sweaty and uncomfortable, this brace is definitely a better fit for you. Although full coverage knee sleeves provide a little extra support, they tend to bunch behind your knee joint and slide down during physical activities and sports. This open front/back neoprene knee sleeve is a more breathable option and stays put without bunching, giving your knees the support they really need. Great for athletes The extra support provided by this knee brace allows athletes suffering from sports-related injuries to continue their normal fitness routine. However, powerlifters and bodybuilders often favor BraceAbility’s closed patella knee sleeve for its extra support. Made from 3/16” thick premium-grade neoprene This discreet black knee sleeve is 13” long and 3/16” thick, making it not too flashy and flat enough to fit under ordinary pants, such as jeans, but still thick enough to provide adequate compression and support. Water resistant This water-resistant knee brace is perfect for swimming, a great exercise for people trying to lose weight and much easier on your knees than running if you have knee problems. Reduces swelling and promotes healing This neoprene material provides warmth and moderate elastic compression to your sore knee, which reduces swelling and encourages blood flow to speed up your healing process. Is This Black Neoprene Knee Sleeve Waterproof? Similar to the wetsuits scuba divers wear, this open patellar knee sleeve is unique because it is made out of premium-grade 3/16” thick neoprene, which is water-resistant. Meaning, this neoprene knee sleeve able to resist the penetration of water to some degree but not entirely. If you do wear this knee sleeve when you are sweating profusely, showering, or for a swim, it is important to lay this knee sleeve flat to dry out completely before using it again for swimming, rowing, sailing, waterskiing, wakeboarding or surfing, for example. For more knee supports that can be worn in the water, see BraceAbility’s full line of neoprene knee braces . Frequently Asked Questions about this Knee Sleeve Who can wear it? With sizes from S all the way up to 4XL, anyone from kids and teens to adults can wear this knee sleeve. Our larger sizes will even fit plus size or overweight men and women. How do I know what size to get? Using a fabric tape measure, measure the circumference of your leg 6” above the center of your kneecap and 6” below the center of your kneecap. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our detailed sizing instructions to choose the right size. What conditions does this knee brace treat? Helps to manage pain from injuries like knee arthritis, knee osteoarthritis (OA), knee sprains, knee strains, patellofemoral pain syndrome, runner's knee, jumper's knee, and general knee pain.  How do I put on this knee sleeve? Insert your foot into the largest end of the knee sleeve. The stitched seam should run down the backside of your leg, centered behind your kneecap Continue pulling up until there is approximately 6” of material above your kneecap. There should be opening around your kneecap (patella) and at the back of your knee (popliteal) Can I wear this brace over my pants? Yes, but this knee brace is meant to fit against your skin for a better grip. It can be worn above tight pants or leggings if necessary. How tall is this knee sleeve? 13” What material is this sleeve made of? Latex-free, 3/16” thick premium-grade neoprene When should I wear this knee sleeve? This lightweight knee brace can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during physical activity. However, you should check with your primary care physician before wearing any compression knee sleeve while sleeping. Can I wash this neoprene knee brace?  Yes. We recommend hand washing this knee brace with mild soap and then lay flat to air dry completely for about 24 hours. 621642940469 7678469111861 new 24.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03k0501-neoprene-open-patella-open-back-athletic-knee-sleeve_grande.jpg?v=1529684692 641061979616 BraceAbility 03K0501M Knee Braces MUS Neoprene Open Patella / Open Back Athletic Knee Sleeve http://www.braceability.com/products/open-patella-knee-sleeve?variant=7678469144629 Neoprene Open Patella / Open Back Athletic Knee Sleeve L   Why Do I Need an Open Patella / Open Back Knee Sleeve? This neoprene knee sleeve is one of BraceAbility’s most popular knee braces with an opening around your patella (kneecap) and popliteal (behind your kneecap). BraceAbility’s open patella neoprene knee support was designed to protect your knee from future injuries, alleviate your knee pain, and provide comfortable support to your knees. This knee sleeve can help treat many causes of knee pain and knee conditions including: Knee arthritis (knee osteoarthritis (OA) ) Moderate knee sprains and knee strains Patellofemoral pain syndrome (runner’s knee and jumper’s knee ) Meniscus tear General knee pain 6 Reasons Why People Love This Neoprene Knee Sleeve It’s simple This hassle-free slip-on recovery knee sleeve can be worn interchangeably on your right or left knee. There are no adjustable straps, closures, or fastens to deal with, making application quick and simple for athletes and non-athletes alike. The open patella and open popliteal design prevents bunching If you find solid neoprene knee supports or ACE bandages sweaty and uncomfortable, this brace is definitely a better fit for you. Although full coverage knee sleeves provide a little extra support, they tend to bunch behind your knee joint and slide down during physical activities and sports. This open front/back neoprene knee sleeve is a more breathable option and stays put without bunching, giving your knees the support they really need. Great for athletes The extra support provided by this knee brace allows athletes suffering from sports-related injuries to continue their normal fitness routine. However, powerlifters and bodybuilders often favor BraceAbility’s closed patella knee sleeve for its extra support. Made from 3/16” thick premium-grade neoprene This discreet black knee sleeve is 13” long and 3/16” thick, making it not too flashy and flat enough to fit under ordinary pants, such as jeans, but still thick enough to provide adequate compression and support. Water resistant This water-resistant knee brace is perfect for swimming, a great exercise for people trying to lose weight and much easier on your knees than running if you have knee problems. Reduces swelling and promotes healing This neoprene material provides warmth and moderate elastic compression to your sore knee, which reduces swelling and encourages blood flow to speed up your healing process. Is This Black Neoprene Knee Sleeve Waterproof? Similar to the wetsuits scuba divers wear, this open patellar knee sleeve is unique because it is made out of premium-grade 3/16” thick neoprene, which is water-resistant. Meaning, this neoprene knee sleeve able to resist the penetration of water to some degree but not entirely. If you do wear this knee sleeve when you are sweating profusely, showering, or for a swim, it is important to lay this knee sleeve flat to dry out completely before using it again for swimming, rowing, sailing, waterskiing, wakeboarding or surfing, for example. For more knee supports that can be worn in the water, see BraceAbility’s full line of neoprene knee braces . Frequently Asked Questions about this Knee Sleeve Who can wear it? With sizes from S all the way up to 4XL, anyone from kids and teens to adults can wear this knee sleeve. Our larger sizes will even fit plus size or overweight men and women. How do I know what size to get? Using a fabric tape measure, measure the circumference of your leg 6” above the center of your kneecap and 6” below the center of your kneecap. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our detailed sizing instructions to choose the right size. What conditions does this knee brace treat? Helps to manage pain from injuries like knee arthritis, knee osteoarthritis (OA), knee sprains, knee strains, patellofemoral pain syndrome, runner's knee, jumper's knee, and general knee pain.  How do I put on this knee sleeve? Insert your foot into the largest end of the knee sleeve. The stitched seam should run down the backside of your leg, centered behind your kneecap Continue pulling up until there is approximately 6” of material above your kneecap. There should be opening around your kneecap (patella) and at the back of your knee (popliteal) Can I wear this brace over my pants? Yes, but this knee brace is meant to fit against your skin for a better grip. It can be worn above tight pants or leggings if necessary. How tall is this knee sleeve? 13” What material is this sleeve made of? Latex-free, 3/16” thick premium-grade neoprene When should I wear this knee sleeve? This lightweight knee brace can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during physical activity. However, you should check with your primary care physician before wearing any compression knee sleeve while sleeping. Can I wash this neoprene knee brace?  Yes. We recommend hand washing this knee brace with mild soap and then lay flat to air dry completely for about 24 hours. 621642940469 7678469144629 new 24.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03k0501-neoprene-open-patella-open-back-athletic-knee-sleeve_grande.jpg?v=1529684692 641061979623 BraceAbility 03K0501L Knee Braces LUS Neoprene Open Patella / Open Back Athletic Knee Sleeve http://www.braceability.com/products/open-patella-knee-sleeve?variant=7678469177397 Neoprene Open Patella / Open Back Athletic Knee Sleeve XL   Why Do I Need an Open Patella / Open Back Knee Sleeve? This neoprene knee sleeve is one of BraceAbility’s most popular knee braces with an opening around your patella (kneecap) and popliteal (behind your kneecap). BraceAbility’s open patella neoprene knee support was designed to protect your knee from future injuries, alleviate your knee pain, and provide comfortable support to your knees. This knee sleeve can help treat many causes of knee pain and knee conditions including: Knee arthritis (knee osteoarthritis (OA) ) Moderate knee sprains and knee strains Patellofemoral pain syndrome (runner’s knee and jumper’s knee ) Meniscus tear General knee pain 6 Reasons Why People Love This Neoprene Knee Sleeve It’s simple This hassle-free slip-on recovery knee sleeve can be worn interchangeably on your right or left knee. There are no adjustable straps, closures, or fastens to deal with, making application quick and simple for athletes and non-athletes alike. The open patella and open popliteal design prevents bunching If you find solid neoprene knee supports or ACE bandages sweaty and uncomfortable, this brace is definitely a better fit for you. Although full coverage knee sleeves provide a little extra support, they tend to bunch behind your knee joint and slide down during physical activities and sports. This open front/back neoprene knee sleeve is a more breathable option and stays put without bunching, giving your knees the support they really need. Great for athletes The extra support provided by this knee brace allows athletes suffering from sports-related injuries to continue their normal fitness routine. However, powerlifters and bodybuilders often favor BraceAbility’s closed patella knee sleeve for its extra support. Made from 3/16” thick premium-grade neoprene This discreet black knee sleeve is 13” long and 3/16” thick, making it not too flashy and flat enough to fit under ordinary pants, such as jeans, but still thick enough to provide adequate compression and support. Water resistant This water-resistant knee brace is perfect for swimming, a great exercise for people trying to lose weight and much easier on your knees than running if you have knee problems. Reduces swelling and promotes healing This neoprene material provides warmth and moderate elastic compression to your sore knee, which reduces swelling and encourages blood flow to speed up your healing process. Is This Black Neoprene Knee Sleeve Waterproof? Similar to the wetsuits scuba divers wear, this open patellar knee sleeve is unique because it is made out of premium-grade 3/16” thick neoprene, which is water-resistant. Meaning, this neoprene knee sleeve able to resist the penetration of water to some degree but not entirely. If you do wear this knee sleeve when you are sweating profusely, showering, or for a swim, it is important to lay this knee sleeve flat to dry out completely before using it again for swimming, rowing, sailing, waterskiing, wakeboarding or surfing, for example. For more knee supports that can be worn in the water, see BraceAbility’s full line of neoprene knee braces . Frequently Asked Questions about this Knee Sleeve Who can wear it? With sizes from S all the way up to 4XL, anyone from kids and teens to adults can wear this knee sleeve. Our larger sizes will even fit plus size or overweight men and women. How do I know what size to get? Using a fabric tape measure, measure the circumference of your leg 6” above the center of your kneecap and 6” below the center of your kneecap. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our detailed sizing instructions to choose the right size. What conditions does this knee brace treat? Helps to manage pain from injuries like knee arthritis, knee osteoarthritis (OA), knee sprains, knee strains, patellofemoral pain syndrome, runner's knee, jumper's knee, and general knee pain.  How do I put on this knee sleeve? Insert your foot into the largest end of the knee sleeve. The stitched seam should run down the backside of your leg, centered behind your kneecap Continue pulling up until there is approximately 6” of material above your kneecap. There should be opening around your kneecap (patella) and at the back of your knee (popliteal) Can I wear this brace over my pants? Yes, but this knee brace is meant to fit against your skin for a better grip. It can be worn above tight pants or leggings if necessary. How tall is this knee sleeve? 13” What material is this sleeve made of? Latex-free, 3/16” thick premium-grade neoprene When should I wear this knee sleeve? This lightweight knee brace can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during physical activity. However, you should check with your primary care physician before wearing any compression knee sleeve while sleeping. Can I wash this neoprene knee brace?  Yes. We recommend hand washing this knee brace with mild soap and then lay flat to air dry completely for about 24 hours. 621642940469 7678469177397 new 24.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03k0501-neoprene-open-patella-open-back-athletic-knee-sleeve_grande.jpg?v=1529684692 641061979630 BraceAbility 03K0501XL Knee Braces XLUS Neoprene Open Patella / Open Back Athletic Knee Sleeve http://www.braceability.com/products/open-patella-knee-sleeve?variant=7678469210165 Neoprene Open Patella / Open Back Athletic Knee Sleeve 2XL   Why Do I Need an Open Patella / Open Back Knee Sleeve? This neoprene knee sleeve is one of BraceAbility’s most popular knee braces with an opening around your patella (kneecap) and popliteal (behind your kneecap). BraceAbility’s open patella neoprene knee support was designed to protect your knee from future injuries, alleviate your knee pain, and provide comfortable support to your knees. This knee sleeve can help treat many causes of knee pain and knee conditions including: Knee arthritis (knee osteoarthritis (OA) ) Moderate knee sprains and knee strains Patellofemoral pain syndrome (runner’s knee and jumper’s knee ) Meniscus tear General knee pain 6 Reasons Why People Love This Neoprene Knee Sleeve It’s simple This hassle-free slip-on recovery knee sleeve can be worn interchangeably on your right or left knee. There are no adjustable straps, closures, or fastens to deal with, making application quick and simple for athletes and non-athletes alike. The open patella and open popliteal design prevents bunching If you find solid neoprene knee supports or ACE bandages sweaty and uncomfortable, this brace is definitely a better fit for you. Although full coverage knee sleeves provide a little extra support, they tend to bunch behind your knee joint and slide down during physical activities and sports. This open front/back neoprene knee sleeve is a more breathable option and stays put without bunching, giving your knees the support they really need. Great for athletes The extra support provided by this knee brace allows athletes suffering from sports-related injuries to continue their normal fitness routine. However, powerlifters and bodybuilders often favor BraceAbility’s closed patella knee sleeve for its extra support. Made from 3/16” thick premium-grade neoprene This discreet black knee sleeve is 13” long and 3/16” thick, making it not too flashy and flat enough to fit under ordinary pants, such as jeans, but still thick enough to provide adequate compression and support. Water resistant This water-resistant knee brace is perfect for swimming, a great exercise for people trying to lose weight and much easier on your knees than running if you have knee problems. Reduces swelling and promotes healing This neoprene material provides warmth and moderate elastic compression to your sore knee, which reduces swelling and encourages blood flow to speed up your healing process. Is This Black Neoprene Knee Sleeve Waterproof? Similar to the wetsuits scuba divers wear, this open patellar knee sleeve is unique because it is made out of premium-grade 3/16” thick neoprene, which is water-resistant. Meaning, this neoprene knee sleeve able to resist the penetration of water to some degree but not entirely. If you do wear this knee sleeve when you are sweating profusely, showering, or for a swim, it is important to lay this knee sleeve flat to dry out completely before using it again for swimming, rowing, sailing, waterskiing, wakeboarding or surfing, for example. For more knee supports that can be worn in the water, see BraceAbility’s full line of neoprene knee braces . Frequently Asked Questions about this Knee Sleeve Who can wear it? With sizes from S all the way up to 4XL, anyone from kids and teens to adults can wear this knee sleeve. Our larger sizes will even fit plus size or overweight men and women. How do I know what size to get? Using a fabric tape measure, measure the circumference of your leg 6” above the center of your kneecap and 6” below the center of your kneecap. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our detailed sizing instructions to choose the right size. What conditions does this knee brace treat? Helps to manage pain from injuries like knee arthritis, knee osteoarthritis (OA), knee sprains, knee strains, patellofemoral pain syndrome, runner's knee, jumper's knee, and general knee pain.  How do I put on this knee sleeve? Insert your foot into the largest end of the knee sleeve. The stitched seam should run down the backside of your leg, centered behind your kneecap Continue pulling up until there is approximately 6” of material above your kneecap. There should be opening around your kneecap (patella) and at the back of your knee (popliteal) Can I wear this brace over my pants? Yes, but this knee brace is meant to fit against your skin for a better grip. It can be worn above tight pants or leggings if necessary. How tall is this knee sleeve? 13” What material is this sleeve made of? Latex-free, 3/16” thick premium-grade neoprene When should I wear this knee sleeve? This lightweight knee brace can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during physical activity. However, you should check with your primary care physician before wearing any compression knee sleeve while sleeping. Can I wash this neoprene knee brace?  Yes. We recommend hand washing this knee brace with mild soap and then lay flat to air dry completely for about 24 hours. 621642940469 7678469210165 new 24.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03k0501-neoprene-open-patella-open-back-athletic-knee-sleeve_grande.jpg?v=1529684692 641061979647 BraceAbility 03K0501XXL Knee Braces 2XLUS Neoprene Open Patella / Open Back Athletic Knee Sleeve http://www.braceability.com/products/open-patella-knee-sleeve?variant=7678469242933 Neoprene Open Patella / Open Back Athletic Knee Sleeve 3XL   Why Do I Need an Open Patella / Open Back Knee Sleeve? This neoprene knee sleeve is one of BraceAbility’s most popular knee braces with an opening around your patella (kneecap) and popliteal (behind your kneecap). BraceAbility’s open patella neoprene knee support was designed to protect your knee from future injuries, alleviate your knee pain, and provide comfortable support to your knees. This knee sleeve can help treat many causes of knee pain and knee conditions including: Knee arthritis (knee osteoarthritis (OA) ) Moderate knee sprains and knee strains Patellofemoral pain syndrome (runner’s knee and jumper’s knee ) Meniscus tear General knee pain 6 Reasons Why People Love This Neoprene Knee Sleeve It’s simple This hassle-free slip-on recovery knee sleeve can be worn interchangeably on your right or left knee. There are no adjustable straps, closures, or fastens to deal with, making application quick and simple for athletes and non-athletes alike. The open patella and open popliteal design prevents bunching If you find solid neoprene knee supports or ACE bandages sweaty and uncomfortable, this brace is definitely a better fit for you. Although full coverage knee sleeves provide a little extra support, they tend to bunch behind your knee joint and slide down during physical activities and sports. This open front/back neoprene knee sleeve is a more breathable option and stays put without bunching, giving your knees the support they really need. Great for athletes The extra support provided by this knee brace allows athletes suffering from sports-related injuries to continue their normal fitness routine. However, powerlifters and bodybuilders often favor BraceAbility’s closed patella knee sleeve for its extra support. Made from 3/16” thick premium-grade neoprene This discreet black knee sleeve is 13” long and 3/16” thick, making it not too flashy and flat enough to fit under ordinary pants, such as jeans, but still thick enough to provide adequate compression and support. Water resistant This water-resistant knee brace is perfect for swimming, a great exercise for people trying to lose weight and much easier on your knees than running if you have knee problems. Reduces swelling and promotes healing This neoprene material provides warmth and moderate elastic compression to your sore knee, which reduces swelling and encourages blood flow to speed up your healing process. Is This Black Neoprene Knee Sleeve Waterproof? Similar to the wetsuits scuba divers wear, this open patellar knee sleeve is unique because it is made out of premium-grade 3/16” thick neoprene, which is water-resistant. Meaning, this neoprene knee sleeve able to resist the penetration of water to some degree but not entirely. If you do wear this knee sleeve when you are sweating profusely, showering, or for a swim, it is important to lay this knee sleeve flat to dry out completely before using it again for swimming, rowing, sailing, waterskiing, wakeboarding or surfing, for example. For more knee supports that can be worn in the water, see BraceAbility’s full line of neoprene knee braces . Frequently Asked Questions about this Knee Sleeve Who can wear it? With sizes from S all the way up to 4XL, anyone from kids and teens to adults can wear this knee sleeve. Our larger sizes will even fit plus size or overweight men and women. How do I know what size to get? Using a fabric tape measure, measure the circumference of your leg 6” above the center of your kneecap and 6” below the center of your kneecap. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our detailed sizing instructions to choose the right size. What conditions does this knee brace treat? Helps to manage pain from injuries like knee arthritis, knee osteoarthritis (OA), knee sprains, knee strains, patellofemoral pain syndrome, runner's knee, jumper's knee, and general knee pain.  How do I put on this knee sleeve? Insert your foot into the largest end of the knee sleeve. The stitched seam should run down the backside of your leg, centered behind your kneecap Continue pulling up until there is approximately 6” of material above your kneecap. There should be opening around your kneecap (patella) and at the back of your knee (popliteal) Can I wear this brace over my pants? Yes, but this knee brace is meant to fit against your skin for a better grip. It can be worn above tight pants or leggings if necessary. How tall is this knee sleeve? 13” What material is this sleeve made of? Latex-free, 3/16” thick premium-grade neoprene When should I wear this knee sleeve? This lightweight knee brace can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during physical activity. However, you should check with your primary care physician before wearing any compression knee sleeve while sleeping. Can I wash this neoprene knee brace?  Yes. We recommend hand washing this knee brace with mild soap and then lay flat to air dry completely for about 24 hours. 621642940469 7678469242933 new 24.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03k0501-neoprene-open-patella-open-back-athletic-knee-sleeve_grande.jpg?v=1529684692 641061979654 BraceAbility 03K0501XXXL Knee Braces 3XLUS Neoprene Open Patella / Open Back Athletic Knee Sleeve http://www.braceability.com/products/open-patella-knee-sleeve?variant=7678469275701 Neoprene Open Patella / Open Back Athletic Knee Sleeve 4XL   Why Do I Need an Open Patella / Open Back Knee Sleeve? This neoprene knee sleeve is one of BraceAbility’s most popular knee braces with an opening around your patella (kneecap) and popliteal (behind your kneecap). BraceAbility’s open patella neoprene knee support was designed to protect your knee from future injuries, alleviate your knee pain, and provide comfortable support to your knees. This knee sleeve can help treat many causes of knee pain and knee conditions including: Knee arthritis (knee osteoarthritis (OA) ) Moderate knee sprains and knee strains Patellofemoral pain syndrome (runner’s knee and jumper’s knee ) Meniscus tear General knee pain 6 Reasons Why People Love This Neoprene Knee Sleeve It’s simple This hassle-free slip-on recovery knee sleeve can be worn interchangeably on your right or left knee. There are no adjustable straps, closures, or fastens to deal with, making application quick and simple for athletes and non-athletes alike. The open patella and open popliteal design prevents bunching If you find solid neoprene knee supports or ACE bandages sweaty and uncomfortable, this brace is definitely a better fit for you. Although full coverage knee sleeves provide a little extra support, they tend to bunch behind your knee joint and slide down during physical activities and sports. This open front/back neoprene knee sleeve is a more breathable option and stays put without bunching, giving your knees the support they really need. Great for athletes The extra support provided by this knee brace allows athletes suffering from sports-related injuries to continue their normal fitness routine. However, powerlifters and bodybuilders often favor BraceAbility’s closed patella knee sleeve for its extra support. Made from 3/16” thick premium-grade neoprene This discreet black knee sleeve is 13” long and 3/16” thick, making it not too flashy and flat enough to fit under ordinary pants, such as jeans, but still thick enough to provide adequate compression and support. Water resistant This water-resistant knee brace is perfect for swimming, a great exercise for people trying to lose weight and much easier on your knees than running if you have knee problems. Reduces swelling and promotes healing This neoprene material provides warmth and moderate elastic compression to your sore knee, which reduces swelling and encourages blood flow to speed up your healing process. Is This Black Neoprene Knee Sleeve Waterproof? Similar to the wetsuits scuba divers wear, this open patellar knee sleeve is unique because it is made out of premium-grade 3/16” thick neoprene, which is water-resistant. Meaning, this neoprene knee sleeve able to resist the penetration of water to some degree but not entirely. If you do wear this knee sleeve when you are sweating profusely, showering, or for a swim, it is important to lay this knee sleeve flat to dry out completely before using it again for swimming, rowing, sailing, waterskiing, wakeboarding or surfing, for example. For more knee supports that can be worn in the water, see BraceAbility’s full line of neoprene knee braces . Frequently Asked Questions about this Knee Sleeve Who can wear it? With sizes from S all the way up to 4XL, anyone from kids and teens to adults can wear this knee sleeve. Our larger sizes will even fit plus size or overweight men and women. How do I know what size to get? Using a fabric tape measure, measure the circumference of your leg 6” above the center of your kneecap and 6” below the center of your kneecap. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our detailed sizing instructions to choose the right size. What conditions does this knee brace treat? Helps to manage pain from injuries like knee arthritis, knee osteoarthritis (OA), knee sprains, knee strains, patellofemoral pain syndrome, runner's knee, jumper's knee, and general knee pain.  How do I put on this knee sleeve? Insert your foot into the largest end of the knee sleeve. The stitched seam should run down the backside of your leg, centered behind your kneecap Continue pulling up until there is approximately 6” of material above your kneecap. There should be opening around your kneecap (patella) and at the back of your knee (popliteal) Can I wear this brace over my pants? Yes, but this knee brace is meant to fit against your skin for a better grip. It can be worn above tight pants or leggings if necessary. How tall is this knee sleeve? 13” What material is this sleeve made of? Latex-free, 3/16” thick premium-grade neoprene When should I wear this knee sleeve? This lightweight knee brace can be comfortably worn all day while sitting, standing, and during physical activity. However, you should check with your primary care physician before wearing any compression knee sleeve while sleeping. Can I wash this neoprene knee brace?  Yes. We recommend hand washing this knee brace with mild soap and then lay flat to air dry completely for about 24 hours. 621642940469 7678469275701 new 24.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03k0501-neoprene-open-patella-open-back-athletic-knee-sleeve_grande.jpg?v=1529684692 641061979661 BraceAbility 03K0501XXXXL Knee Braces 4XLUS Closed Toe Medical Walking Shoe / Foot Protection Boot http://www.braceability.com/products/closed-toe-medical-shoe?variant=7609370181685 Closed Toe Medical Walking Shoe / Foot Protection Boot S BraceAbility's Closed Toe Walking Boot The BraceAbility closed toe medical walking shoe protection boot is a unique medical boot specifically designed to protect, support and treat the foot and toe from a wide variety of injuries and conditions. With the closed toe component of this medical boot, the medical shoe protects the toe and foot from further infection and pain, while also keeping the foot and toes warm and dry while walking, making it a great walking shoe for the colder months. The medical foot boot also features a large, spacious square toe design, which allows patients to have additional room in the boot for swelling, bandages , socks , and other dressings that would require extra space. For those who are no longer swelling or do not need bandages, the foot injury shoe has adjustable Velcro straps to increase compression and comfortability while walking during the recovery process. A Medical Boot for Broken Toe and Foot The closed toe walking boot is ideal for patients suffering from a broken toe or foot. With a closed toe protection feature, patients are able to walk outdoors or for a long period of time with their fractured toe and foot completely covered and protected. This will reduce the chance of further injury or infection, while also keeping the foot and toes dry and warm. An added benefit of this walking boot for a broken foot is the rocker bottom design. This feature promotes a natural gait while walking and helps reduce plantar pressure, making it ideal for broken feet to reduce swelling and enable the patient to walk easily and normally during the recovery process. The versatile square toe design of the medical boot makes it an excellent shoe for patients who need extra space with bandaging, casts, or a swollen foot. Providing extra support and protection, patients are able to stay mobile while recovering from foot and toe injuries . By minimizing pressure on the painful areas of the foot, faster healing is able to take place and keep patients moving during the healing process.  Surgical Boot Shoe for Foot Protection This medical walking shoe is also ideal for post-surgical use in order to help the foot heal and reduce any associated pain. Through compression, the post-op walking boot boosts blood circulations, which helps reduce swelling that often occurs after surgery when individuals walk. The Velcro straps allow the patient to adjust the necessary comfortability and compression levels during the recovery process as swelling is reduced and bandages are removed. The closed toe feature protects the area of the foot that was operated on from infection, swelling, and pain. It also keeps the foot warm and dry while walking outdoors. After foot surgery, swelling is very common. The wide square toe of the medical shoe allows room for this swelling and bandaging as well. As swelling reduces during the recovery process, patients are able to adjust the Velcro straps for a tighter fit. This medical shoe is also ideal for protecting patients wearing casts or just having their cast removed. This post-op shoe is additionally constructed of EVA insole material with tricot foam for ideal comfortability and protection of the foot. The surgical boot shoe features a lightweight design that is used to protect and provide comfort to the foot in order to ease pain that one may be experiencing. The boot is constructed of tricot foam that is both comfortable and durable for long-term use. The elastic strap located on the top of the surgical boot prevents the walking boot from slipping off your foot. The Velcro straps allow for a quick and simple application and removal process that is painless and noninvasive to one's injury.  Closed Toe Medical Shoe Features Comfortable, durable and customized fit Tricot foam, nylon, and durable rubber sole Allows for mobility while protecting your foot during the healing process after stress fractures, broken toes, bunionectomy and more. Features Velcro straps for quick and simple application & removal Rocker Sole to promote a natural gait  Square toe design for extra protection of the toes Can be worn on your right or left foot 608832061493 7609370181685 new 24.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03a08-closed-toe-medical-walking-shoe-protection-boot-main_grande.jpg?v=1539029678 641061980827 BraceAbility 03A0801S Post-op Shoes SUS Closed Toe Medical Walking Shoe / Foot Protection Boot http://www.braceability.com/products/closed-toe-medical-shoe?variant=7609370214453 Closed Toe Medical Walking Shoe / Foot Protection Boot M BraceAbility's Closed Toe Walking Boot The BraceAbility closed toe medical walking shoe protection boot is a unique medical boot specifically designed to protect, support and treat the foot and toe from a wide variety of injuries and conditions. With the closed toe component of this medical boot, the medical shoe protects the toe and foot from further infection and pain, while also keeping the foot and toes warm and dry while walking, making it a great walking shoe for the colder months. The medical foot boot also features a large, spacious square toe design, which allows patients to have additional room in the boot for swelling, bandages , socks , and other dressings that would require extra space. For those who are no longer swelling or do not need bandages, the foot injury shoe has adjustable Velcro straps to increase compression and comfortability while walking during the recovery process. A Medical Boot for Broken Toe and Foot The closed toe walking boot is ideal for patients suffering from a broken toe or foot. With a closed toe protection feature, patients are able to walk outdoors or for a long period of time with their fractured toe and foot completely covered and protected. This will reduce the chance of further injury or infection, while also keeping the foot and toes dry and warm. An added benefit of this walking boot for a broken foot is the rocker bottom design. This feature promotes a natural gait while walking and helps reduce plantar pressure, making it ideal for broken feet to reduce swelling and enable the patient to walk easily and normally during the recovery process. The versatile square toe design of the medical boot makes it an excellent shoe for patients who need extra space with bandaging, casts, or a swollen foot. Providing extra support and protection, patients are able to stay mobile while recovering from foot and toe injuries . By minimizing pressure on the painful areas of the foot, faster healing is able to take place and keep patients moving during the healing process.  Surgical Boot Shoe for Foot Protection This medical walking shoe is also ideal for post-surgical use in order to help the foot heal and reduce any associated pain. Through compression, the post-op walking boot boosts blood circulations, which helps reduce swelling that often occurs after surgery when individuals walk. The Velcro straps allow the patient to adjust the necessary comfortability and compression levels during the recovery process as swelling is reduced and bandages are removed. The closed toe feature protects the area of the foot that was operated on from infection, swelling, and pain. It also keeps the foot warm and dry while walking outdoors. After foot surgery, swelling is very common. The wide square toe of the medical shoe allows room for this swelling and bandaging as well. As swelling reduces during the recovery process, patients are able to adjust the Velcro straps for a tighter fit. This medical shoe is also ideal for protecting patients wearing casts or just having their cast removed. This post-op shoe is additionally constructed of EVA insole material with tricot foam for ideal comfortability and protection of the foot. The surgical boot shoe features a lightweight design that is used to protect and provide comfort to the foot in order to ease pain that one may be experiencing. The boot is constructed of tricot foam that is both comfortable and durable for long-term use. The elastic strap located on the top of the surgical boot prevents the walking boot from slipping off your foot. The Velcro straps allow for a quick and simple application and removal process that is painless and noninvasive to one's injury.  Closed Toe Medical Shoe Features Comfortable, durable and customized fit Tricot foam, nylon, and durable rubber sole Allows for mobility while protecting your foot during the healing process after stress fractures, broken toes, bunionectomy and more. Features Velcro straps for quick and simple application & removal Rocker Sole to promote a natural gait  Square toe design for extra protection of the toes Can be worn on your right or left foot 608832061493 7609370214453 new 24.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03a08-closed-toe-medical-walking-shoe-protection-boot-main_grande.jpg?v=1539029678 641061980834 BraceAbility 03A0801M Post-op Shoes MUS Closed Toe Medical Walking Shoe / Foot Protection Boot http://www.braceability.com/products/closed-toe-medical-shoe?variant=7609370247221 Closed Toe Medical Walking Shoe / Foot Protection Boot L BraceAbility's Closed Toe Walking Boot The BraceAbility closed toe medical walking shoe protection boot is a unique medical boot specifically designed to protect, support and treat the foot and toe from a wide variety of injuries and conditions. With the closed toe component of this medical boot, the medical shoe protects the toe and foot from further infection and pain, while also keeping the foot and toes warm and dry while walking, making it a great walking shoe for the colder months. The medical foot boot also features a large, spacious square toe design, which allows patients to have additional room in the boot for swelling, bandages , socks , and other dressings that would require extra space. For those who are no longer swelling or do not need bandages, the foot injury shoe has adjustable Velcro straps to increase compression and comfortability while walking during the recovery process. A Medical Boot for Broken Toe and Foot The closed toe walking boot is ideal for patients suffering from a broken toe or foot. With a closed toe protection feature, patients are able to walk outdoors or for a long period of time with their fractured toe and foot completely covered and protected. This will reduce the chance of further injury or infection, while also keeping the foot and toes dry and warm. An added benefit of this walking boot for a broken foot is the rocker bottom design. This feature promotes a natural gait while walking and helps reduce plantar pressure, making it ideal for broken feet to reduce swelling and enable the patient to walk easily and normally during the recovery process. The versatile square toe design of the medical boot makes it an excellent shoe for patients who need extra space with bandaging, casts, or a swollen foot. Providing extra support and protection, patients are able to stay mobile while recovering from foot and toe injuries . By minimizing pressure on the painful areas of the foot, faster healing is able to take place and keep patients moving during the healing process.  Surgical Boot Shoe for Foot Protection This medical walking shoe is also ideal for post-surgical use in order to help the foot heal and reduce any associated pain. Through compression, the post-op walking boot boosts blood circulations, which helps reduce swelling that often occurs after surgery when individuals walk. The Velcro straps allow the patient to adjust the necessary comfortability and compression levels during the recovery process as swelling is reduced and bandages are removed. The closed toe feature protects the area of the foot that was operated on from infection, swelling, and pain. It also keeps the foot warm and dry while walking outdoors. After foot surgery, swelling is very common. The wide square toe of the medical shoe allows room for this swelling and bandaging as well. As swelling reduces during the recovery process, patients are able to adjust the Velcro straps for a tighter fit. This medical shoe is also ideal for protecting patients wearing casts or just having their cast removed. This post-op shoe is additionally constructed of EVA insole material with tricot foam for ideal comfortability and protection of the foot. The surgical boot shoe features a lightweight design that is used to protect and provide comfort to the foot in order to ease pain that one may be experiencing. The boot is constructed of tricot foam that is both comfortable and durable for long-term use. The elastic strap located on the top of the surgical boot prevents the walking boot from slipping off your foot. The Velcro straps allow for a quick and simple application and removal process that is painless and noninvasive to one's injury.  Closed Toe Medical Shoe Features Comfortable, durable and customized fit Tricot foam, nylon, and durable rubber sole Allows for mobility while protecting your foot during the healing process after stress fractures, broken toes, bunionectomy and more. Features Velcro straps for quick and simple application & removal Rocker Sole to promote a natural gait  Square toe design for extra protection of the toes Can be worn on your right or left foot 608832061493 7609370247221 new 24.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03a08-closed-toe-medical-walking-shoe-protection-boot-main_grande.jpg?v=1539029678 641061980841 BraceAbility 03A0801L Post-op Shoes LUS Closed Toe Medical Walking Shoe / Foot Protection Boot http://www.braceability.com/products/closed-toe-medical-shoe?variant=7609370279989 Closed Toe Medical Walking Shoe / Foot Protection Boot XL BraceAbility's Closed Toe Walking Boot The BraceAbility closed toe medical walking shoe protection boot is a unique medical boot specifically designed to protect, support and treat the foot and toe from a wide variety of injuries and conditions. With the closed toe component of this medical boot, the medical shoe protects the toe and foot from further infection and pain, while also keeping the foot and toes warm and dry while walking, making it a great walking shoe for the colder months. The medical foot boot also features a large, spacious square toe design, which allows patients to have additional room in the boot for swelling, bandages , socks , and other dressings that would require extra space. For those who are no longer swelling or do not need bandages, the foot injury shoe has adjustable Velcro straps to increase compression and comfortability while walking during the recovery process. A Medical Boot for Broken Toe and Foot The closed toe walking boot is ideal for patients suffering from a broken toe or foot. With a closed toe protection feature, patients are able to walk outdoors or for a long period of time with their fractured toe and foot completely covered and protected. This will reduce the chance of further injury or infection, while also keeping the foot and toes dry and warm. An added benefit of this walking boot for a broken foot is the rocker bottom design. This feature promotes a natural gait while walking and helps reduce plantar pressure, making it ideal for broken feet to reduce swelling and enable the patient to walk easily and normally during the recovery process. The versatile square toe design of the medical boot makes it an excellent shoe for patients who need extra space with bandaging, casts, or a swollen foot. Providing extra support and protection, patients are able to stay mobile while recovering from foot and toe injuries . By minimizing pressure on the painful areas of the foot, faster healing is able to take place and keep patients moving during the healing process.  Surgical Boot Shoe for Foot Protection This medical walking shoe is also ideal for post-surgical use in order to help the foot heal and reduce any associated pain. Through compression, the post-op walking boot boosts blood circulations, which helps reduce swelling that often occurs after surgery when individuals walk. The Velcro straps allow the patient to adjust the necessary comfortability and compression levels during the recovery process as swelling is reduced and bandages are removed. The closed toe feature protects the area of the foot that was operated on from infection, swelling, and pain. It also keeps the foot warm and dry while walking outdoors. After foot surgery, swelling is very common. The wide square toe of the medical shoe allows room for this swelling and bandaging as well. As swelling reduces during the recovery process, patients are able to adjust the Velcro straps for a tighter fit. This medical shoe is also ideal for protecting patients wearing casts or just having their cast removed. This post-op shoe is additionally constructed of EVA insole material with tricot foam for ideal comfortability and protection of the foot. The surgical boot shoe features a lightweight design that is used to protect and provide comfort to the foot in order to ease pain that one may be experiencing. The boot is constructed of tricot foam that is both comfortable and durable for long-term use. The elastic strap located on the top of the surgical boot prevents the walking boot from slipping off your foot. The Velcro straps allow for a quick and simple application and removal process that is painless and noninvasive to one's injury.  Closed Toe Medical Shoe Features Comfortable, durable and customized fit Tricot foam, nylon, and durable rubber sole Allows for mobility while protecting your foot during the healing process after stress fractures, broken toes, bunionectomy and more. Features Velcro straps for quick and simple application & removal Rocker Sole to promote a natural gait  Square toe design for extra protection of the toes Can be worn on your right or left foot 608832061493 7609370279989 new 24.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03a08-closed-toe-medical-walking-shoe-protection-boot-main_grande.jpg?v=1539029678 641061980858 BraceAbility 03A0801XL Post-op Shoes XLUS Women's Back Brace for Female Lower Back Pain (Plus Sizes up to 4XL) http://www.braceability.com/products/back-brace-for-women?variant=7563365777461 Women's Back Brace for Female Lower Back Pain (Plus Sizes up to 4XL) S Back Brace for Women with Low Back Pain There are many causes of low back pain in women. The good news is that this back support belt for women can help with many of them. And it is available in extra large sizes, fitting larger body circumferences up to 69 inches. This lumbar sacral orthosis (LSO) for women supports your low back and forces you to exercise good posture, in the interest of easing pain and preventing further damage. Top 7 Causes of Lower Back Pain in Women There is no shortage of things that might be a cause of lower back pain in women. Fortunately, wearing women’s back braces can help with a number of these sources of back pain as they ease stress on the low back and apply compression that stimulates healing and reduces inflammation. It also promotes good posture which is ideal to prevent further damage. Improper Body Mechanics Lifting a heavy object, twisting or moving suddenly might strain the muscle or ligaments in your back, causing low back pain as well as stiffness and possibly muscle spasms. Such injuries are common causes of upper back pain in women as well. The compression this low-back brace applies can soothe painful inflammation and encourage healing. Pressure on Your Nerves Another possible source of lower back pain in young ladies is pressure on the nerves, especially the sciatic nerve, which causes pain, tingling and numbness in your low back that branches to your hips, buttocks, and legs. Typically, sciatica affects just one side of your body, so this is often a cause of either lower right side or lower left side back pain in women, but not both. It is usually pressured by a herniated disc or a bone spur. While a doctor can address why there is pressure on your nerve, the good posture this lumbar brace makes you adhere to, as well as the support it provides can make this a helpful component of treatment. Stress Fractures Stress fractures in the vertebra of your back can cause slipping of these discs known as spondylolisthesis , which may place pressure on your spinal cord or nerve roots. This may also lead to radiating pain and numbness, resulting in right or left lower back pain in females. This is just one example of instances where degenerative changes in your back might cause pain or pressure on your nerve roots, causing left or right lower back pain. The lumbar spine, especially, is subject to a high degree of stress that over time can lead to cartilage erosion, stress fractures, etc. Wearing a brace for lower back support that also provides abdominal compression can reduce the amount of pressure on your lumbar spine and limit any harmful movements. Abnormal Spinal Curvature An abnormal curve of the spine due to a deformity present from birth, degenerative changes or poor posture, like kyphosis , lordosis , or scoliosis can also lead to both low and upper back pain. In some cases, this can be fixed, possibly with the help of a back brace, and in other cases treatment focuses on slowing the progression of the problem. Pregnancy Cartilage erosion or too much motion at the sacroiliac (SI) joint (often due to pregnancy) can lead to SI joint dysfunction that can cause lower back and groin pain in women. Generally, this discomfort is isolated to one side, so pain in the lower left or lower right back of a female would be more common than discomfort across your entire low back. BraceAbility offers a number of pregnancy back supports and maternity braces . Being Overweight or Obese Being overweight or obese also increases the amount of stress on the spine and tissues of the back, accelerating degenerative changes of its tissues, increasing lordosis of the spine and increasing your risk of back injury. Aging As you age, your spine becomes more prone to injury. Therefore, it is important to engage in low-impact exercises to keep your back strong and limber and to be conscientious of maintaining good posture so as not to increase existing strain on the back. Are you a Woman with Lower Abdominal Pain and Lower Left or Right Back Pain? Another benefit of this female back binder is that it provides abdominal pressure, which takes pressure off the lumbar back. Plus it makes this support multi-functional in instances where both lower abdominal pain and back pain in women are at play. The combination of lower back and abdominal pain in women can be a sign of a more serious problem/situation such as: Pelvic inflammatory disease Endometriosis Pancreatitis Abdominal aneurysm Constipation Kidney stone Pregnancy Gallstones Urinary tract infection This is by no means an exhaustive list of what might be causing lower stomach and back pain in women, but as you can see, many of these will not be remedied by wearing a lumbar back support. Therefore, it is important to seek the help of a medical professional if you are experiencing lower abdomen and lower back pain. Key Features of this Brace for Women with Mild or Chronic Low Back Pain The crisscross back panel of this back pain brace, as well as its double-pull elastic tension straps, support and apply compression to your lower back. These features and more make it an ideal back belt for dealing with moderate pain in your lower back, lower left and lower right abdominal pain, spinal arthritis , back muscle weakness, pulls or tears , and/or lumbar sprains or strains. Elastic Material Applies Lightweight, Flexible Support to the Low Back This back brace for women is composed of a latex-free, form-fitting elastic. The material will conform to the curves of your body while providing light compression, which can help reduce female lower back pain while encouraging healing of the various causes of back pain. The compression reduces inflammation that can be one of the reasons for lower back pain in women. This also improves blood flow to your low back, which encourages quick healing. The material will stay put, as needed for treating low back pain in women. The back support for women that hugs your body is quite sleek in terms of design, helping it to fit discreetly under your clothes if needed so that addressing lower back pain causes in women is not a wardrobe-disrupting affair. Adjustable Velcro Straps The back posture brace for women comes with support straps for additional support to your lumbar spine. In addition to addressing right or left side lower back pain in women, this also helps hold your brace in place. The brace can be easily secured via its Velcro closure that secures at the front of your body. This also enables easy adjustment of fit. Removable Plastic Stays The women’s back brace is wider in the back and tapered at the front for a more functional, comfortable fit. The back panel has four plastic stays for addressing the causes of lower back pain in women. The plastic stays are lightweight and contoured to fit the shape of your back - so they support your lower back while still being comfortable. You can bend them to adjust their shape as needed, and you can remove them if you don't need that much support. Relieves Lower Back Pain from a Variety of Injuries and Conditions This lumbar spine support treats acute or chronic back pain stemming from a variety of causes, from muscle strain to degenerative disc disease to poor posture; it can also help with radiating pain to the hips, groin, pelvis, legs, etc. Frequently Asked Questions About This Lower Back Corset What conditions does it help treat? This girdle for low back pain can help treat moderate lower back pain, muscle strains, tears, or pulls, bulging discs, herniated discs, and hip pain. Who can wear this lumbar compression brace? The sizing options make it easy for both average and plus size women to find a size that fits. How do I know which size to get? Using a soft/flexible tape measure, find the circumference around your widest part of your body where you plan to wear this brace, in inches. This lower back brace fits body circumferences of 25” up to 69”. How tall is the orthopedic back brace? The brace tapers from 10” tall in the back to 6” in the front. What is the brace made of? This brace is made out of a latex-free, elastic material. The removable stays are plastic. How do I adjust the brace? Grab the double-pull tension straps (located on the outside of the brace) and adjust them to make it either tighter or looser, then re-apply the Velcro closures. How do I put on the brace? Unhook all Velcro closures and lay the brace flat on the floor to identify the top side. The top has openings, which allow you to remove the metal stays. Next, position the brace behind your body so it’s centered on your back with the bottom of the brace sitting at the widest part of your hips. Fold the left side of the brace towards the middle of your stomach. Do the same with the right side but pull firmly and secure the Velcro closure. Repeat this process with the double-pull tension straps for your desired compression level. When do I wear it? Can I sleep in the brace? Thanks to the lightweight, latex-free material it's possible for you to wear this brace 24/7 if advised by your doctor. You can also sleep comfortably in this brace due to its soft material. It’s advised to speak with a medical professional before wearing a brace for an extended amount of time. Washing instructions: To wash the brace, first, remove stays and close all Velcro closures. Handwash in warm water with mild soap. Do not use bleach. The brace should be air-dried. Do not use high temperatures to wash or dry. Color:  Neutral white color 603207401525 7563365777461 new 39.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03b0202-womens-back-brace-for-female-lower-back-pain_grande.jpg?v=1527633657 641061975359 BraceAbility 03B0202S Back Braces SUS Women's Back Brace for Female Lower Back Pain (Plus Sizes up to 4XL) http://www.braceability.com/products/back-brace-for-women?variant=7563372068917 Women's Back Brace for Female Lower Back Pain (Plus Sizes up to 4XL) M Back Brace for Women with Low Back Pain There are many causes of low back pain in women. The good news is that this back support belt for women can help with many of them. And it is available in extra large sizes, fitting larger body circumferences up to 69 inches. This lumbar sacral orthosis (LSO) for women supports your low back and forces you to exercise good posture, in the interest of easing pain and preventing further damage. Top 7 Causes of Lower Back Pain in Women There is no shortage of things that might be a cause of lower back pain in women. Fortunately, wearing women’s back braces can help with a number of these sources of back pain as they ease stress on the low back and apply compression that stimulates healing and reduces inflammation. It also promotes good posture which is ideal to prevent further damage. Improper Body Mechanics Lifting a heavy object, twisting or moving suddenly might strain the muscle or ligaments in your back, causing low back pain as well as stiffness and possibly muscle spasms. Such injuries are common causes of upper back pain in women as well. The compression this low-back brace applies can soothe painful inflammation and encourage healing. Pressure on Your Nerves Another possible source of lower back pain in young ladies is pressure on the nerves, especially the sciatic nerve, which causes pain, tingling and numbness in your low back that branches to your hips, buttocks, and legs. Typically, sciatica affects just one side of your body, so this is often a cause of either lower right side or lower left side back pain in women, but not both. It is usually pressured by a herniated disc or a bone spur. While a doctor can address why there is pressure on your nerve, the good posture this lumbar brace makes you adhere to, as well as the support it provides can make this a helpful component of treatment. Stress Fractures Stress fractures in the vertebra of your back can cause slipping of these discs known as spondylolisthesis , which may place pressure on your spinal cord or nerve roots. This may also lead to radiating pain and numbness, resulting in right or left lower back pain in females. This is just one example of instances where degenerative changes in your back might cause pain or pressure on your nerve roots, causing left or right lower back pain. The lumbar spine, especially, is subject to a high degree of stress that over time can lead to cartilage erosion, stress fractures, etc. Wearing a brace for lower back support that also provides abdominal compression can reduce the amount of pressure on your lumbar spine and limit any harmful movements. Abnormal Spinal Curvature An abnormal curve of the spine due to a deformity present from birth, degenerative changes or poor posture, like kyphosis , lordosis , or scoliosis can also lead to both low and upper back pain. In some cases, this can be fixed, possibly with the help of a back brace, and in other cases treatment focuses on slowing the progression of the problem. Pregnancy Cartilage erosion or too much motion at the sacroiliac (SI) joint (often due to pregnancy) can lead to SI joint dysfunction that can cause lower back and groin pain in women. Generally, this discomfort is isolated to one side, so pain in the lower left or lower right back of a female would be more common than discomfort across your entire low back. BraceAbility offers a number of pregnancy back supports and maternity braces . Being Overweight or Obese Being overweight or obese also increases the amount of stress on the spine and tissues of the back, accelerating degenerative changes of its tissues, increasing lordosis of the spine and increasing your risk of back injury. Aging As you age, your spine becomes more prone to injury. Therefore, it is important to engage in low-impact exercises to keep your back strong and limber and to be conscientious of maintaining good posture so as not to increase existing strain on the back. Are you a Woman with Lower Abdominal Pain and Lower Left or Right Back Pain? Another benefit of this female back binder is that it provides abdominal pressure, which takes pressure off the lumbar back. Plus it makes this support multi-functional in instances where both lower abdominal pain and back pain in women are at play. The combination of lower back and abdominal pain in women can be a sign of a more serious problem/situation such as: Pelvic inflammatory disease Endometriosis Pancreatitis Abdominal aneurysm Constipation Kidney stone Pregnancy Gallstones Urinary tract infection This is by no means an exhaustive list of what might be causing lower stomach and back pain in women, but as you can see, many of these will not be remedied by wearing a lumbar back support. Therefore, it is important to seek the help of a medical professional if you are experiencing lower abdomen and lower back pain. Key Features of this Brace for Women with Mild or Chronic Low Back Pain The crisscross back panel of this back pain brace, as well as its double-pull elastic tension straps, support and apply compression to your lower back. These features and more make it an ideal back belt for dealing with moderate pain in your lower back, lower left and lower right abdominal pain, spinal arthritis , back muscle weakness, pulls or tears , and/or lumbar sprains or strains. Elastic Material Applies Lightweight, Flexible Support to the Low Back This back brace for women is composed of a latex-free, form-fitting elastic. The material will conform to the curves of your body while providing light compression, which can help reduce female lower back pain while encouraging healing of the various causes of back pain. The compression reduces inflammation that can be one of the reasons for lower back pain in women. This also improves blood flow to your low back, which encourages quick healing. The material will stay put, as needed for treating low back pain in women. The back support for women that hugs your body is quite sleek in terms of design, helping it to fit discreetly under your clothes if needed so that addressing lower back pain causes in women is not a wardrobe-disrupting affair. Adjustable Velcro Straps The back posture brace for women comes with support straps for additional support to your lumbar spine. In addition to addressing right or left side lower back pain in women, this also helps hold your brace in place. The brace can be easily secured via its Velcro closure that secures at the front of your body. This also enables easy adjustment of fit. Removable Plastic Stays The women’s back brace is wider in the back and tapered at the front for a more functional, comfortable fit. The back panel has four plastic stays for addressing the causes of lower back pain in women. The plastic stays are lightweight and contoured to fit the shape of your back - so they support your lower back while still being comfortable. You can bend them to adjust their shape as needed, and you can remove them if you don't need that much support. Relieves Lower Back Pain from a Variety of Injuries and Conditions This lumbar spine support treats acute or chronic back pain stemming from a variety of causes, from muscle strain to degenerative disc disease to poor posture; it can also help with radiating pain to the hips, groin, pelvis, legs, etc. Frequently Asked Questions About This Lower Back Corset What conditions does it help treat? This girdle for low back pain can help treat moderate lower back pain, muscle strains, tears, or pulls, bulging discs, herniated discs, and hip pain. Who can wear this lumbar compression brace? The sizing options make it easy for both average and plus size women to find a size that fits. How do I know which size to get? Using a soft/flexible tape measure, find the circumference around your widest part of your body where you plan to wear this brace, in inches. This lower back brace fits body circumferences of 25” up to 69”. How tall is the orthopedic back brace? The brace tapers from 10” tall in the back to 6” in the front. What is the brace made of? This brace is made out of a latex-free, elastic material. The removable stays are plastic. How do I adjust the brace? Grab the double-pull tension straps (located on the outside of the brace) and adjust them to make it either tighter or looser, then re-apply the Velcro closures. How do I put on the brace? Unhook all Velcro closures and lay the brace flat on the floor to identify the top side. The top has openings, which allow you to remove the metal stays. Next, position the brace behind your body so it’s centered on your back with the bottom of the brace sitting at the widest part of your hips. Fold the left side of the brace towards the middle of your stomach. Do the same with the right side but pull firmly and secure the Velcro closure. Repeat this process with the double-pull tension straps for your desired compression level. When do I wear it? Can I sleep in the brace? Thanks to the lightweight, latex-free material it's possible for you to wear this brace 24/7 if advised by your doctor. You can also sleep comfortably in this brace due to its soft material. It’s advised to speak with a medical professional before wearing a brace for an extended amount of time. Washing instructions: To wash the brace, first, remove stays and close all Velcro closures. Handwash in warm water with mild soap. Do not use bleach. The brace should be air-dried. Do not use high temperatures to wash or dry. Color:  Neutral white color 603207401525 7563372068917 new 39.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03b0202-womens-back-brace-for-female-lower-back-pain_grande.jpg?v=1527633657 641061975366 BraceAbility 03B0202M Back Braces MUS Women's Back Brace for Female Lower Back Pain (Plus Sizes up to 4XL) http://www.braceability.com/products/back-brace-for-women?variant=7563372101685 Women's Back Brace for Female Lower Back Pain (Plus Sizes up to 4XL) L Back Brace for Women with Low Back Pain There are many causes of low back pain in women. The good news is that this back support belt for women can help with many of them. And it is available in extra large sizes, fitting larger body circumferences up to 69 inches. This lumbar sacral orthosis (LSO) for women supports your low back and forces you to exercise good posture, in the interest of easing pain and preventing further damage. Top 7 Causes of Lower Back Pain in Women There is no shortage of things that might be a cause of lower back pain in women. Fortunately, wearing women’s back braces can help with a number of these sources of back pain as they ease stress on the low back and apply compression that stimulates healing and reduces inflammation. It also promotes good posture which is ideal to prevent further damage. Improper Body Mechanics Lifting a heavy object, twisting or moving suddenly might strain the muscle or ligaments in your back, causing low back pain as well as stiffness and possibly muscle spasms. Such injuries are common causes of upper back pain in women as well. The compression this low-back brace applies can soothe painful inflammation and encourage healing. Pressure on Your Nerves Another possible source of lower back pain in young ladies is pressure on the nerves, especially the sciatic nerve, which causes pain, tingling and numbness in your low back that branches to your hips, buttocks, and legs. Typically, sciatica affects just one side of your body, so this is often a cause of either lower right side or lower left side back pain in women, but not both. It is usually pressured by a herniated disc or a bone spur. While a doctor can address why there is pressure on your nerve, the good posture this lumbar brace makes you adhere to, as well as the support it provides can make this a helpful component of treatment. Stress Fractures Stress fractures in the vertebra of your back can cause slipping of these discs known as spondylolisthesis , which may place pressure on your spinal cord or nerve roots. This may also lead to radiating pain and numbness, resulting in right or left lower back pain in females. This is just one example of instances where degenerative changes in your back might cause pain or pressure on your nerve roots, causing left or right lower back pain. The lumbar spine, especially, is subject to a high degree of stress that over time can lead to cartilage erosion, stress fractures, etc. Wearing a brace for lower back support that also provides abdominal compression can reduce the amount of pressure on your lumbar spine and limit any harmful movements. Abnormal Spinal Curvature An abnormal curve of the spine due to a deformity present from birth, degenerative changes or poor posture, like kyphosis , lordosis , or scoliosis can also lead to both low and upper back pain. In some cases, this can be fixed, possibly with the help of a back brace, and in other cases treatment focuses on slowing the progression of the problem. Pregnancy Cartilage erosion or too much motion at the sacroiliac (SI) joint (often due to pregnancy) can lead to SI joint dysfunction that can cause lower back and groin pain in women. Generally, this discomfort is isolated to one side, so pain in the lower left or lower right back of a female would be more common than discomfort across your entire low back. BraceAbility offers a number of pregnancy back supports and maternity braces . Being Overweight or Obese Being overweight or obese also increases the amount of stress on the spine and tissues of the back, accelerating degenerative changes of its tissues, increasing lordosis of the spine and increasing your risk of back injury. Aging As you age, your spine becomes more prone to injury. Therefore, it is important to engage in low-impact exercises to keep your back strong and limber and to be conscientious of maintaining good posture so as not to increase existing strain on the back. Are you a Woman with Lower Abdominal Pain and Lower Left or Right Back Pain? Another benefit of this female back binder is that it provides abdominal pressure, which takes pressure off the lumbar back. Plus it makes this support multi-functional in instances where both lower abdominal pain and back pain in women are at play. The combination of lower back and abdominal pain in women can be a sign of a more serious problem/situation such as: Pelvic inflammatory disease Endometriosis Pancreatitis Abdominal aneurysm Constipation Kidney stone Pregnancy Gallstones Urinary tract infection This is by no means an exhaustive list of what might be causing lower stomach and back pain in women, but as you can see, many of these will not be remedied by wearing a lumbar back support. Therefore, it is important to seek the help of a medical professional if you are experiencing lower abdomen and lower back pain. Key Features of this Brace for Women with Mild or Chronic Low Back Pain The crisscross back panel of this back pain brace, as well as its double-pull elastic tension straps, support and apply compression to your lower back. These features and more make it an ideal back belt for dealing with moderate pain in your lower back, lower left and lower right abdominal pain, spinal arthritis , back muscle weakness, pulls or tears , and/or lumbar sprains or strains. Elastic Material Applies Lightweight, Flexible Support to the Low Back This back brace for women is composed of a latex-free, form-fitting elastic. The material will conform to the curves of your body while providing light compression, which can help reduce female lower back pain while encouraging healing of the various causes of back pain. The compression reduces inflammation that can be one of the reasons for lower back pain in women. This also improves blood flow to your low back, which encourages quick healing. The material will stay put, as needed for treating low back pain in women. The back support for women that hugs your body is quite sleek in terms of design, helping it to fit discreetly under your clothes if needed so that addressing lower back pain causes in women is not a wardrobe-disrupting affair. Adjustable Velcro Straps The back posture brace for women comes with support straps for additional support to your lumbar spine. In addition to addressing right or left side lower back pain in women, this also helps hold your brace in place. The brace can be easily secured via its Velcro closure that secures at the front of your body. This also enables easy adjustment of fit. Removable Plastic Stays The women’s back brace is wider in the back and tapered at the front for a more functional, comfortable fit. The back panel has four plastic stays for addressing the causes of lower back pain in women. The plastic stays are lightweight and contoured to fit the shape of your back - so they support your lower back while still being comfortable. You can bend them to adjust their shape as needed, and you can remove them if you don't need that much support. Relieves Lower Back Pain from a Variety of Injuries and Conditions This lumbar spine support treats acute or chronic back pain stemming from a variety of causes, from muscle strain to degenerative disc disease to poor posture; it can also help with radiating pain to the hips, groin, pelvis, legs, etc. Frequently Asked Questions About This Lower Back Corset What conditions does it help treat? This girdle for low back pain can help treat moderate lower back pain, muscle strains, tears, or pulls, bulging discs, herniated discs, and hip pain. Who can wear this lumbar compression brace? The sizing options make it easy for both average and plus size women to find a size that fits. How do I know which size to get? Using a soft/flexible tape measure, find the circumference around your widest part of your body where you plan to wear this brace, in inches. This lower back brace fits body circumferences of 25” up to 69”. How tall is the orthopedic back brace? The brace tapers from 10” tall in the back to 6” in the front. What is the brace made of? This brace is made out of a latex-free, elastic material. The removable stays are plastic. How do I adjust the brace? Grab the double-pull tension straps (located on the outside of the brace) and adjust them to make it either tighter or looser, then re-apply the Velcro closures. How do I put on the brace? Unhook all Velcro closures and lay the brace flat on the floor to identify the top side. The top has openings, which allow you to remove the metal stays. Next, position the brace behind your body so it’s centered on your back with the bottom of the brace sitting at the widest part of your hips. Fold the left side of the brace towards the middle of your stomach. Do the same with the right side but pull firmly and secure the Velcro closure. Repeat this process with the double-pull tension straps for your desired compression level. When do I wear it? Can I sleep in the brace? Thanks to the lightweight, latex-free material it's possible for you to wear this brace 24/7 if advised by your doctor. You can also sleep comfortably in this brace due to its soft material. It’s advised to speak with a medical professional before wearing a brace for an extended amount of time. Washing instructions: To wash the brace, first, remove stays and close all Velcro closures. Handwash in warm water with mild soap. Do not use bleach. The brace should be air-dried. Do not use high temperatures to wash or dry. Color:  Neutral white color 603207401525 7563372101685 new 39.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03b0202-womens-back-brace-for-female-lower-back-pain_grande.jpg?v=1527633657 641061975373 BraceAbility 03B0202L Back Braces LUS Women's Back Brace for Female Lower Back Pain (Plus Sizes up to 4XL) http://www.braceability.com/products/back-brace-for-women?variant=7563372134453 Women's Back Brace for Female Lower Back Pain (Plus Sizes up to 4XL) XL Back Brace for Women with Low Back Pain There are many causes of low back pain in women. The good news is that this back support belt for women can help with many of them. And it is available in extra large sizes, fitting larger body circumferences up to 69 inches. This lumbar sacral orthosis (LSO) for women supports your low back and forces you to exercise good posture, in the interest of easing pain and preventing further damage. Top 7 Causes of Lower Back Pain in Women There is no shortage of things that might be a cause of lower back pain in women. Fortunately, wearing women’s back braces can help with a number of these sources of back pain as they ease stress on the low back and apply compression that stimulates healing and reduces inflammation. It also promotes good posture which is ideal to prevent further damage. Improper Body Mechanics Lifting a heavy object, twisting or moving suddenly might strain the muscle or ligaments in your back, causing low back pain as well as stiffness and possibly muscle spasms. Such injuries are common causes of upper back pain in women as well. The compression this low-back brace applies can soothe painful inflammation and encourage healing. Pressure on Your Nerves Another possible source of lower back pain in young ladies is pressure on the nerves, especially the sciatic nerve, which causes pain, tingling and numbness in your low back that branches to your hips, buttocks, and legs. Typically, sciatica affects just one side of your body, so this is often a cause of either lower right side or lower left side back pain in women, but not both. It is usually pressured by a herniated disc or a bone spur. While a doctor can address why there is pressure on your nerve, the good posture this lumbar brace makes you adhere to, as well as the support it provides can make this a helpful component of treatment. Stress Fractures Stress fractures in the vertebra of your back can cause slipping of these discs known as spondylolisthesis , which may place pressure on your spinal cord or nerve roots. This may also lead to radiating pain and numbness, resulting in right or left lower back pain in females. This is just one example of instances where degenerative changes in your back might cause pain or pressure on your nerve roots, causing left or right lower back pain. The lumbar spine, especially, is subject to a high degree of stress that over time can lead to cartilage erosion, stress fractures, etc. Wearing a brace for lower back support that also provides abdominal compression can reduce the amount of pressure on your lumbar spine and limit any harmful movements. Abnormal Spinal Curvature An abnormal curve of the spine due to a deformity present from birth, degenerative changes or poor posture, like kyphosis , lordosis , or scoliosis can also lead to both low and upper back pain. In some cases, this can be fixed, possibly with the help of a back brace, and in other cases treatment focuses on slowing the progression of the problem. Pregnancy Cartilage erosion or too much motion at the sacroiliac (SI) joint (often due to pregnancy) can lead to SI joint dysfunction that can cause lower back and groin pain in women. Generally, this discomfort is isolated to one side, so pain in the lower left or lower right back of a female would be more common than discomfort across your entire low back. BraceAbility offers a number of pregnancy back supports and maternity braces . Being Overweight or Obese Being overweight or obese also increases the amount of stress on the spine and tissues of the back, accelerating degenerative changes of its tissues, increasing lordosis of the spine and increasing your risk of back injury. Aging As you age, your spine becomes more prone to injury. Therefore, it is important to engage in low-impact exercises to keep your back strong and limber and to be conscientious of maintaining good posture so as not to increase existing strain on the back. Are you a Woman with Lower Abdominal Pain and Lower Left or Right Back Pain? Another benefit of this female back binder is that it provides abdominal pressure, which takes pressure off the lumbar back. Plus it makes this support multi-functional in instances where both lower abdominal pain and back pain in women are at play. The combination of lower back and abdominal pain in women can be a sign of a more serious problem/situation such as: Pelvic inflammatory disease Endometriosis Pancreatitis Abdominal aneurysm Constipation Kidney stone Pregnancy Gallstones Urinary tract infection This is by no means an exhaustive list of what might be causing lower stomach and back pain in women, but as you can see, many of these will not be remedied by wearing a lumbar back support. Therefore, it is important to seek the help of a medical professional if you are experiencing lower abdomen and lower back pain. Key Features of this Brace for Women with Mild or Chronic Low Back Pain The crisscross back panel of this back pain brace, as well as its double-pull elastic tension straps, support and apply compression to your lower back. These features and more make it an ideal back belt for dealing with moderate pain in your lower back, lower left and lower right abdominal pain, spinal arthritis , back muscle weakness, pulls or tears , and/or lumbar sprains or strains. Elastic Material Applies Lightweight, Flexible Support to the Low Back This back brace for women is composed of a latex-free, form-fitting elastic. The material will conform to the curves of your body while providing light compression, which can help reduce female lower back pain while encouraging healing of the various causes of back pain. The compression reduces inflammation that can be one of the reasons for lower back pain in women. This also improves blood flow to your low back, which encourages quick healing. The material will stay put, as needed for treating low back pain in women. The back support for women that hugs your body is quite sleek in terms of design, helping it to fit discreetly under your clothes if needed so that addressing lower back pain causes in women is not a wardrobe-disrupting affair. Adjustable Velcro Straps The back posture brace for women comes with support straps for additional support to your lumbar spine. In addition to addressing right or left side lower back pain in women, this also helps hold your brace in place. The brace can be easily secured via its Velcro closure that secures at the front of your body. This also enables easy adjustment of fit. Removable Plastic Stays The women’s back brace is wider in the back and tapered at the front for a more functional, comfortable fit. The back panel has four plastic stays for addressing the causes of lower back pain in women. The plastic stays are lightweight and contoured to fit the shape of your back - so they support your lower back while still being comfortable. You can bend them to adjust their shape as needed, and you can remove them if you don't need that much support. Relieves Lower Back Pain from a Variety of Injuries and Conditions This lumbar spine support treats acute or chronic back pain stemming from a variety of causes, from muscle strain to degenerative disc disease to poor posture; it can also help with radiating pain to the hips, groin, pelvis, legs, etc. Frequently Asked Questions About This Lower Back Corset What conditions does it help treat? This girdle for low back pain can help treat moderate lower back pain, muscle strains, tears, or pulls, bulging discs, herniated discs, and hip pain. Who can wear this lumbar compression brace? The sizing options make it easy for both average and plus size women to find a size that fits. How do I know which size to get? Using a soft/flexible tape measure, find the circumference around your widest part of your body where you plan to wear this brace, in inches. This lower back brace fits body circumferences of 25” up to 69”. How tall is the orthopedic back brace? The brace tapers from 10” tall in the back to 6” in the front. What is the brace made of? This brace is made out of a latex-free, elastic material. The removable stays are plastic. How do I adjust the brace? Grab the double-pull tension straps (located on the outside of the brace) and adjust them to make it either tighter or looser, then re-apply the Velcro closures. How do I put on the brace? Unhook all Velcro closures and lay the brace flat on the floor to identify the top side. The top has openings, which allow you to remove the metal stays. Next, position the brace behind your body so it’s centered on your back with the bottom of the brace sitting at the widest part of your hips. Fold the left side of the brace towards the middle of your stomach. Do the same with the right side but pull firmly and secure the Velcro closure. Repeat this process with the double-pull tension straps for your desired compression level. When do I wear it? Can I sleep in the brace? Thanks to the lightweight, latex-free material it's possible for you to wear this brace 24/7 if advised by your doctor. You can also sleep comfortably in this brace due to its soft material. It’s advised to speak with a medical professional before wearing a brace for an extended amount of time. Washing instructions: To wash the brace, first, remove stays and close all Velcro closures. Handwash in warm water with mild soap. Do not use bleach. The brace should be air-dried. Do not use high temperatures to wash or dry. Color:  Neutral white color 603207401525 7563372134453 new 39.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/plus-size-female-lower-back-pain-brace_grande.jpg?v=1527633657 641061975380 BraceAbility 03B0202XL Back Braces XLUS Women's Back Brace for Female Lower Back Pain (Plus Sizes up to 4XL) http://www.braceability.com/products/back-brace-for-women?variant=7563372167221 Women's Back Brace for Female Lower Back Pain (Plus Sizes up to 4XL) 2XL Back Brace for Women with Low Back Pain There are many causes of low back pain in women. The good news is that this back support belt for women can help with many of them. And it is available in extra large sizes, fitting larger body circumferences up to 69 inches. This lumbar sacral orthosis (LSO) for women supports your low back and forces you to exercise good posture, in the interest of easing pain and preventing further damage. Top 7 Causes of Lower Back Pain in Women There is no shortage of things that might be a cause of lower back pain in women. Fortunately, wearing women’s back braces can help with a number of these sources of back pain as they ease stress on the low back and apply compression that stimulates healing and reduces inflammation. It also promotes good posture which is ideal to prevent further damage. Improper Body Mechanics Lifting a heavy object, twisting or moving suddenly might strain the muscle or ligaments in your back, causing low back pain as well as stiffness and possibly muscle spasms. Such injuries are common causes of upper back pain in women as well. The compression this low-back brace applies can soothe painful inflammation and encourage healing. Pressure on Your Nerves Another possible source of lower back pain in young ladies is pressure on the nerves, especially the sciatic nerve, which causes pain, tingling and numbness in your low back that branches to your hips, buttocks, and legs. Typically, sciatica affects just one side of your body, so this is often a cause of either lower right side or lower left side back pain in women, but not both. It is usually pressured by a herniated disc or a bone spur. While a doctor can address why there is pressure on your nerve, the good posture this lumbar brace makes you adhere to, as well as the support it provides can make this a helpful component of treatment. Stress Fractures Stress fractures in the vertebra of your back can cause slipping of these discs known as spondylolisthesis , which may place pressure on your spinal cord or nerve roots. This may also lead to radiating pain and numbness, resulting in right or left lower back pain in females. This is just one example of instances where degenerative changes in your back might cause pain or pressure on your nerve roots, causing left or right lower back pain. The lumbar spine, especially, is subject to a high degree of stress that over time can lead to cartilage erosion, stress fractures, etc. Wearing a brace for lower back support that also provides abdominal compression can reduce the amount of pressure on your lumbar spine and limit any harmful movements. Abnormal Spinal Curvature An abnormal curve of the spine due to a deformity present from birth, degenerative changes or poor posture, like kyphosis , lordosis , or scoliosis can also lead to both low and upper back pain. In some cases, this can be fixed, possibly with the help of a back brace, and in other cases treatment focuses on slowing the progression of the problem. Pregnancy Cartilage erosion or too much motion at the sacroiliac (SI) joint (often due to pregnancy) can lead to SI joint dysfunction that can cause lower back and groin pain in women. Generally, this discomfort is isolated to one side, so pain in the lower left or lower right back of a female would be more common than discomfort across your entire low back. BraceAbility offers a number of pregnancy back supports and maternity braces . Being Overweight or Obese Being overweight or obese also increases the amount of stress on the spine and tissues of the back, accelerating degenerative changes of its tissues, increasing lordosis of the spine and increasing your risk of back injury. Aging As you age, your spine becomes more prone to injury. Therefore, it is important to engage in low-impact exercises to keep your back strong and limber and to be conscientious of maintaining good posture so as not to increase existing strain on the back. Are you a Woman with Lower Abdominal Pain and Lower Left or Right Back Pain? Another benefit of this female back binder is that it provides abdominal pressure, which takes pressure off the lumbar back. Plus it makes this support multi-functional in instances where both lower abdominal pain and back pain in women are at play. The combination of lower back and abdominal pain in women can be a sign of a more serious problem/situation such as: Pelvic inflammatory disease Endometriosis Pancreatitis Abdominal aneurysm Constipation Kidney stone Pregnancy Gallstones Urinary tract infection This is by no means an exhaustive list of what might be causing lower stomach and back pain in women, but as you can see, many of these will not be remedied by wearing a lumbar back support. Therefore, it is important to seek the help of a medical professional if you are experiencing lower abdomen and lower back pain. Key Features of this Brace for Women with Mild or Chronic Low Back Pain The crisscross back panel of this back pain brace, as well as its double-pull elastic tension straps, support and apply compression to your lower back. These features and more make it an ideal back belt for dealing with moderate pain in your lower back, lower left and lower right abdominal pain, spinal arthritis , back muscle weakness, pulls or tears , and/or lumbar sprains or strains. Elastic Material Applies Lightweight, Flexible Support to the Low Back This back brace for women is composed of a latex-free, form-fitting elastic. The material will conform to the curves of your body while providing light compression, which can help reduce female lower back pain while encouraging healing of the various causes of back pain. The compression reduces inflammation that can be one of the reasons for lower back pain in women. This also improves blood flow to your low back, which encourages quick healing. The material will stay put, as needed for treating low back pain in women. The back support for women that hugs your body is quite sleek in terms of design, helping it to fit discreetly under your clothes if needed so that addressing lower back pain causes in women is not a wardrobe-disrupting affair. Adjustable Velcro Straps The back posture brace for women comes with support straps for additional support to your lumbar spine. In addition to addressing right or left side lower back pain in women, this also helps hold your brace in place. The brace can be easily secured via its Velcro closure that secures at the front of your body. This also enables easy adjustment of fit. Removable Plastic Stays The women’s back brace is wider in the back and tapered at the front for a more functional, comfortable fit. The back panel has four plastic stays for addressing the causes of lower back pain in women. The plastic stays are lightweight and contoured to fit the shape of your back - so they support your lower back while still being comfortable. You can bend them to adjust their shape as needed, and you can remove them if you don't need that much support. Relieves Lower Back Pain from a Variety of Injuries and Conditions This lumbar spine support treats acute or chronic back pain stemming from a variety of causes, from muscle strain to degenerative disc disease to poor posture; it can also help with radiating pain to the hips, groin, pelvis, legs, etc. Frequently Asked Questions About This Lower Back Corset What conditions does it help treat? This girdle for low back pain can help treat moderate lower back pain, muscle strains, tears, or pulls, bulging discs, herniated discs, and hip pain. Who can wear this lumbar compression brace? The sizing options make it easy for both average and plus size women to find a size that fits. How do I know which size to get? Using a soft/flexible tape measure, find the circumference around your widest part of your body where you plan to wear this brace, in inches. This lower back brace fits body circumferences of 25” up to 69”. How tall is the orthopedic back brace? The brace tapers from 10” tall in the back to 6” in the front. What is the brace made of? This brace is made out of a latex-free, elastic material. The removable stays are plastic. How do I adjust the brace? Grab the double-pull tension straps (located on the outside of the brace) and adjust them to make it either tighter or looser, then re-apply the Velcro closures. How do I put on the brace? Unhook all Velcro closures and lay the brace flat on the floor to identify the top side. The top has openings, which allow you to remove the metal stays. Next, position the brace behind your body so it’s centered on your back with the bottom of the brace sitting at the widest part of your hips. Fold the left side of the brace towards the middle of your stomach. Do the same with the right side but pull firmly and secure the Velcro closure. Repeat this process with the double-pull tension straps for your desired compression level. When do I wear it? Can I sleep in the brace? Thanks to the lightweight, latex-free material it's possible for you to wear this brace 24/7 if advised by your doctor. You can also sleep comfortably in this brace due to its soft material. It’s advised to speak with a medical professional before wearing a brace for an extended amount of time. Washing instructions: To wash the brace, first, remove stays and close all Velcro closures. Handwash in warm water with mild soap. Do not use bleach. The brace should be air-dried. Do not use high temperatures to wash or dry. Color:  Neutral white color 603207401525 7563372167221 new 39.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/plus-size-female-lower-back-pain-brace_grande.jpg?v=1527633657 641061975397 BraceAbility 03B0202XXL Back Braces 2XLUS Women's Back Brace for Female Lower Back Pain (Plus Sizes up to 4XL) http://www.braceability.com/products/back-brace-for-women?variant=7563372199989 Women's Back Brace for Female Lower Back Pain (Plus Sizes up to 4XL) 3XL Back Brace for Women with Low Back Pain There are many causes of low back pain in women. The good news is that this back support belt for women can help with many of them. And it is available in extra large sizes, fitting larger body circumferences up to 69 inches. This lumbar sacral orthosis (LSO) for women supports your low back and forces you to exercise good posture, in the interest of easing pain and preventing further damage. Top 7 Causes of Lower Back Pain in Women There is no shortage of things that might be a cause of lower back pain in women. Fortunately, wearing women’s back braces can help with a number of these sources of back pain as they ease stress on the low back and apply compression that stimulates healing and reduces inflammation. It also promotes good posture which is ideal to prevent further damage. Improper Body Mechanics Lifting a heavy object, twisting or moving suddenly might strain the muscle or ligaments in your back, causing low back pain as well as stiffness and possibly muscle spasms. Such injuries are common causes of upper back pain in women as well. The compression this low-back brace applies can soothe painful inflammation and encourage healing. Pressure on Your Nerves Another possible source of lower back pain in young ladies is pressure on the nerves, especially the sciatic nerve, which causes pain, tingling and numbness in your low back that branches to your hips, buttocks, and legs. Typically, sciatica affects just one side of your body, so this is often a cause of either lower right side or lower left side back pain in women, but not both. It is usually pressured by a herniated disc or a bone spur. While a doctor can address why there is pressure on your nerve, the good posture this lumbar brace makes you adhere to, as well as the support it provides can make this a helpful component of treatment. Stress Fractures Stress fractures in the vertebra of your back can cause slipping of these discs known as spondylolisthesis , which may place pressure on your spinal cord or nerve roots. This may also lead to radiating pain and numbness, resulting in right or left lower back pain in females. This is just one example of instances where degenerative changes in your back might cause pain or pressure on your nerve roots, causing left or right lower back pain. The lumbar spine, especially, is subject to a high degree of stress that over time can lead to cartilage erosion, stress fractures, etc. Wearing a brace for lower back support that also provides abdominal compression can reduce the amount of pressure on your lumbar spine and limit any harmful movements. Abnormal Spinal Curvature An abnormal curve of the spine due to a deformity present from birth, degenerative changes or poor posture, like kyphosis , lordosis , or scoliosis can also lead to both low and upper back pain. In some cases, this can be fixed, possibly with the help of a back brace, and in other cases treatment focuses on slowing the progression of the problem. Pregnancy Cartilage erosion or too much motion at the sacroiliac (SI) joint (often due to pregnancy) can lead to SI joint dysfunction that can cause lower back and groin pain in women. Generally, this discomfort is isolated to one side, so pain in the lower left or lower right back of a female would be more common than discomfort across your entire low back. BraceAbility offers a number of pregnancy back supports and maternity braces . Being Overweight or Obese Being overweight or obese also increases the amount of stress on the spine and tissues of the back, accelerating degenerative changes of its tissues, increasing lordosis of the spine and increasing your risk of back injury. Aging As you age, your spine becomes more prone to injury. Therefore, it is important to engage in low-impact exercises to keep your back strong and limber and to be conscientious of maintaining good posture so as not to increase existing strain on the back. Are you a Woman with Lower Abdominal Pain and Lower Left or Right Back Pain? Another benefit of this female back binder is that it provides abdominal pressure, which takes pressure off the lumbar back. Plus it makes this support multi-functional in instances where both lower abdominal pain and back pain in women are at play. The combination of lower back and abdominal pain in women can be a sign of a more serious problem/situation such as: Pelvic inflammatory disease Endometriosis Pancreatitis Abdominal aneurysm Constipation Kidney stone Pregnancy Gallstones Urinary tract infection This is by no means an exhaustive list of what might be causing lower stomach and back pain in women, but as you can see, many of these will not be remedied by wearing a lumbar back support. Therefore, it is important to seek the help of a medical professional if you are experiencing lower abdomen and lower back pain. Key Features of this Brace for Women with Mild or Chronic Low Back Pain The crisscross back panel of this back pain brace, as well as its double-pull elastic tension straps, support and apply compression to your lower back. These features and more make it an ideal back belt for dealing with moderate pain in your lower back, lower left and lower right abdominal pain, spinal arthritis , back muscle weakness, pulls or tears , and/or lumbar sprains or strains. Elastic Material Applies Lightweight, Flexible Support to the Low Back This back brace for women is composed of a latex-free, form-fitting elastic. The material will conform to the curves of your body while providing light compression, which can help reduce female lower back pain while encouraging healing of the various causes of back pain. The compression reduces inflammation that can be one of the reasons for lower back pain in women. This also improves blood flow to your low back, which encourages quick healing. The material will stay put, as needed for treating low back pain in women. The back support for women that hugs your body is quite sleek in terms of design, helping it to fit discreetly under your clothes if needed so that addressing lower back pain causes in women is not a wardrobe-disrupting affair. Adjustable Velcro Straps The back posture brace for women comes with support straps for additional support to your lumbar spine. In addition to addressing right or left side lower back pain in women, this also helps hold your brace in place. The brace can be easily secured via its Velcro closure that secures at the front of your body. This also enables easy adjustment of fit. Removable Plastic Stays The women’s back brace is wider in the back and tapered at the front for a more functional, comfortable fit. The back panel has four plastic stays for addressing the causes of lower back pain in women. The plastic stays are lightweight and contoured to fit the shape of your back - so they support your lower back while still being comfortable. You can bend them to adjust their shape as needed, and you can remove them if you don't need that much support. Relieves Lower Back Pain from a Variety of Injuries and Conditions This lumbar spine support treats acute or chronic back pain stemming from a variety of causes, from muscle strain to degenerative disc disease to poor posture; it can also help with radiating pain to the hips, groin, pelvis, legs, etc. Frequently Asked Questions About This Lower Back Corset What conditions does it help treat? This girdle for low back pain can help treat moderate lower back pain, muscle strains, tears, or pulls, bulging discs, herniated discs, and hip pain. Who can wear this lumbar compression brace? The sizing options make it easy for both average and plus size women to find a size that fits. How do I know which size to get? Using a soft/flexible tape measure, find the circumference around your widest part of your body where you plan to wear this brace, in inches. This lower back brace fits body circumferences of 25” up to 69”. How tall is the orthopedic back brace? The brace tapers from 10” tall in the back to 6” in the front. What is the brace made of? This brace is made out of a latex-free, elastic material. The removable stays are plastic. How do I adjust the brace? Grab the double-pull tension straps (located on the outside of the brace) and adjust them to make it either tighter or looser, then re-apply the Velcro closures. How do I put on the brace? Unhook all Velcro closures and lay the brace flat on the floor to identify the top side. The top has openings, which allow you to remove the metal stays. Next, position the brace behind your body so it’s centered on your back with the bottom of the brace sitting at the widest part of your hips. Fold the left side of the brace towards the middle of your stomach. Do the same with the right side but pull firmly and secure the Velcro closure. Repeat this process with the double-pull tension straps for your desired compression level. When do I wear it? Can I sleep in the brace? Thanks to the lightweight, latex-free material it's possible for you to wear this brace 24/7 if advised by your doctor. You can also sleep comfortably in this brace due to its soft material. It’s advised to speak with a medical professional before wearing a brace for an extended amount of time. Washing instructions: To wash the brace, first, remove stays and close all Velcro closures. Handwash in warm water with mild soap. Do not use bleach. The brace should be air-dried. Do not use high temperatures to wash or dry. Color:  Neutral white color 603207401525 7563372199989 new 39.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/plus-size-female-lower-back-pain-brace_grande.jpg?v=1527633657 641061975403 BraceAbility 03B0202XXXL Back Braces 3XLUS Women's Back Brace for Female Lower Back Pain (Plus Sizes up to 4XL) http://www.braceability.com/products/back-brace-for-women?variant=7563372232757 Women's Back Brace for Female Lower Back Pain (Plus Sizes up to 4XL) 4XL Back Brace for Women with Low Back Pain There are many causes of low back pain in women. The good news is that this back support belt for women can help with many of them. And it is available in extra large sizes, fitting larger body circumferences up to 69 inches. This lumbar sacral orthosis (LSO) for women supports your low back and forces you to exercise good posture, in the interest of easing pain and preventing further damage. Top 7 Causes of Lower Back Pain in Women There is no shortage of things that might be a cause of lower back pain in women. Fortunately, wearing women’s back braces can help with a number of these sources of back pain as they ease stress on the low back and apply compression that stimulates healing and reduces inflammation. It also promotes good posture which is ideal to prevent further damage. Improper Body Mechanics Lifting a heavy object, twisting or moving suddenly might strain the muscle or ligaments in your back, causing low back pain as well as stiffness and possibly muscle spasms. Such injuries are common causes of upper back pain in women as well. The compression this low-back brace applies can soothe painful inflammation and encourage healing. Pressure on Your Nerves Another possible source of lower back pain in young ladies is pressure on the nerves, especially the sciatic nerve, which causes pain, tingling and numbness in your low back that branches to your hips, buttocks, and legs. Typically, sciatica affects just one side of your body, so this is often a cause of either lower right side or lower left side back pain in women, but not both. It is usually pressured by a herniated disc or a bone spur. While a doctor can address why there is pressure on your nerve, the good posture this lumbar brace makes you adhere to, as well as the support it provides can make this a helpful component of treatment. Stress Fractures Stress fractures in the vertebra of your back can cause slipping of these discs known as spondylolisthesis , which may place pressure on your spinal cord or nerve roots. This may also lead to radiating pain and numbness, resulting in right or left lower back pain in females. This is just one example of instances where degenerative changes in your back might cause pain or pressure on your nerve roots, causing left or right lower back pain. The lumbar spine, especially, is subject to a high degree of stress that over time can lead to cartilage erosion, stress fractures, etc. Wearing a brace for lower back support that also provides abdominal compression can reduce the amount of pressure on your lumbar spine and limit any harmful movements. Abnormal Spinal Curvature An abnormal curve of the spine due to a deformity present from birth, degenerative changes or poor posture, like kyphosis , lordosis , or scoliosis can also lead to both low and upper back pain. In some cases, this can be fixed, possibly with the help of a back brace, and in other cases treatment focuses on slowing the progression of the problem. Pregnancy Cartilage erosion or too much motion at the sacroiliac (SI) joint (often due to pregnancy) can lead to SI joint dysfunction that can cause lower back and groin pain in women. Generally, this discomfort is isolated to one side, so pain in the lower left or lower right back of a female would be more common than discomfort across your entire low back. BraceAbility offers a number of pregnancy back supports and maternity braces . Being Overweight or Obese Being overweight or obese also increases the amount of stress on the spine and tissues of the back, accelerating degenerative changes of its tissues, increasing lordosis of the spine and increasing your risk of back injury. Aging As you age, your spine becomes more prone to injury. Therefore, it is important to engage in low-impact exercises to keep your back strong and limber and to be conscientious of maintaining good posture so as not to increase existing strain on the back. Are you a Woman with Lower Abdominal Pain and Lower Left or Right Back Pain? Another benefit of this female back binder is that it provides abdominal pressure, which takes pressure off the lumbar back. Plus it makes this support multi-functional in instances where both lower abdominal pain and back pain in women are at play. The combination of lower back and abdominal pain in women can be a sign of a more serious problem/situation such as: Pelvic inflammatory disease Endometriosis Pancreatitis Abdominal aneurysm Constipation Kidney stone Pregnancy Gallstones Urinary tract infection This is by no means an exhaustive list of what might be causing lower stomach and back pain in women, but as you can see, many of these will not be remedied by wearing a lumbar back support. Therefore, it is important to seek the help of a medical professional if you are experiencing lower abdomen and lower back pain. Key Features of this Brace for Women with Mild or Chronic Low Back Pain The crisscross back panel of this back pain brace, as well as its double-pull elastic tension straps, support and apply compression to your lower back. These features and more make it an ideal back belt for dealing with moderate pain in your lower back, lower left and lower right abdominal pain, spinal arthritis , back muscle weakness, pulls or tears , and/or lumbar sprains or strains. Elastic Material Applies Lightweight, Flexible Support to the Low Back This back brace for women is composed of a latex-free, form-fitting elastic. The material will conform to the curves of your body while providing light compression, which can help reduce female lower back pain while encouraging healing of the various causes of back pain. The compression reduces inflammation that can be one of the reasons for lower back pain in women. This also improves blood flow to your low back, which encourages quick healing. The material will stay put, as needed for treating low back pain in women. The back support for women that hugs your body is quite sleek in terms of design, helping it to fit discreetly under your clothes if needed so that addressing lower back pain causes in women is not a wardrobe-disrupting affair. Adjustable Velcro Straps The back posture brace for women comes with support straps for additional support to your lumbar spine. In addition to addressing right or left side lower back pain in women, this also helps hold your brace in place. The brace can be easily secured via its Velcro closure that secures at the front of your body. This also enables easy adjustment of fit. Removable Plastic Stays The women’s back brace is wider in the back and tapered at the front for a more functional, comfortable fit. The back panel has four plastic stays for addressing the causes of lower back pain in women. The plastic stays are lightweight and contoured to fit the shape of your back - so they support your lower back while still being comfortable. You can bend them to adjust their shape as needed, and you can remove them if you don't need that much support. Relieves Lower Back Pain from a Variety of Injuries and Conditions This lumbar spine support treats acute or chronic back pain stemming from a variety of causes, from muscle strain to degenerative disc disease to poor posture; it can also help with radiating pain to the hips, groin, pelvis, legs, etc. Frequently Asked Questions About This Lower Back Corset What conditions does it help treat? This girdle for low back pain can help treat moderate lower back pain, muscle strains, tears, or pulls, bulging discs, herniated discs, and hip pain. Who can wear this lumbar compression brace? The sizing options make it easy for both average and plus size women to find a size that fits. How do I know which size to get? Using a soft/flexible tape measure, find the circumference around your widest part of your body where you plan to wear this brace, in inches. This lower back brace fits body circumferences of 25” up to 69”. How tall is the orthopedic back brace? The brace tapers from 10” tall in the back to 6” in the front. What is the brace made of? This brace is made out of a latex-free, elastic material. The removable stays are plastic. How do I adjust the brace? Grab the double-pull tension straps (located on the outside of the brace) and adjust them to make it either tighter or looser, then re-apply the Velcro closures. How do I put on the brace? Unhook all Velcro closures and lay the brace flat on the floor to identify the top side. The top has openings, which allow you to remove the metal stays. Next, position the brace behind your body so it’s centered on your back with the bottom of the brace sitting at the widest part of your hips. Fold the left side of the brace towards the middle of your stomach. Do the same with the right side but pull firmly and secure the Velcro closure. Repeat this process with the double-pull tension straps for your desired compression level. When do I wear it? Can I sleep in the brace? Thanks to the lightweight, latex-free material it's possible for you to wear this brace 24/7 if advised by your doctor. You can also sleep comfortably in this brace due to its soft material. It’s advised to speak with a medical professional before wearing a brace for an extended amount of time. Washing instructions: To wash the brace, first, remove stays and close all Velcro closures. Handwash in warm water with mild soap. Do not use bleach. The brace should be air-dried. Do not use high temperatures to wash or dry. Color:  Neutral white color 603207401525 7563372232757 new 39.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/plus-size-female-lower-back-pain-brace_grande.jpg?v=1527633657 641061981374 BraceAbility 03B0202XXXXL Back Braces 4XLUS Orthopedic Air Walker Boot Cast for Ankle Sprains, Fractures and Achilles Tendonitis http://www.braceability.com/products/air-cam-walker-boot-cast?variant=7661321584693 Orthopedic Air Walker Boot Cast for Ankle Sprains, Fractures and Achilles Tendonitis XS  Why You Need This Air Cast Walking Boot Searching for a highly-rated medical walking boot at an affordable price? Look no further. This air cast boot offers mobility, protection, and support for daily activities while recovering from a variety of foot and ankle injuries , including: Bunionectomy Ankle sprains Stress fractures General pain or postoperative use Metatarsal foot fractures Lisfranc injuries Toe, foot, or ankle breaks Achilles tendonitis 6 Reasons Why People Love This Short Air Walking Boot This short air boot has several features that make wearing it a very comfortable experience, especially in comparison to other orthopedic ankle walkers on the market. Innovative Air Cell Technology Perhaps the best feature of this boot is its custom-inflated air cells. These air chambers help keep your leg properly positioned within the brace for enhanced stability and fit, as well as personalized compression. To inflate the air bladders and increase pressure, push the red bulb (handpump) until you reach your desired compression level. To deflate, push the black button under the bulb and the pressure will decrease. Low Profile Polymer Shell The majority of walking boots for sale are made out of plastic and metal struts. However, this walking boot shell is constructed entirely out of a polymer material. Although it looks similar, polymer is a very strong and high-tech, yet surprisingly lightweight form of plastic. This non-weight bearing boot has a relatively low-profile fit when compared to other boots for broken metatarsal bones and other foot injuries . This cutting-edge design improves your mobility throughout the day. Plus, its universal design means you can wear this recovery boot interchangeably on your right or left foot. Wide Footbed and Open Toe Design This foot boot for broken toes, ankles sprains, and more leaves your toe area open. This advanced feature is convenient for accessing bandaging and improving the breathability of this toe fracture boot. Similarly, the wide footbed of this boot is also a valuable feature. After sustaining a foot or toe injury, you’ll probably experience some swelling and your injury might need bandaging. This walking shoe allows extra room for swelling, bandaging, and thick socks. After your swelling has gone down, you can adjust the liner, straps, and air pump to tighten your fit. Deluxe Foam Interior This boot for fractured toes and other injuries is lined with a deluxe foam material that is soft and squishy against your skin. Plus, to eliminate any discomfort you might experience as you move throughout the day, extra foam pads are also included with your purchase. These soft pads can be placed anywhere within your boot to help prevent discomfort from pressure points, gaps, rubbing, or chafing against your skin. Natural Rocker Bottom Sole The curved bottom of this fractured toe boot promotes a smooth gait (stride) that is more energy efficient. Meaning that unlike some broken foot splints, this one will not cause a hitch in your step that can lead to other problems, such as hip or back pain . Plus, the arching rocker design of this shoe boot helps reduce impact and plantar pressures. Medical-Grade Velcro Closures Another outstanding feature of this post-surgical boot is that the Velcro straps are much stronger than most. That is because these are medical-grade Velcro straps, which are 10 times stronger than the retail-grade Velcro you’ll find on braces at Target, Walmart, or your local drugstore. Medical-grade Velcro is meant to open and close 900 times, unlike retail-grade Velcro, which is only meant to open and close 90 times. Air vs. Non-Air Medical Boots: What’s the Difference? Not sure which kind of walker boot is right for you ? The biggest difference between an air cast (pneumatic) and non-air cam walking boot is (you guessed it) the air pump. BraceAbility’s customizable air cell technology provides personalized compression and enhanced stability during your recovery process. Other healing benefits of BraceAbility’s air boot include: The air forms around the shape of your foot for optimal comfort and fit. When using the air pump, you can easily adjust the amount of compression. After all, too much compression to a swollen foot can be counterproductive. Air helps break your pain cycle by reducing inflammation and swelling. Multiple air bladders that have a massaging effect on your foot every time you take a step. Frequently Asked Questions About This Orthopedic Walking Boot for Sprained Ankles What conditions / injuries does this boot treat? It’s great for toe, foot, and ankle injuries treatment, including stress fractures, torn foot ligaments, after bunion removal surgery, sprains, strains, bruised foot bones, metatarsal fractures, ankle arthritis, general foot and ankle pain, lisfranc injuries, Achilles tendonitis, and Achilles tendon tears. How does it work? Designed to provide mobility, protection, and support for day-to-day activities while immobilizing your toe, foot, and ankle. Who can wear this brace? It comes in sizes ranging from XS to L, which fit a wide variety of adult men and women, as well as some teenagers and kids. However, anybody 6’ or taller should purchase a tall air walking boot for proper support, protection, and immobilization of their foot and ankle. What size should I get? To choose your size, view our sizing graphic in the images above. This walking boot is universal, so it will fit your right or left foot. When should I wear it? Use anytime your toe, foot, or ankle needs to be immobilized. Can be worn throughout the day for support. Ask your doctor before wearing this while sleeping. What is it made of? This brace is made out of a polymer plastic shell, as well as deluxe foam lining. How tall is this walking boot for broken toes? 11 inches tall. How do I put it on? With all Velcro closures open, place your foot inside the boot liner, making sure to slide your heel to the back of the boot. Close the liner, starting near your toes and working up towards your lower leg. Fasten the Velcro straps tightly, working toe up. Attach extra foam pads to the liner anywhere you feel pressure or gaps. Then, inflate the air cell pressure, pushing the red bulb until you reach necessary compression. To deflate, push the black button under the bulb and the pressure will decrease. Washing Instructions: Handwash all components in warm water with mild soap, allowing it to air dry completely before reapplying. Other features: Natural, non-invasive fix for many sources of foot and ankle pain. Easy to put on, take off and adjust. Extra pads are included with your purchase for added comfort. Color: Black. 618810540085 7661321584693 new 44.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10a1402-orthopedic-air-walker-boot-cast-for-ankle-sprains_grande.jpg?v=1527627639 641061979913 BraceAbility 10A1402XS Walker Boots XSUS Orthopedic Air Walker Boot Cast for Ankle Sprains, Fractures and Achilles Tendonitis http://www.braceability.com/products/air-cam-walker-boot-cast?variant=7661337018421 Orthopedic Air Walker Boot Cast for Ankle Sprains, Fractures and Achilles Tendonitis S  Why You Need This Air Cast Walking Boot Searching for a highly-rated medical walking boot at an affordable price? Look no further. This air cast boot offers mobility, protection, and support for daily activities while recovering from a variety of foot and ankle injuries , including: Bunionectomy Ankle sprains Stress fractures General pain or postoperative use Metatarsal foot fractures Lisfranc injuries Toe, foot, or ankle breaks Achilles tendonitis 6 Reasons Why People Love This Short Air Walking Boot This short air boot has several features that make wearing it a very comfortable experience, especially in comparison to other orthopedic ankle walkers on the market. Innovative Air Cell Technology Perhaps the best feature of this boot is its custom-inflated air cells. These air chambers help keep your leg properly positioned within the brace for enhanced stability and fit, as well as personalized compression. To inflate the air bladders and increase pressure, push the red bulb (handpump) until you reach your desired compression level. To deflate, push the black button under the bulb and the pressure will decrease. Low Profile Polymer Shell The majority of walking boots for sale are made out of plastic and metal struts. However, this walking boot shell is constructed entirely out of a polymer material. Although it looks similar, polymer is a very strong and high-tech, yet surprisingly lightweight form of plastic. This non-weight bearing boot has a relatively low-profile fit when compared to other boots for broken metatarsal bones and other foot injuries . This cutting-edge design improves your mobility throughout the day. Plus, its universal design means you can wear this recovery boot interchangeably on your right or left foot. Wide Footbed and Open Toe Design This foot boot for broken toes, ankles sprains, and more leaves your toe area open. This advanced feature is convenient for accessing bandaging and improving the breathability of this toe fracture boot. Similarly, the wide footbed of this boot is also a valuable feature. After sustaining a foot or toe injury, you’ll probably experience some swelling and your injury might need bandaging. This walking shoe allows extra room for swelling, bandaging, and thick socks. After your swelling has gone down, you can adjust the liner, straps, and air pump to tighten your fit. Deluxe Foam Interior This boot for fractured toes and other injuries is lined with a deluxe foam material that is soft and squishy against your skin. Plus, to eliminate any discomfort you might experience as you move throughout the day, extra foam pads are also included with your purchase. These soft pads can be placed anywhere within your boot to help prevent discomfort from pressure points, gaps, rubbing, or chafing against your skin. Natural Rocker Bottom Sole The curved bottom of this fractured toe boot promotes a smooth gait (stride) that is more energy efficient. Meaning that unlike some broken foot splints, this one will not cause a hitch in your step that can lead to other problems, such as hip or back pain . Plus, the arching rocker design of this shoe boot helps reduce impact and plantar pressures. Medical-Grade Velcro Closures Another outstanding feature of this post-surgical boot is that the Velcro straps are much stronger than most. That is because these are medical-grade Velcro straps, which are 10 times stronger than the retail-grade Velcro you’ll find on braces at Target, Walmart, or your local drugstore. Medical-grade Velcro is meant to open and close 900 times, unlike retail-grade Velcro, which is only meant to open and close 90 times. Air vs. Non-Air Medical Boots: What’s the Difference? Not sure which kind of walker boot is right for you ? The biggest difference between an air cast (pneumatic) and non-air cam walking boot is (you guessed it) the air pump. BraceAbility’s customizable air cell technology provides personalized compression and enhanced stability during your recovery process. Other healing benefits of BraceAbility’s air boot include: The air forms around the shape of your foot for optimal comfort and fit. When using the air pump, you can easily adjust the amount of compression. After all, too much compression to a swollen foot can be counterproductive. Air helps break your pain cycle by reducing inflammation and swelling. Multiple air bladders that have a massaging effect on your foot every time you take a step. Frequently Asked Questions About This Orthopedic Walking Boot for Sprained Ankles What conditions / injuries does this boot treat? It’s great for toe, foot, and ankle injuries treatment, including stress fractures, torn foot ligaments, after bunion removal surgery, sprains, strains, bruised foot bones, metatarsal fractures, ankle arthritis, general foot and ankle pain, lisfranc injuries, Achilles tendonitis, and Achilles tendon tears. How does it work? Designed to provide mobility, protection, and support for day-to-day activities while immobilizing your toe, foot, and ankle. Who can wear this brace? It comes in sizes ranging from XS to L, which fit a wide variety of adult men and women, as well as some teenagers and kids. However, anybody 6’ or taller should purchase a tall air walking boot for proper support, protection, and immobilization of their foot and ankle. What size should I get? To choose your size, view our sizing graphic in the images above. This walking boot is universal, so it will fit your right or left foot. When should I wear it? Use anytime your toe, foot, or ankle needs to be immobilized. Can be worn throughout the day for support. Ask your doctor before wearing this while sleeping. What is it made of? This brace is made out of a polymer plastic shell, as well as deluxe foam lining. How tall is this walking boot for broken toes? 11 inches tall. How do I put it on? With all Velcro closures open, place your foot inside the boot liner, making sure to slide your heel to the back of the boot. Close the liner, starting near your toes and working up towards your lower leg. Fasten the Velcro straps tightly, working toe up. Attach extra foam pads to the liner anywhere you feel pressure or gaps. Then, inflate the air cell pressure, pushing the red bulb until you reach necessary compression. To deflate, push the black button under the bulb and the pressure will decrease. Washing Instructions: Handwash all components in warm water with mild soap, allowing it to air dry completely before reapplying. Other features: Natural, non-invasive fix for many sources of foot and ankle pain. Easy to put on, take off and adjust. Extra pads are included with your purchase for added comfort. Color: Black. 618810540085 7661337018421 new 44.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10a1402-orthopedic-air-walker-boot-cast-for-ankle-sprains_grande.jpg?v=1527627639 641061979906 BraceAbility 10A1402S Walker Boots SUS Orthopedic Air Walker Boot Cast for Ankle Sprains, Fractures and Achilles Tendonitis http://www.braceability.com/products/air-cam-walker-boot-cast?variant=7661337051189 Orthopedic Air Walker Boot Cast for Ankle Sprains, Fractures and Achilles Tendonitis M  Why You Need This Air Cast Walking Boot Searching for a highly-rated medical walking boot at an affordable price? Look no further. This air cast boot offers mobility, protection, and support for daily activities while recovering from a variety of foot and ankle injuries , including: Bunionectomy Ankle sprains Stress fractures General pain or postoperative use Metatarsal foot fractures Lisfranc injuries Toe, foot, or ankle breaks Achilles tendonitis 6 Reasons Why People Love This Short Air Walking Boot This short air boot has several features that make wearing it a very comfortable experience, especially in comparison to other orthopedic ankle walkers on the market. Innovative Air Cell Technology Perhaps the best feature of this boot is its custom-inflated air cells. These air chambers help keep your leg properly positioned within the brace for enhanced stability and fit, as well as personalized compression. To inflate the air bladders and increase pressure, push the red bulb (handpump) until you reach your desired compression level. To deflate, push the black button under the bulb and the pressure will decrease. Low Profile Polymer Shell The majority of walking boots for sale are made out of plastic and metal struts. However, this walking boot shell is constructed entirely out of a polymer material. Although it looks similar, polymer is a very strong and high-tech, yet surprisingly lightweight form of plastic. This non-weight bearing boot has a relatively low-profile fit when compared to other boots for broken metatarsal bones and other foot injuries . This cutting-edge design improves your mobility throughout the day. Plus, its universal design means you can wear this recovery boot interchangeably on your right or left foot. Wide Footbed and Open Toe Design This foot boot for broken toes, ankles sprains, and more leaves your toe area open. This advanced feature is convenient for accessing bandaging and improving the breathability of this toe fracture boot. Similarly, the wide footbed of this boot is also a valuable feature. After sustaining a foot or toe injury, you’ll probably experience some swelling and your injury might need bandaging. This walking shoe allows extra room for swelling, bandaging, and thick socks. After your swelling has gone down, you can adjust the liner, straps, and air pump to tighten your fit. Deluxe Foam Interior This boot for fractured toes and other injuries is lined with a deluxe foam material that is soft and squishy against your skin. Plus, to eliminate any discomfort you might experience as you move throughout the day, extra foam pads are also included with your purchase. These soft pads can be placed anywhere within your boot to help prevent discomfort from pressure points, gaps, rubbing, or chafing against your skin. Natural Rocker Bottom Sole The curved bottom of this fractured toe boot promotes a smooth gait (stride) that is more energy efficient. Meaning that unlike some broken foot splints, this one will not cause a hitch in your step that can lead to other problems, such as hip or back pain . Plus, the arching rocker design of this shoe boot helps reduce impact and plantar pressures. Medical-Grade Velcro Closures Another outstanding feature of this post-surgical boot is that the Velcro straps are much stronger than most. That is because these are medical-grade Velcro straps, which are 10 times stronger than the retail-grade Velcro you’ll find on braces at Target, Walmart, or your local drugstore. Medical-grade Velcro is meant to open and close 900 times, unlike retail-grade Velcro, which is only meant to open and close 90 times. Air vs. Non-Air Medical Boots: What’s the Difference? Not sure which kind of walker boot is right for you ? The biggest difference between an air cast (pneumatic) and non-air cam walking boot is (you guessed it) the air pump. BraceAbility’s customizable air cell technology provides personalized compression and enhanced stability during your recovery process. Other healing benefits of BraceAbility’s air boot include: The air forms around the shape of your foot for optimal comfort and fit. When using the air pump, you can easily adjust the amount of compression. After all, too much compression to a swollen foot can be counterproductive. Air helps break your pain cycle by reducing inflammation and swelling. Multiple air bladders that have a massaging effect on your foot every time you take a step. Frequently Asked Questions About This Orthopedic Walking Boot for Sprained Ankles What conditions / injuries does this boot treat? It’s great for toe, foot, and ankle injuries treatment, including stress fractures, torn foot ligaments, after bunion removal surgery, sprains, strains, bruised foot bones, metatarsal fractures, ankle arthritis, general foot and ankle pain, lisfranc injuries, Achilles tendonitis, and Achilles tendon tears. How does it work? Designed to provide mobility, protection, and support for day-to-day activities while immobilizing your toe, foot, and ankle. Who can wear this brace? It comes in sizes ranging from XS to L, which fit a wide variety of adult men and women, as well as some teenagers and kids. However, anybody 6’ or taller should purchase a tall air walking boot for proper support, protection, and immobilization of their foot and ankle. What size should I get? To choose your size, view our sizing graphic in the images above. This walking boot is universal, so it will fit your right or left foot. When should I wear it? Use anytime your toe, foot, or ankle needs to be immobilized. Can be worn throughout the day for support. Ask your doctor before wearing this while sleeping. What is it made of? This brace is made out of a polymer plastic shell, as well as deluxe foam lining. How tall is this walking boot for broken toes? 11 inches tall. How do I put it on? With all Velcro closures open, place your foot inside the boot liner, making sure to slide your heel to the back of the boot. Close the liner, starting near your toes and working up towards your lower leg. Fasten the Velcro straps tightly, working toe up. Attach extra foam pads to the liner anywhere you feel pressure or gaps. Then, inflate the air cell pressure, pushing the red bulb until you reach necessary compression. To deflate, push the black button under the bulb and the pressure will decrease. Washing Instructions: Handwash all components in warm water with mild soap, allowing it to air dry completely before reapplying. Other features: Natural, non-invasive fix for many sources of foot and ankle pain. Easy to put on, take off and adjust. Extra pads are included with your purchase for added comfort. Color: Black. 618810540085 7661337051189 new 44.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10a1402-orthopedic-air-walker-boot-cast-for-ankle-sprains_grande.jpg?v=1527627639 641061979890 BraceAbility 10A1402M Walker Boots MUS Orthopedic Air Walker Boot Cast for Ankle Sprains, Fractures and Achilles Tendonitis http://www.braceability.com/products/air-cam-walker-boot-cast?variant=7661337083957 Orthopedic Air Walker Boot Cast for Ankle Sprains, Fractures and Achilles Tendonitis L  Why You Need This Air Cast Walking Boot Searching for a highly-rated medical walking boot at an affordable price? Look no further. This air cast boot offers mobility, protection, and support for daily activities while recovering from a variety of foot and ankle injuries , including: Bunionectomy Ankle sprains Stress fractures General pain or postoperative use Metatarsal foot fractures Lisfranc injuries Toe, foot, or ankle breaks Achilles tendonitis 6 Reasons Why People Love This Short Air Walking Boot This short air boot has several features that make wearing it a very comfortable experience, especially in comparison to other orthopedic ankle walkers on the market. Innovative Air Cell Technology Perhaps the best feature of this boot is its custom-inflated air cells. These air chambers help keep your leg properly positioned within the brace for enhanced stability and fit, as well as personalized compression. To inflate the air bladders and increase pressure, push the red bulb (handpump) until you reach your desired compression level. To deflate, push the black button under the bulb and the pressure will decrease. Low Profile Polymer Shell The majority of walking boots for sale are made out of plastic and metal struts. However, this walking boot shell is constructed entirely out of a polymer material. Although it looks similar, polymer is a very strong and high-tech, yet surprisingly lightweight form of plastic. This non-weight bearing boot has a relatively low-profile fit when compared to other boots for broken metatarsal bones and other foot injuries . This cutting-edge design improves your mobility throughout the day. Plus, its universal design means you can wear this recovery boot interchangeably on your right or left foot. Wide Footbed and Open Toe Design This foot boot for broken toes, ankles sprains, and more leaves your toe area open. This advanced feature is convenient for accessing bandaging and improving the breathability of this toe fracture boot. Similarly, the wide footbed of this boot is also a valuable feature. After sustaining a foot or toe injury, you’ll probably experience some swelling and your injury might need bandaging. This walking shoe allows extra room for swelling, bandaging, and thick socks. After your swelling has gone down, you can adjust the liner, straps, and air pump to tighten your fit. Deluxe Foam Interior This boot for fractured toes and other injuries is lined with a deluxe foam material that is soft and squishy against your skin. Plus, to eliminate any discomfort you might experience as you move throughout the day, extra foam pads are also included with your purchase. These soft pads can be placed anywhere within your boot to help prevent discomfort from pressure points, gaps, rubbing, or chafing against your skin. Natural Rocker Bottom Sole The curved bottom of this fractured toe boot promotes a smooth gait (stride) that is more energy efficient. Meaning that unlike some broken foot splints, this one will not cause a hitch in your step that can lead to other problems, such as hip or back pain . Plus, the arching rocker design of this shoe boot helps reduce impact and plantar pressures. Medical-Grade Velcro Closures Another outstanding feature of this post-surgical boot is that the Velcro straps are much stronger than most. That is because these are medical-grade Velcro straps, which are 10 times stronger than the retail-grade Velcro you’ll find on braces at Target, Walmart, or your local drugstore. Medical-grade Velcro is meant to open and close 900 times, unlike retail-grade Velcro, which is only meant to open and close 90 times. Air vs. Non-Air Medical Boots: What’s the Difference? Not sure which kind of walker boot is right for you ? The biggest difference between an air cast (pneumatic) and non-air cam walking boot is (you guessed it) the air pump. BraceAbility’s customizable air cell technology provides personalized compression and enhanced stability during your recovery process. Other healing benefits of BraceAbility’s air boot include: The air forms around the shape of your foot for optimal comfort and fit. When using the air pump, you can easily adjust the amount of compression. After all, too much compression to a swollen foot can be counterproductive. Air helps break your pain cycle by reducing inflammation and swelling. Multiple air bladders that have a massaging effect on your foot every time you take a step. Frequently Asked Questions About This Orthopedic Walking Boot for Sprained Ankles What conditions / injuries does this boot treat? It’s great for toe, foot, and ankle injuries treatment, including stress fractures, torn foot ligaments, after bunion removal surgery, sprains, strains, bruised foot bones, metatarsal fractures, ankle arthritis, general foot and ankle pain, lisfranc injuries, Achilles tendonitis, and Achilles tendon tears. How does it work? Designed to provide mobility, protection, and support for day-to-day activities while immobilizing your toe, foot, and ankle. Who can wear this brace? It comes in sizes ranging from XS to L, which fit a wide variety of adult men and women, as well as some teenagers and kids. However, anybody 6’ or taller should purchase a tall air walking boot for proper support, protection, and immobilization of their foot and ankle. What size should I get? To choose your size, view our sizing graphic in the images above. This walking boot is universal, so it will fit your right or left foot. When should I wear it? Use anytime your toe, foot, or ankle needs to be immobilized. Can be worn throughout the day for support. Ask your doctor before wearing this while sleeping. What is it made of? This brace is made out of a polymer plastic shell, as well as deluxe foam lining. How tall is this walking boot for broken toes? 11 inches tall. How do I put it on? With all Velcro closures open, place your foot inside the boot liner, making sure to slide your heel to the back of the boot. Close the liner, starting near your toes and working up towards your lower leg. Fasten the Velcro straps tightly, working toe up. Attach extra foam pads to the liner anywhere you feel pressure or gaps. Then, inflate the air cell pressure, pushing the red bulb until you reach necessary compression. To deflate, push the black button under the bulb and the pressure will decrease. Washing Instructions: Handwash all components in warm water with mild soap, allowing it to air dry completely before reapplying. Other features: Natural, non-invasive fix for many sources of foot and ankle pain. Easy to put on, take off and adjust. Extra pads are included with your purchase for added comfort. Color: Black. 618810540085 7661337083957 new 44.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10a1402-orthopedic-air-walker-boot-cast-for-ankle-sprains_grande.jpg?v=1527627639 641061979883 BraceAbility 10A1402L Walker Boots LUS Lumbar Back Brace for Chronic Pain from Sciatica or Pinched Nerve http://www.braceability.com/products/sciatica-back-pain-brace?variant=7610186137653 Lumbar Back Brace for Chronic Pain from Sciatica or Pinched Nerve S Why Do I Need This Back Brace for Sciatica? Compression is a key component for those trying to reduce their sciatica pain and discomfort. Although many individuals have symptoms occurring in the legs and buttock region, the underlying cause of the pain originates in your lumbar back region. This is why wearing a brace that applies such pressure and compression is vital. This brace also allows easy hot/cold therapy as it has a pocket designed for hot and cold packets. Read below for more great features of the brace and to learn more about sciatica! Features of the Lumbar Brace for Pinched Nerve In Back Treatment: Sciatica Pain Treatment Provides Support and Compression This 9” tall lumbar belt works to compress and support the lower spine to remedy a pinched nerve. The belt for lower back treatment contours to the shape of your body, making it customizable for anyone. Sciatica Brace Features Double Pull Tension Straps The double pull tension straps of this lumbosacral support belt help maximize the amount of pressure applied to your back. These straps are easily tightened/loosened for your desired level of compression. Comfortable, Flexible, and Customizable Design The brace is lightweight and thin, yet supportive allowing it to be worn over or underneath your clothing. In addition, the comfort of the premium-quality neoprene and elastic material allows for day or nighttime wear. This braces low profile and everyday use design ensure your sciatica a quick recovery. This lumbar band can be worn by men and women of all ages; during the day at work or at home, at night while you're sleeping, or even during activities like walking or working out at the gym.  Sciatica Back Brace Includes Back Pocket for Hot/Cold Inserts Adding to its benefits, this pain reliever brace effectively helps sciatica through featured pockets that hold a gel insert for hot or cold therapy, the best form of treatment for a pinched nerve. Hot and cold therapy is tremendous solutions for lumbar pinched nerves because they reduce any type of inflammation causing pain. The hot and cold therapy gel insert stays flexible, allowing the device to conform to the shape of your body. On top of this, you can also purchase an additional pressure pad to help with your compression therapy. The pressure pad works to reduce pain by adding pressure to the affected area. These inserts will ensure your sciatica it’s quickest and most effective form of recovery. Both inserts are sold separately. Wide Range of Sizes from Small up to 4XL Plus Size This sciatic nerve treatment brace comes in sizes ranging from S all the way up to 4XL, fitting hip/waist circumferences of 25”-69”. The size variations help fit any individual, even those considered large or plus size individuals. What’s the Difference Between Sciatica and a Pinched Nerve? People often misunderstand what sciatica is versus a pinched nerve. True sciatica is actually a symptom of some form of nerve compression. This means that sciatica is the name for the pain that you feel (usually in your leg) because you have a pinch in the nerve in your lower lumbar back. The term “sciatica” is not an actual medical diagnosis in and of itself. Rather, it’s used to describe the symptoms (chronic leg pain) of an underlying medical problem (a pinched nerve in your back). Most often, people refer to sciatica when they are experiencing leg pain. Other symptoms may include leg numbness, pain while sitting down, burning, tingling, and other types of buttocks, thigh, or calf pain. How does a nerve in your back become pinched or compressed? Common lower back conditions that are actually the cause of your sciatica are often times lumbar herniated disc, degenerative disc disease, spondylolisthesis, or spinal stenosis. These conditions involve the discs that surround your spinal cord becoming weak or damaged. This damage then causes pressure to be placed directly on your spinal cord nerves - ultimately causing sciatica pain. What Causes Sciatica or a Pinched Lumbar Nerve? The most common cause of issues related to sciatica is an improper closure of the space where a canal lies between the vertebrae. This type of improper closure comes from conditions like those listed below, such as a bulging or degenerated disc. Another potential cause could be back trauma so severe that the vertebral joints become inflamed and the muscles of the back tighten up around the affected area. This type of trauma can place chronic stress around the vertebrae and cause nerve compression.  This lumbar band for both a man and woman work as a great form of treatment because it will not only compress the affected area but also work to realign and reduce inflammation. When suffering from these types of conditions it's vital your brace puts pressure on the irritated area in order to protect the tissue. This lumbar band will help create stability with the spinal column while still providing the area with pain relief. Most Common Symptoms of Severe Sciatica Back Pain: Constant chronic pain running down one side of the buttocks or leg Pain that worsens when seated Leg pain described as tingling, numbness, or a burning sensation Sharp pain making it difficult to stand up or walk Conditions Which Cause Pinched Nerves in Your Back: Lumbar Herniated Disc Degenerative Disc Disease Spondylolisthesis Spinal Stenosis Sciatica Treatment At Home: To cure sciatica the focus is usually on the lumbar region because this is usually the root of the leg pain. Here are some good natural home remedies to help ease your discomfort from sciatica: Hot/cold therapy Low to moderate exercises Stretching and yoga Physical therapy Rest Looking for other sciatica supports? BraceAbility has a wide variety of other braces to help relieve your sciatica pain .  Frequently Asked Questions About This Sciatica Pain Relief Brace What injuries or conditions does this back brace treat? Lower compression brace to help treat sciatica and pinched nerves in your back caused by spinal conditions such as degenerative disc disease, spinal stenosis, herniated discs, and spondylolisthesis. How do I know which size to get? Using a soft tape measure, measure the circumference around your hips, in inches. The brace comes in a variety of sizes, ranging from S - 4XL, fitting waist circumferences of 25” up to 69.” How do I put on this brace? Lay the back support flat and locate the top. If you purchased a gel pack or pressure pad, now is the time to insert it into the pocket. Center the brace on your back. Pull the left side firmly across, to the middle of your stomach, repeat for the right side. Attach the two sides by the Velcro on the ends. Adjust as needed for own comfort preferences. Can I wash the brace? Yes, hand wash the belt in warm water with mild soap. Do not bleach. Lay flat to air-dry. Avoid high temperatures to wash or dry. 609093681205 7610186137653 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03b0503-sciatica-back-pain-brace-procides_support-and-compression_grande.jpg?v=1536335664 641427944418 BraceAbility 03B0503S Back Braces SUS Lumbar Back Brace for Chronic Pain from Sciatica or Pinched Nerve http://www.braceability.com/products/sciatica-back-pain-brace?variant=7610186170421 Lumbar Back Brace for Chronic Pain from Sciatica or Pinched Nerve M Why Do I Need This Back Brace for Sciatica? Compression is a key component for those trying to reduce their sciatica pain and discomfort. Although many individuals have symptoms occurring in the legs and buttock region, the underlying cause of the pain originates in your lumbar back region. This is why wearing a brace that applies such pressure and compression is vital. This brace also allows easy hot/cold therapy as it has a pocket designed for hot and cold packets. Read below for more great features of the brace and to learn more about sciatica! Features of the Lumbar Brace for Pinched Nerve In Back Treatment: Sciatica Pain Treatment Provides Support and Compression This 9” tall lumbar belt works to compress and support the lower spine to remedy a pinched nerve. The belt for lower back treatment contours to the shape of your body, making it customizable for anyone. Sciatica Brace Features Double Pull Tension Straps The double pull tension straps of this lumbosacral support belt help maximize the amount of pressure applied to your back. These straps are easily tightened/loosened for your desired level of compression. Comfortable, Flexible, and Customizable Design The brace is lightweight and thin, yet supportive allowing it to be worn over or underneath your clothing. In addition, the comfort of the premium-quality neoprene and elastic material allows for day or nighttime wear. This braces low profile and everyday use design ensure your sciatica a quick recovery. This lumbar band can be worn by men and women of all ages; during the day at work or at home, at night while you're sleeping, or even during activities like walking or working out at the gym.  Sciatica Back Brace Includes Back Pocket for Hot/Cold Inserts Adding to its benefits, this pain reliever brace effectively helps sciatica through featured pockets that hold a gel insert for hot or cold therapy, the best form of treatment for a pinched nerve. Hot and cold therapy is tremendous solutions for lumbar pinched nerves because they reduce any type of inflammation causing pain. The hot and cold therapy gel insert stays flexible, allowing the device to conform to the shape of your body. On top of this, you can also purchase an additional pressure pad to help with your compression therapy. The pressure pad works to reduce pain by adding pressure to the affected area. These inserts will ensure your sciatica it’s quickest and most effective form of recovery. Both inserts are sold separately. Wide Range of Sizes from Small up to 4XL Plus Size This sciatic nerve treatment brace comes in sizes ranging from S all the way up to 4XL, fitting hip/waist circumferences of 25”-69”. The size variations help fit any individual, even those considered large or plus size individuals. What’s the Difference Between Sciatica and a Pinched Nerve? People often misunderstand what sciatica is versus a pinched nerve. True sciatica is actually a symptom of some form of nerve compression. This means that sciatica is the name for the pain that you feel (usually in your leg) because you have a pinch in the nerve in your lower lumbar back. The term “sciatica” is not an actual medical diagnosis in and of itself. Rather, it’s used to describe the symptoms (chronic leg pain) of an underlying medical problem (a pinched nerve in your back). Most often, people refer to sciatica when they are experiencing leg pain. Other symptoms may include leg numbness, pain while sitting down, burning, tingling, and other types of buttocks, thigh, or calf pain. How does a nerve in your back become pinched or compressed? Common lower back conditions that are actually the cause of your sciatica are often times lumbar herniated disc, degenerative disc disease, spondylolisthesis, or spinal stenosis. These conditions involve the discs that surround your spinal cord becoming weak or damaged. This damage then causes pressure to be placed directly on your spinal cord nerves - ultimately causing sciatica pain. What Causes Sciatica or a Pinched Lumbar Nerve? The most common cause of issues related to sciatica is an improper closure of the space where a canal lies between the vertebrae. This type of improper closure comes from conditions like those listed below, such as a bulging or degenerated disc. Another potential cause could be back trauma so severe that the vertebral joints become inflamed and the muscles of the back tighten up around the affected area. This type of trauma can place chronic stress around the vertebrae and cause nerve compression.  This lumbar band for both a man and woman work as a great form of treatment because it will not only compress the affected area but also work to realign and reduce inflammation. When suffering from these types of conditions it's vital your brace puts pressure on the irritated area in order to protect the tissue. This lumbar band will help create stability with the spinal column while still providing the area with pain relief. Most Common Symptoms of Severe Sciatica Back Pain: Constant chronic pain running down one side of the buttocks or leg Pain that worsens when seated Leg pain described as tingling, numbness, or a burning sensation Sharp pain making it difficult to stand up or walk Conditions Which Cause Pinched Nerves in Your Back: Lumbar Herniated Disc Degenerative Disc Disease Spondylolisthesis Spinal Stenosis Sciatica Treatment At Home: To cure sciatica the focus is usually on the lumbar region because this is usually the root of the leg pain. Here are some good natural home remedies to help ease your discomfort from sciatica: Hot/cold therapy Low to moderate exercises Stretching and yoga Physical therapy Rest Looking for other sciatica supports? BraceAbility has a wide variety of other braces to help relieve your sciatica pain .  Frequently Asked Questions About This Sciatica Pain Relief Brace What injuries or conditions does this back brace treat? Lower compression brace to help treat sciatica and pinched nerves in your back caused by spinal conditions such as degenerative disc disease, spinal stenosis, herniated discs, and spondylolisthesis. How do I know which size to get? Using a soft tape measure, measure the circumference around your hips, in inches. The brace comes in a variety of sizes, ranging from S - 4XL, fitting waist circumferences of 25” up to 69.” How do I put on this brace? Lay the back support flat and locate the top. If you purchased a gel pack or pressure pad, now is the time to insert it into the pocket. Center the brace on your back. Pull the left side firmly across, to the middle of your stomach, repeat for the right side. Attach the two sides by the Velcro on the ends. Adjust as needed for own comfort preferences. Can I wash the brace? Yes, hand wash the belt in warm water with mild soap. Do not bleach. Lay flat to air-dry. Avoid high temperatures to wash or dry. 609093681205 7610186170421 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03b0503-sciatica-back-pain-brace-procides_support-and-compression_grande.jpg?v=1536335664 641427944425 BraceAbility 03B0503M Back Braces MUS Lumbar Back Brace for Chronic Pain from Sciatica or Pinched Nerve http://www.braceability.com/products/sciatica-back-pain-brace?variant=7610186203189 Lumbar Back Brace for Chronic Pain from Sciatica or Pinched Nerve L Why Do I Need This Back Brace for Sciatica? Compression is a key component for those trying to reduce their sciatica pain and discomfort. Although many individuals have symptoms occurring in the legs and buttock region, the underlying cause of the pain originates in your lumbar back region. This is why wearing a brace that applies such pressure and compression is vital. This brace also allows easy hot/cold therapy as it has a pocket designed for hot and cold packets. Read below for more great features of the brace and to learn more about sciatica! Features of the Lumbar Brace for Pinched Nerve In Back Treatment: Sciatica Pain Treatment Provides Support and Compression This 9” tall lumbar belt works to compress and support the lower spine to remedy a pinched nerve. The belt for lower back treatment contours to the shape of your body, making it customizable for anyone. Sciatica Brace Features Double Pull Tension Straps The double pull tension straps of this lumbosacral support belt help maximize the amount of pressure applied to your back. These straps are easily tightened/loosened for your desired level of compression. Comfortable, Flexible, and Customizable Design The brace is lightweight and thin, yet supportive allowing it to be worn over or underneath your clothing. In addition, the comfort of the premium-quality neoprene and elastic material allows for day or nighttime wear. This braces low profile and everyday use design ensure your sciatica a quick recovery. This lumbar band can be worn by men and women of all ages; during the day at work or at home, at night while you're sleeping, or even during activities like walking or working out at the gym.  Sciatica Back Brace Includes Back Pocket for Hot/Cold Inserts Adding to its benefits, this pain reliever brace effectively helps sciatica through featured pockets that hold a gel insert for hot or cold therapy, the best form of treatment for a pinched nerve. Hot and cold therapy is tremendous solutions for lumbar pinched nerves because they reduce any type of inflammation causing pain. The hot and cold therapy gel insert stays flexible, allowing the device to conform to the shape of your body. On top of this, you can also purchase an additional pressure pad to help with your compression therapy. The pressure pad works to reduce pain by adding pressure to the affected area. These inserts will ensure your sciatica it’s quickest and most effective form of recovery. Both inserts are sold separately. Wide Range of Sizes from Small up to 4XL Plus Size This sciatic nerve treatment brace comes in sizes ranging from S all the way up to 4XL, fitting hip/waist circumferences of 25”-69”. The size variations help fit any individual, even those considered large or plus size individuals. What’s the Difference Between Sciatica and a Pinched Nerve? People often misunderstand what sciatica is versus a pinched nerve. True sciatica is actually a symptom of some form of nerve compression. This means that sciatica is the name for the pain that you feel (usually in your leg) because you have a pinch in the nerve in your lower lumbar back. The term “sciatica” is not an actual medical diagnosis in and of itself. Rather, it’s used to describe the symptoms (chronic leg pain) of an underlying medical problem (a pinched nerve in your back). Most often, people refer to sciatica when they are experiencing leg pain. Other symptoms may include leg numbness, pain while sitting down, burning, tingling, and other types of buttocks, thigh, or calf pain. How does a nerve in your back become pinched or compressed? Common lower back conditions that are actually the cause of your sciatica are often times lumbar herniated disc, degenerative disc disease, spondylolisthesis, or spinal stenosis. These conditions involve the discs that surround your spinal cord becoming weak or damaged. This damage then causes pressure to be placed directly on your spinal cord nerves - ultimately causing sciatica pain. What Causes Sciatica or a Pinched Lumbar Nerve? The most common cause of issues related to sciatica is an improper closure of the space where a canal lies between the vertebrae. This type of improper closure comes from conditions like those listed below, such as a bulging or degenerated disc. Another potential cause could be back trauma so severe that the vertebral joints become inflamed and the muscles of the back tighten up around the affected area. This type of trauma can place chronic stress around the vertebrae and cause nerve compression.  This lumbar band for both a man and woman work as a great form of treatment because it will not only compress the affected area but also work to realign and reduce inflammation. When suffering from these types of conditions it's vital your brace puts pressure on the irritated area in order to protect the tissue. This lumbar band will help create stability with the spinal column while still providing the area with pain relief. Most Common Symptoms of Severe Sciatica Back Pain: Constant chronic pain running down one side of the buttocks or leg Pain that worsens when seated Leg pain described as tingling, numbness, or a burning sensation Sharp pain making it difficult to stand up or walk Conditions Which Cause Pinched Nerves in Your Back: Lumbar Herniated Disc Degenerative Disc Disease Spondylolisthesis Spinal Stenosis Sciatica Treatment At Home: To cure sciatica the focus is usually on the lumbar region because this is usually the root of the leg pain. Here are some good natural home remedies to help ease your discomfort from sciatica: Hot/cold therapy Low to moderate exercises Stretching and yoga Physical therapy Rest Looking for other sciatica supports? BraceAbility has a wide variety of other braces to help relieve your sciatica pain .  Frequently Asked Questions About This Sciatica Pain Relief Brace What injuries or conditions does this back brace treat? Lower compression brace to help treat sciatica and pinched nerves in your back caused by spinal conditions such as degenerative disc disease, spinal stenosis, herniated discs, and spondylolisthesis. How do I know which size to get? Using a soft tape measure, measure the circumference around your hips, in inches. The brace comes in a variety of sizes, ranging from S - 4XL, fitting waist circumferences of 25” up to 69.” How do I put on this brace? Lay the back support flat and locate the top. If you purchased a gel pack or pressure pad, now is the time to insert it into the pocket. Center the brace on your back. Pull the left side firmly across, to the middle of your stomach, repeat for the right side. Attach the two sides by the Velcro on the ends. Adjust as needed for own comfort preferences. Can I wash the brace? Yes, hand wash the belt in warm water with mild soap. Do not bleach. Lay flat to air-dry. Avoid high temperatures to wash or dry. 609093681205 7610186203189 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03b0503-sciatica-back-pain-brace-procides_support-and-compression_grande.jpg?v=1536335664 641427944432 BraceAbility 03B0503L Back Braces LUS Lumbar Back Brace for Chronic Pain from Sciatica or Pinched Nerve http://www.braceability.com/products/sciatica-back-pain-brace?variant=7610186235957 Lumbar Back Brace for Chronic Pain from Sciatica or Pinched Nerve XL Why Do I Need This Back Brace for Sciatica? Compression is a key component for those trying to reduce their sciatica pain and discomfort. Although many individuals have symptoms occurring in the legs and buttock region, the underlying cause of the pain originates in your lumbar back region. This is why wearing a brace that applies such pressure and compression is vital. This brace also allows easy hot/cold therapy as it has a pocket designed for hot and cold packets. Read below for more great features of the brace and to learn more about sciatica! Features of the Lumbar Brace for Pinched Nerve In Back Treatment: Sciatica Pain Treatment Provides Support and Compression This 9” tall lumbar belt works to compress and support the lower spine to remedy a pinched nerve. The belt for lower back treatment contours to the shape of your body, making it customizable for anyone. Sciatica Brace Features Double Pull Tension Straps The double pull tension straps of this lumbosacral support belt help maximize the amount of pressure applied to your back. These straps are easily tightened/loosened for your desired level of compression. Comfortable, Flexible, and Customizable Design The brace is lightweight and thin, yet supportive allowing it to be worn over or underneath your clothing. In addition, the comfort of the premium-quality neoprene and elastic material allows for day or nighttime wear. This braces low profile and everyday use design ensure your sciatica a quick recovery. This lumbar band can be worn by men and women of all ages; during the day at work or at home, at night while you're sleeping, or even during activities like walking or working out at the gym.  Sciatica Back Brace Includes Back Pocket for Hot/Cold Inserts Adding to its benefits, this pain reliever brace effectively helps sciatica through featured pockets that hold a gel insert for hot or cold therapy, the best form of treatment for a pinched nerve. Hot and cold therapy is tremendous solutions for lumbar pinched nerves because they reduce any type of inflammation causing pain. The hot and cold therapy gel insert stays flexible, allowing the device to conform to the shape of your body. On top of this, you can also purchase an additional pressure pad to help with your compression therapy. The pressure pad works to reduce pain by adding pressure to the affected area. These inserts will ensure your sciatica it’s quickest and most effective form of recovery. Both inserts are sold separately. Wide Range of Sizes from Small up to 4XL Plus Size This sciatic nerve treatment brace comes in sizes ranging from S all the way up to 4XL, fitting hip/waist circumferences of 25”-69”. The size variations help fit any individual, even those considered large or plus size individuals. What’s the Difference Between Sciatica and a Pinched Nerve? People often misunderstand what sciatica is versus a pinched nerve. True sciatica is actually a symptom of some form of nerve compression. This means that sciatica is the name for the pain that you feel (usually in your leg) because you have a pinch in the nerve in your lower lumbar back. The term “sciatica” is not an actual medical diagnosis in and of itself. Rather, it’s used to describe the symptoms (chronic leg pain) of an underlying medical problem (a pinched nerve in your back). Most often, people refer to sciatica when they are experiencing leg pain. Other symptoms may include leg numbness, pain while sitting down, burning, tingling, and other types of buttocks, thigh, or calf pain. How does a nerve in your back become pinched or compressed? Common lower back conditions that are actually the cause of your sciatica are often times lumbar herniated disc, degenerative disc disease, spondylolisthesis, or spinal stenosis. These conditions involve the discs that surround your spinal cord becoming weak or damaged. This damage then causes pressure to be placed directly on your spinal cord nerves - ultimately causing sciatica pain. What Causes Sciatica or a Pinched Lumbar Nerve? The most common cause of issues related to sciatica is an improper closure of the space where a canal lies between the vertebrae. This type of improper closure comes from conditions like those listed below, such as a bulging or degenerated disc. Another potential cause could be back trauma so severe that the vertebral joints become inflamed and the muscles of the back tighten up around the affected area. This type of trauma can place chronic stress around the vertebrae and cause nerve compression.  This lumbar band for both a man and woman work as a great form of treatment because it will not only compress the affected area but also work to realign and reduce inflammation. When suffering from these types of conditions it's vital your brace puts pressure on the irritated area in order to protect the tissue. This lumbar band will help create stability with the spinal column while still providing the area with pain relief. Most Common Symptoms of Severe Sciatica Back Pain: Constant chronic pain running down one side of the buttocks or leg Pain that worsens when seated Leg pain described as tingling, numbness, or a burning sensation Sharp pain making it difficult to stand up or walk Conditions Which Cause Pinched Nerves in Your Back: Lumbar Herniated Disc Degenerative Disc Disease Spondylolisthesis Spinal Stenosis Sciatica Treatment At Home: To cure sciatica the focus is usually on the lumbar region because this is usually the root of the leg pain. Here are some good natural home remedies to help ease your discomfort from sciatica: Hot/cold therapy Low to moderate exercises Stretching and yoga Physical therapy Rest Looking for other sciatica supports? BraceAbility has a wide variety of other braces to help relieve your sciatica pain .  Frequently Asked Questions About This Sciatica Pain Relief Brace What injuries or conditions does this back brace treat? Lower compression brace to help treat sciatica and pinched nerves in your back caused by spinal conditions such as degenerative disc disease, spinal stenosis, herniated discs, and spondylolisthesis. How do I know which size to get? Using a soft tape measure, measure the circumference around your hips, in inches. The brace comes in a variety of sizes, ranging from S - 4XL, fitting waist circumferences of 25” up to 69.” How do I put on this brace? Lay the back support flat and locate the top. If you purchased a gel pack or pressure pad, now is the time to insert it into the pocket. Center the brace on your back. Pull the left side firmly across, to the middle of your stomach, repeat for the right side. Attach the two sides by the Velcro on the ends. Adjust as needed for own comfort preferences. Can I wash the brace? Yes, hand wash the belt in warm water with mild soap. Do not bleach. Lay flat to air-dry. Avoid high temperatures to wash or dry. 609093681205 7610186235957 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03b0503-sciatica-back-pain-brace-procides_support-and-compression_grande.jpg?v=1536335664 641427944449 BraceAbility 03B0503XL Back Braces XLUS Lumbar Back Brace for Chronic Pain from Sciatica or Pinched Nerve http://www.braceability.com/products/sciatica-back-pain-brace?variant=7610186268725 Lumbar Back Brace for Chronic Pain from Sciatica or Pinched Nerve 2XL Why Do I Need This Back Brace for Sciatica? Compression is a key component for those trying to reduce their sciatica pain and discomfort. Although many individuals have symptoms occurring in the legs and buttock region, the underlying cause of the pain originates in your lumbar back region. This is why wearing a brace that applies such pressure and compression is vital. This brace also allows easy hot/cold therapy as it has a pocket designed for hot and cold packets. Read below for more great features of the brace and to learn more about sciatica! Features of the Lumbar Brace for Pinched Nerve In Back Treatment: Sciatica Pain Treatment Provides Support and Compression This 9” tall lumbar belt works to compress and support the lower spine to remedy a pinched nerve. The belt for lower back treatment contours to the shape of your body, making it customizable for anyone. Sciatica Brace Features Double Pull Tension Straps The double pull tension straps of this lumbosacral support belt help maximize the amount of pressure applied to your back. These straps are easily tightened/loosened for your desired level of compression. Comfortable, Flexible, and Customizable Design The brace is lightweight and thin, yet supportive allowing it to be worn over or underneath your clothing. In addition, the comfort of the premium-quality neoprene and elastic material allows for day or nighttime wear. This braces low profile and everyday use design ensure your sciatica a quick recovery. This lumbar band can be worn by men and women of all ages; during the day at work or at home, at night while you're sleeping, or even during activities like walking or working out at the gym.  Sciatica Back Brace Includes Back Pocket for Hot/Cold Inserts Adding to its benefits, this pain reliever brace effectively helps sciatica through featured pockets that hold a gel insert for hot or cold therapy, the best form of treatment for a pinched nerve. Hot and cold therapy is tremendous solutions for lumbar pinched nerves because they reduce any type of inflammation causing pain. The hot and cold therapy gel insert stays flexible, allowing the device to conform to the shape of your body. On top of this, you can also purchase an additional pressure pad to help with your compression therapy. The pressure pad works to reduce pain by adding pressure to the affected area. These inserts will ensure your sciatica it’s quickest and most effective form of recovery. Both inserts are sold separately. Wide Range of Sizes from Small up to 4XL Plus Size This sciatic nerve treatment brace comes in sizes ranging from S all the way up to 4XL, fitting hip/waist circumferences of 25”-69”. The size variations help fit any individual, even those considered large or plus size individuals. What’s the Difference Between Sciatica and a Pinched Nerve? People often misunderstand what sciatica is versus a pinched nerve. True sciatica is actually a symptom of some form of nerve compression. This means that sciatica is the name for the pain that you feel (usually in your leg) because you have a pinch in the nerve in your lower lumbar back. The term “sciatica” is not an actual medical diagnosis in and of itself. Rather, it’s used to describe the symptoms (chronic leg pain) of an underlying medical problem (a pinched nerve in your back). Most often, people refer to sciatica when they are experiencing leg pain. Other symptoms may include leg numbness, pain while sitting down, burning, tingling, and other types of buttocks, thigh, or calf pain. How does a nerve in your back become pinched or compressed? Common lower back conditions that are actually the cause of your sciatica are often times lumbar herniated disc, degenerative disc disease, spondylolisthesis, or spinal stenosis. These conditions involve the discs that surround your spinal cord becoming weak or damaged. This damage then causes pressure to be placed directly on your spinal cord nerves - ultimately causing sciatica pain. What Causes Sciatica or a Pinched Lumbar Nerve? The most common cause of issues related to sciatica is an improper closure of the space where a canal lies between the vertebrae. This type of improper closure comes from conditions like those listed below, such as a bulging or degenerated disc. Another potential cause could be back trauma so severe that the vertebral joints become inflamed and the muscles of the back tighten up around the affected area. This type of trauma can place chronic stress around the vertebrae and cause nerve compression.  This lumbar band for both a man and woman work as a great form of treatment because it will not only compress the affected area but also work to realign and reduce inflammation. When suffering from these types of conditions it's vital your brace puts pressure on the irritated area in order to protect the tissue. This lumbar band will help create stability with the spinal column while still providing the area with pain relief. Most Common Symptoms of Severe Sciatica Back Pain: Constant chronic pain running down one side of the buttocks or leg Pain that worsens when seated Leg pain described as tingling, numbness, or a burning sensation Sharp pain making it difficult to stand up or walk Conditions Which Cause Pinched Nerves in Your Back: Lumbar Herniated Disc Degenerative Disc Disease Spondylolisthesis Spinal Stenosis Sciatica Treatment At Home: To cure sciatica the focus is usually on the lumbar region because this is usually the root of the leg pain. Here are some good natural home remedies to help ease your discomfort from sciatica: Hot/cold therapy Low to moderate exercises Stretching and yoga Physical therapy Rest Looking for other sciatica supports? BraceAbility has a wide variety of other braces to help relieve your sciatica pain .  Frequently Asked Questions About This Sciatica Pain Relief Brace What injuries or conditions does this back brace treat? Lower compression brace to help treat sciatica and pinched nerves in your back caused by spinal conditions such as degenerative disc disease, spinal stenosis, herniated discs, and spondylolisthesis. How do I know which size to get? Using a soft tape measure, measure the circumference around your hips, in inches. The brace comes in a variety of sizes, ranging from S - 4XL, fitting waist circumferences of 25” up to 69.” How do I put on this brace? Lay the back support flat and locate the top. If you purchased a gel pack or pressure pad, now is the time to insert it into the pocket. Center the brace on your back. Pull the left side firmly across, to the middle of your stomach, repeat for the right side. Attach the two sides by the Velcro on the ends. Adjust as needed for own comfort preferences. Can I wash the brace? Yes, hand wash the belt in warm water with mild soap. Do not bleach. Lay flat to air-dry. Avoid high temperatures to wash or dry. 609093681205 7610186268725 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03b0503-sciatica-back-pain-brace-procides_support-and-compression_grande.jpg?v=1536335664 641427944456 BraceAbility 03B0503XXL Back Braces 2XLUS Lumbar Back Brace for Chronic Pain from Sciatica or Pinched Nerve http://www.braceability.com/products/sciatica-back-pain-brace?variant=7610186301493 Lumbar Back Brace for Chronic Pain from Sciatica or Pinched Nerve 3XL Why Do I Need This Back Brace for Sciatica? Compression is a key component for those trying to reduce their sciatica pain and discomfort. Although many individuals have symptoms occurring in the legs and buttock region, the underlying cause of the pain originates in your lumbar back region. This is why wearing a brace that applies such pressure and compression is vital. This brace also allows easy hot/cold therapy as it has a pocket designed for hot and cold packets. Read below for more great features of the brace and to learn more about sciatica! Features of the Lumbar Brace for Pinched Nerve In Back Treatment: Sciatica Pain Treatment Provides Support and Compression This 9” tall lumbar belt works to compress and support the lower spine to remedy a pinched nerve. The belt for lower back treatment contours to the shape of your body, making it customizable for anyone. Sciatica Brace Features Double Pull Tension Straps The double pull tension straps of this lumbosacral support belt help maximize the amount of pressure applied to your back. These straps are easily tightened/loosened for your desired level of compression. Comfortable, Flexible, and Customizable Design The brace is lightweight and thin, yet supportive allowing it to be worn over or underneath your clothing. In addition, the comfort of the premium-quality neoprene and elastic material allows for day or nighttime wear. This braces low profile and everyday use design ensure your sciatica a quick recovery. This lumbar band can be worn by men and women of all ages; during the day at work or at home, at night while you're sleeping, or even during activities like walking or working out at the gym.  Sciatica Back Brace Includes Back Pocket for Hot/Cold Inserts Adding to its benefits, this pain reliever brace effectively helps sciatica through featured pockets that hold a gel insert for hot or cold therapy, the best form of treatment for a pinched nerve. Hot and cold therapy is tremendous solutions for lumbar pinched nerves because they reduce any type of inflammation causing pain. The hot and cold therapy gel insert stays flexible, allowing the device to conform to the shape of your body. On top of this, you can also purchase an additional pressure pad to help with your compression therapy. The pressure pad works to reduce pain by adding pressure to the affected area. These inserts will ensure your sciatica it’s quickest and most effective form of recovery. Both inserts are sold separately. Wide Range of Sizes from Small up to 4XL Plus Size This sciatic nerve treatment brace comes in sizes ranging from S all the way up to 4XL, fitting hip/waist circumferences of 25”-69”. The size variations help fit any individual, even those considered large or plus size individuals. What’s the Difference Between Sciatica and a Pinched Nerve? People often misunderstand what sciatica is versus a pinched nerve. True sciatica is actually a symptom of some form of nerve compression. This means that sciatica is the name for the pain that you feel (usually in your leg) because you have a pinch in the nerve in your lower lumbar back. The term “sciatica” is not an actual medical diagnosis in and of itself. Rather, it’s used to describe the symptoms (chronic leg pain) of an underlying medical problem (a pinched nerve in your back). Most often, people refer to sciatica when they are experiencing leg pain. Other symptoms may include leg numbness, pain while sitting down, burning, tingling, and other types of buttocks, thigh, or calf pain. How does a nerve in your back become pinched or compressed? Common lower back conditions that are actually the cause of your sciatica are often times lumbar herniated disc, degenerative disc disease, spondylolisthesis, or spinal stenosis. These conditions involve the discs that surround your spinal cord becoming weak or damaged. This damage then causes pressure to be placed directly on your spinal cord nerves - ultimately causing sciatica pain. What Causes Sciatica or a Pinched Lumbar Nerve? The most common cause of issues related to sciatica is an improper closure of the space where a canal lies between the vertebrae. This type of improper closure comes from conditions like those listed below, such as a bulging or degenerated disc. Another potential cause could be back trauma so severe that the vertebral joints become inflamed and the muscles of the back tighten up around the affected area. This type of trauma can place chronic stress around the vertebrae and cause nerve compression.  This lumbar band for both a man and woman work as a great form of treatment because it will not only compress the affected area but also work to realign and reduce inflammation. When suffering from these types of conditions it's vital your brace puts pressure on the irritated area in order to protect the tissue. This lumbar band will help create stability with the spinal column while still providing the area with pain relief. Most Common Symptoms of Severe Sciatica Back Pain: Constant chronic pain running down one side of the buttocks or leg Pain that worsens when seated Leg pain described as tingling, numbness, or a burning sensation Sharp pain making it difficult to stand up or walk Conditions Which Cause Pinched Nerves in Your Back: Lumbar Herniated Disc Degenerative Disc Disease Spondylolisthesis Spinal Stenosis Sciatica Treatment At Home: To cure sciatica the focus is usually on the lumbar region because this is usually the root of the leg pain. Here are some good natural home remedies to help ease your discomfort from sciatica: Hot/cold therapy Low to moderate exercises Stretching and yoga Physical therapy Rest Looking for other sciatica supports? BraceAbility has a wide variety of other braces to help relieve your sciatica pain .  Frequently Asked Questions About This Sciatica Pain Relief Brace What injuries or conditions does this back brace treat? Lower compression brace to help treat sciatica and pinched nerves in your back caused by spinal conditions such as degenerative disc disease, spinal stenosis, herniated discs, and spondylolisthesis. How do I know which size to get? Using a soft tape measure, measure the circumference around your hips, in inches. The brace comes in a variety of sizes, ranging from S - 4XL, fitting waist circumferences of 25” up to 69.” How do I put on this brace? Lay the back support flat and locate the top. If you purchased a gel pack or pressure pad, now is the time to insert it into the pocket. Center the brace on your back. Pull the left side firmly across, to the middle of your stomach, repeat for the right side. Attach the two sides by the Velcro on the ends. Adjust as needed for own comfort preferences. Can I wash the brace? Yes, hand wash the belt in warm water with mild soap. Do not bleach. Lay flat to air-dry. Avoid high temperatures to wash or dry. 609093681205 7610186301493 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03b0503-sciatica-back-pain-brace-procides_support-and-compression_grande.jpg?v=1536335664 641427944463 BraceAbility 03B0503XXXL Back Braces 3XLUS Lumbar Back Brace for Chronic Pain from Sciatica or Pinched Nerve http://www.braceability.com/products/sciatica-back-pain-brace?variant=7610186334261 Lumbar Back Brace for Chronic Pain from Sciatica or Pinched Nerve 4XL Why Do I Need This Back Brace for Sciatica? Compression is a key component for those trying to reduce their sciatica pain and discomfort. Although many individuals have symptoms occurring in the legs and buttock region, the underlying cause of the pain originates in your lumbar back region. This is why wearing a brace that applies such pressure and compression is vital. This brace also allows easy hot/cold therapy as it has a pocket designed for hot and cold packets. Read below for more great features of the brace and to learn more about sciatica! Features of the Lumbar Brace for Pinched Nerve In Back Treatment: Sciatica Pain Treatment Provides Support and Compression This 9” tall lumbar belt works to compress and support the lower spine to remedy a pinched nerve. The belt for lower back treatment contours to the shape of your body, making it customizable for anyone. Sciatica Brace Features Double Pull Tension Straps The double pull tension straps of this lumbosacral support belt help maximize the amount of pressure applied to your back. These straps are easily tightened/loosened for your desired level of compression. Comfortable, Flexible, and Customizable Design The brace is lightweight and thin, yet supportive allowing it to be worn over or underneath your clothing. In addition, the comfort of the premium-quality neoprene and elastic material allows for day or nighttime wear. This braces low profile and everyday use design ensure your sciatica a quick recovery. This lumbar band can be worn by men and women of all ages; during the day at work or at home, at night while you're sleeping, or even during activities like walking or working out at the gym.  Sciatica Back Brace Includes Back Pocket for Hot/Cold Inserts Adding to its benefits, this pain reliever brace effectively helps sciatica through featured pockets that hold a gel insert for hot or cold therapy, the best form of treatment for a pinched nerve. Hot and cold therapy is tremendous solutions for lumbar pinched nerves because they reduce any type of inflammation causing pain. The hot and cold therapy gel insert stays flexible, allowing the device to conform to the shape of your body. On top of this, you can also purchase an additional pressure pad to help with your compression therapy. The pressure pad works to reduce pain by adding pressure to the affected area. These inserts will ensure your sciatica it’s quickest and most effective form of recovery. Both inserts are sold separately. Wide Range of Sizes from Small up to 4XL Plus Size This sciatic nerve treatment brace comes in sizes ranging from S all the way up to 4XL, fitting hip/waist circumferences of 25”-69”. The size variations help fit any individual, even those considered large or plus size individuals. What’s the Difference Between Sciatica and a Pinched Nerve? People often misunderstand what sciatica is versus a pinched nerve. True sciatica is actually a symptom of some form of nerve compression. This means that sciatica is the name for the pain that you feel (usually in your leg) because you have a pinch in the nerve in your lower lumbar back. The term “sciatica” is not an actual medical diagnosis in and of itself. Rather, it’s used to describe the symptoms (chronic leg pain) of an underlying medical problem (a pinched nerve in your back). Most often, people refer to sciatica when they are experiencing leg pain. Other symptoms may include leg numbness, pain while sitting down, burning, tingling, and other types of buttocks, thigh, or calf pain. How does a nerve in your back become pinched or compressed? Common lower back conditions that are actually the cause of your sciatica are often times lumbar herniated disc, degenerative disc disease, spondylolisthesis, or spinal stenosis. These conditions involve the discs that surround your spinal cord becoming weak or damaged. This damage then causes pressure to be placed directly on your spinal cord nerves - ultimately causing sciatica pain. What Causes Sciatica or a Pinched Lumbar Nerve? The most common cause of issues related to sciatica is an improper closure of the space where a canal lies between the vertebrae. This type of improper closure comes from conditions like those listed below, such as a bulging or degenerated disc. Another potential cause could be back trauma so severe that the vertebral joints become inflamed and the muscles of the back tighten up around the affected area. This type of trauma can place chronic stress around the vertebrae and cause nerve compression.  This lumbar band for both a man and woman work as a great form of treatment because it will not only compress the affected area but also work to realign and reduce inflammation. When suffering from these types of conditions it's vital your brace puts pressure on the irritated area in order to protect the tissue. This lumbar band will help create stability with the spinal column while still providing the area with pain relief. Most Common Symptoms of Severe Sciatica Back Pain: Constant chronic pain running down one side of the buttocks or leg Pain that worsens when seated Leg pain described as tingling, numbness, or a burning sensation Sharp pain making it difficult to stand up or walk Conditions Which Cause Pinched Nerves in Your Back: Lumbar Herniated Disc Degenerative Disc Disease Spondylolisthesis Spinal Stenosis Sciatica Treatment At Home: To cure sciatica the focus is usually on the lumbar region because this is usually the root of the leg pain. Here are some good natural home remedies to help ease your discomfort from sciatica: Hot/cold therapy Low to moderate exercises Stretching and yoga Physical therapy Rest Looking for other sciatica supports? BraceAbility has a wide variety of other braces to help relieve your sciatica pain .  Frequently Asked Questions About This Sciatica Pain Relief Brace What injuries or conditions does this back brace treat? Lower compression brace to help treat sciatica and pinched nerves in your back caused by spinal conditions such as degenerative disc disease, spinal stenosis, herniated discs, and spondylolisthesis. How do I know which size to get? Using a soft tape measure, measure the circumference around your hips, in inches. The brace comes in a variety of sizes, ranging from S - 4XL, fitting waist circumferences of 25” up to 69.” How do I put on this brace? Lay the back support flat and locate the top. If you purchased a gel pack or pressure pad, now is the time to insert it into the pocket. Center the brace on your back. Pull the left side firmly across, to the middle of your stomach, repeat for the right side. Attach the two sides by the Velcro on the ends. Adjust as needed for own comfort preferences. Can I wash the brace? Yes, hand wash the belt in warm water with mild soap. Do not bleach. Lay flat to air-dry. Avoid high temperatures to wash or dry. 609093681205 7610186334261 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03b0503-sciatica-back-pain-brace-procides_support-and-compression_grande.jpg?v=1536335664 641427944470 BraceAbility 03B0503XXXXL Back Braces 4XLUS Big & Tall Husky XL Knee Wrap for Wide Thighs http://www.braceability.com/products/husky-knee-wrap?variant=7671149527093 Big & Tall Husky XL Knee Wrap for Wide Thighs XL Why You Need This Big and Tall Knee Brace for Oversized Knee Support Having plus-size legs puts you at greater risk of injury , making it difficult to enjoy a more active lifestyle. (Find out if you are overweight or obese .) This extra-large, performance-focused knee wrap is a great solution for allowing you to continue doing the things you like since it helps manage knee pain caused by conditions including: Kneecap instability Patella tracking disorder Arthritis Kneecap dislocation Meniscus tears Ligament sprains Patellar subluxation Or if you’re simply looking for added support when walking, practicing yoga, or doing other athletic activities, you can wear the brace for extra support. 4 Reasons Why You'll Love This XXL Knee Wrap for Husky Knees The trouble with many of the XXL knee braces you find at stores such as CVS or Walmart is that they are not designed with the needs of an obese person in mind. They slide down your leg, bunch up, and simply don’t get the job done. This extra large knee brace is one of BraceAbility’s best and most popular knee supports thanks to several very innovative features, which allow overweight to morbidly obese patients to enjoy a more active, pain-free lifestyle, in addition to protecting their knee against injury. Check out our full line of plus-size supports . Easy, Wrap-Around Style The fact that this wrap around knee brace comes in sizes up to XXXL means you don’t have to worry about squeezing into an ill-fitting brace, which can be counterproductive. It comes in XL, 2XL and 3XL sizes, each of which you can adjust quite a bit thanks to the wrap-around straps above and below your knee that are secured with medical-grade Velcro. Comfortable Design An opening over your patella prevents this big knee wrap from pressing on your sore knee joint. Plus, the circular opening allows your kneecap to move more easily as it’s directed by the buttresses. There is another opening behind your kneecap (popliteal), which helps increase the flexibility of this extra-large knee support. This open back also gives you a cooler fit and prevents uncomfortable bunching. Breathable, Neoprene-Alternative Material The compression wrap for plus size knees is flexible and lightweight thanks to the neoprene-alternative fabric this brace is made of, which means you can wear it comfortably throughout the day, including periods of activity. While breathable, the neoprene-alternative material that makes up this XXL adjustable knee wrap does provide a little warmth to your leg. This is great for soothing achy, stiff, or arthritic knees. However, we also offer a heated knee wrap if you are looking for more warmth. The latex-free, plus-size sport knee support also wicks moisture off your skin and has antimicrobial properties, making it a great athletic knee wrap. Try out these 7 exercises for overweight knee pain today! Plus, the thin, spongy material is very soft and flexible. Therefore, the brace will stay comfortably positioned on your knee whether you are sitting or standing. Two Customizable Buttresses For support, this brace has two adjustable buttresses that can help with medial (inner knee) or lateral (outer knee) instability or any other problems with how your kneecap moves within the socket. (Learn why your kneecap moves from side to side.) The thinner fabric support attaches via pull tabs at the front of the brace and provides light tension to pull the kneecap in the right direction. You can flip the brace to switch it from lateral to medial pull or vice versa. The thicker, horseshoe-shaped buttress provides moderate support to the kneecap and you can place it wherever you need around the kneecap opening thanks to its Velcro backing. These buttresses should be used separately. This extra support is great if you are dealing with kneecap instability due to ligament sprains or tears to the cartilage that cushions your kneecap. Frequently Asked Questions About This Bariatric Knee Brace for Morbidly Obese Patients What conditions does this knee brace treat? This compression wrap is specifically designed to help with pain and instability of plus-size knees, whether from arthritis, meniscus tears, past injuries and more. Who can wear it? This knee wrap is great for both men and women with big legs. We offer sizes ranging from XL to XXXL, fitting a wide range of kneecap and thigh circumferences. How do I know what size to get? Using a fabric tape measure, measure the circumference around the center of your kneecap and 6" above the center of your kneecap, around your thigh. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our sizing graphic in the photos above to choose the right size. How do I put on this plus size knee brace? First, decide whether you would rather use the pull tab support or buttress for light or moderate support, respectively.  If using the buttress, attach its Velcro backing where you need support around the kneecap opening of the brace. If you are using the pull tab, remove the buttress and position the brace as needed to pull the kneecap either toward the outer or inner side of the knee (you can flip the entire wrap to get it on the other side of the knee). Next, position the circular opening over the kneecap with the buttress side against your skin. Then, wrap the straps below the knee and above the knee and secure them using their Velcro closures. The brace should be snug, but not uncomfortable. If you are using the pull tab component, you can now pull its tabs to increase tension on the kneecap. Can I wear this brace over my pants? Yes, but this knee brace is meant to fit against your skin for a better grip. It can be worn above tight pants or leggings if necessary. How tall is this knee brace? 13”. What material is this sleeve made of? Latex-free, 3/16” thick, neoprene alternative. When should I wear this oversized knee brace? You should always follow a doctor’s instructions regarding use of an orthotic. But generally speaking, you can wear this adjustable wrap around knee support whenever you need extra stability.The fact that the support is lightweight and breathable means you will have no problem wearing it throughout the day while sitting, standing, and during physical activity if you want. Washing Instructions: Wash the Velcro knee compression wrap by hand using warm water and mild soap. Lay it flat to air dry completely before reapplying. You should not use bleach or high temperatures to wash or dry this support. Other features: There is no fabric at the back of the knee to bunch up. The support provides soothing warmth to the knee. The huge knee wrap wicks away moisture. Color: Black. 620730810421 7671149527093 new 59.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10k0901-big-and-tall-husky-knee-wrap-for-wide-thighs-main_grande.jpg?v=1524501193 641427945071 BraceAbility 10K0901XL Plus Size Knee Braces XLUS Big & Tall Husky XL Knee Wrap for Wide Thighs http://www.braceability.com/products/husky-knee-wrap?variant=7671185670197 Big & Tall Husky XL Knee Wrap for Wide Thighs 2XL Why You Need This Big and Tall Knee Brace for Oversized Knee Support Having plus-size legs puts you at greater risk of injury , making it difficult to enjoy a more active lifestyle. (Find out if you are overweight or obese .) This extra-large, performance-focused knee wrap is a great solution for allowing you to continue doing the things you like since it helps manage knee pain caused by conditions including: Kneecap instability Patella tracking disorder Arthritis Kneecap dislocation Meniscus tears Ligament sprains Patellar subluxation Or if you’re simply looking for added support when walking, practicing yoga, or doing other athletic activities, you can wear the brace for extra support. 4 Reasons Why You'll Love This XXL Knee Wrap for Husky Knees The trouble with many of the XXL knee braces you find at stores such as CVS or Walmart is that they are not designed with the needs of an obese person in mind. They slide down your leg, bunch up, and simply don’t get the job done. This extra large knee brace is one of BraceAbility’s best and most popular knee supports thanks to several very innovative features, which allow overweight to morbidly obese patients to enjoy a more active, pain-free lifestyle, in addition to protecting their knee against injury. Check out our full line of plus-size supports . Easy, Wrap-Around Style The fact that this wrap around knee brace comes in sizes up to XXXL means you don’t have to worry about squeezing into an ill-fitting brace, which can be counterproductive. It comes in XL, 2XL and 3XL sizes, each of which you can adjust quite a bit thanks to the wrap-around straps above and below your knee that are secured with medical-grade Velcro. Comfortable Design An opening over your patella prevents this big knee wrap from pressing on your sore knee joint. Plus, the circular opening allows your kneecap to move more easily as it’s directed by the buttresses. There is another opening behind your kneecap (popliteal), which helps increase the flexibility of this extra-large knee support. This open back also gives you a cooler fit and prevents uncomfortable bunching. Breathable, Neoprene-Alternative Material The compression wrap for plus size knees is flexible and lightweight thanks to the neoprene-alternative fabric this brace is made of, which means you can wear it comfortably throughout the day, including periods of activity. While breathable, the neoprene-alternative material that makes up this XXL adjustable knee wrap does provide a little warmth to your leg. This is great for soothing achy, stiff, or arthritic knees. However, we also offer a heated knee wrap if you are looking for more warmth. The latex-free, plus-size sport knee support also wicks moisture off your skin and has antimicrobial properties, making it a great athletic knee wrap. Try out these 7 exercises for overweight knee pain today! Plus, the thin, spongy material is very soft and flexible. Therefore, the brace will stay comfortably positioned on your knee whether you are sitting or standing. Two Customizable Buttresses For support, this brace has two adjustable buttresses that can help with medial (inner knee) or lateral (outer knee) instability or any other problems with how your kneecap moves within the socket. (Learn why your kneecap moves from side to side.) The thinner fabric support attaches via pull tabs at the front of the brace and provides light tension to pull the kneecap in the right direction. You can flip the brace to switch it from lateral to medial pull or vice versa. The thicker, horseshoe-shaped buttress provides moderate support to the kneecap and you can place it wherever you need around the kneecap opening thanks to its Velcro backing. These buttresses should be used separately. This extra support is great if you are dealing with kneecap instability due to ligament sprains or tears to the cartilage that cushions your kneecap. Frequently Asked Questions About This Bariatric Knee Brace for Morbidly Obese Patients What conditions does this knee brace treat? This compression wrap is specifically designed to help with pain and instability of plus-size knees, whether from arthritis, meniscus tears, past injuries and more. Who can wear it? This knee wrap is great for both men and women with big legs. We offer sizes ranging from XL to XXXL, fitting a wide range of kneecap and thigh circumferences. How do I know what size to get? Using a fabric tape measure, measure the circumference around the center of your kneecap and 6" above the center of your kneecap, around your thigh. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our sizing graphic in the photos above to choose the right size. How do I put on this plus size knee brace? First, decide whether you would rather use the pull tab support or buttress for light or moderate support, respectively.  If using the buttress, attach its Velcro backing where you need support around the kneecap opening of the brace. If you are using the pull tab, remove the buttress and position the brace as needed to pull the kneecap either toward the outer or inner side of the knee (you can flip the entire wrap to get it on the other side of the knee). Next, position the circular opening over the kneecap with the buttress side against your skin. Then, wrap the straps below the knee and above the knee and secure them using their Velcro closures. The brace should be snug, but not uncomfortable. If you are using the pull tab component, you can now pull its tabs to increase tension on the kneecap. Can I wear this brace over my pants? Yes, but this knee brace is meant to fit against your skin for a better grip. It can be worn above tight pants or leggings if necessary. How tall is this knee brace? 13”. What material is this sleeve made of? Latex-free, 3/16” thick, neoprene alternative. When should I wear this oversized knee brace? You should always follow a doctor’s instructions regarding use of an orthotic. But generally speaking, you can wear this adjustable wrap around knee support whenever you need extra stability.The fact that the support is lightweight and breathable means you will have no problem wearing it throughout the day while sitting, standing, and during physical activity if you want. Washing Instructions: Wash the Velcro knee compression wrap by hand using warm water and mild soap. Lay it flat to air dry completely before reapplying. You should not use bleach or high temperatures to wash or dry this support. Other features: There is no fabric at the back of the knee to bunch up. The support provides soothing warmth to the knee. The huge knee wrap wicks away moisture. Color: Black. 620730810421 7671185670197 new 59.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10k0901-big-and-tall-husky-knee-wrap-for-wide-thighs-main_grande.jpg?v=1524501193 641427945088 BraceAbility 10K0901XXL Plus Size Knee Braces 2XLUS Big & Tall Husky XL Knee Wrap for Wide Thighs http://www.braceability.com/products/husky-knee-wrap?variant=7671185735733 Big & Tall Husky XL Knee Wrap for Wide Thighs 3XL Why You Need This Big and Tall Knee Brace for Oversized Knee Support Having plus-size legs puts you at greater risk of injury , making it difficult to enjoy a more active lifestyle. (Find out if you are overweight or obese .) This extra-large, performance-focused knee wrap is a great solution for allowing you to continue doing the things you like since it helps manage knee pain caused by conditions including: Kneecap instability Patella tracking disorder Arthritis Kneecap dislocation Meniscus tears Ligament sprains Patellar subluxation Or if you’re simply looking for added support when walking, practicing yoga, or doing other athletic activities, you can wear the brace for extra support. 4 Reasons Why You'll Love This XXL Knee Wrap for Husky Knees The trouble with many of the XXL knee braces you find at stores such as CVS or Walmart is that they are not designed with the needs of an obese person in mind. They slide down your leg, bunch up, and simply don’t get the job done. This extra large knee brace is one of BraceAbility’s best and most popular knee supports thanks to several very innovative features, which allow overweight to morbidly obese patients to enjoy a more active, pain-free lifestyle, in addition to protecting their knee against injury. Check out our full line of plus-size supports . Easy, Wrap-Around Style The fact that this wrap around knee brace comes in sizes up to XXXL means you don’t have to worry about squeezing into an ill-fitting brace, which can be counterproductive. It comes in XL, 2XL and 3XL sizes, each of which you can adjust quite a bit thanks to the wrap-around straps above and below your knee that are secured with medical-grade Velcro. Comfortable Design An opening over your patella prevents this big knee wrap from pressing on your sore knee joint. Plus, the circular opening allows your kneecap to move more easily as it’s directed by the buttresses. There is another opening behind your kneecap (popliteal), which helps increase the flexibility of this extra-large knee support. This open back also gives you a cooler fit and prevents uncomfortable bunching. Breathable, Neoprene-Alternative Material The compression wrap for plus size knees is flexible and lightweight thanks to the neoprene-alternative fabric this brace is made of, which means you can wear it comfortably throughout the day, including periods of activity. While breathable, the neoprene-alternative material that makes up this XXL adjustable knee wrap does provide a little warmth to your leg. This is great for soothing achy, stiff, or arthritic knees. However, we also offer a heated knee wrap if you are looking for more warmth. The latex-free, plus-size sport knee support also wicks moisture off your skin and has antimicrobial properties, making it a great athletic knee wrap. Try out these 7 exercises for overweight knee pain today! Plus, the thin, spongy material is very soft and flexible. Therefore, the brace will stay comfortably positioned on your knee whether you are sitting or standing. Two Customizable Buttresses For support, this brace has two adjustable buttresses that can help with medial (inner knee) or lateral (outer knee) instability or any other problems with how your kneecap moves within the socket. (Learn why your kneecap moves from side to side.) The thinner fabric support attaches via pull tabs at the front of the brace and provides light tension to pull the kneecap in the right direction. You can flip the brace to switch it from lateral to medial pull or vice versa. The thicker, horseshoe-shaped buttress provides moderate support to the kneecap and you can place it wherever you need around the kneecap opening thanks to its Velcro backing. These buttresses should be used separately. This extra support is great if you are dealing with kneecap instability due to ligament sprains or tears to the cartilage that cushions your kneecap. Frequently Asked Questions About This Bariatric Knee Brace for Morbidly Obese Patients What conditions does this knee brace treat? This compression wrap is specifically designed to help with pain and instability of plus-size knees, whether from arthritis, meniscus tears, past injuries and more. Who can wear it? This knee wrap is great for both men and women with big legs. We offer sizes ranging from XL to XXXL, fitting a wide range of kneecap and thigh circumferences. How do I know what size to get? Using a fabric tape measure, measure the circumference around the center of your kneecap and 6" above the center of your kneecap, around your thigh. To get the most accurate measurements, we recommend having a close family member or friend assist you. Refer to our sizing graphic in the photos above to choose the right size. How do I put on this plus size knee brace? First, decide whether you would rather use the pull tab support or buttress for light or moderate support, respectively.  If using the buttress, attach its Velcro backing where you need support around the kneecap opening of the brace. If you are using the pull tab, remove the buttress and position the brace as needed to pull the kneecap either toward the outer or inner side of the knee (you can flip the entire wrap to get it on the other side of the knee). Next, position the circular opening over the kneecap with the buttress side against your skin. Then, wrap the straps below the knee and above the knee and secure them using their Velcro closures. The brace should be snug, but not uncomfortable. If you are using the pull tab component, you can now pull its tabs to increase tension on the kneecap. Can I wear this brace over my pants? Yes, but this knee brace is meant to fit against your skin for a better grip. It can be worn above tight pants or leggings if necessary. How tall is this knee brace? 13”. What material is this sleeve made of? Latex-free, 3/16” thick, neoprene alternative. When should I wear this oversized knee brace? You should always follow a doctor’s instructions regarding use of an orthotic. But generally speaking, you can wear this adjustable wrap around knee support whenever you need extra stability.The fact that the support is lightweight and breathable means you will have no problem wearing it throughout the day while sitting, standing, and during physical activity if you want. Washing Instructions: Wash the Velcro knee compression wrap by hand using warm water and mild soap. Lay it flat to air dry completely before reapplying. You should not use bleach or high temperatures to wash or dry this support. Other features: There is no fabric at the back of the knee to bunch up. The support provides soothing warmth to the knee. The huge knee wrap wicks away moisture. Color: Black. 620730810421 7671185735733 new 59.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10k0901-big-and-tall-husky-knee-wrap-for-wide-thighs-main_grande.jpg?v=1524501193 641427945095 BraceAbility 10K0901XXXL Plus Size Knee Braces 3XLUS Umbilical & Abdominal Hernia Support Belt with Pad http://www.braceability.com/products/umbilical-hernia-belt?variant=7695297904693 Umbilical & Abdominal Hernia Support Belt with Pad S How Do I Know if I Have a Hernia? A ‘hernia’ happens when an internal part of your body protrudes out of its typical structure. They are caused when your muscles, tendons, or bones weakening during the aging process, or by excess stress or weight being placed on a part of your body. You’ve probably heard of a ‘herniated disc ’ - which is an abnormal protrusion of your spinal nerves pushing out of the canals in your spine. But this hernia belt for women and men is for treating stomach and abdominal hernias - where your intestines or internal organs are pushing through your abdomen muscles, creating a visible bulge or pouch. Many people get confused between an abdominal hernia and abdominal muscle strain as they have similar symptoms and causes. If you aren’t sure which condition you have, check out this chart to help diagnose your abdominal pain. Why Would I Need An Abdominal Hernia Treatment Belt? Unfortunately, the only way to completely treat and repair a hernia is through undergoing surgery. But you may be able to postpone hernia surgery or choose not to have it at all if a hernia is small. If you are waiting for surgery, wearing this hernia support band will greatly reduce your discomfort. The pad on this hernia belt applies compression directly over your hernia to keep it in place so it doesn’t bulge out further. If you do have surgery , your bulging intestine will be pushed back through the hole in your abdominal wall, then the hole will be sewn shut. You won’t be able to do much physical activity until you are completely healed, leaving your stomach vulnerable to muscle loss. You can wear this belt with or without the pad to provide compression and support to your abdominal wall so your muscles heal properly. Hernia support belts protect your incision site and reduce the chances of your hernia recurring. Why this is the Best Umbilical Hernia Binder for Women and Men Removable Hernia Pad • This pad has a raised bump which should be placed right on top of your bulge to help provide maximum compression to the hernia. This relieves abdominal pain when you move, twist, and even cough. • The shape of the pad puts pressure directly on your hernia to help keep it confined and prevent it from protruding out more. • You can wear it in preparation for your surgery as well as post surgery. • Made silicone and plastic, surrounded by a thin Lycra cover (85% polyester, 15% spandex) making it comfortable yet tough enough to support a hernia in your abdomen. • The velcro on the back of the pad allows you to remove it and place it anywhere along the belt, depending on the location of your hernia. • The removable and washable cover is made of terrycloth fabric (100% polyester) making it soft and comfortable against your skin This innovative pad makes our hernia brace better than a cheap one you might find at your local Walmart or CVS. If you already have a hernia belt but the pad is getting old or overused - you can buy an extra hernia pad here . Easy and Quick Application This hernia waistband belt for women is easy and quick to apply! Wrapping this hernia garment around your waist only takes seconds and doesn’t require any assistance to secure it. No pesky clasps or buckles! The easy Velcro closure is convenient if you have arthritic hands. Lightweight and Breathable Material This hernia binder is comprised of nylon and spandex material and all parts of the brace are latex free. This lightweight medical device enables you to wear it over your clothes or discreetly beneath them, depending on your preference. Removable Flexible Spiral Stays Prevent Rolling The stays located on both sides of the belt help ensure the brace doesn’t roll down or bunch up while you wear it. The splints provide stability but can be removed if you don’t need them. What Are The Different Kinds of Hernias Found in Women and Men? There are many different types of hernias you can get. There are even some abdominal hernias that women alone are more prone to. How unfair right? These are the most common: Abdominal Hernias Umbilical Hernias (also called Navel or Belly Button Hernia) Incisional Hernias (also called Ventral Hernia Groin Hernias Inguinal Hernias Rectus Femoral Hernias Obturator Hernias For groin hernias, check out our compression groin wrap to help support the region while you wait for surgery. Esophagus Hernias Hiatal Hernias This belt is only recommended for abdominal hernias, which you can read more about below: Types of Abdominal Hernias this Brace Treats: Umbilical Hernias (Belly Button Hernias or Navel Hernias): Umbilical hernias are when your intestine pushes through the muscle behind your belly button. Although umbilical hernias are most likely seen in babies after they’re born, they’re seen in adults too. Umbilical hernias are frequently seen in women for many different reasons. Being an overweight individual, having frequent pregnancies or having twins, etc., past stomach surgery, and a chronic cough all make you more prone to umbilical hernias.  Symptoms of umbilical hernias include a bulge in the middle of your stomach, pain especially when coughing, pressure and discomfort. Incisional or Ventral Hernias: These hernias are a result of a past surgery to your abdomen region. Typically, abdominal surgeries such as having a C-section or getting a tummy tuck, make the muscles in your stomach or abdomen weak. This weakness leads to the development of hernias after your surgery. If I’m Pregnant, Am I More Susceptible To Umbilical Hernias? Abdomen hernias are found in expecting mothers due to the extra pressure that is being placed on the stomach. For women that are diagnosed with an umbilical hernia during pregnancy, it’s advised to wait until after you’ve delivered your baby to have surgery to fix your herniated navel. You should be fully recovered from your delivery before considering surgery to get your diastasis recti treated. Wearing a hernia belt during your pregnancy is a great option to help give you relief while you wait for your child to be born. The wide range of sizes makes it easy for you to find the right fit and even get a larger size as your baby grows. Or if you’re considered obese or plus size , the variety of sizes makes it easy for you find the perfect size for your body. The elastic band is available for body circumferences from 28” up to 60”. At BraceAbility, we have a wide selection of other maternity support belts, braces, binders, and wraps to help you feel comfortable throughout your pregnancy! Frequently Asked Questions About The Hernia Belt for Females What conditions does this hernia belt treat? This truss belt helps give relief to those suffering from abdominal hernias such as umbilical hernias, navel/belly button hernias, incisional hernias, and ventral hernias. It’s a great option for those wanting or needing to postpone hernia surgery. How do I know which size to get? Using a fabric tape measure, measure the circumference around your body at the location of your hernia. This hernia corset fits body circumferences of 28”-60” How do I put on the brace? Position the pad on the inside of the belt based on the location of your hernia. Next, wrap the hernia band around your body and secure the Velcro closure. Adjust the position of the pad as needed; the pad should put pressure directly on your hernia. The two supportive stays on the sides can be removed if you wish. How do I adjust the hernia pad? To adjust the location, you simply remove the silicone pad that is secured by Velcro closures and place it right on top of your hernia region. What is the height of the belt? This abdominal wrap is 5” tall. What material is this hernia brace made of? Belt: 80% Nylon, 20% Spandex, Pad: Silicone with Polyester cover. Soft Removable Pad Cover: Lycra and Terrycloth fabric (85% Polyester, 15% Spandex). All components are latex-free. Can I wash the brace? Before washing, remove both of the spiral stays and the soft fabric cover of the hernia pad. Hand wash the belt and fabric cover of the hernia pad in warm water with mild soap. Lay flat to air-dry. Do not use high temperatures to wash or dry.  623920873525 7695297904693 new 49.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/11w0101-umbilical-hernia-surgery-belt-in-abdominal_grande.jpg?v=1544111479 641427943732 BraceAbility 11W0101S Hernia SUS Umbilical & Abdominal Hernia Support Belt with Pad http://www.braceability.com/products/umbilical-hernia-belt?variant=7695297937461 Umbilical & Abdominal Hernia Support Belt with Pad M How Do I Know if I Have a Hernia? A ‘hernia’ happens when an internal part of your body protrudes out of its typical structure. They are caused when your muscles, tendons, or bones weakening during the aging process, or by excess stress or weight being placed on a part of your body. You’ve probably heard of a ‘herniated disc ’ - which is an abnormal protrusion of your spinal nerves pushing out of the canals in your spine. But this hernia belt for women and men is for treating stomach and abdominal hernias - where your intestines or internal organs are pushing through your abdomen muscles, creating a visible bulge or pouch. Many people get confused between an abdominal hernia and abdominal muscle strain as they have similar symptoms and causes. If you aren’t sure which condition you have, check out this chart to help diagnose your abdominal pain. Why Would I Need An Abdominal Hernia Treatment Belt? Unfortunately, the only way to completely treat and repair a hernia is through undergoing surgery. But you may be able to postpone hernia surgery or choose not to have it at all if a hernia is small. If you are waiting for surgery, wearing this hernia support band will greatly reduce your discomfort. The pad on this hernia belt applies compression directly over your hernia to keep it in place so it doesn’t bulge out further. If you do have surgery , your bulging intestine will be pushed back through the hole in your abdominal wall, then the hole will be sewn shut. You won’t be able to do much physical activity until you are completely healed, leaving your stomach vulnerable to muscle loss. You can wear this belt with or without the pad to provide compression and support to your abdominal wall so your muscles heal properly. Hernia support belts protect your incision site and reduce the chances of your hernia recurring. Why this is the Best Umbilical Hernia Binder for Women and Men Removable Hernia Pad • This pad has a raised bump which should be placed right on top of your bulge to help provide maximum compression to the hernia. This relieves abdominal pain when you move, twist, and even cough. • The shape of the pad puts pressure directly on your hernia to help keep it confined and prevent it from protruding out more. • You can wear it in preparation for your surgery as well as post surgery. • Made silicone and plastic, surrounded by a thin Lycra cover (85% polyester, 15% spandex) making it comfortable yet tough enough to support a hernia in your abdomen. • The velcro on the back of the pad allows you to remove it and place it anywhere along the belt, depending on the location of your hernia. • The removable and washable cover is made of terrycloth fabric (100% polyester) making it soft and comfortable against your skin This innovative pad makes our hernia brace better than a cheap one you might find at your local Walmart or CVS. If you already have a hernia belt but the pad is getting old or overused - you can buy an extra hernia pad here . Easy and Quick Application This hernia waistband belt for women is easy and quick to apply! Wrapping this hernia garment around your waist only takes seconds and doesn’t require any assistance to secure it. No pesky clasps or buckles! The easy Velcro closure is convenient if you have arthritic hands. Lightweight and Breathable Material This hernia binder is comprised of nylon and spandex material and all parts of the brace are latex free. This lightweight medical device enables you to wear it over your clothes or discreetly beneath them, depending on your preference. Removable Flexible Spiral Stays Prevent Rolling The stays located on both sides of the belt help ensure the brace doesn’t roll down or bunch up while you wear it. The splints provide stability but can be removed if you don’t need them. What Are The Different Kinds of Hernias Found in Women and Men? There are many different types of hernias you can get. There are even some abdominal hernias that women alone are more prone to. How unfair right? These are the most common: Abdominal Hernias Umbilical Hernias (also called Navel or Belly Button Hernia) Incisional Hernias (also called Ventral Hernia Groin Hernias Inguinal Hernias Rectus Femoral Hernias Obturator Hernias For groin hernias, check out our compression groin wrap to help support the region while you wait for surgery. Esophagus Hernias Hiatal Hernias This belt is only recommended for abdominal hernias, which you can read more about below: Types of Abdominal Hernias this Brace Treats: Umbilical Hernias (Belly Button Hernias or Navel Hernias): Umbilical hernias are when your intestine pushes through the muscle behind your belly button. Although umbilical hernias are most likely seen in babies after they’re born, they’re seen in adults too. Umbilical hernias are frequently seen in women for many different reasons. Being an overweight individual, having frequent pregnancies or having twins, etc., past stomach surgery, and a chronic cough all make you more prone to umbilical hernias.  Symptoms of umbilical hernias include a bulge in the middle of your stomach, pain especially when coughing, pressure and discomfort. Incisional or Ventral Hernias: These hernias are a result of a past surgery to your abdomen region. Typically, abdominal surgeries such as having a C-section or getting a tummy tuck, make the muscles in your stomach or abdomen weak. This weakness leads to the development of hernias after your surgery. If I’m Pregnant, Am I More Susceptible To Umbilical Hernias? Abdomen hernias are found in expecting mothers due to the extra pressure that is being placed on the stomach. For women that are diagnosed with an umbilical hernia during pregnancy, it’s advised to wait until after you’ve delivered your baby to have surgery to fix your herniated navel. You should be fully recovered from your delivery before considering surgery to get your diastasis recti treated. Wearing a hernia belt during your pregnancy is a great option to help give you relief while you wait for your child to be born. The wide range of sizes makes it easy for you to find the right fit and even get a larger size as your baby grows. Or if you’re considered obese or plus size , the variety of sizes makes it easy for you find the perfect size for your body. The elastic band is available for body circumferences from 28” up to 60”. At BraceAbility, we have a wide selection of other maternity support belts, braces, binders, and wraps to help you feel comfortable throughout your pregnancy! Frequently Asked Questions About The Hernia Belt for Females What conditions does this hernia belt treat? This truss belt helps give relief to those suffering from abdominal hernias such as umbilical hernias, navel/belly button hernias, incisional hernias, and ventral hernias. It’s a great option for those wanting or needing to postpone hernia surgery. How do I know which size to get? Using a fabric tape measure, measure the circumference around your body at the location of your hernia. This hernia corset fits body circumferences of 28”-60” How do I put on the brace? Position the pad on the inside of the belt based on the location of your hernia. Next, wrap the hernia band around your body and secure the Velcro closure. Adjust the position of the pad as needed; the pad should put pressure directly on your hernia. The two supportive stays on the sides can be removed if you wish. How do I adjust the hernia pad? To adjust the location, you simply remove the silicone pad that is secured by Velcro closures and place it right on top of your hernia region. What is the height of the belt? This abdominal wrap is 5” tall. What material is this hernia brace made of? Belt: 80% Nylon, 20% Spandex, Pad: Silicone with Polyester cover. Soft Removable Pad Cover: Lycra and Terrycloth fabric (85% Polyester, 15% Spandex). All components are latex-free. Can I wash the brace? Before washing, remove both of the spiral stays and the soft fabric cover of the hernia pad. Hand wash the belt and fabric cover of the hernia pad in warm water with mild soap. Lay flat to air-dry. Do not use high temperatures to wash or dry.  623920873525 7695297937461 new 49.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/11w0101-umbilical-hernia-surgery-belt-in-abdominal_grande.jpg?v=1544111479 641427943749 BraceAbility 11W0101M Hernia MUS Umbilical & Abdominal Hernia Support Belt with Pad http://www.braceability.com/products/umbilical-hernia-belt?variant=7695297970229 Umbilical & Abdominal Hernia Support Belt with Pad L How Do I Know if I Have a Hernia? A ‘hernia’ happens when an internal part of your body protrudes out of its typical structure. They are caused when your muscles, tendons, or bones weakening during the aging process, or by excess stress or weight being placed on a part of your body. You’ve probably heard of a ‘herniated disc ’ - which is an abnormal protrusion of your spinal nerves pushing out of the canals in your spine. But this hernia belt for women and men is for treating stomach and abdominal hernias - where your intestines or internal organs are pushing through your abdomen muscles, creating a visible bulge or pouch. Many people get confused between an abdominal hernia and abdominal muscle strain as they have similar symptoms and causes. If you aren’t sure which condition you have, check out this chart to help diagnose your abdominal pain. Why Would I Need An Abdominal Hernia Treatment Belt? Unfortunately, the only way to completely treat and repair a hernia is through undergoing surgery. But you may be able to postpone hernia surgery or choose not to have it at all if a hernia is small. If you are waiting for surgery, wearing this hernia support band will greatly reduce your discomfort. The pad on this hernia belt applies compression directly over your hernia to keep it in place so it doesn’t bulge out further. If you do have surgery , your bulging intestine will be pushed back through the hole in your abdominal wall, then the hole will be sewn shut. You won’t be able to do much physical activity until you are completely healed, leaving your stomach vulnerable to muscle loss. You can wear this belt with or without the pad to provide compression and support to your abdominal wall so your muscles heal properly. Hernia support belts protect your incision site and reduce the chances of your hernia recurring. Why this is the Best Umbilical Hernia Binder for Women and Men Removable Hernia Pad • This pad has a raised bump which should be placed right on top of your bulge to help provide maximum compression to the hernia. This relieves abdominal pain when you move, twist, and even cough. • The shape of the pad puts pressure directly on your hernia to help keep it confined and prevent it from protruding out more. • You can wear it in preparation for your surgery as well as post surgery. • Made silicone and plastic, surrounded by a thin Lycra cover (85% polyester, 15% spandex) making it comfortable yet tough enough to support a hernia in your abdomen. • The velcro on the back of the pad allows you to remove it and place it anywhere along the belt, depending on the location of your hernia. • The removable and washable cover is made of terrycloth fabric (100% polyester) making it soft and comfortable against your skin This innovative pad makes our hernia brace better than a cheap one you might find at your local Walmart or CVS. If you already have a hernia belt but the pad is getting old or overused - you can buy an extra hernia pad here . Easy and Quick Application This hernia waistband belt for women is easy and quick to apply! Wrapping this hernia garment around your waist only takes seconds and doesn’t require any assistance to secure it. No pesky clasps or buckles! The easy Velcro closure is convenient if you have arthritic hands. Lightweight and Breathable Material This hernia binder is comprised of nylon and spandex material and all parts of the brace are latex free. This lightweight medical device enables you to wear it over your clothes or discreetly beneath them, depending on your preference. Removable Flexible Spiral Stays Prevent Rolling The stays located on both sides of the belt help ensure the brace doesn’t roll down or bunch up while you wear it. The splints provide stability but can be removed if you don’t need them. What Are The Different Kinds of Hernias Found in Women and Men? There are many different types of hernias you can get. There are even some abdominal hernias that women alone are more prone to. How unfair right? These are the most common: Abdominal Hernias Umbilical Hernias (also called Navel or Belly Button Hernia) Incisional Hernias (also called Ventral Hernia Groin Hernias Inguinal Hernias Rectus Femoral Hernias Obturator Hernias For groin hernias, check out our compression groin wrap to help support the region while you wait for surgery. Esophagus Hernias Hiatal Hernias This belt is only recommended for abdominal hernias, which you can read more about below: Types of Abdominal Hernias this Brace Treats: Umbilical Hernias (Belly Button Hernias or Navel Hernias): Umbilical hernias are when your intestine pushes through the muscle behind your belly button. Although umbilical hernias are most likely seen in babies after they’re born, they’re seen in adults too. Umbilical hernias are frequently seen in women for many different reasons. Being an overweight individual, having frequent pregnancies or having twins, etc., past stomach surgery, and a chronic cough all make you more prone to umbilical hernias.  Symptoms of umbilical hernias include a bulge in the middle of your stomach, pain especially when coughing, pressure and discomfort. Incisional or Ventral Hernias: These hernias are a result of a past surgery to your abdomen region. Typically, abdominal surgeries such as having a C-section or getting a tummy tuck, make the muscles in your stomach or abdomen weak. This weakness leads to the development of hernias after your surgery. If I’m Pregnant, Am I More Susceptible To Umbilical Hernias? Abdomen hernias are found in expecting mothers due to the extra pressure that is being placed on the stomach. For women that are diagnosed with an umbilical hernia during pregnancy, it’s advised to wait until after you’ve delivered your baby to have surgery to fix your herniated navel. You should be fully recovered from your delivery before considering surgery to get your diastasis recti treated. Wearing a hernia belt during your pregnancy is a great option to help give you relief while you wait for your child to be born. The wide range of sizes makes it easy for you to find the right fit and even get a larger size as your baby grows. Or if you’re considered obese or plus size , the variety of sizes makes it easy for you find the perfect size for your body. The elastic band is available for body circumferences from 28” up to 60”. At BraceAbility, we have a wide selection of other maternity support belts, braces, binders, and wraps to help you feel comfortable throughout your pregnancy! Frequently Asked Questions About The Hernia Belt for Females What conditions does this hernia belt treat? This truss belt helps give relief to those suffering from abdominal hernias such as umbilical hernias, navel/belly button hernias, incisional hernias, and ventral hernias. It’s a great option for those wanting or needing to postpone hernia surgery. How do I know which size to get? Using a fabric tape measure, measure the circumference around your body at the location of your hernia. This hernia corset fits body circumferences of 28”-60” How do I put on the brace? Position the pad on the inside of the belt based on the location of your hernia. Next, wrap the hernia band around your body and secure the Velcro closure. Adjust the position of the pad as needed; the pad should put pressure directly on your hernia. The two supportive stays on the sides can be removed if you wish. How do I adjust the hernia pad? To adjust the location, you simply remove the silicone pad that is secured by Velcro closures and place it right on top of your hernia region. What is the height of the belt? This abdominal wrap is 5” tall. What material is this hernia brace made of? Belt: 80% Nylon, 20% Spandex, Pad: Silicone with Polyester cover. Soft Removable Pad Cover: Lycra and Terrycloth fabric (85% Polyester, 15% Spandex). All components are latex-free. Can I wash the brace? Before washing, remove both of the spiral stays and the soft fabric cover of the hernia pad. Hand wash the belt and fabric cover of the hernia pad in warm water with mild soap. Lay flat to air-dry. Do not use high temperatures to wash or dry.  623920873525 7695297970229 new 49.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/11w0101-umbilical-hernia-surgery-belt-in-abdominal_grande.jpg?v=1544111479 641427943756 BraceAbility 11W0101L Hernia LUS Soft AFO Foot Drop Treatment Brace for Walking Barefoot or Inside Shoe http://www.braceability.com/products/afo-drop-foot-brace?variant=7609756942389 Soft AFO Foot Drop Treatment Brace for Walking Barefoot or Inside Shoe S/M Why You Need This Dorsiflexion Assist AFO for Drop Foot Drop foot refers to the inability to lift the front of your foot off the ground by contracting the muscles in your shin, a movement known as dorsiflexion.There are a number of reasons why you might have trouble with this movement, including:  Stroke Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease Muscular dystrophy Compression of your peroneal nerve due to habitual leg crossing Diabetic nerve damage As you probably already guessed, foot drop is not a condition, but rather a symptom of some underlying condition. Learn more about foot drop and its causes ! If you suffer from foot drop, you’re likely familiar with dragging or scuffing your forefoot across the floor as you walk. And let’s not forget the awkward, high-knee or swinging gait you probably had to adapt to counter this, which can lead to further injuries. This soft AFO (ankle foot orthosis) for foot drop helps address these cumbersome symptoms by supporting the upper portion of your foot, allowing you to move about and walk more naturally. What Is Charcot-Marie-Tooth Disease? And What Does It Have to Do with Foot Drop? Charcot-Marie-Tooth (CMT) is a nerve disorder that causes damage to your peripheral nerves (arms and legs). This nerve damage often results in weakened muscles and loss of feeling in your legs and feet, which can make walking quick difficult. Depending on the severity of your symptoms, this AFO foot drop brace can help promote a more natural gait. 5 Reasons Why You'll Love This AFO Brace for Foot Drop This splint for drop foot is a popular product thanks to its versatility and soft design. To be more specific, some of its best features include the following: Works Interchangeably with a Tie Shoe, Slip-On Shoe, or Barefoot Its two interchangeable forefoot attachments give you the ability to wear this drop foot brace with sandals, slip-on shoes, or laced shoes. Plus, it can also be used while you’re barefoot. The plastic tie insert fits between the tongue and laces of your shoe and is practically invisible. This flexibility helps it to stand out from other braces for drop foot . Breathable Fabric and Open-Heel Design Unlike many other AFO braces for drop foot, this product is made of a soft and thin, flexible material that fits easily inside shoes. The lack of a heel section makes this brace more comfortable to wear for all-day support. Convenient, Wrap-Around Style for Quick and Easy Adjustment Easily apply or remove this brace, thanks to its convenient wrap-around design. Each Velcro strap is Medical-grade, making it 10X stronger than standard, retail-grade Velcro for a secure fit throughout the day. Provides Comfortable, Daytime Support This soft AFO for plantar fasciitis, Achilles tendonitis, foot drop, and more holds your foot close to a 90-degree angle, providing a consistent stretch to your plantar fascia, Achilles tendon, and calf muscle, while also promoting a more natural gait. Many braces for plantar fasciitis only provide nighttime support, but this dorsiflexion assist was specifically designed for daytime use. Looking for nighttime support? Check out our soft dorsal night splint or sleeping stretch boot ! Adjustable Buckle Strap for Customizable Dorsiflexion Control The center release buckle has a simple-to-use contact-release, which makes it easy to switch out the attachments, whenever necessary. And you can easily adjust the tension by simply pulling the buckle strap tighter for increased dorsiflexion or loosen for less support throughout the day. Frequently Asked Questions About This Ankle Foot Orthosis Treatment   What conditions/injuries does this ankle stabilizer treat? This dorsiflexion assist orthosis helps manage discomfort due to foot drop, post CVA (stroke), Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease, plantar fasciitis , diabetic neuropathy, mild muscular dystrophy, Achilles tendonitis , and post-spinal cord surgery. How does it work? This daytime splint for foot drop and plantar fasciitis holds your foot at a 90-degree angle, supporting your foot and eliminating discomfort. When should I wear it? This foot drop brace is meant to be worn throughout the day for support, with or without shoes. We also offer a variety of nighttime foot supports for bedtime use. What is it made of? This latex-free brace for drop foot is made out of breathable foam laminate, nylon straps, a center release buckle, and medical-grade Velcro closures. Who can wear this brace? Men and women of all ages can benefit from the stretch and support provided by this soft AFO brace. What size should I buy? Size S/M fits ankle circumferences ranging from 8”-10” and size L/XL fits ankle circumferences ranging from 9.5”-12.5”. It can be worn on your left or right foot, with or without socks. How do I put it on? Slip-On Application: If a slip-on option is desired, grasp foot sleeve and slide over foot arch, making sure to strap with buckle in on top of your foot. Wrap bottom calf strap just above your ankle and secure underneath buckle strap. Adjust strap with buckle to achieve the desired flexion of the foot. Remove and reattach small Velcro piece near the top for more support. Wrap top calf strap around leg and secure to desired comfort level, wrapping over buckle strap. Lace Shoe Application: Press buckle to undo foot sleeve. Wrap calf wrap around leg and secure at desired comfort level, making sure strap with buckle is on the top of your leg. Undo the first half of shoestrings. Lace shoestrings thru tie insert securing shoestrings at desired comfort level. Attach tie insert to calf wrap. Adjust strap with buckle to achieve desired flexion of foot, moving the small Velcro piece near the top for more support. How tall is this brace? The S/M is 9” tall and the L/XL is 11” tall. Washing Instructions: Close all Velcro closures and hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Allow brace to air dry completely before reapplying. Do not use high temperatures to wash or dry. Other features: Can be worn with or without socks Breathable, open-heel design Highly adjustable, strapping system for optimal support Color: Black. 608968212533 7609756942389 new 69.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03a1101-soft-afo-foot-drop-brace-main_grande.jpg?v=1543938014 641061983668 BraceAbility 03A1101S Foot & Toe S/MUS Soft AFO Foot Drop Treatment Brace for Walking Barefoot or Inside Shoe http://www.braceability.com/products/afo-drop-foot-brace?variant=7609756975157 Soft AFO Foot Drop Treatment Brace for Walking Barefoot or Inside Shoe L/XL Why You Need This Dorsiflexion Assist AFO for Drop Foot Drop foot refers to the inability to lift the front of your foot off the ground by contracting the muscles in your shin, a movement known as dorsiflexion.There are a number of reasons why you might have trouble with this movement, including:  Stroke Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease Muscular dystrophy Compression of your peroneal nerve due to habitual leg crossing Diabetic nerve damage As you probably already guessed, foot drop is not a condition, but rather a symptom of some underlying condition. Learn more about foot drop and its causes ! If you suffer from foot drop, you’re likely familiar with dragging or scuffing your forefoot across the floor as you walk. And let’s not forget the awkward, high-knee or swinging gait you probably had to adapt to counter this, which can lead to further injuries. This soft AFO (ankle foot orthosis) for foot drop helps address these cumbersome symptoms by supporting the upper portion of your foot, allowing you to move about and walk more naturally. What Is Charcot-Marie-Tooth Disease? And What Does It Have to Do with Foot Drop? Charcot-Marie-Tooth (CMT) is a nerve disorder that causes damage to your peripheral nerves (arms and legs). This nerve damage often results in weakened muscles and loss of feeling in your legs and feet, which can make walking quick difficult. Depending on the severity of your symptoms, this AFO foot drop brace can help promote a more natural gait. 5 Reasons Why You'll Love This AFO Brace for Foot Drop This splint for drop foot is a popular product thanks to its versatility and soft design. To be more specific, some of its best features include the following: Works Interchangeably with a Tie Shoe, Slip-On Shoe, or Barefoot Its two interchangeable forefoot attachments give you the ability to wear this drop foot brace with sandals, slip-on shoes, or laced shoes. Plus, it can also be used while you’re barefoot. The plastic tie insert fits between the tongue and laces of your shoe and is practically invisible. This flexibility helps it to stand out from other braces for drop foot . Breathable Fabric and Open-Heel Design Unlike many other AFO braces for drop foot, this product is made of a soft and thin, flexible material that fits easily inside shoes. The lack of a heel section makes this brace more comfortable to wear for all-day support. Convenient, Wrap-Around Style for Quick and Easy Adjustment Easily apply or remove this brace, thanks to its convenient wrap-around design. Each Velcro strap is Medical-grade, making it 10X stronger than standard, retail-grade Velcro for a secure fit throughout the day. Provides Comfortable, Daytime Support This soft AFO for plantar fasciitis, Achilles tendonitis, foot drop, and more holds your foot close to a 90-degree angle, providing a consistent stretch to your plantar fascia, Achilles tendon, and calf muscle, while also promoting a more natural gait. Many braces for plantar fasciitis only provide nighttime support, but this dorsiflexion assist was specifically designed for daytime use. Looking for nighttime support? Check out our soft dorsal night splint or sleeping stretch boot ! Adjustable Buckle Strap for Customizable Dorsiflexion Control The center release buckle has a simple-to-use contact-release, which makes it easy to switch out the attachments, whenever necessary. And you can easily adjust the tension by simply pulling the buckle strap tighter for increased dorsiflexion or loosen for less support throughout the day. Frequently Asked Questions About This Ankle Foot Orthosis Treatment   What conditions/injuries does this ankle stabilizer treat? This dorsiflexion assist orthosis helps manage discomfort due to foot drop, post CVA (stroke), Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease, plantar fasciitis , diabetic neuropathy, mild muscular dystrophy, Achilles tendonitis , and post-spinal cord surgery. How does it work? This daytime splint for foot drop and plantar fasciitis holds your foot at a 90-degree angle, supporting your foot and eliminating discomfort. When should I wear it? This foot drop brace is meant to be worn throughout the day for support, with or without shoes. We also offer a variety of nighttime foot supports for bedtime use. What is it made of? This latex-free brace for drop foot is made out of breathable foam laminate, nylon straps, a center release buckle, and medical-grade Velcro closures. Who can wear this brace? Men and women of all ages can benefit from the stretch and support provided by this soft AFO brace. What size should I buy? Size S/M fits ankle circumferences ranging from 8”-10” and size L/XL fits ankle circumferences ranging from 9.5”-12.5”. It can be worn on your left or right foot, with or without socks. How do I put it on? Slip-On Application: If a slip-on option is desired, grasp foot sleeve and slide over foot arch, making sure to strap with buckle in on top of your foot. Wrap bottom calf strap just above your ankle and secure underneath buckle strap. Adjust strap with buckle to achieve the desired flexion of the foot. Remove and reattach small Velcro piece near the top for more support. Wrap top calf strap around leg and secure to desired comfort level, wrapping over buckle strap. Lace Shoe Application: Press buckle to undo foot sleeve. Wrap calf wrap around leg and secure at desired comfort level, making sure strap with buckle is on the top of your leg. Undo the first half of shoestrings. Lace shoestrings thru tie insert securing shoestrings at desired comfort level. Attach tie insert to calf wrap. Adjust strap with buckle to achieve desired flexion of foot, moving the small Velcro piece near the top for more support. How tall is this brace? The S/M is 9” tall and the L/XL is 11” tall. Washing Instructions: Close all Velcro closures and hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Allow brace to air dry completely before reapplying. Do not use high temperatures to wash or dry. Other features: Can be worn with or without socks Breathable, open-heel design Highly adjustable, strapping system for optimal support Color: Black. 608968212533 7609756975157 new 69.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03a1101-soft-afo-foot-drop-brace-main_grande.jpg?v=1543938014 641061983675 BraceAbility 03A1101L Foot & Toe L/XLUS Elastic Slip-on Cotton Fabric Knee Pain Support Sleeve http://www.braceability.com/products/elastic-cotton-knee-sleeve?variant=7694285766709 Elastic Slip-on Cotton Fabric Knee Pain Support Sleeve S Elastic Knee Sleeve’s Main Features One of the major selling points of these compression knee sleeves is their simplicity. The elastic knee bandage consists of a single piece of material with no hooks, buckles or latches to irritate your skin or trip up arthritic fingers. To put it on or take it off, slide it up or down your leg and center it over your knee. Once the elastic knee brace is in place, you’ll hardly notice it’s there. The fabric knee support is thin, lightweight and breathable. And its stretch material is also great for movement.  Its finished edges are comfortable against your skin, plus they help the sleeve for knee pain stand up to wear. Slip-on Knee Brace Treats Many Conditions The stretchy knee brace hugs your leg, keeping it in place and evenly compressing your knee and the surrounding area. The snug, closed-patella design means that your sore joint is compressed from all angles, plus it increases the stabilizing power of this cotton knee brace. This makes it great for treating: Mild sprains/strains of the knee Osteoarthritis Joint effusion (mild cases) Bursitis Baker’s cyst Tendonitis Some meniscus tears Minor instability Great for Sports, Daily Use or Under a Brace It works great as a sports wrap for your knee thanks to its slim fit and flexible, breathable material. The ultra-thin support is perfect for walking, hiking, running and more. For even more flex, you might consider this dual-tension compression bandage . These features also make it a perfect everyday solution for an arthritic knee or joint effusion (AKA, water on the knee). You can easily put it under your pants. It’s also a good buffer under a medical knee brace. Besides offering a layer of protection against any rigid components of a brace like a stocking, the fabric knee brace can also help you recover from injury or even surgery on the joint by reducing swelling and acting as an added stabilizer. Elastic Knee Brace Comes in Many Sizes The beige cloth knee sleeve comes in many sizes, ranging from small to XXL. The sizing of these compression knee supports is based on the circumference of your leg six inches above the middle area of your kneecap. Whereas the small fits thighs measuring as small as 17 inches around, the 2XL fits legs with circumferences up to 25 inches. If our extra-large sizes don’t work for you, you may want to check out this plus-size compression sleeve that is available in sizes up to 6XL. This type of knee brace works for either the right or left knee and both men and women. While the support is meant for adults, the smaller sizes may fit some kids. Faster, Easier Than an ACE Knee Wrap There are many reasons that an elastic bandage for your knee is superior to wrapping the joint with an ACE bandage. No need to master taping techniques. Pulling the thin knee sleeve up your leg is much quicker than wrapping and securing bandages around your knee. There’s no need to re-tape if it slides out of position. Simply pull the sleeve back up your leg. Applies even compression to and around the joint. The tension you get from wrapping your knee with an elastic band may not be even if you don’t tape it just right. There is no tape to tug on the skin or hair of your leg. How Does Wearing a Compression Knee Sleeve Relieve Pain? Swelling is the body’s natural reaction to many injuries, and this increased fluid on a joint actually occurs for good reason. The swelling and associated pain is meant as an alert not to use that injured body part, protecting you from further injury. That said, an injury or chronic condition does not have to put life on hold. Compressing and supporting your knee with an elastic knee stabilizer can ease pain and help get you back to normal more quickly. Compression boosts blood flow to the region, which whisks away painful inflammation so an injury like a sprain or a mild meniscus tear can heal. Users hardly notice they are wearing the thin, lightweight knee brace, making it a great solution when chronic knee swelling is a problem, as might be the case for various stages of osteoarthritis . This compression is also great for prevention and/or treatment of a cyst of the knee, which is when fluid builds up in a pocket. This causes a feeling of tightness when you bend your knee, a bulge and pain. A Baker’s cyst that causes pain behind the knee is one such example.   Wearing a flexible knitted knee support adds a layer of support and protection that can make you more comfortable and confident as you return to activity after being sidelined by an injury. Rest is another great remedy for just about any knee problem. Other go-to steps for treating a knee injury include cold/heat therapy and elevation. Frequently Asked Questions About This Elastic Knee Support What conditions / injuries does this compression knee brace treat? It’s great for problems with the knee joint stemming from arthritis , tendonitis, a sprain or strain, bursitis, minor meniscus tears, knee effusion (water on the knee), or baker’s cysts. These braces are also great post-surgery for bringing down swelling and/or as an undersleeve beneath a heavier-duty, hinged knee brace . How does it work?  The sleeve fits snugly against the skin, compressing the knee and its surrounding tissues. This boosts blood flow, which eases painful inflammation and encourages healing. The band of fabric also provides some light, flexible support to the knee. When should I wear it? Right after an injury, it’s best to compress the knee for a few days or weeks, depending upon how serious it is. For chronic (long-term) conditions like arthritis, you may wear it for flare-ups or around the clock. It is breathable, lightweight and flexible, which makes it great whether you need it for a walk around the block or a vigorous game of tennis.    What is it made of? This brace is made of elasticized cotton, so it’s both breathable and stretchy. There is a thin band of elastic around the bottom and top of the sleeve that is covered with a knitted material that keeps it from chafing the skin or wearing out.   Who can wear this brace? It’s great for adult men and women of all shapes and sizes. It comes in sizes ranging from small to 2x-large that fit leg circumferences (measured 6 inches above the middle of the knee cap) from 17” to 25 inches. To measure, wrap a soft tape measure or string around the leg. The single sleeve works on either the right or left leg. How do I put it on? Simply slide it over the foot and up the leg until it is centered over the kneecap. Washing Instructions: Hand wash it using mild soap/detergent and warm water, squeeze out the water and allow it to air dry.  You should avoid high temperatures when it comes to either washing or drying the support. Other features: Natural, non-invasive fix for many sources of knee pain and swelling. Snug fit prevents it from sliding down the leg. Easier to put on, take off and adjust than an ACE knee support. The sleeve is roughly 10 inches long, covering no more of the leg than necessary. The single knee sleeve comes at a very affordable price.   Color: Beige. 623771779125 7694285766709 new 17.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/06k0501-elastic-cotton-slip-on-knee-sleeve-main_grande.jpg?v=1524082505 641061979098 BraceAbility 06K0501S Knee Braces SUS Elastic Slip-on Cotton Fabric Knee Pain Support Sleeve http://www.braceability.com/products/elastic-cotton-knee-sleeve?variant=7694285799477 Elastic Slip-on Cotton Fabric Knee Pain Support Sleeve M Elastic Knee Sleeve’s Main Features One of the major selling points of these compression knee sleeves is their simplicity. The elastic knee bandage consists of a single piece of material with no hooks, buckles or latches to irritate your skin or trip up arthritic fingers. To put it on or take it off, slide it up or down your leg and center it over your knee. Once the elastic knee brace is in place, you’ll hardly notice it’s there. The fabric knee support is thin, lightweight and breathable. And its stretch material is also great for movement.  Its finished edges are comfortable against your skin, plus they help the sleeve for knee pain stand up to wear. Slip-on Knee Brace Treats Many Conditions The stretchy knee brace hugs your leg, keeping it in place and evenly compressing your knee and the surrounding area. The snug, closed-patella design means that your sore joint is compressed from all angles, plus it increases the stabilizing power of this cotton knee brace. This makes it great for treating: Mild sprains/strains of the knee Osteoarthritis Joint effusion (mild cases) Bursitis Baker’s cyst Tendonitis Some meniscus tears Minor instability Great for Sports, Daily Use or Under a Brace It works great as a sports wrap for your knee thanks to its slim fit and flexible, breathable material. The ultra-thin support is perfect for walking, hiking, running and more. For even more flex, you might consider this dual-tension compression bandage . These features also make it a perfect everyday solution for an arthritic knee or joint effusion (AKA, water on the knee). You can easily put it under your pants. It’s also a good buffer under a medical knee brace. Besides offering a layer of protection against any rigid components of a brace like a stocking, the fabric knee brace can also help you recover from injury or even surgery on the joint by reducing swelling and acting as an added stabilizer. Elastic Knee Brace Comes in Many Sizes The beige cloth knee sleeve comes in many sizes, ranging from small to XXL. The sizing of these compression knee supports is based on the circumference of your leg six inches above the middle area of your kneecap. Whereas the small fits thighs measuring as small as 17 inches around, the 2XL fits legs with circumferences up to 25 inches. If our extra-large sizes don’t work for you, you may want to check out this plus-size compression sleeve that is available in sizes up to 6XL. This type of knee brace works for either the right or left knee and both men and women. While the support is meant for adults, the smaller sizes may fit some kids. Faster, Easier Than an ACE Knee Wrap There are many reasons that an elastic bandage for your knee is superior to wrapping the joint with an ACE bandage. No need to master taping techniques. Pulling the thin knee sleeve up your leg is much quicker than wrapping and securing bandages around your knee. There’s no need to re-tape if it slides out of position. Simply pull the sleeve back up your leg. Applies even compression to and around the joint. The tension you get from wrapping your knee with an elastic band may not be even if you don’t tape it just right. There is no tape to tug on the skin or hair of your leg. How Does Wearing a Compression Knee Sleeve Relieve Pain? Swelling is the body’s natural reaction to many injuries, and this increased fluid on a joint actually occurs for good reason. The swelling and associated pain is meant as an alert not to use that injured body part, protecting you from further injury. That said, an injury or chronic condition does not have to put life on hold. Compressing and supporting your knee with an elastic knee stabilizer can ease pain and help get you back to normal more quickly. Compression boosts blood flow to the region, which whisks away painful inflammation so an injury like a sprain or a mild meniscus tear can heal. Users hardly notice they are wearing the thin, lightweight knee brace, making it a great solution when chronic knee swelling is a problem, as might be the case for various stages of osteoarthritis . This compression is also great for prevention and/or treatment of a cyst of the knee, which is when fluid builds up in a pocket. This causes a feeling of tightness when you bend your knee, a bulge and pain. A Baker’s cyst that causes pain behind the knee is one such example.   Wearing a flexible knitted knee support adds a layer of support and protection that can make you more comfortable and confident as you return to activity after being sidelined by an injury. Rest is another great remedy for just about any knee problem. Other go-to steps for treating a knee injury include cold/heat therapy and elevation. Frequently Asked Questions About This Elastic Knee Support What conditions / injuries does this compression knee brace treat? It’s great for problems with the knee joint stemming from arthritis , tendonitis, a sprain or strain, bursitis, minor meniscus tears, knee effusion (water on the knee), or baker’s cysts. These braces are also great post-surgery for bringing down swelling and/or as an undersleeve beneath a heavier-duty, hinged knee brace . How does it work?  The sleeve fits snugly against the skin, compressing the knee and its surrounding tissues. This boosts blood flow, which eases painful inflammation and encourages healing. The band of fabric also provides some light, flexible support to the knee. When should I wear it? Right after an injury, it’s best to compress the knee for a few days or weeks, depending upon how serious it is. For chronic (long-term) conditions like arthritis, you may wear it for flare-ups or around the clock. It is breathable, lightweight and flexible, which makes it great whether you need it for a walk around the block or a vigorous game of tennis.    What is it made of? This brace is made of elasticized cotton, so it’s both breathable and stretchy. There is a thin band of elastic around the bottom and top of the sleeve that is covered with a knitted material that keeps it from chafing the skin or wearing out.   Who can wear this brace? It’s great for adult men and women of all shapes and sizes. It comes in sizes ranging from small to 2x-large that fit leg circumferences (measured 6 inches above the middle of the knee cap) from 17” to 25 inches. To measure, wrap a soft tape measure or string around the leg. The single sleeve works on either the right or left leg. How do I put it on? Simply slide it over the foot and up the leg until it is centered over the kneecap. Washing Instructions: Hand wash it using mild soap/detergent and warm water, squeeze out the water and allow it to air dry.  You should avoid high temperatures when it comes to either washing or drying the support. Other features: Natural, non-invasive fix for many sources of knee pain and swelling. Snug fit prevents it from sliding down the leg. Easier to put on, take off and adjust than an ACE knee support. The sleeve is roughly 10 inches long, covering no more of the leg than necessary. The single knee sleeve comes at a very affordable price.   Color: Beige. 623771779125 7694285799477 new 17.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/06k0501-elastic-cotton-slip-on-knee-sleeve-main_grande.jpg?v=1524082505 641061979104 BraceAbility 06K0501M Knee Braces MUS Elastic Slip-on Cotton Fabric Knee Pain Support Sleeve http://www.braceability.com/products/elastic-cotton-knee-sleeve?variant=7694285832245 Elastic Slip-on Cotton Fabric Knee Pain Support Sleeve L Elastic Knee Sleeve’s Main Features One of the major selling points of these compression knee sleeves is their simplicity. The elastic knee bandage consists of a single piece of material with no hooks, buckles or latches to irritate your skin or trip up arthritic fingers. To put it on or take it off, slide it up or down your leg and center it over your knee. Once the elastic knee brace is in place, you’ll hardly notice it’s there. The fabric knee support is thin, lightweight and breathable. And its stretch material is also great for movement.  Its finished edges are comfortable against your skin, plus they help the sleeve for knee pain stand up to wear. Slip-on Knee Brace Treats Many Conditions The stretchy knee brace hugs your leg, keeping it in place and evenly compressing your knee and the surrounding area. The snug, closed-patella design means that your sore joint is compressed from all angles, plus it increases the stabilizing power of this cotton knee brace. This makes it great for treating: Mild sprains/strains of the knee Osteoarthritis Joint effusion (mild cases) Bursitis Baker’s cyst Tendonitis Some meniscus tears Minor instability Great for Sports, Daily Use or Under a Brace It works great as a sports wrap for your knee thanks to its slim fit and flexible, breathable material. The ultra-thin support is perfect for walking, hiking, running and more. For even more flex, you might consider this dual-tension compression bandage . These features also make it a perfect everyday solution for an arthritic knee or joint effusion (AKA, water on the knee). You can easily put it under your pants. It’s also a good buffer under a medical knee brace. Besides offering a layer of protection against any rigid components of a brace like a stocking, the fabric knee brace can also help you recover from injury or even surgery on the joint by reducing swelling and acting as an added stabilizer. Elastic Knee Brace Comes in Many Sizes The beige cloth knee sleeve comes in many sizes, ranging from small to XXL. The sizing of these compression knee supports is based on the circumference of your leg six inches above the middle area of your kneecap. Whereas the small fits thighs measuring as small as 17 inches around, the 2XL fits legs with circumferences up to 25 inches. If our extra-large sizes don’t work for you, you may want to check out this plus-size compression sleeve that is available in sizes up to 6XL. This type of knee brace works for either the right or left knee and both men and women. While the support is meant for adults, the smaller sizes may fit some kids. Faster, Easier Than an ACE Knee Wrap There are many reasons that an elastic bandage for your knee is superior to wrapping the joint with an ACE bandage. No need to master taping techniques. Pulling the thin knee sleeve up your leg is much quicker than wrapping and securing bandages around your knee. There’s no need to re-tape if it slides out of position. Simply pull the sleeve back up your leg. Applies even compression to and around the joint. The tension you get from wrapping your knee with an elastic band may not be even if you don’t tape it just right. There is no tape to tug on the skin or hair of your leg. How Does Wearing a Compression Knee Sleeve Relieve Pain? Swelling is the body’s natural reaction to many injuries, and this increased fluid on a joint actually occurs for good reason. The swelling and associated pain is meant as an alert not to use that injured body part, protecting you from further injury. That said, an injury or chronic condition does not have to put life on hold. Compressing and supporting your knee with an elastic knee stabilizer can ease pain and help get you back to normal more quickly. Compression boosts blood flow to the region, which whisks away painful inflammation so an injury like a sprain or a mild meniscus tear can heal. Users hardly notice they are wearing the thin, lightweight knee brace, making it a great solution when chronic knee swelling is a problem, as might be the case for various stages of osteoarthritis . This compression is also great for prevention and/or treatment of a cyst of the knee, which is when fluid builds up in a pocket. This causes a feeling of tightness when you bend your knee, a bulge and pain. A Baker’s cyst that causes pain behind the knee is one such example.   Wearing a flexible knitted knee support adds a layer of support and protection that can make you more comfortable and confident as you return to activity after being sidelined by an injury. Rest is another great remedy for just about any knee problem. Other go-to steps for treating a knee injury include cold/heat therapy and elevation. Frequently Asked Questions About This Elastic Knee Support What conditions / injuries does this compression knee brace treat? It’s great for problems with the knee joint stemming from arthritis , tendonitis, a sprain or strain, bursitis, minor meniscus tears, knee effusion (water on the knee), or baker’s cysts. These braces are also great post-surgery for bringing down swelling and/or as an undersleeve beneath a heavier-duty, hinged knee brace . How does it work?  The sleeve fits snugly against the skin, compressing the knee and its surrounding tissues. This boosts blood flow, which eases painful inflammation and encourages healing. The band of fabric also provides some light, flexible support to the knee. When should I wear it? Right after an injury, it’s best to compress the knee for a few days or weeks, depending upon how serious it is. For chronic (long-term) conditions like arthritis, you may wear it for flare-ups or around the clock. It is breathable, lightweight and flexible, which makes it great whether you need it for a walk around the block or a vigorous game of tennis.    What is it made of? This brace is made of elasticized cotton, so it’s both breathable and stretchy. There is a thin band of elastic around the bottom and top of the sleeve that is covered with a knitted material that keeps it from chafing the skin or wearing out.   Who can wear this brace? It’s great for adult men and women of all shapes and sizes. It comes in sizes ranging from small to 2x-large that fit leg circumferences (measured 6 inches above the middle of the knee cap) from 17” to 25 inches. To measure, wrap a soft tape measure or string around the leg. The single sleeve works on either the right or left leg. How do I put it on? Simply slide it over the foot and up the leg until it is centered over the kneecap. Washing Instructions: Hand wash it using mild soap/detergent and warm water, squeeze out the water and allow it to air dry.  You should avoid high temperatures when it comes to either washing or drying the support. Other features: Natural, non-invasive fix for many sources of knee pain and swelling. Snug fit prevents it from sliding down the leg. Easier to put on, take off and adjust than an ACE knee support. The sleeve is roughly 10 inches long, covering no more of the leg than necessary. The single knee sleeve comes at a very affordable price.   Color: Beige. 623771779125 7694285832245 new 17.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/06k0501-elastic-cotton-slip-on-knee-sleeve-main_grande.jpg?v=1524082505 641061979111 BraceAbility 06K0501L Knee Braces LUS Elastic Slip-on Cotton Fabric Knee Pain Support Sleeve http://www.braceability.com/products/elastic-cotton-knee-sleeve?variant=7694285865013 Elastic Slip-on Cotton Fabric Knee Pain Support Sleeve XL Elastic Knee Sleeve’s Main Features One of the major selling points of these compression knee sleeves is their simplicity. The elastic knee bandage consists of a single piece of material with no hooks, buckles or latches to irritate your skin or trip up arthritic fingers. To put it on or take it off, slide it up or down your leg and center it over your knee. Once the elastic knee brace is in place, you’ll hardly notice it’s there. The fabric knee support is thin, lightweight and breathable. And its stretch material is also great for movement.  Its finished edges are comfortable against your skin, plus they help the sleeve for knee pain stand up to wear. Slip-on Knee Brace Treats Many Conditions The stretchy knee brace hugs your leg, keeping it in place and evenly compressing your knee and the surrounding area. The snug, closed-patella design means that your sore joint is compressed from all angles, plus it increases the stabilizing power of this cotton knee brace. This makes it great for treating: Mild sprains/strains of the knee Osteoarthritis Joint effusion (mild cases) Bursitis Baker’s cyst Tendonitis Some meniscus tears Minor instability Great for Sports, Daily Use or Under a Brace It works great as a sports wrap for your knee thanks to its slim fit and flexible, breathable material. The ultra-thin support is perfect for walking, hiking, running and more. For even more flex, you might consider this dual-tension compression bandage . These features also make it a perfect everyday solution for an arthritic knee or joint effusion (AKA, water on the knee). You can easily put it under your pants. It’s also a good buffer under a medical knee brace. Besides offering a layer of protection against any rigid components of a brace like a stocking, the fabric knee brace can also help you recover from injury or even surgery on the joint by reducing swelling and acting as an added stabilizer. Elastic Knee Brace Comes in Many Sizes The beige cloth knee sleeve comes in many sizes, ranging from small to XXL. The sizing of these compression knee supports is based on the circumference of your leg six inches above the middle area of your kneecap. Whereas the small fits thighs measuring as small as 17 inches around, the 2XL fits legs with circumferences up to 25 inches. If our extra-large sizes don’t work for you, you may want to check out this plus-size compression sleeve that is available in sizes up to 6XL. This type of knee brace works for either the right or left knee and both men and women. While the support is meant for adults, the smaller sizes may fit some kids. Faster, Easier Than an ACE Knee Wrap There are many reasons that an elastic bandage for your knee is superior to wrapping the joint with an ACE bandage. No need to master taping techniques. Pulling the thin knee sleeve up your leg is much quicker than wrapping and securing bandages around your knee. There’s no need to re-tape if it slides out of position. Simply pull the sleeve back up your leg. Applies even compression to and around the joint. The tension you get from wrapping your knee with an elastic band may not be even if you don’t tape it just right. There is no tape to tug on the skin or hair of your leg. How Does Wearing a Compression Knee Sleeve Relieve Pain? Swelling is the body’s natural reaction to many injuries, and this increased fluid on a joint actually occurs for good reason. The swelling and associated pain is meant as an alert not to use that injured body part, protecting you from further injury. That said, an injury or chronic condition does not have to put life on hold. Compressing and supporting your knee with an elastic knee stabilizer can ease pain and help get you back to normal more quickly. Compression boosts blood flow to the region, which whisks away painful inflammation so an injury like a sprain or a mild meniscus tear can heal. Users hardly notice they are wearing the thin, lightweight knee brace, making it a great solution when chronic knee swelling is a problem, as might be the case for various stages of osteoarthritis . This compression is also great for prevention and/or treatment of a cyst of the knee, which is when fluid builds up in a pocket. This causes a feeling of tightness when you bend your knee, a bulge and pain. A Baker’s cyst that causes pain behind the knee is one such example.   Wearing a flexible knitted knee support adds a layer of support and protection that can make you more comfortable and confident as you return to activity after being sidelined by an injury. Rest is another great remedy for just about any knee problem. Other go-to steps for treating a knee injury include cold/heat therapy and elevation. Frequently Asked Questions About This Elastic Knee Support What conditions / injuries does this compression knee brace treat? It’s great for problems with the knee joint stemming from arthritis , tendonitis, a sprain or strain, bursitis, minor meniscus tears, knee effusion (water on the knee), or baker’s cysts. These braces are also great post-surgery for bringing down swelling and/or as an undersleeve beneath a heavier-duty, hinged knee brace . How does it work?  The sleeve fits snugly against the skin, compressing the knee and its surrounding tissues. This boosts blood flow, which eases painful inflammation and encourages healing. The band of fabric also provides some light, flexible support to the knee. When should I wear it? Right after an injury, it’s best to compress the knee for a few days or weeks, depending upon how serious it is. For chronic (long-term) conditions like arthritis, you may wear it for flare-ups or around the clock. It is breathable, lightweight and flexible, which makes it great whether you need it for a walk around the block or a vigorous game of tennis.    What is it made of? This brace is made of elasticized cotton, so it’s both breathable and stretchy. There is a thin band of elastic around the bottom and top of the sleeve that is covered with a knitted material that keeps it from chafing the skin or wearing out.   Who can wear this brace? It’s great for adult men and women of all shapes and sizes. It comes in sizes ranging from small to 2x-large that fit leg circumferences (measured 6 inches above the middle of the knee cap) from 17” to 25 inches. To measure, wrap a soft tape measure or string around the leg. The single sleeve works on either the right or left leg. How do I put it on? Simply slide it over the foot and up the leg until it is centered over the kneecap. Washing Instructions: Hand wash it using mild soap/detergent and warm water, squeeze out the water and allow it to air dry.  You should avoid high temperatures when it comes to either washing or drying the support. Other features: Natural, non-invasive fix for many sources of knee pain and swelling. Snug fit prevents it from sliding down the leg. Easier to put on, take off and adjust than an ACE knee support. The sleeve is roughly 10 inches long, covering no more of the leg than necessary. The single knee sleeve comes at a very affordable price.   Color: Beige. 623771779125 7694285865013 new 17.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/06k0501-elastic-cotton-slip-on-knee-sleeve-main_grande.jpg?v=1524082505 641061979128 BraceAbility 06K0501XL Knee Braces XLUS Elastic Slip-on Cotton Fabric Knee Pain Support Sleeve http://www.braceability.com/products/elastic-cotton-knee-sleeve?variant=7694285897781 Elastic Slip-on Cotton Fabric Knee Pain Support Sleeve 2XL Elastic Knee Sleeve’s Main Features One of the major selling points of these compression knee sleeves is their simplicity. The elastic knee bandage consists of a single piece of material with no hooks, buckles or latches to irritate your skin or trip up arthritic fingers. To put it on or take it off, slide it up or down your leg and center it over your knee. Once the elastic knee brace is in place, you’ll hardly notice it’s there. The fabric knee support is thin, lightweight and breathable. And its stretch material is also great for movement.  Its finished edges are comfortable against your skin, plus they help the sleeve for knee pain stand up to wear. Slip-on Knee Brace Treats Many Conditions The stretchy knee brace hugs your leg, keeping it in place and evenly compressing your knee and the surrounding area. The snug, closed-patella design means that your sore joint is compressed from all angles, plus it increases the stabilizing power of this cotton knee brace. This makes it great for treating: Mild sprains/strains of the knee Osteoarthritis Joint effusion (mild cases) Bursitis Baker’s cyst Tendonitis Some meniscus tears Minor instability Great for Sports, Daily Use or Under a Brace It works great as a sports wrap for your knee thanks to its slim fit and flexible, breathable material. The ultra-thin support is perfect for walking, hiking, running and more. For even more flex, you might consider this dual-tension compression bandage . These features also make it a perfect everyday solution for an arthritic knee or joint effusion (AKA, water on the knee). You can easily put it under your pants. It’s also a good buffer under a medical knee brace. Besides offering a layer of protection against any rigid components of a brace like a stocking, the fabric knee brace can also help you recover from injury or even surgery on the joint by reducing swelling and acting as an added stabilizer. Elastic Knee Brace Comes in Many Sizes The beige cloth knee sleeve comes in many sizes, ranging from small to XXL. The sizing of these compression knee supports is based on the circumference of your leg six inches above the middle area of your kneecap. Whereas the small fits thighs measuring as small as 17 inches around, the 2XL fits legs with circumferences up to 25 inches. If our extra-large sizes don’t work for you, you may want to check out this plus-size compression sleeve that is available in sizes up to 6XL. This type of knee brace works for either the right or left knee and both men and women. While the support is meant for adults, the smaller sizes may fit some kids. Faster, Easier Than an ACE Knee Wrap There are many reasons that an elastic bandage for your knee is superior to wrapping the joint with an ACE bandage. No need to master taping techniques. Pulling the thin knee sleeve up your leg is much quicker than wrapping and securing bandages around your knee. There’s no need to re-tape if it slides out of position. Simply pull the sleeve back up your leg. Applies even compression to and around the joint. The tension you get from wrapping your knee with an elastic band may not be even if you don’t tape it just right. There is no tape to tug on the skin or hair of your leg. How Does Wearing a Compression Knee Sleeve Relieve Pain? Swelling is the body’s natural reaction to many injuries, and this increased fluid on a joint actually occurs for good reason. The swelling and associated pain is meant as an alert not to use that injured body part, protecting you from further injury. That said, an injury or chronic condition does not have to put life on hold. Compressing and supporting your knee with an elastic knee stabilizer can ease pain and help get you back to normal more quickly. Compression boosts blood flow to the region, which whisks away painful inflammation so an injury like a sprain or a mild meniscus tear can heal. Users hardly notice they are wearing the thin, lightweight knee brace, making it a great solution when chronic knee swelling is a problem, as might be the case for various stages of osteoarthritis . This compression is also great for prevention and/or treatment of a cyst of the knee, which is when fluid builds up in a pocket. This causes a feeling of tightness when you bend your knee, a bulge and pain. A Baker’s cyst that causes pain behind the knee is one such example.   Wearing a flexible knitted knee support adds a layer of support and protection that can make you more comfortable and confident as you return to activity after being sidelined by an injury. Rest is another great remedy for just about any knee problem. Other go-to steps for treating a knee injury include cold/heat therapy and elevation. Frequently Asked Questions About This Elastic Knee Support What conditions / injuries does this compression knee brace treat? It’s great for problems with the knee joint stemming from arthritis , tendonitis, a sprain or strain, bursitis, minor meniscus tears, knee effusion (water on the knee), or baker’s cysts. These braces are also great post-surgery for bringing down swelling and/or as an undersleeve beneath a heavier-duty, hinged knee brace . How does it work?  The sleeve fits snugly against the skin, compressing the knee and its surrounding tissues. This boosts blood flow, which eases painful inflammation and encourages healing. The band of fabric also provides some light, flexible support to the knee. When should I wear it? Right after an injury, it’s best to compress the knee for a few days or weeks, depending upon how serious it is. For chronic (long-term) conditions like arthritis, you may wear it for flare-ups or around the clock. It is breathable, lightweight and flexible, which makes it great whether you need it for a walk around the block or a vigorous game of tennis.    What is it made of? This brace is made of elasticized cotton, so it’s both breathable and stretchy. There is a thin band of elastic around the bottom and top of the sleeve that is covered with a knitted material that keeps it from chafing the skin or wearing out.   Who can wear this brace? It’s great for adult men and women of all shapes and sizes. It comes in sizes ranging from small to 2x-large that fit leg circumferences (measured 6 inches above the middle of the knee cap) from 17” to 25 inches. To measure, wrap a soft tape measure or string around the leg. The single sleeve works on either the right or left leg. How do I put it on? Simply slide it over the foot and up the leg until it is centered over the kneecap. Washing Instructions: Hand wash it using mild soap/detergent and warm water, squeeze out the water and allow it to air dry.  You should avoid high temperatures when it comes to either washing or drying the support. Other features: Natural, non-invasive fix for many sources of knee pain and swelling. Snug fit prevents it from sliding down the leg. Easier to put on, take off and adjust than an ACE knee support. The sleeve is roughly 10 inches long, covering no more of the leg than necessary. The single knee sleeve comes at a very affordable price.   Color: Beige. 623771779125 7694285897781 new 17.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/06k0501-elastic-cotton-slip-on-knee-sleeve-main_grande.jpg?v=1524082505 641061979135 BraceAbility 06K0501XXL Knee Braces 2XLUS Thumb & Wrist Tendonitis Splint for De Quervain's Tenosynovitis Treatment http://www.braceability.com/products/wrist-tendonitis-treatment-splint?variant=7661765394485 Thumb & Wrist Tendonitis Splint for De Quervain's Tenosynovitis Treatment Right / XS Wrist and Thumb Splint Provides Relief for Wrist Tendonitis This versatile wrist brace for De Quervain’s tendonitis and more immobilizes the metacarpophalangeal (MP) joint and the carpometacarpal (CMC) saddle joint between the thumb and the index finger, in addition to supporting the wrist. This makes this wrist brace/thumb stabilizer well equipped for treating a number of wrist injuries on the thumb side, including: Wrist or thumb tendonitis De Quervain’s disease Rheumatoid arthritis Thumb or wrist sprains or strains Rhizarthrosis The wrist splint for tendonitis includes an aluminum stay for additional support. If one desires a sleeker, more flexible thumb/wrist brace for tendonitis, he or she can simply remove the stay. There is also a rigid stay at the thumb of the wrist and thumb brace for tendonitis for immobilization and support. This stay can also be removed from the wrist brace with a thumb stabilizer for a more flexible fit. The aluminum stay is not easily bendable because it is intended to be an immobilizing splint, but if needed you can slightly mold the thumb stay for a customized thumb stabilizer wrist brace fit. The splint for wrist tendonitis is composed of durable material that will stand up to frequent use. This material is also breathable and lined with a padded lycra material, which makes this a more comfortable tendonitis wrist splint. Another feature that enhances the comfort factor of this wrist splint with an abducted thumb component is the contouring that is incorporated in several areas of the brace. The contouring in the palmar area of this wrist and thumb support for tendonitis enables one to move the fingers normally, including grasping or clenching motions. There is also contouring at the fifth MP joint (pinky) of this tendonitis treatment of the wrist, allowing one to spread the fingers. Besides the obvious comfort aspect of allowing free movement of the hand outside of the thumb, the motion permitted by this wrist brace with thumb support also means it can be used during therapy for wrist tendonitis. How to treat tendonitis in the wrist and thumb will likely involve exercises meant to build up the strength and flexibility of the soft tissues in the affected areas. If this tendonitis wrist splint with a thumb stabilizer restricted movement of the hand more than necessary, it would likely lead to some counterproductive muscle loss. This brace for tendonitis in the thumb and wrist is secured via hook and loop (Velcro-like) closures. There are three along the wrist and forearm area, which ensures the De Quervain’s tendonitis wrist brace stays in position, as well as one around the thumb. If the strap ends are too long, you can cut off the excess material.  This style of closure means one will not waste time trying to figure out how to use the thumb and wrist splint or struggling to apply and/or adjust it.  It also makes it quite easy to secure and adjust the wrist brace spica for tendonitis—after all, it makes little sense to require excessive twisting, gripping etc. that stresses one’s tendons if the goal is healing wrist tendonitis. On the other hand, a cast for right wrist tendonitis may be going overboard in many instances. This wrist and thumb brace extends up the arm for added support to the wrist and forearm. Sizes XS and S are 7" long and sizes M-L are 8" long. This measurement does not include the thumb portion, see image above for details. So as you can see, from its price tag to its smart, comfortable design to its supportive qualities, there are many reasons this is a good brace to help with tendonitis wrist/thumb and other injuries. See more braces for the wrist and thumb . How to Treat Tendonitis in the Wrist and Thumb Injuries to the hands and wrist are some of the most common injuries among athletes. Think about it… these areas of the body are essential for gripping and swinging a bat or racket, shooting a basketball, grappling with another wrestler, doing a flip and so much more. And in daily life one relies on these areas of the body for so much—holding hands, lifting a baby, eating or strumming a guitar would be difficult to impossible without these areas of the body. Typically what causes tendonitis in the thumb/wrist falls into the category of overuse or trauma—tendonitis of the wrist or thumb can fall into either category. Some conditions like rheumatoid arthritis or diabetes can also lead to tendonitis of the hand and/or wrist. Tendonitis is a general term referring to inflammation of the tendons. This is problematic as these connective tissues must glide through various tunnels in order for one to move the hands and wrist. Understandably, forcing an irritated swollen tendon through such passages can be painful and eventually impossible. Tendonitis thumb/wrist treatment typically begins with following the steps of RICE —rest, ice, compress and elevate the hand, thumb and wrist. These steps can reduce painful inflammation more quickly. This brace for tendonitis in the wrist and thumb helps with both the rest and compression steps of this process. The wrist splint with abducted thumb immobilizes the MP and CMC joint, helping with wrist pain on the thumb side by forcing these tendons to rest. The Velcro closures of the thumb stabilizing wrist brace also means one can adjust the amount of compression it provides at both the wrist and thumb area. For additional compression, one might consider a bandage or wrist wrap . One can also take over-the-counter pain killers to help with the wrist pain above the thumb associated with de Quervain’s syndrome and other sources of wrist and hand pain. In some cases a corticosteroid injection may be needed to calm the inflamed tissues. Once inflammation and wrist/thumb pain from tendonitis are under control, one can start performing exercises to strengthen the muscles around the sore joint and stretches to improve mobility as part of treatment for wrist tendonitis. And as previously noted, the fact that this wrist splint with thumb immobilizer allows full movement of the fingers helps minimize muscle loss and hand function during the periods of immobilization. One should follow the instructions of a medical professional when it comes to getting back to activity. Overdoing it or performing certain motions can lead to a reinjury. Other steps to prevent a reinjury include being sure to warm up and to gradually increase the intensity of one’s workouts. Cooling down is also important. Attention to proper form and equipment are also important for preventing tendonitis. Wearing a wrist and thumb guard can also help prevent such injuries. How long it takes for wrist tendonitis to heal will depend upon the location and severity of one’s injury. It may take just a few days or several weeks for one to get back to normal. If one is still performing aggravating activities, reversing wrist tendonitis may take even longer. Key Features of Right or Left Wrist Tendonitis Brace The numerous sizing features, low price tag and smart design of this orthotic makes it one of the best thumb and wrist braces for treating tendonitis and a number of other hand and wrist injuries. Following is a detailed list of its features: Rigid wrist brace with thumb spica immobilizes the MP and CMC joints Contouring at the palmar crease for full finger function and also at the lower joint of the pinky finger, allowing palmar spread Wrist brace for thumb tendonitis, wrist tendonitis, de Quervain’s syndrome, rheumatoid arthritis, rhizarthrosis, wrist or thumb sprains, thumb or wrist strains, etc. Rigid splint for sprained wrist can be made more flexible by removing its palmar or thumb stay Rigid thumb stay of this wrist and abducted thumb splint for thumb tendon injuries can be molded to suit one’s needs and anatomy Wrist tendon pain splint is constructed of durable material that will hold up well to wear Black color of this wrist and thumb stabilizer for the right or left had also means the support does not show wear, dirt, stains, etc. Padded lycra lining for a more comfortable fit Material of which this sore wrist, thumb side splint is constructed is also quite breathable Hook and loop closures of this wrist support brace for torn tendonitis make it easy to apply and to adjust the compression it applies Wrist splint/thumb stabilizer leaves the fingers free Affordable wrist splint with thumb protector Choose between a right or left wrist brace with thumb stabilizer 618870112309 7661765394485 new 24.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10h0102-thumb-and-wrist-tendonitis-splint-for-de-quervains-tenosynovitis-treatment_grande.jpg?v=1524258829 641061978244 BraceAbility 10H0102XSR Wrist / Hand XSUS Thumb & Wrist Tendonitis Splint for De Quervain's Tenosynovitis Treatment http://www.braceability.com/products/wrist-tendonitis-treatment-splint?variant=7661765427253 Thumb & Wrist Tendonitis Splint for De Quervain's Tenosynovitis Treatment Right / S Wrist and Thumb Splint Provides Relief for Wrist Tendonitis This versatile wrist brace for De Quervain’s tendonitis and more immobilizes the metacarpophalangeal (MP) joint and the carpometacarpal (CMC) saddle joint between the thumb and the index finger, in addition to supporting the wrist. This makes this wrist brace/thumb stabilizer well equipped for treating a number of wrist injuries on the thumb side, including: Wrist or thumb tendonitis De Quervain’s disease Rheumatoid arthritis Thumb or wrist sprains or strains Rhizarthrosis The wrist splint for tendonitis includes an aluminum stay for additional support. If one desires a sleeker, more flexible thumb/wrist brace for tendonitis, he or she can simply remove the stay. There is also a rigid stay at the thumb of the wrist and thumb brace for tendonitis for immobilization and support. This stay can also be removed from the wrist brace with a thumb stabilizer for a more flexible fit. The aluminum stay is not easily bendable because it is intended to be an immobilizing splint, but if needed you can slightly mold the thumb stay for a customized thumb stabilizer wrist brace fit. The splint for wrist tendonitis is composed of durable material that will stand up to frequent use. This material is also breathable and lined with a padded lycra material, which makes this a more comfortable tendonitis wrist splint. Another feature that enhances the comfort factor of this wrist splint with an abducted thumb component is the contouring that is incorporated in several areas of the brace. The contouring in the palmar area of this wrist and thumb support for tendonitis enables one to move the fingers normally, including grasping or clenching motions. There is also contouring at the fifth MP joint (pinky) of this tendonitis treatment of the wrist, allowing one to spread the fingers. Besides the obvious comfort aspect of allowing free movement of the hand outside of the thumb, the motion permitted by this wrist brace with thumb support also means it can be used during therapy for wrist tendonitis. How to treat tendonitis in the wrist and thumb will likely involve exercises meant to build up the strength and flexibility of the soft tissues in the affected areas. If this tendonitis wrist splint with a thumb stabilizer restricted movement of the hand more than necessary, it would likely lead to some counterproductive muscle loss. This brace for tendonitis in the thumb and wrist is secured via hook and loop (Velcro-like) closures. There are three along the wrist and forearm area, which ensures the De Quervain’s tendonitis wrist brace stays in position, as well as one around the thumb. If the strap ends are too long, you can cut off the excess material.  This style of closure means one will not waste time trying to figure out how to use the thumb and wrist splint or struggling to apply and/or adjust it.  It also makes it quite easy to secure and adjust the wrist brace spica for tendonitis—after all, it makes little sense to require excessive twisting, gripping etc. that stresses one’s tendons if the goal is healing wrist tendonitis. On the other hand, a cast for right wrist tendonitis may be going overboard in many instances. This wrist and thumb brace extends up the arm for added support to the wrist and forearm. Sizes XS and S are 7" long and sizes M-L are 8" long. This measurement does not include the thumb portion, see image above for details. So as you can see, from its price tag to its smart, comfortable design to its supportive qualities, there are many reasons this is a good brace to help with tendonitis wrist/thumb and other injuries. See more braces for the wrist and thumb . How to Treat Tendonitis in the Wrist and Thumb Injuries to the hands and wrist are some of the most common injuries among athletes. Think about it… these areas of the body are essential for gripping and swinging a bat or racket, shooting a basketball, grappling with another wrestler, doing a flip and so much more. And in daily life one relies on these areas of the body for so much—holding hands, lifting a baby, eating or strumming a guitar would be difficult to impossible without these areas of the body. Typically what causes tendonitis in the thumb/wrist falls into the category of overuse or trauma—tendonitis of the wrist or thumb can fall into either category. Some conditions like rheumatoid arthritis or diabetes can also lead to tendonitis of the hand and/or wrist. Tendonitis is a general term referring to inflammation of the tendons. This is problematic as these connective tissues must glide through various tunnels in order for one to move the hands and wrist. Understandably, forcing an irritated swollen tendon through such passages can be painful and eventually impossible. Tendonitis thumb/wrist treatment typically begins with following the steps of RICE —rest, ice, compress and elevate the hand, thumb and wrist. These steps can reduce painful inflammation more quickly. This brace for tendonitis in the wrist and thumb helps with both the rest and compression steps of this process. The wrist splint with abducted thumb immobilizes the MP and CMC joint, helping with wrist pain on the thumb side by forcing these tendons to rest. The Velcro closures of the thumb stabilizing wrist brace also means one can adjust the amount of compression it provides at both the wrist and thumb area. For additional compression, one might consider a bandage or wrist wrap . One can also take over-the-counter pain killers to help with the wrist pain above the thumb associated with de Quervain’s syndrome and other sources of wrist and hand pain. In some cases a corticosteroid injection may be needed to calm the inflamed tissues. Once inflammation and wrist/thumb pain from tendonitis are under control, one can start performing exercises to strengthen the muscles around the sore joint and stretches to improve mobility as part of treatment for wrist tendonitis. And as previously noted, the fact that this wrist splint with thumb immobilizer allows full movement of the fingers helps minimize muscle loss and hand function during the periods of immobilization. One should follow the instructions of a medical professional when it comes to getting back to activity. Overdoing it or performing certain motions can lead to a reinjury. Other steps to prevent a reinjury include being sure to warm up and to gradually increase the intensity of one’s workouts. Cooling down is also important. Attention to proper form and equipment are also important for preventing tendonitis. Wearing a wrist and thumb guard can also help prevent such injuries. How long it takes for wrist tendonitis to heal will depend upon the location and severity of one’s injury. It may take just a few days or several weeks for one to get back to normal. If one is still performing aggravating activities, reversing wrist tendonitis may take even longer. Key Features of Right or Left Wrist Tendonitis Brace The numerous sizing features, low price tag and smart design of this orthotic makes it one of the best thumb and wrist braces for treating tendonitis and a number of other hand and wrist injuries. Following is a detailed list of its features: Rigid wrist brace with thumb spica immobilizes the MP and CMC joints Contouring at the palmar crease for full finger function and also at the lower joint of the pinky finger, allowing palmar spread Wrist brace for thumb tendonitis, wrist tendonitis, de Quervain’s syndrome, rheumatoid arthritis, rhizarthrosis, wrist or thumb sprains, thumb or wrist strains, etc. Rigid splint for sprained wrist can be made more flexible by removing its palmar or thumb stay Rigid thumb stay of this wrist and abducted thumb splint for thumb tendon injuries can be molded to suit one’s needs and anatomy Wrist tendon pain splint is constructed of durable material that will hold up well to wear Black color of this wrist and thumb stabilizer for the right or left had also means the support does not show wear, dirt, stains, etc. Padded lycra lining for a more comfortable fit Material of which this sore wrist, thumb side splint is constructed is also quite breathable Hook and loop closures of this wrist support brace for torn tendonitis make it easy to apply and to adjust the compression it applies Wrist splint/thumb stabilizer leaves the fingers free Affordable wrist splint with thumb protector Choose between a right or left wrist brace with thumb stabilizer 618870112309 7661765427253 new 24.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10h0102-thumb-and-wrist-tendonitis-splint-for-de-quervains-tenosynovitis-treatment_grande.jpg?v=1524258829 641061978237 BraceAbility 10H0102SR Wrist / Hand SUS Thumb & Wrist Tendonitis Splint for De Quervain's Tenosynovitis Treatment http://www.braceability.com/products/wrist-tendonitis-treatment-splint?variant=7661765460021 Thumb & Wrist Tendonitis Splint for De Quervain's Tenosynovitis Treatment Right / M Wrist and Thumb Splint Provides Relief for Wrist Tendonitis This versatile wrist brace for De Quervain’s tendonitis and more immobilizes the metacarpophalangeal (MP) joint and the carpometacarpal (CMC) saddle joint between the thumb and the index finger, in addition to supporting the wrist. This makes this wrist brace/thumb stabilizer well equipped for treating a number of wrist injuries on the thumb side, including: Wrist or thumb tendonitis De Quervain’s disease Rheumatoid arthritis Thumb or wrist sprains or strains Rhizarthrosis The wrist splint for tendonitis includes an aluminum stay for additional support. If one desires a sleeker, more flexible thumb/wrist brace for tendonitis, he or she can simply remove the stay. There is also a rigid stay at the thumb of the wrist and thumb brace for tendonitis for immobilization and support. This stay can also be removed from the wrist brace with a thumb stabilizer for a more flexible fit. The aluminum stay is not easily bendable because it is intended to be an immobilizing splint, but if needed you can slightly mold the thumb stay for a customized thumb stabilizer wrist brace fit. The splint for wrist tendonitis is composed of durable material that will stand up to frequent use. This material is also breathable and lined with a padded lycra material, which makes this a more comfortable tendonitis wrist splint. Another feature that enhances the comfort factor of this wrist splint with an abducted thumb component is the contouring that is incorporated in several areas of the brace. The contouring in the palmar area of this wrist and thumb support for tendonitis enables one to move the fingers normally, including grasping or clenching motions. There is also contouring at the fifth MP joint (pinky) of this tendonitis treatment of the wrist, allowing one to spread the fingers. Besides the obvious comfort aspect of allowing free movement of the hand outside of the thumb, the motion permitted by this wrist brace with thumb support also means it can be used during therapy for wrist tendonitis. How to treat tendonitis in the wrist and thumb will likely involve exercises meant to build up the strength and flexibility of the soft tissues in the affected areas. If this tendonitis wrist splint with a thumb stabilizer restricted movement of the hand more than necessary, it would likely lead to some counterproductive muscle loss. This brace for tendonitis in the thumb and wrist is secured via hook and loop (Velcro-like) closures. There are three along the wrist and forearm area, which ensures the De Quervain’s tendonitis wrist brace stays in position, as well as one around the thumb. If the strap ends are too long, you can cut off the excess material.  This style of closure means one will not waste time trying to figure out how to use the thumb and wrist splint or struggling to apply and/or adjust it.  It also makes it quite easy to secure and adjust the wrist brace spica for tendonitis—after all, it makes little sense to require excessive twisting, gripping etc. that stresses one’s tendons if the goal is healing wrist tendonitis. On the other hand, a cast for right wrist tendonitis may be going overboard in many instances. This wrist and thumb brace extends up the arm for added support to the wrist and forearm. Sizes XS and S are 7" long and sizes M-L are 8" long. This measurement does not include the thumb portion, see image above for details. So as you can see, from its price tag to its smart, comfortable design to its supportive qualities, there are many reasons this is a good brace to help with tendonitis wrist/thumb and other injuries. See more braces for the wrist and thumb . How to Treat Tendonitis in the Wrist and Thumb Injuries to the hands and wrist are some of the most common injuries among athletes. Think about it… these areas of the body are essential for gripping and swinging a bat or racket, shooting a basketball, grappling with another wrestler, doing a flip and so much more. And in daily life one relies on these areas of the body for so much—holding hands, lifting a baby, eating or strumming a guitar would be difficult to impossible without these areas of the body. Typically what causes tendonitis in the thumb/wrist falls into the category of overuse or trauma—tendonitis of the wrist or thumb can fall into either category. Some conditions like rheumatoid arthritis or diabetes can also lead to tendonitis of the hand and/or wrist. Tendonitis is a general term referring to inflammation of the tendons. This is problematic as these connective tissues must glide through various tunnels in order for one to move the hands and wrist. Understandably, forcing an irritated swollen tendon through such passages can be painful and eventually impossible. Tendonitis thumb/wrist treatment typically begins with following the steps of RICE —rest, ice, compress and elevate the hand, thumb and wrist. These steps can reduce painful inflammation more quickly. This brace for tendonitis in the wrist and thumb helps with both the rest and compression steps of this process. The wrist splint with abducted thumb immobilizes the MP and CMC joint, helping with wrist pain on the thumb side by forcing these tendons to rest. The Velcro closures of the thumb stabilizing wrist brace also means one can adjust the amount of compression it provides at both the wrist and thumb area. For additional compression, one might consider a bandage or wrist wrap . One can also take over-the-counter pain killers to help with the wrist pain above the thumb associated with de Quervain’s syndrome and other sources of wrist and hand pain. In some cases a corticosteroid injection may be needed to calm the inflamed tissues. Once inflammation and wrist/thumb pain from tendonitis are under control, one can start performing exercises to strengthen the muscles around the sore joint and stretches to improve mobility as part of treatment for wrist tendonitis. And as previously noted, the fact that this wrist splint with thumb immobilizer allows full movement of the fingers helps minimize muscle loss and hand function during the periods of immobilization. One should follow the instructions of a medical professional when it comes to getting back to activity. Overdoing it or performing certain motions can lead to a reinjury. Other steps to prevent a reinjury include being sure to warm up and to gradually increase the intensity of one’s workouts. Cooling down is also important. Attention to proper form and equipment are also important for preventing tendonitis. Wearing a wrist and thumb guard can also help prevent such injuries. How long it takes for wrist tendonitis to heal will depend upon the location and severity of one’s injury. It may take just a few days or several weeks for one to get back to normal. If one is still performing aggravating activities, reversing wrist tendonitis may take even longer. Key Features of Right or Left Wrist Tendonitis Brace The numerous sizing features, low price tag and smart design of this orthotic makes it one of the best thumb and wrist braces for treating tendonitis and a number of other hand and wrist injuries. Following is a detailed list of its features: Rigid wrist brace with thumb spica immobilizes the MP and CMC joints Contouring at the palmar crease for full finger function and also at the lower joint of the pinky finger, allowing palmar spread Wrist brace for thumb tendonitis, wrist tendonitis, de Quervain’s syndrome, rheumatoid arthritis, rhizarthrosis, wrist or thumb sprains, thumb or wrist strains, etc. Rigid splint for sprained wrist can be made more flexible by removing its palmar or thumb stay Rigid thumb stay of this wrist and abducted thumb splint for thumb tendon injuries can be molded to suit one’s needs and anatomy Wrist tendon pain splint is constructed of durable material that will hold up well to wear Black color of this wrist and thumb stabilizer for the right or left had also means the support does not show wear, dirt, stains, etc. Padded lycra lining for a more comfortable fit Material of which this sore wrist, thumb side splint is constructed is also quite breathable Hook and loop closures of this wrist support brace for torn tendonitis make it easy to apply and to adjust the compression it applies Wrist splint/thumb stabilizer leaves the fingers free Affordable wrist splint with thumb protector Choose between a right or left wrist brace with thumb stabilizer 618870112309 7661765460021 new 24.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10h0102-thumb-and-wrist-tendonitis-splint-for-de-quervains-tenosynovitis-treatment_grande.jpg?v=1524258829 641061978220 BraceAbility 10H0102MR Wrist / Hand MUS Thumb & Wrist Tendonitis Splint for De Quervain's Tenosynovitis Treatment http://www.braceability.com/products/wrist-tendonitis-treatment-splint?variant=7661765492789 Thumb & Wrist Tendonitis Splint for De Quervain's Tenosynovitis Treatment Right / L Wrist and Thumb Splint Provides Relief for Wrist Tendonitis This versatile wrist brace for De Quervain’s tendonitis and more immobilizes the metacarpophalangeal (MP) joint and the carpometacarpal (CMC) saddle joint between the thumb and the index finger, in addition to supporting the wrist. This makes this wrist brace/thumb stabilizer well equipped for treating a number of wrist injuries on the thumb side, including: Wrist or thumb tendonitis De Quervain’s disease Rheumatoid arthritis Thumb or wrist sprains or strains Rhizarthrosis The wrist splint for tendonitis includes an aluminum stay for additional support. If one desires a sleeker, more flexible thumb/wrist brace for tendonitis, he or she can simply remove the stay. There is also a rigid stay at the thumb of the wrist and thumb brace for tendonitis for immobilization and support. This stay can also be removed from the wrist brace with a thumb stabilizer for a more flexible fit. The aluminum stay is not easily bendable because it is intended to be an immobilizing splint, but if needed you can slightly mold the thumb stay for a customized thumb stabilizer wrist brace fit. The splint for wrist tendonitis is composed of durable material that will stand up to frequent use. This material is also breathable and lined with a padded lycra material, which makes this a more comfortable tendonitis wrist splint. Another feature that enhances the comfort factor of this wrist splint with an abducted thumb component is the contouring that is incorporated in several areas of the brace. The contouring in the palmar area of this wrist and thumb support for tendonitis enables one to move the fingers normally, including grasping or clenching motions. There is also contouring at the fifth MP joint (pinky) of this tendonitis treatment of the wrist, allowing one to spread the fingers. Besides the obvious comfort aspect of allowing free movement of the hand outside of the thumb, the motion permitted by this wrist brace with thumb support also means it can be used during therapy for wrist tendonitis. How to treat tendonitis in the wrist and thumb will likely involve exercises meant to build up the strength and flexibility of the soft tissues in the affected areas. If this tendonitis wrist splint with a thumb stabilizer restricted movement of the hand more than necessary, it would likely lead to some counterproductive muscle loss. This brace for tendonitis in the thumb and wrist is secured via hook and loop (Velcro-like) closures. There are three along the wrist and forearm area, which ensures the De Quervain’s tendonitis wrist brace stays in position, as well as one around the thumb. If the strap ends are too long, you can cut off the excess material.  This style of closure means one will not waste time trying to figure out how to use the thumb and wrist splint or struggling to apply and/or adjust it.  It also makes it quite easy to secure and adjust the wrist brace spica for tendonitis—after all, it makes little sense to require excessive twisting, gripping etc. that stresses one’s tendons if the goal is healing wrist tendonitis. On the other hand, a cast for right wrist tendonitis may be going overboard in many instances. This wrist and thumb brace extends up the arm for added support to the wrist and forearm. Sizes XS and S are 7" long and sizes M-L are 8" long. This measurement does not include the thumb portion, see image above for details. So as you can see, from its price tag to its smart, comfortable design to its supportive qualities, there are many reasons this is a good brace to help with tendonitis wrist/thumb and other injuries. See more braces for the wrist and thumb . How to Treat Tendonitis in the Wrist and Thumb Injuries to the hands and wrist are some of the most common injuries among athletes. Think about it… these areas of the body are essential for gripping and swinging a bat or racket, shooting a basketball, grappling with another wrestler, doing a flip and so much more. And in daily life one relies on these areas of the body for so much—holding hands, lifting a baby, eating or strumming a guitar would be difficult to impossible without these areas of the body. Typically what causes tendonitis in the thumb/wrist falls into the category of overuse or trauma—tendonitis of the wrist or thumb can fall into either category. Some conditions like rheumatoid arthritis or diabetes can also lead to tendonitis of the hand and/or wrist. Tendonitis is a general term referring to inflammation of the tendons. This is problematic as these connective tissues must glide through various tunnels in order for one to move the hands and wrist. Understandably, forcing an irritated swollen tendon through such passages can be painful and eventually impossible. Tendonitis thumb/wrist treatment typically begins with following the steps of RICE —rest, ice, compress and elevate the hand, thumb and wrist. These steps can reduce painful inflammation more quickly. This brace for tendonitis in the wrist and thumb helps with both the rest and compression steps of this process. The wrist splint with abducted thumb immobilizes the MP and CMC joint, helping with wrist pain on the thumb side by forcing these tendons to rest. The Velcro closures of the thumb stabilizing wrist brace also means one can adjust the amount of compression it provides at both the wrist and thumb area. For additional compression, one might consider a bandage or wrist wrap . One can also take over-the-counter pain killers to help with the wrist pain above the thumb associated with de Quervain’s syndrome and other sources of wrist and hand pain. In some cases a corticosteroid injection may be needed to calm the inflamed tissues. Once inflammation and wrist/thumb pain from tendonitis are under control, one can start performing exercises to strengthen the muscles around the sore joint and stretches to improve mobility as part of treatment for wrist tendonitis. And as previously noted, the fact that this wrist splint with thumb immobilizer allows full movement of the fingers helps minimize muscle loss and hand function during the periods of immobilization. One should follow the instructions of a medical professional when it comes to getting back to activity. Overdoing it or performing certain motions can lead to a reinjury. Other steps to prevent a reinjury include being sure to warm up and to gradually increase the intensity of one’s workouts. Cooling down is also important. Attention to proper form and equipment are also important for preventing tendonitis. Wearing a wrist and thumb guard can also help prevent such injuries. How long it takes for wrist tendonitis to heal will depend upon the location and severity of one’s injury. It may take just a few days or several weeks for one to get back to normal. If one is still performing aggravating activities, reversing wrist tendonitis may take even longer. Key Features of Right or Left Wrist Tendonitis Brace The numerous sizing features, low price tag and smart design of this orthotic makes it one of the best thumb and wrist braces for treating tendonitis and a number of other hand and wrist injuries. Following is a detailed list of its features: Rigid wrist brace with thumb spica immobilizes the MP and CMC joints Contouring at the palmar crease for full finger function and also at the lower joint of the pinky finger, allowing palmar spread Wrist brace for thumb tendonitis, wrist tendonitis, de Quervain’s syndrome, rheumatoid arthritis, rhizarthrosis, wrist or thumb sprains, thumb or wrist strains, etc. Rigid splint for sprained wrist can be made more flexible by removing its palmar or thumb stay Rigid thumb stay of this wrist and abducted thumb splint for thumb tendon injuries can be molded to suit one’s needs and anatomy Wrist tendon pain splint is constructed of durable material that will hold up well to wear Black color of this wrist and thumb stabilizer for the right or left had also means the support does not show wear, dirt, stains, etc. Padded lycra lining for a more comfortable fit Material of which this sore wrist, thumb side splint is constructed is also quite breathable Hook and loop closures of this wrist support brace for torn tendonitis make it easy to apply and to adjust the compression it applies Wrist splint/thumb stabilizer leaves the fingers free Affordable wrist splint with thumb protector Choose between a right or left wrist brace with thumb stabilizer 618870112309 7661765492789 new 24.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10h0102-thumb-and-wrist-tendonitis-splint-for-de-quervains-tenosynovitis-treatment_grande.jpg?v=1524258829 641061978213 BraceAbility 10H0102LR Wrist / Hand LUS Thumb & Wrist Tendonitis Splint for De Quervain's Tenosynovitis Treatment http://www.braceability.com/products/wrist-tendonitis-treatment-splint?variant=7661712343093 Thumb & Wrist Tendonitis Splint for De Quervain's Tenosynovitis Treatment Left / XS Wrist and Thumb Splint Provides Relief for Wrist Tendonitis This versatile wrist brace for De Quervain’s tendonitis and more immobilizes the metacarpophalangeal (MP) joint and the carpometacarpal (CMC) saddle joint between the thumb and the index finger, in addition to supporting the wrist. This makes this wrist brace/thumb stabilizer well equipped for treating a number of wrist injuries on the thumb side, including: Wrist or thumb tendonitis De Quervain’s disease Rheumatoid arthritis Thumb or wrist sprains or strains Rhizarthrosis The wrist splint for tendonitis includes an aluminum stay for additional support. If one desires a sleeker, more flexible thumb/wrist brace for tendonitis, he or she can simply remove the stay. There is also a rigid stay at the thumb of the wrist and thumb brace for tendonitis for immobilization and support. This stay can also be removed from the wrist brace with a thumb stabilizer for a more flexible fit. The aluminum stay is not easily bendable because it is intended to be an immobilizing splint, but if needed you can slightly mold the thumb stay for a customized thumb stabilizer wrist brace fit. The splint for wrist tendonitis is composed of durable material that will stand up to frequent use. This material is also breathable and lined with a padded lycra material, which makes this a more comfortable tendonitis wrist splint. Another feature that enhances the comfort factor of this wrist splint with an abducted thumb component is the contouring that is incorporated in several areas of the brace. The contouring in the palmar area of this wrist and thumb support for tendonitis enables one to move the fingers normally, including grasping or clenching motions. There is also contouring at the fifth MP joint (pinky) of this tendonitis treatment of the wrist, allowing one to spread the fingers. Besides the obvious comfort aspect of allowing free movement of the hand outside of the thumb, the motion permitted by this wrist brace with thumb support also means it can be used during therapy for wrist tendonitis. How to treat tendonitis in the wrist and thumb will likely involve exercises meant to build up the strength and flexibility of the soft tissues in the affected areas. If this tendonitis wrist splint with a thumb stabilizer restricted movement of the hand more than necessary, it would likely lead to some counterproductive muscle loss. This brace for tendonitis in the thumb and wrist is secured via hook and loop (Velcro-like) closures. There are three along the wrist and forearm area, which ensures the De Quervain’s tendonitis wrist brace stays in position, as well as one around the thumb. If the strap ends are too long, you can cut off the excess material.  This style of closure means one will not waste time trying to figure out how to use the thumb and wrist splint or struggling to apply and/or adjust it.  It also makes it quite easy to secure and adjust the wrist brace spica for tendonitis—after all, it makes little sense to require excessive twisting, gripping etc. that stresses one’s tendons if the goal is healing wrist tendonitis. On the other hand, a cast for right wrist tendonitis may be going overboard in many instances. This wrist and thumb brace extends up the arm for added support to the wrist and forearm. Sizes XS and S are 7" long and sizes M-L are 8" long. This measurement does not include the thumb portion, see image above for details. So as you can see, from its price tag to its smart, comfortable design to its supportive qualities, there are many reasons this is a good brace to help with tendonitis wrist/thumb and other injuries. See more braces for the wrist and thumb . How to Treat Tendonitis in the Wrist and Thumb Injuries to the hands and wrist are some of the most common injuries among athletes. Think about it… these areas of the body are essential for gripping and swinging a bat or racket, shooting a basketball, grappling with another wrestler, doing a flip and so much more. And in daily life one relies on these areas of the body for so much—holding hands, lifting a baby, eating or strumming a guitar would be difficult to impossible without these areas of the body. Typically what causes tendonitis in the thumb/wrist falls into the category of overuse or trauma—tendonitis of the wrist or thumb can fall into either category. Some conditions like rheumatoid arthritis or diabetes can also lead to tendonitis of the hand and/or wrist. Tendonitis is a general term referring to inflammation of the tendons. This is problematic as these connective tissues must glide through various tunnels in order for one to move the hands and wrist. Understandably, forcing an irritated swollen tendon through such passages can be painful and eventually impossible. Tendonitis thumb/wrist treatment typically begins with following the steps of RICE —rest, ice, compress and elevate the hand, thumb and wrist. These steps can reduce painful inflammation more quickly. This brace for tendonitis in the wrist and thumb helps with both the rest and compression steps of this process. The wrist splint with abducted thumb immobilizes the MP and CMC joint, helping with wrist pain on the thumb side by forcing these tendons to rest. The Velcro closures of the thumb stabilizing wrist brace also means one can adjust the amount of compression it provides at both the wrist and thumb area. For additional compression, one might consider a bandage or wrist wrap . One can also take over-the-counter pain killers to help with the wrist pain above the thumb associated with de Quervain’s syndrome and other sources of wrist and hand pain. In some cases a corticosteroid injection may be needed to calm the inflamed tissues. Once inflammation and wrist/thumb pain from tendonitis are under control, one can start performing exercises to strengthen the muscles around the sore joint and stretches to improve mobility as part of treatment for wrist tendonitis. And as previously noted, the fact that this wrist splint with thumb immobilizer allows full movement of the fingers helps minimize muscle loss and hand function during the periods of immobilization. One should follow the instructions of a medical professional when it comes to getting back to activity. Overdoing it or performing certain motions can lead to a reinjury. Other steps to prevent a reinjury include being sure to warm up and to gradually increase the intensity of one’s workouts. Cooling down is also important. Attention to proper form and equipment are also important for preventing tendonitis. Wearing a wrist and thumb guard can also help prevent such injuries. How long it takes for wrist tendonitis to heal will depend upon the location and severity of one’s injury. It may take just a few days or several weeks for one to get back to normal. If one is still performing aggravating activities, reversing wrist tendonitis may take even longer. Key Features of Right or Left Wrist Tendonitis Brace The numerous sizing features, low price tag and smart design of this orthotic makes it one of the best thumb and wrist braces for treating tendonitis and a number of other hand and wrist injuries. Following is a detailed list of its features: Rigid wrist brace with thumb spica immobilizes the MP and CMC joints Contouring at the palmar crease for full finger function and also at the lower joint of the pinky finger, allowing palmar spread Wrist brace for thumb tendonitis, wrist tendonitis, de Quervain’s syndrome, rheumatoid arthritis, rhizarthrosis, wrist or thumb sprains, thumb or wrist strains, etc. Rigid splint for sprained wrist can be made more flexible by removing its palmar or thumb stay Rigid thumb stay of this wrist and abducted thumb splint for thumb tendon injuries can be molded to suit one’s needs and anatomy Wrist tendon pain splint is constructed of durable material that will hold up well to wear Black color of this wrist and thumb stabilizer for the right or left had also means the support does not show wear, dirt, stains, etc. Padded lycra lining for a more comfortable fit Material of which this sore wrist, thumb side splint is constructed is also quite breathable Hook and loop closures of this wrist support brace for torn tendonitis make it easy to apply and to adjust the compression it applies Wrist splint/thumb stabilizer leaves the fingers free Affordable wrist splint with thumb protector Choose between a right or left wrist brace with thumb stabilizer 618870112309 7661712343093 new 24.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10h0102-thumb-and-wrist-tendonitis-splint-for-de-quervains-tenosynovitis-treatment_grande.jpg?v=1524258829 641061978299 BraceAbility 10H0102XSL Wrist / Hand XSUS Thumb & Wrist Tendonitis Splint for De Quervain's Tenosynovitis Treatment http://www.braceability.com/products/wrist-tendonitis-treatment-splint?variant=7661765296181 Thumb & Wrist Tendonitis Splint for De Quervain's Tenosynovitis Treatment Left / S Wrist and Thumb Splint Provides Relief for Wrist Tendonitis This versatile wrist brace for De Quervain’s tendonitis and more immobilizes the metacarpophalangeal (MP) joint and the carpometacarpal (CMC) saddle joint between the thumb and the index finger, in addition to supporting the wrist. This makes this wrist brace/thumb stabilizer well equipped for treating a number of wrist injuries on the thumb side, including: Wrist or thumb tendonitis De Quervain’s disease Rheumatoid arthritis Thumb or wrist sprains or strains Rhizarthrosis The wrist splint for tendonitis includes an aluminum stay for additional support. If one desires a sleeker, more flexible thumb/wrist brace for tendonitis, he or she can simply remove the stay. There is also a rigid stay at the thumb of the wrist and thumb brace for tendonitis for immobilization and support. This stay can also be removed from the wrist brace with a thumb stabilizer for a more flexible fit. The aluminum stay is not easily bendable because it is intended to be an immobilizing splint, but if needed you can slightly mold the thumb stay for a customized thumb stabilizer wrist brace fit. The splint for wrist tendonitis is composed of durable material that will stand up to frequent use. This material is also breathable and lined with a padded lycra material, which makes this a more comfortable tendonitis wrist splint. Another feature that enhances the comfort factor of this wrist splint with an abducted thumb component is the contouring that is incorporated in several areas of the brace. The contouring in the palmar area of this wrist and thumb support for tendonitis enables one to move the fingers normally, including grasping or clenching motions. There is also contouring at the fifth MP joint (pinky) of this tendonitis treatment of the wrist, allowing one to spread the fingers. Besides the obvious comfort aspect of allowing free movement of the hand outside of the thumb, the motion permitted by this wrist brace with thumb support also means it can be used during therapy for wrist tendonitis. How to treat tendonitis in the wrist and thumb will likely involve exercises meant to build up the strength and flexibility of the soft tissues in the affected areas. If this tendonitis wrist splint with a thumb stabilizer restricted movement of the hand more than necessary, it would likely lead to some counterproductive muscle loss. This brace for tendonitis in the thumb and wrist is secured via hook and loop (Velcro-like) closures. There are three along the wrist and forearm area, which ensures the De Quervain’s tendonitis wrist brace stays in position, as well as one around the thumb. If the strap ends are too long, you can cut off the excess material.  This style of closure means one will not waste time trying to figure out how to use the thumb and wrist splint or struggling to apply and/or adjust it.  It also makes it quite easy to secure and adjust the wrist brace spica for tendonitis—after all, it makes little sense to require excessive twisting, gripping etc. that stresses one’s tendons if the goal is healing wrist tendonitis. On the other hand, a cast for right wrist tendonitis may be going overboard in many instances. This wrist and thumb brace extends up the arm for added support to the wrist and forearm. Sizes XS and S are 7" long and sizes M-L are 8" long. This measurement does not include the thumb portion, see image above for details. So as you can see, from its price tag to its smart, comfortable design to its supportive qualities, there are many reasons this is a good brace to help with tendonitis wrist/thumb and other injuries. See more braces for the wrist and thumb . How to Treat Tendonitis in the Wrist and Thumb Injuries to the hands and wrist are some of the most common injuries among athletes. Think about it… these areas of the body are essential for gripping and swinging a bat or racket, shooting a basketball, grappling with another wrestler, doing a flip and so much more. And in daily life one relies on these areas of the body for so much—holding hands, lifting a baby, eating or strumming a guitar would be difficult to impossible without these areas of the body. Typically what causes tendonitis in the thumb/wrist falls into the category of overuse or trauma—tendonitis of the wrist or thumb can fall into either category. Some conditions like rheumatoid arthritis or diabetes can also lead to tendonitis of the hand and/or wrist. Tendonitis is a general term referring to inflammation of the tendons. This is problematic as these connective tissues must glide through various tunnels in order for one to move the hands and wrist. Understandably, forcing an irritated swollen tendon through such passages can be painful and eventually impossible. Tendonitis thumb/wrist treatment typically begins with following the steps of RICE —rest, ice, compress and elevate the hand, thumb and wrist. These steps can reduce painful inflammation more quickly. This brace for tendonitis in the wrist and thumb helps with both the rest and compression steps of this process. The wrist splint with abducted thumb immobilizes the MP and CMC joint, helping with wrist pain on the thumb side by forcing these tendons to rest. The Velcro closures of the thumb stabilizing wrist brace also means one can adjust the amount of compression it provides at both the wrist and thumb area. For additional compression, one might consider a bandage or wrist wrap . One can also take over-the-counter pain killers to help with the wrist pain above the thumb associated with de Quervain’s syndrome and other sources of wrist and hand pain. In some cases a corticosteroid injection may be needed to calm the inflamed tissues. Once inflammation and wrist/thumb pain from tendonitis are under control, one can start performing exercises to strengthen the muscles around the sore joint and stretches to improve mobility as part of treatment for wrist tendonitis. And as previously noted, the fact that this wrist splint with thumb immobilizer allows full movement of the fingers helps minimize muscle loss and hand function during the periods of immobilization. One should follow the instructions of a medical professional when it comes to getting back to activity. Overdoing it or performing certain motions can lead to a reinjury. Other steps to prevent a reinjury include being sure to warm up and to gradually increase the intensity of one’s workouts. Cooling down is also important. Attention to proper form and equipment are also important for preventing tendonitis. Wearing a wrist and thumb guard can also help prevent such injuries. How long it takes for wrist tendonitis to heal will depend upon the location and severity of one’s injury. It may take just a few days or several weeks for one to get back to normal. If one is still performing aggravating activities, reversing wrist tendonitis may take even longer. Key Features of Right or Left Wrist Tendonitis Brace The numerous sizing features, low price tag and smart design of this orthotic makes it one of the best thumb and wrist braces for treating tendonitis and a number of other hand and wrist injuries. Following is a detailed list of its features: Rigid wrist brace with thumb spica immobilizes the MP and CMC joints Contouring at the palmar crease for full finger function and also at the lower joint of the pinky finger, allowing palmar spread Wrist brace for thumb tendonitis, wrist tendonitis, de Quervain’s syndrome, rheumatoid arthritis, rhizarthrosis, wrist or thumb sprains, thumb or wrist strains, etc. Rigid splint for sprained wrist can be made more flexible by removing its palmar or thumb stay Rigid thumb stay of this wrist and abducted thumb splint for thumb tendon injuries can be molded to suit one’s needs and anatomy Wrist tendon pain splint is constructed of durable material that will hold up well to wear Black color of this wrist and thumb stabilizer for the right or left had also means the support does not show wear, dirt, stains, etc. Padded lycra lining for a more comfortable fit Material of which this sore wrist, thumb side splint is constructed is also quite breathable Hook and loop closures of this wrist support brace for torn tendonitis make it easy to apply and to adjust the compression it applies Wrist splint/thumb stabilizer leaves the fingers free Affordable wrist splint with thumb protector Choose between a right or left wrist brace with thumb stabilizer 618870112309 7661765296181 new 24.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10h0102-thumb-and-wrist-tendonitis-splint-for-de-quervains-tenosynovitis-treatment_grande.jpg?v=1524258829 641061978282 BraceAbility 10H0102SL Wrist / Hand SUS Thumb & Wrist Tendonitis Splint for De Quervain's Tenosynovitis Treatment http://www.braceability.com/products/wrist-tendonitis-treatment-splint?variant=7661765328949 Thumb & Wrist Tendonitis Splint for De Quervain's Tenosynovitis Treatment Left / M Wrist and Thumb Splint Provides Relief for Wrist Tendonitis This versatile wrist brace for De Quervain’s tendonitis and more immobilizes the metacarpophalangeal (MP) joint and the carpometacarpal (CMC) saddle joint between the thumb and the index finger, in addition to supporting the wrist. This makes this wrist brace/thumb stabilizer well equipped for treating a number of wrist injuries on the thumb side, including: Wrist or thumb tendonitis De Quervain’s disease Rheumatoid arthritis Thumb or wrist sprains or strains Rhizarthrosis The wrist splint for tendonitis includes an aluminum stay for additional support. If one desires a sleeker, more flexible thumb/wrist brace for tendonitis, he or she can simply remove the stay. There is also a rigid stay at the thumb of the wrist and thumb brace for tendonitis for immobilization and support. This stay can also be removed from the wrist brace with a thumb stabilizer for a more flexible fit. The aluminum stay is not easily bendable because it is intended to be an immobilizing splint, but if needed you can slightly mold the thumb stay for a customized thumb stabilizer wrist brace fit. The splint for wrist tendonitis is composed of durable material that will stand up to frequent use. This material is also breathable and lined with a padded lycra material, which makes this a more comfortable tendonitis wrist splint. Another feature that enhances the comfort factor of this wrist splint with an abducted thumb component is the contouring that is incorporated in several areas of the brace. The contouring in the palmar area of this wrist and thumb support for tendonitis enables one to move the fingers normally, including grasping or clenching motions. There is also contouring at the fifth MP joint (pinky) of this tendonitis treatment of the wrist, allowing one to spread the fingers. Besides the obvious comfort aspect of allowing free movement of the hand outside of the thumb, the motion permitted by this wrist brace with thumb support also means it can be used during therapy for wrist tendonitis. How to treat tendonitis in the wrist and thumb will likely involve exercises meant to build up the strength and flexibility of the soft tissues in the affected areas. If this tendonitis wrist splint with a thumb stabilizer restricted movement of the hand more than necessary, it would likely lead to some counterproductive muscle loss. This brace for tendonitis in the thumb and wrist is secured via hook and loop (Velcro-like) closures. There are three along the wrist and forearm area, which ensures the De Quervain’s tendonitis wrist brace stays in position, as well as one around the thumb. If the strap ends are too long, you can cut off the excess material.  This style of closure means one will not waste time trying to figure out how to use the thumb and wrist splint or struggling to apply and/or adjust it.  It also makes it quite easy to secure and adjust the wrist brace spica for tendonitis—after all, it makes little sense to require excessive twisting, gripping etc. that stresses one’s tendons if the goal is healing wrist tendonitis. On the other hand, a cast for right wrist tendonitis may be going overboard in many instances. This wrist and thumb brace extends up the arm for added support to the wrist and forearm. Sizes XS and S are 7" long and sizes M-L are 8" long. This measurement does not include the thumb portion, see image above for details. So as you can see, from its price tag to its smart, comfortable design to its supportive qualities, there are many reasons this is a good brace to help with tendonitis wrist/thumb and other injuries. See more braces for the wrist and thumb . How to Treat Tendonitis in the Wrist and Thumb Injuries to the hands and wrist are some of the most common injuries among athletes. Think about it… these areas of the body are essential for gripping and swinging a bat or racket, shooting a basketball, grappling with another wrestler, doing a flip and so much more. And in daily life one relies on these areas of the body for so much—holding hands, lifting a baby, eating or strumming a guitar would be difficult to impossible without these areas of the body. Typically what causes tendonitis in the thumb/wrist falls into the category of overuse or trauma—tendonitis of the wrist or thumb can fall into either category. Some conditions like rheumatoid arthritis or diabetes can also lead to tendonitis of the hand and/or wrist. Tendonitis is a general term referring to inflammation of the tendons. This is problematic as these connective tissues must glide through various tunnels in order for one to move the hands and wrist. Understandably, forcing an irritated swollen tendon through such passages can be painful and eventually impossible. Tendonitis thumb/wrist treatment typically begins with following the steps of RICE —rest, ice, compress and elevate the hand, thumb and wrist. These steps can reduce painful inflammation more quickly. This brace for tendonitis in the wrist and thumb helps with both the rest and compression steps of this process. The wrist splint with abducted thumb immobilizes the MP and CMC joint, helping with wrist pain on the thumb side by forcing these tendons to rest. The Velcro closures of the thumb stabilizing wrist brace also means one can adjust the amount of compression it provides at both the wrist and thumb area. For additional compression, one might consider a bandage or wrist wrap . One can also take over-the-counter pain killers to help with the wrist pain above the thumb associated with de Quervain’s syndrome and other sources of wrist and hand pain. In some cases a corticosteroid injection may be needed to calm the inflamed tissues. Once inflammation and wrist/thumb pain from tendonitis are under control, one can start performing exercises to strengthen the muscles around the sore joint and stretches to improve mobility as part of treatment for wrist tendonitis. And as previously noted, the fact that this wrist splint with thumb immobilizer allows full movement of the fingers helps minimize muscle loss and hand function during the periods of immobilization. One should follow the instructions of a medical professional when it comes to getting back to activity. Overdoing it or performing certain motions can lead to a reinjury. Other steps to prevent a reinjury include being sure to warm up and to gradually increase the intensity of one’s workouts. Cooling down is also important. Attention to proper form and equipment are also important for preventing tendonitis. Wearing a wrist and thumb guard can also help prevent such injuries. How long it takes for wrist tendonitis to heal will depend upon the location and severity of one’s injury. It may take just a few days or several weeks for one to get back to normal. If one is still performing aggravating activities, reversing wrist tendonitis may take even longer. Key Features of Right or Left Wrist Tendonitis Brace The numerous sizing features, low price tag and smart design of this orthotic makes it one of the best thumb and wrist braces for treating tendonitis and a number of other hand and wrist injuries. Following is a detailed list of its features: Rigid wrist brace with thumb spica immobilizes the MP and CMC joints Contouring at the palmar crease for full finger function and also at the lower joint of the pinky finger, allowing palmar spread Wrist brace for thumb tendonitis, wrist tendonitis, de Quervain’s syndrome, rheumatoid arthritis, rhizarthrosis, wrist or thumb sprains, thumb or wrist strains, etc. Rigid splint for sprained wrist can be made more flexible by removing its palmar or thumb stay Rigid thumb stay of this wrist and abducted thumb splint for thumb tendon injuries can be molded to suit one’s needs and anatomy Wrist tendon pain splint is constructed of durable material that will hold up well to wear Black color of this wrist and thumb stabilizer for the right or left had also means the support does not show wear, dirt, stains, etc. Padded lycra lining for a more comfortable fit Material of which this sore wrist, thumb side splint is constructed is also quite breathable Hook and loop closures of this wrist support brace for torn tendonitis make it easy to apply and to adjust the compression it applies Wrist splint/thumb stabilizer leaves the fingers free Affordable wrist splint with thumb protector Choose between a right or left wrist brace with thumb stabilizer 618870112309 7661765328949 new 24.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10h0102-thumb-and-wrist-tendonitis-splint-for-de-quervains-tenosynovitis-treatment_grande.jpg?v=1524258829 641061978275 BraceAbility 10H0102ML Wrist / Hand MUS Thumb & Wrist Tendonitis Splint for De Quervain's Tenosynovitis Treatment http://www.braceability.com/products/wrist-tendonitis-treatment-splint?variant=7661765361717 Thumb & Wrist Tendonitis Splint for De Quervain's Tenosynovitis Treatment Left / L Wrist and Thumb Splint Provides Relief for Wrist Tendonitis This versatile wrist brace for De Quervain’s tendonitis and more immobilizes the metacarpophalangeal (MP) joint and the carpometacarpal (CMC) saddle joint between the thumb and the index finger, in addition to supporting the wrist. This makes this wrist brace/thumb stabilizer well equipped for treating a number of wrist injuries on the thumb side, including: Wrist or thumb tendonitis De Quervain’s disease Rheumatoid arthritis Thumb or wrist sprains or strains Rhizarthrosis The wrist splint for tendonitis includes an aluminum stay for additional support. If one desires a sleeker, more flexible thumb/wrist brace for tendonitis, he or she can simply remove the stay. There is also a rigid stay at the thumb of the wrist and thumb brace for tendonitis for immobilization and support. This stay can also be removed from the wrist brace with a thumb stabilizer for a more flexible fit. The aluminum stay is not easily bendable because it is intended to be an immobilizing splint, but if needed you can slightly mold the thumb stay for a customized thumb stabilizer wrist brace fit. The splint for wrist tendonitis is composed of durable material that will stand up to frequent use. This material is also breathable and lined with a padded lycra material, which makes this a more comfortable tendonitis wrist splint. Another feature that enhances the comfort factor of this wrist splint with an abducted thumb component is the contouring that is incorporated in several areas of the brace. The contouring in the palmar area of this wrist and thumb support for tendonitis enables one to move the fingers normally, including grasping or clenching motions. There is also contouring at the fifth MP joint (pinky) of this tendonitis treatment of the wrist, allowing one to spread the fingers. Besides the obvious comfort aspect of allowing free movement of the hand outside of the thumb, the motion permitted by this wrist brace with thumb support also means it can be used during therapy for wrist tendonitis. How to treat tendonitis in the wrist and thumb will likely involve exercises meant to build up the strength and flexibility of the soft tissues in the affected areas. If this tendonitis wrist splint with a thumb stabilizer restricted movement of the hand more than necessary, it would likely lead to some counterproductive muscle loss. This brace for tendonitis in the thumb and wrist is secured via hook and loop (Velcro-like) closures. There are three along the wrist and forearm area, which ensures the De Quervain’s tendonitis wrist brace stays in position, as well as one around the thumb. If the strap ends are too long, you can cut off the excess material.  This style of closure means one will not waste time trying to figure out how to use the thumb and wrist splint or struggling to apply and/or adjust it.  It also makes it quite easy to secure and adjust the wrist brace spica for tendonitis—after all, it makes little sense to require excessive twisting, gripping etc. that stresses one’s tendons if the goal is healing wrist tendonitis. On the other hand, a cast for right wrist tendonitis may be going overboard in many instances. This wrist and thumb brace extends up the arm for added support to the wrist and forearm. Sizes XS and S are 7" long and sizes M-L are 8" long. This measurement does not include the thumb portion, see image above for details. So as you can see, from its price tag to its smart, comfortable design to its supportive qualities, there are many reasons this is a good brace to help with tendonitis wrist/thumb and other injuries. See more braces for the wrist and thumb . How to Treat Tendonitis in the Wrist and Thumb Injuries to the hands and wrist are some of the most common injuries among athletes. Think about it… these areas of the body are essential for gripping and swinging a bat or racket, shooting a basketball, grappling with another wrestler, doing a flip and so much more. And in daily life one relies on these areas of the body for so much—holding hands, lifting a baby, eating or strumming a guitar would be difficult to impossible without these areas of the body. Typically what causes tendonitis in the thumb/wrist falls into the category of overuse or trauma—tendonitis of the wrist or thumb can fall into either category. Some conditions like rheumatoid arthritis or diabetes can also lead to tendonitis of the hand and/or wrist. Tendonitis is a general term referring to inflammation of the tendons. This is problematic as these connective tissues must glide through various tunnels in order for one to move the hands and wrist. Understandably, forcing an irritated swollen tendon through such passages can be painful and eventually impossible. Tendonitis thumb/wrist treatment typically begins with following the steps of RICE —rest, ice, compress and elevate the hand, thumb and wrist. These steps can reduce painful inflammation more quickly. This brace for tendonitis in the wrist and thumb helps with both the rest and compression steps of this process. The wrist splint with abducted thumb immobilizes the MP and CMC joint, helping with wrist pain on the thumb side by forcing these tendons to rest. The Velcro closures of the thumb stabilizing wrist brace also means one can adjust the amount of compression it provides at both the wrist and thumb area. For additional compression, one might consider a bandage or wrist wrap . One can also take over-the-counter pain killers to help with the wrist pain above the thumb associated with de Quervain’s syndrome and other sources of wrist and hand pain. In some cases a corticosteroid injection may be needed to calm the inflamed tissues. Once inflammation and wrist/thumb pain from tendonitis are under control, one can start performing exercises to strengthen the muscles around the sore joint and stretches to improve mobility as part of treatment for wrist tendonitis. And as previously noted, the fact that this wrist splint with thumb immobilizer allows full movement of the fingers helps minimize muscle loss and hand function during the periods of immobilization. One should follow the instructions of a medical professional when it comes to getting back to activity. Overdoing it or performing certain motions can lead to a reinjury. Other steps to prevent a reinjury include being sure to warm up and to gradually increase the intensity of one’s workouts. Cooling down is also important. Attention to proper form and equipment are also important for preventing tendonitis. Wearing a wrist and thumb guard can also help prevent such injuries. How long it takes for wrist tendonitis to heal will depend upon the location and severity of one’s injury. It may take just a few days or several weeks for one to get back to normal. If one is still performing aggravating activities, reversing wrist tendonitis may take even longer. Key Features of Right or Left Wrist Tendonitis Brace The numerous sizing features, low price tag and smart design of this orthotic makes it one of the best thumb and wrist braces for treating tendonitis and a number of other hand and wrist injuries. Following is a detailed list of its features: Rigid wrist brace with thumb spica immobilizes the MP and CMC joints Contouring at the palmar crease for full finger function and also at the lower joint of the pinky finger, allowing palmar spread Wrist brace for thumb tendonitis, wrist tendonitis, de Quervain’s syndrome, rheumatoid arthritis, rhizarthrosis, wrist or thumb sprains, thumb or wrist strains, etc. Rigid splint for sprained wrist can be made more flexible by removing its palmar or thumb stay Rigid thumb stay of this wrist and abducted thumb splint for thumb tendon injuries can be molded to suit one’s needs and anatomy Wrist tendon pain splint is constructed of durable material that will hold up well to wear Black color of this wrist and thumb stabilizer for the right or left had also means the support does not show wear, dirt, stains, etc. Padded lycra lining for a more comfortable fit Material of which this sore wrist, thumb side splint is constructed is also quite breathable Hook and loop closures of this wrist support brace for torn tendonitis make it easy to apply and to adjust the compression it applies Wrist splint/thumb stabilizer leaves the fingers free Affordable wrist splint with thumb protector Choose between a right or left wrist brace with thumb stabilizer 618870112309 7661765361717 new 24.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10h0102-thumb-and-wrist-tendonitis-splint-for-de-quervains-tenosynovitis-treatment_grande.jpg?v=1524258829 641061978268 BraceAbility 10H0102LL Wrist / Hand LUS BraceAbility Turf Toe Strap Soft Taping Treatment http://www.braceability.com/products/turf-toe-taping-splint?variant=7677154885685 BraceAbility Turf Toe Strap Soft Taping Treatment Right / S Turf Toe Pain Wrap This toe splint holds the big toe (hallux) in an ideal position for healing and supports the metatarsophalangeal (the joint at the base of the toe, also known as MTP) in proper alignment. This speeds healing and protects the foot and toe against further injury. This is what is needed for treating conditions such as turf toe, bunions and other toe deformities.  See BraceAbility’s full line of toe protectors . This brace for turf toe is highly adjustable. Indeed, the entire brace is made of soft Velcro material that can easily be adjusted so that it conforms to the contours of any foot. The big toe component of the splint for bunions is also adjustable. The additional Velcro strap helps to separate and pull the first metatarsal (big toe) away from the second, keeping them from rubbing together.  The bunion brace is also quite comfortable to wear, unlike an uncomfortable hard bunion splint, thanks to its thin, lightweight material. If room permits, you may be able to wear this bunion wrap inside of your shoe to help prevent rubbing from occurring. For added convenience, the foot/toe splint is washable as well as latex-free. Bunion & Turf Toe Treatment Essentially, turf toe is a sprain of the middle joint at the base of the big toe that might occur when the toe is forced into hyperextension when the toe is fixed on the ground with the heel in the air. While this condition derives its name from injuries sustained on artificial turf, this injury can occur in a number of activities and sports. As with other sprains, treatment involves following the steps of rest, ice, compress and elevate (RICE) . Rest involves taking a break from the activity that caused the injury in the first place and avoiding walking or putting weight on the foot. In some cases, a cam walking boot may also be necessary. Another component of turf toe treatment involves immobilizing the MTP joint, which is where this brace for toe alignment can help. It also can help reduce stress on the plantar plate and provide needed support. While a bunion is quite different than a turf toe sprain, treatment for this injury also involves reducing the amount of pressure on one’s big toe as well as following the steps of RICE to reduce swelling.  Check out BraceAbility’s full line of bunion splints . Wearing roomy shoes with wide and deep toe boxes and avoiding high heels are also important for achieving relief from bunions, or an enlargement of the bone or tissue around the metatarsophalangeal joint. There are also a number of arch supports and other foot orthotics that can encourage even distribution of weight on the foot, which helps reduce discomfort stemming from bunions. Turf Toe and Bunion Splint Solution There are a number of reasons this bunion and turf toe brace is a popular choice. These include the following: Maintains ideal positioning for the big toe Promotes metatarsophalangeal joint alignment Made of Velcro compatible material so it is highly adjustable Conforms to any foot Adjustable hallux positioning Easy to apply thanks to Velcro closure Thin and lightweight material Can be worn inside a shoe Washable Latex-free Available for right or left foot Three sizes fitting foot circumferences 9" 12" (See sizing chart for more details.) Neutral black color 621521764405 7677154885685 new 19.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10a0301-braceability-turf-toe-strap-soft-taping-treatment_grande.jpg?v=1524750015 641061981572 BraceAbility 10A0301SR Foot & Toe SUS BraceAbility Turf Toe Strap Soft Taping Treatment http://www.braceability.com/products/turf-toe-taping-splint?variant=7677154918453 BraceAbility Turf Toe Strap Soft Taping Treatment Right / M Turf Toe Pain Wrap This toe splint holds the big toe (hallux) in an ideal position for healing and supports the metatarsophalangeal (the joint at the base of the toe, also known as MTP) in proper alignment. This speeds healing and protects the foot and toe against further injury. This is what is needed for treating conditions such as turf toe, bunions and other toe deformities.  See BraceAbility’s full line of toe protectors . This brace for turf toe is highly adjustable. Indeed, the entire brace is made of soft Velcro material that can easily be adjusted so that it conforms to the contours of any foot. The big toe component of the splint for bunions is also adjustable. The additional Velcro strap helps to separate and pull the first metatarsal (big toe) away from the second, keeping them from rubbing together.  The bunion brace is also quite comfortable to wear, unlike an uncomfortable hard bunion splint, thanks to its thin, lightweight material. If room permits, you may be able to wear this bunion wrap inside of your shoe to help prevent rubbing from occurring. For added convenience, the foot/toe splint is washable as well as latex-free. Bunion & Turf Toe Treatment Essentially, turf toe is a sprain of the middle joint at the base of the big toe that might occur when the toe is forced into hyperextension when the toe is fixed on the ground with the heel in the air. While this condition derives its name from injuries sustained on artificial turf, this injury can occur in a number of activities and sports. As with other sprains, treatment involves following the steps of rest, ice, compress and elevate (RICE) . Rest involves taking a break from the activity that caused the injury in the first place and avoiding walking or putting weight on the foot. In some cases, a cam walking boot may also be necessary. Another component of turf toe treatment involves immobilizing the MTP joint, which is where this brace for toe alignment can help. It also can help reduce stress on the plantar plate and provide needed support. While a bunion is quite different than a turf toe sprain, treatment for this injury also involves reducing the amount of pressure on one’s big toe as well as following the steps of RICE to reduce swelling.  Check out BraceAbility’s full line of bunion splints . Wearing roomy shoes with wide and deep toe boxes and avoiding high heels are also important for achieving relief from bunions, or an enlargement of the bone or tissue around the metatarsophalangeal joint. There are also a number of arch supports and other foot orthotics that can encourage even distribution of weight on the foot, which helps reduce discomfort stemming from bunions. Turf Toe and Bunion Splint Solution There are a number of reasons this bunion and turf toe brace is a popular choice. These include the following: Maintains ideal positioning for the big toe Promotes metatarsophalangeal joint alignment Made of Velcro compatible material so it is highly adjustable Conforms to any foot Adjustable hallux positioning Easy to apply thanks to Velcro closure Thin and lightweight material Can be worn inside a shoe Washable Latex-free Available for right or left foot Three sizes fitting foot circumferences 9" 12" (See sizing chart for more details.) Neutral black color 621521764405 7677154918453 new 19.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10a0301-braceability-turf-toe-strap-soft-taping-treatment_grande.jpg?v=1524750015 641061981589 BraceAbility 10A0301MR Foot & Toe MUS BraceAbility Turf Toe Strap Soft Taping Treatment http://www.braceability.com/products/turf-toe-taping-splint?variant=7677154951221 BraceAbility Turf Toe Strap Soft Taping Treatment Right / L Turf Toe Pain Wrap This toe splint holds the big toe (hallux) in an ideal position for healing and supports the metatarsophalangeal (the joint at the base of the toe, also known as MTP) in proper alignment. This speeds healing and protects the foot and toe against further injury. This is what is needed for treating conditions such as turf toe, bunions and other toe deformities.  See BraceAbility’s full line of toe protectors . This brace for turf toe is highly adjustable. Indeed, the entire brace is made of soft Velcro material that can easily be adjusted so that it conforms to the contours of any foot. The big toe component of the splint for bunions is also adjustable. The additional Velcro strap helps to separate and pull the first metatarsal (big toe) away from the second, keeping them from rubbing together.  The bunion brace is also quite comfortable to wear, unlike an uncomfortable hard bunion splint, thanks to its thin, lightweight material. If room permits, you may be able to wear this bunion wrap inside of your shoe to help prevent rubbing from occurring. For added convenience, the foot/toe splint is washable as well as latex-free. Bunion & Turf Toe Treatment Essentially, turf toe is a sprain of the middle joint at the base of the big toe that might occur when the toe is forced into hyperextension when the toe is fixed on the ground with the heel in the air. While this condition derives its name from injuries sustained on artificial turf, this injury can occur in a number of activities and sports. As with other sprains, treatment involves following the steps of rest, ice, compress and elevate (RICE) . Rest involves taking a break from the activity that caused the injury in the first place and avoiding walking or putting weight on the foot. In some cases, a cam walking boot may also be necessary. Another component of turf toe treatment involves immobilizing the MTP joint, which is where this brace for toe alignment can help. It also can help reduce stress on the plantar plate and provide needed support. While a bunion is quite different than a turf toe sprain, treatment for this injury also involves reducing the amount of pressure on one’s big toe as well as following the steps of RICE to reduce swelling.  Check out BraceAbility’s full line of bunion splints . Wearing roomy shoes with wide and deep toe boxes and avoiding high heels are also important for achieving relief from bunions, or an enlargement of the bone or tissue around the metatarsophalangeal joint. There are also a number of arch supports and other foot orthotics that can encourage even distribution of weight on the foot, which helps reduce discomfort stemming from bunions. Turf Toe and Bunion Splint Solution There are a number of reasons this bunion and turf toe brace is a popular choice. These include the following: Maintains ideal positioning for the big toe Promotes metatarsophalangeal joint alignment Made of Velcro compatible material so it is highly adjustable Conforms to any foot Adjustable hallux positioning Easy to apply thanks to Velcro closure Thin and lightweight material Can be worn inside a shoe Washable Latex-free Available for right or left foot Three sizes fitting foot circumferences 9" 12" (See sizing chart for more details.) Neutral black color 621521764405 7677154951221 new 19.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10a0301-braceability-turf-toe-strap-soft-taping-treatment_grande.jpg?v=1524750015 641061981596 BraceAbility 10A0301LR Foot & Toe LUS BraceAbility Turf Toe Strap Soft Taping Treatment http://www.braceability.com/products/turf-toe-taping-splint?variant=7677125361717 BraceAbility Turf Toe Strap Soft Taping Treatment Left / S Turf Toe Pain Wrap This toe splint holds the big toe (hallux) in an ideal position for healing and supports the metatarsophalangeal (the joint at the base of the toe, also known as MTP) in proper alignment. This speeds healing and protects the foot and toe against further injury. This is what is needed for treating conditions such as turf toe, bunions and other toe deformities.  See BraceAbility’s full line of toe protectors . This brace for turf toe is highly adjustable. Indeed, the entire brace is made of soft Velcro material that can easily be adjusted so that it conforms to the contours of any foot. The big toe component of the splint for bunions is also adjustable. The additional Velcro strap helps to separate and pull the first metatarsal (big toe) away from the second, keeping them from rubbing together.  The bunion brace is also quite comfortable to wear, unlike an uncomfortable hard bunion splint, thanks to its thin, lightweight material. If room permits, you may be able to wear this bunion wrap inside of your shoe to help prevent rubbing from occurring. For added convenience, the foot/toe splint is washable as well as latex-free. Bunion & Turf Toe Treatment Essentially, turf toe is a sprain of the middle joint at the base of the big toe that might occur when the toe is forced into hyperextension when the toe is fixed on the ground with the heel in the air. While this condition derives its name from injuries sustained on artificial turf, this injury can occur in a number of activities and sports. As with other sprains, treatment involves following the steps of rest, ice, compress and elevate (RICE) . Rest involves taking a break from the activity that caused the injury in the first place and avoiding walking or putting weight on the foot. In some cases, a cam walking boot may also be necessary. Another component of turf toe treatment involves immobilizing the MTP joint, which is where this brace for toe alignment can help. It also can help reduce stress on the plantar plate and provide needed support. While a bunion is quite different than a turf toe sprain, treatment for this injury also involves reducing the amount of pressure on one’s big toe as well as following the steps of RICE to reduce swelling.  Check out BraceAbility’s full line of bunion splints . Wearing roomy shoes with wide and deep toe boxes and avoiding high heels are also important for achieving relief from bunions, or an enlargement of the bone or tissue around the metatarsophalangeal joint. There are also a number of arch supports and other foot orthotics that can encourage even distribution of weight on the foot, which helps reduce discomfort stemming from bunions. Turf Toe and Bunion Splint Solution There are a number of reasons this bunion and turf toe brace is a popular choice. These include the following: Maintains ideal positioning for the big toe Promotes metatarsophalangeal joint alignment Made of Velcro compatible material so it is highly adjustable Conforms to any foot Adjustable hallux positioning Easy to apply thanks to Velcro closure Thin and lightweight material Can be worn inside a shoe Washable Latex-free Available for right or left foot Three sizes fitting foot circumferences 9" 12" (See sizing chart for more details.) Neutral black color 621521764405 7677125361717 new 19.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10a0301-braceability-turf-toe-strap-soft-taping-treatment_grande.jpg?v=1524750015 641061981541 BraceAbility 10A0301SL Foot & Toe SUS BraceAbility Turf Toe Strap Soft Taping Treatment http://www.braceability.com/products/turf-toe-taping-splint?variant=7677154820149 BraceAbility Turf Toe Strap Soft Taping Treatment Left / M Turf Toe Pain Wrap This toe splint holds the big toe (hallux) in an ideal position for healing and supports the metatarsophalangeal (the joint at the base of the toe, also known as MTP) in proper alignment. This speeds healing and protects the foot and toe against further injury. This is what is needed for treating conditions such as turf toe, bunions and other toe deformities.  See BraceAbility’s full line of toe protectors . This brace for turf toe is highly adjustable. Indeed, the entire brace is made of soft Velcro material that can easily be adjusted so that it conforms to the contours of any foot. The big toe component of the splint for bunions is also adjustable. The additional Velcro strap helps to separate and pull the first metatarsal (big toe) away from the second, keeping them from rubbing together.  The bunion brace is also quite comfortable to wear, unlike an uncomfortable hard bunion splint, thanks to its thin, lightweight material. If room permits, you may be able to wear this bunion wrap inside of your shoe to help prevent rubbing from occurring. For added convenience, the foot/toe splint is washable as well as latex-free. Bunion & Turf Toe Treatment Essentially, turf toe is a sprain of the middle joint at the base of the big toe that might occur when the toe is forced into hyperextension when the toe is fixed on the ground with the heel in the air. While this condition derives its name from injuries sustained on artificial turf, this injury can occur in a number of activities and sports. As with other sprains, treatment involves following the steps of rest, ice, compress and elevate (RICE) . Rest involves taking a break from the activity that caused the injury in the first place and avoiding walking or putting weight on the foot. In some cases, a cam walking boot may also be necessary. Another component of turf toe treatment involves immobilizing the MTP joint, which is where this brace for toe alignment can help. It also can help reduce stress on the plantar plate and provide needed support. While a bunion is quite different than a turf toe sprain, treatment for this injury also involves reducing the amount of pressure on one’s big toe as well as following the steps of RICE to reduce swelling.  Check out BraceAbility’s full line of bunion splints . Wearing roomy shoes with wide and deep toe boxes and avoiding high heels are also important for achieving relief from bunions, or an enlargement of the bone or tissue around the metatarsophalangeal joint. There are also a number of arch supports and other foot orthotics that can encourage even distribution of weight on the foot, which helps reduce discomfort stemming from bunions. Turf Toe and Bunion Splint Solution There are a number of reasons this bunion and turf toe brace is a popular choice. These include the following: Maintains ideal positioning for the big toe Promotes metatarsophalangeal joint alignment Made of Velcro compatible material so it is highly adjustable Conforms to any foot Adjustable hallux positioning Easy to apply thanks to Velcro closure Thin and lightweight material Can be worn inside a shoe Washable Latex-free Available for right or left foot Three sizes fitting foot circumferences 9" 12" (See sizing chart for more details.) Neutral black color 621521764405 7677154820149 new 19.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10a0301-braceability-turf-toe-strap-soft-taping-treatment_grande.jpg?v=1524750015 641061981558 BraceAbility 10A0301ML Foot & Toe MUS BraceAbility Turf Toe Strap Soft Taping Treatment http://www.braceability.com/products/turf-toe-taping-splint?variant=7677154852917 BraceAbility Turf Toe Strap Soft Taping Treatment Left / L Turf Toe Pain Wrap This toe splint holds the big toe (hallux) in an ideal position for healing and supports the metatarsophalangeal (the joint at the base of the toe, also known as MTP) in proper alignment. This speeds healing and protects the foot and toe against further injury. This is what is needed for treating conditions such as turf toe, bunions and other toe deformities.  See BraceAbility’s full line of toe protectors . This brace for turf toe is highly adjustable. Indeed, the entire brace is made of soft Velcro material that can easily be adjusted so that it conforms to the contours of any foot. The big toe component of the splint for bunions is also adjustable. The additional Velcro strap helps to separate and pull the first metatarsal (big toe) away from the second, keeping them from rubbing together.  The bunion brace is also quite comfortable to wear, unlike an uncomfortable hard bunion splint, thanks to its thin, lightweight material. If room permits, you may be able to wear this bunion wrap inside of your shoe to help prevent rubbing from occurring. For added convenience, the foot/toe splint is washable as well as latex-free. Bunion & Turf Toe Treatment Essentially, turf toe is a sprain of the middle joint at the base of the big toe that might occur when the toe is forced into hyperextension when the toe is fixed on the ground with the heel in the air. While this condition derives its name from injuries sustained on artificial turf, this injury can occur in a number of activities and sports. As with other sprains, treatment involves following the steps of rest, ice, compress and elevate (RICE) . Rest involves taking a break from the activity that caused the injury in the first place and avoiding walking or putting weight on the foot. In some cases, a cam walking boot may also be necessary. Another component of turf toe treatment involves immobilizing the MTP joint, which is where this brace for toe alignment can help. It also can help reduce stress on the plantar plate and provide needed support. While a bunion is quite different than a turf toe sprain, treatment for this injury also involves reducing the amount of pressure on one’s big toe as well as following the steps of RICE to reduce swelling.  Check out BraceAbility’s full line of bunion splints . Wearing roomy shoes with wide and deep toe boxes and avoiding high heels are also important for achieving relief from bunions, or an enlargement of the bone or tissue around the metatarsophalangeal joint. There are also a number of arch supports and other foot orthotics that can encourage even distribution of weight on the foot, which helps reduce discomfort stemming from bunions. Turf Toe and Bunion Splint Solution There are a number of reasons this bunion and turf toe brace is a popular choice. These include the following: Maintains ideal positioning for the big toe Promotes metatarsophalangeal joint alignment Made of Velcro compatible material so it is highly adjustable Conforms to any foot Adjustable hallux positioning Easy to apply thanks to Velcro closure Thin and lightweight material Can be worn inside a shoe Washable Latex-free Available for right or left foot Three sizes fitting foot circumferences 9" 12" (See sizing chart for more details.) Neutral black color 621521764405 7677154852917 new 19.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10a0301-braceability-turf-toe-strap-soft-taping-treatment_grande.jpg?v=1524750015 641061981565 BraceAbility 10A0301LL Foot & Toe LUS Short Air Medical Walking Boot for Broken / Injured Foot http://www.braceability.com/products/short-medical-air-walker-boot?variant=7661294059573 Short Air Medical Walking Boot for Broken / Injured Foot XS Comfortable Short Air Walking Boot This low-top walker boot features a durable but comfortable design that makes it a great solution for a number of less serious foot injuries where a period of rest and immobilization are needed. Some examples include: Stress fractures Foot or ankle sprains Diabetic ulcers After bunion surgery The polymer-molded upright struts of this fractured foot boot protect and support the foot and ankle. This material is molded to conform to the leg and its fit can be adjusted via three hook and loop (Velcro) closures that are quick and easy to adjust. This pneumatic surgical boot features an added strap for additional padding at the ankle, and an airpump that you can inflate or deflate depending on the fit and compression level you want. This along with the low top and relatively lightweight design makes the boot for foot fracture care more comfortable to move about in. Another component that is specifically geared toward improving the function of this walking foot brace is its arching rocker design. This encourages a smooth gait that takes less energy, making it easier to walk around when wearing this boot after a broken foot or some other injury. Another feature that sets this immobilizing boot apart from other boots for broken foot injuries is its wide foot bed. This diminishes the chance of any uncomfortable rubbing and it allows for swelling. When a less roomy fit is desired, one can simply tighten the lower strap closures. The wide footbed along with the open toe design of this foot injury boot also optimizes the orthotic for post bunion surgery use . These features also improve the breathability of the foot boot for fracture care. The liner of the boot for a sprained foot or ankle is made of a deluxe foam material that is soft against the skin as well as flexible. This lightweight material can stand up to wear. This along with the rough polymer struts makes it a durable broken foot walking boot.   Medical Boot for Broken Foot, Bunion or Ulcer Care A stress fracture is a common overuse injury among those who participate in sports. These tiny cracks in the bone are especially prevalent in sports such as: Tennis Track and field Basketball Gymnastics Another risk factor for stress fractures can be wearing shoes with poor support (think high heels) due to the uneven weight bearing they cause and the lack of support or shock absorption they supply. Osteoporosis or other diseases that weaken the bone can also make one prone to stress fractures. The most important component of stress fracture treatment is rest from the activity that caused the fracture in the first place or any other activities that cause pain. Wearing a lightweight walking cast boot for broken foot bones like this can help give the foot a rest, allowing the stress fracture to heal. Wearing broken foot boots will also help protect against further damage. Elevating the leg and applying ice can also help with the pain. This stress fracture boot works well with foot or ankle sprains  as well, since treatment is quite similar to that for small breaks to the bones of the foot. In some cases, this foot immobilizer boot may also help with a break to the ankle, though a doctor can give you a better gauge as to whether a high-top walking boot would be a better solution.  The wide footbed of this low boot brace makes it a favorite for the treatment of bunions . The abnormal bony bump that can form in the joint area at the base of one’s big or little toe (the latter is known as a bunionette or a tailor’s bunion) can develop as a result of wearing shoes that fit too tightly or that force uneven weight bearing. Bunions can also be the result of an inherited structural defect or certain medical conditions, like arthritis. Wearing roomy shoes or this BraceAbility walking boot that allows extra space for the toes is a common bunion treatment . While this does not address the underlying problem, it does provide relief by allowing painful inflammation to subside. Shoe inserts can also reduce discomfort stemming from bunions, as can taping the foot in a “normal” position. In some instances, surgery known as a bunionectomy may be needed to relieve discomfort stemming from bunions. In such instances, this post-surgical soft shoe for broken foot care can be quite helpful. One may need to use crutches if a doctor recommends a period of limited or non-weight bearing. This walking boot for foot fracture care can also double as an orthotic for dealing with foot ulcers. Wearing this foot injury walking boot reduces pressure on the foot, allowing the open sore known as an ulcer to heal. Ulcers can stem from diabetes or other conditions that cause poor circulation. Ulcers can be quite problematic if they become infected. Therefore, it is important to see a doctor if one develops an ulcer. Besides wearing a foot orthotic for plantar ulcers, treatment may also involve trimming away any diseased tissue, taking antibiotics and wearing a special dressing.  BraceAbility Medical Foot Boot Details What kind of boot do you wear after suffering a broken foot bone? Well most would say they want a walking boot for a broken foot bone that protects and immobilizes the foot in a way that is as comfortable as possible. Where can you get such a medical boot? Look no further…  Following are more details about this support boot for a broken foot and more; Wide footbed of this cam boot for broken foot care allows for swelling and bunion treatment Wide footbed and open-toe design of these broken foot boots makes them more breathable and comfortable Arching rocker design promotes a smooth, energy-conserving gait, making this an ideal walking boot for a broken foot Durable polymer shell of this boot for a broken foot protects and supports the foot Polymer upright struts are molded and contoured to the leg Medical boots for broken foot treatment can also help with diabetic ulcers or after bunion surgery Broken foot boot has low-profile and lightweight design Short boot for broken foot is 11" tall Deluxe foam liner makes this a soft boot for broken foot care There is an extra broken foot Velcro boot strap at the ankle for added padding Closures are Velcro in this boot for broken foot, for easy adjustment and application Color: Black Surgical Walker Boot There are a number of injuries that require immobilization, protection and/or compression of the ankle or foot to heal, ranging from a broken toe to a stable stress fracture at the ankle to a plantar diabetic ulcer to the recovery period after a bunion removal. In all these scenarios, this BraceAbility pneumatic toe fracture boot fits the bill.  Functionally speaking, this lightweight and low-profile walker boot has adjustable air cells that provide compression as well as support. The outer part of this brace consists of durable, polymer-molded upright struts that conform to the shape of one’s legs. The arching rocker design of the support encourages a smooth, natural gait that is more efficient than an awkward limp or an outward swing of the leg. This is also beneficial toward making a speedy recovery. The soft liner of this bunion surgery boot acts as an effective buffer between the outer shell and the foot and ankle. It also leaves the toe area open, improving the breathability of the support. There is also a strap at the ankle that provides additional padding. Broken Toe Boot with a Number of Uses When dealing with a broken toe or a stress fracture injury, treatment is dependent upon what sort of break occurs. If it is a fracture where everything is in place, treatment of the stress fracture or toe break might simply involve a period of immobilization and pain management. For a toe, immobilization might involve “buddy taping” the injured one to a healthy toe and/or wearing a stiff bottomed foot support, such as this walking boot for foot injuries. In instances where the break or stress fracture is less stable and includes displaced bone fragments, surgery may be necessary. Following surgery, one might have to wear a cast and/or a post-operative boot. Again, this BraceAbility boot is an option as are other post-operative foot supports offered by the company. Its wide footbed and open toe area make this particular walker boot an appealing choice for toe injuries in specific. These roomy features also make it a popular walker boot after bunion surgery. Most bunions can be repaired without surgery by switching to shoes that fit properly and using orthotics such as a bunion regulator. But in some instances, this is not enough to address discomfort stemming from bunions and surgery may be warranted. After surgery, one will likely spend time in a cast, walking brace or special shoes, depending upon the extent of the repair and the individual. Limited or no weight bearing may be required for a limited period.   A lightweight walker boot is also helpful from the standpoint that it can reduce pressure on the foot when it comes to treating a diabetic ulcer on the foot. The wide footbed of the pneumatic support is also well suited for this condition as it allows space for bandages.  Special Features of Bunion Surgery Boot This pneumatic boot has a number of features that make it a popular choice for a variety of minor injuries to the foot or ankle. These selling points include:  Adjustable air cells for customized compression and stability Arching rocker bottom Lightweight material Low-profile fit Wide footbed Ankle strap for additional padding 618802151477 7661294059573 new 44.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10a1401-braceability-short-air-medical-walking-boot_grande.jpg?v=1527627433 641061980483 BraceAbility 10A1401XS Walker Boots XSUS Short Air Medical Walking Boot for Broken / Injured Foot http://www.braceability.com/products/short-medical-air-walker-boot?variant=7661304676405 Short Air Medical Walking Boot for Broken / Injured Foot S Comfortable Short Air Walking Boot This low-top walker boot features a durable but comfortable design that makes it a great solution for a number of less serious foot injuries where a period of rest and immobilization are needed. Some examples include: Stress fractures Foot or ankle sprains Diabetic ulcers After bunion surgery The polymer-molded upright struts of this fractured foot boot protect and support the foot and ankle. This material is molded to conform to the leg and its fit can be adjusted via three hook and loop (Velcro) closures that are quick and easy to adjust. This pneumatic surgical boot features an added strap for additional padding at the ankle, and an airpump that you can inflate or deflate depending on the fit and compression level you want. This along with the low top and relatively lightweight design makes the boot for foot fracture care more comfortable to move about in. Another component that is specifically geared toward improving the function of this walking foot brace is its arching rocker design. This encourages a smooth gait that takes less energy, making it easier to walk around when wearing this boot after a broken foot or some other injury. Another feature that sets this immobilizing boot apart from other boots for broken foot injuries is its wide foot bed. This diminishes the chance of any uncomfortable rubbing and it allows for swelling. When a less roomy fit is desired, one can simply tighten the lower strap closures. The wide footbed along with the open toe design of this foot injury boot also optimizes the orthotic for post bunion surgery use . These features also improve the breathability of the foot boot for fracture care. The liner of the boot for a sprained foot or ankle is made of a deluxe foam material that is soft against the skin as well as flexible. This lightweight material can stand up to wear. This along with the rough polymer struts makes it a durable broken foot walking boot.   Medical Boot for Broken Foot, Bunion or Ulcer Care A stress fracture is a common overuse injury among those who participate in sports. These tiny cracks in the bone are especially prevalent in sports such as: Tennis Track and field Basketball Gymnastics Another risk factor for stress fractures can be wearing shoes with poor support (think high heels) due to the uneven weight bearing they cause and the lack of support or shock absorption they supply. Osteoporosis or other diseases that weaken the bone can also make one prone to stress fractures. The most important component of stress fracture treatment is rest from the activity that caused the fracture in the first place or any other activities that cause pain. Wearing a lightweight walking cast boot for broken foot bones like this can help give the foot a rest, allowing the stress fracture to heal. Wearing broken foot boots will also help protect against further damage. Elevating the leg and applying ice can also help with the pain. This stress fracture boot works well with foot or ankle sprains  as well, since treatment is quite similar to that for small breaks to the bones of the foot. In some cases, this foot immobilizer boot may also help with a break to the ankle, though a doctor can give you a better gauge as to whether a high-top walking boot would be a better solution.  The wide footbed of this low boot brace makes it a favorite for the treatment of bunions . The abnormal bony bump that can form in the joint area at the base of one’s big or little toe (the latter is known as a bunionette or a tailor’s bunion) can develop as a result of wearing shoes that fit too tightly or that force uneven weight bearing. Bunions can also be the result of an inherited structural defect or certain medical conditions, like arthritis. Wearing roomy shoes or this BraceAbility walking boot that allows extra space for the toes is a common bunion treatment . While this does not address the underlying problem, it does provide relief by allowing painful inflammation to subside. Shoe inserts can also reduce discomfort stemming from bunions, as can taping the foot in a “normal” position. In some instances, surgery known as a bunionectomy may be needed to relieve discomfort stemming from bunions. In such instances, this post-surgical soft shoe for broken foot care can be quite helpful. One may need to use crutches if a doctor recommends a period of limited or non-weight bearing. This walking boot for foot fracture care can also double as an orthotic for dealing with foot ulcers. Wearing this foot injury walking boot reduces pressure on the foot, allowing the open sore known as an ulcer to heal. Ulcers can stem from diabetes or other conditions that cause poor circulation. Ulcers can be quite problematic if they become infected. Therefore, it is important to see a doctor if one develops an ulcer. Besides wearing a foot orthotic for plantar ulcers, treatment may also involve trimming away any diseased tissue, taking antibiotics and wearing a special dressing.  BraceAbility Medical Foot Boot Details What kind of boot do you wear after suffering a broken foot bone? Well most would say they want a walking boot for a broken foot bone that protects and immobilizes the foot in a way that is as comfortable as possible. Where can you get such a medical boot? Look no further…  Following are more details about this support boot for a broken foot and more; Wide footbed of this cam boot for broken foot care allows for swelling and bunion treatment Wide footbed and open-toe design of these broken foot boots makes them more breathable and comfortable Arching rocker design promotes a smooth, energy-conserving gait, making this an ideal walking boot for a broken foot Durable polymer shell of this boot for a broken foot protects and supports the foot Polymer upright struts are molded and contoured to the leg Medical boots for broken foot treatment can also help with diabetic ulcers or after bunion surgery Broken foot boot has low-profile and lightweight design Short boot for broken foot is 11" tall Deluxe foam liner makes this a soft boot for broken foot care There is an extra broken foot Velcro boot strap at the ankle for added padding Closures are Velcro in this boot for broken foot, for easy adjustment and application Color: Black Surgical Walker Boot There are a number of injuries that require immobilization, protection and/or compression of the ankle or foot to heal, ranging from a broken toe to a stable stress fracture at the ankle to a plantar diabetic ulcer to the recovery period after a bunion removal. In all these scenarios, this BraceAbility pneumatic toe fracture boot fits the bill.  Functionally speaking, this lightweight and low-profile walker boot has adjustable air cells that provide compression as well as support. The outer part of this brace consists of durable, polymer-molded upright struts that conform to the shape of one’s legs. The arching rocker design of the support encourages a smooth, natural gait that is more efficient than an awkward limp or an outward swing of the leg. This is also beneficial toward making a speedy recovery. The soft liner of this bunion surgery boot acts as an effective buffer between the outer shell and the foot and ankle. It also leaves the toe area open, improving the breathability of the support. There is also a strap at the ankle that provides additional padding. Broken Toe Boot with a Number of Uses When dealing with a broken toe or a stress fracture injury, treatment is dependent upon what sort of break occurs. If it is a fracture where everything is in place, treatment of the stress fracture or toe break might simply involve a period of immobilization and pain management. For a toe, immobilization might involve “buddy taping” the injured one to a healthy toe and/or wearing a stiff bottomed foot support, such as this walking boot for foot injuries. In instances where the break or stress fracture is less stable and includes displaced bone fragments, surgery may be necessary. Following surgery, one might have to wear a cast and/or a post-operative boot. Again, this BraceAbility boot is an option as are other post-operative foot supports offered by the company. Its wide footbed and open toe area make this particular walker boot an appealing choice for toe injuries in specific. These roomy features also make it a popular walker boot after bunion surgery. Most bunions can be repaired without surgery by switching to shoes that fit properly and using orthotics such as a bunion regulator. But in some instances, this is not enough to address discomfort stemming from bunions and surgery may be warranted. After surgery, one will likely spend time in a cast, walking brace or special shoes, depending upon the extent of the repair and the individual. Limited or no weight bearing may be required for a limited period.   A lightweight walker boot is also helpful from the standpoint that it can reduce pressure on the foot when it comes to treating a diabetic ulcer on the foot. The wide footbed of the pneumatic support is also well suited for this condition as it allows space for bandages.  Special Features of Bunion Surgery Boot This pneumatic boot has a number of features that make it a popular choice for a variety of minor injuries to the foot or ankle. These selling points include:  Adjustable air cells for customized compression and stability Arching rocker bottom Lightweight material Low-profile fit Wide footbed Ankle strap for additional padding 618802151477 7661304676405 new 44.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10a1401-braceability-short-air-medical-walking-boot_grande.jpg?v=1527627433 641427944937 BraceAbility 10A1401S Walker Boots SUS Short Air Medical Walking Boot for Broken / Injured Foot http://www.braceability.com/products/short-medical-air-walker-boot?variant=7661304709173 Short Air Medical Walking Boot for Broken / Injured Foot M Comfortable Short Air Walking Boot This low-top walker boot features a durable but comfortable design that makes it a great solution for a number of less serious foot injuries where a period of rest and immobilization are needed. Some examples include: Stress fractures Foot or ankle sprains Diabetic ulcers After bunion surgery The polymer-molded upright struts of this fractured foot boot protect and support the foot and ankle. This material is molded to conform to the leg and its fit can be adjusted via three hook and loop (Velcro) closures that are quick and easy to adjust. This pneumatic surgical boot features an added strap for additional padding at the ankle, and an airpump that you can inflate or deflate depending on the fit and compression level you want. This along with the low top and relatively lightweight design makes the boot for foot fracture care more comfortable to move about in. Another component that is specifically geared toward improving the function of this walking foot brace is its arching rocker design. This encourages a smooth gait that takes less energy, making it easier to walk around when wearing this boot after a broken foot or some other injury. Another feature that sets this immobilizing boot apart from other boots for broken foot injuries is its wide foot bed. This diminishes the chance of any uncomfortable rubbing and it allows for swelling. When a less roomy fit is desired, one can simply tighten the lower strap closures. The wide footbed along with the open toe design of this foot injury boot also optimizes the orthotic for post bunion surgery use . These features also improve the breathability of the foot boot for fracture care. The liner of the boot for a sprained foot or ankle is made of a deluxe foam material that is soft against the skin as well as flexible. This lightweight material can stand up to wear. This along with the rough polymer struts makes it a durable broken foot walking boot.   Medical Boot for Broken Foot, Bunion or Ulcer Care A stress fracture is a common overuse injury among those who participate in sports. These tiny cracks in the bone are especially prevalent in sports such as: Tennis Track and field Basketball Gymnastics Another risk factor for stress fractures can be wearing shoes with poor support (think high heels) due to the uneven weight bearing they cause and the lack of support or shock absorption they supply. Osteoporosis or other diseases that weaken the bone can also make one prone to stress fractures. The most important component of stress fracture treatment is rest from the activity that caused the fracture in the first place or any other activities that cause pain. Wearing a lightweight walking cast boot for broken foot bones like this can help give the foot a rest, allowing the stress fracture to heal. Wearing broken foot boots will also help protect against further damage. Elevating the leg and applying ice can also help with the pain. This stress fracture boot works well with foot or ankle sprains  as well, since treatment is quite similar to that for small breaks to the bones of the foot. In some cases, this foot immobilizer boot may also help with a break to the ankle, though a doctor can give you a better gauge as to whether a high-top walking boot would be a better solution.  The wide footbed of this low boot brace makes it a favorite for the treatment of bunions . The abnormal bony bump that can form in the joint area at the base of one’s big or little toe (the latter is known as a bunionette or a tailor’s bunion) can develop as a result of wearing shoes that fit too tightly or that force uneven weight bearing. Bunions can also be the result of an inherited structural defect or certain medical conditions, like arthritis. Wearing roomy shoes or this BraceAbility walking boot that allows extra space for the toes is a common bunion treatment . While this does not address the underlying problem, it does provide relief by allowing painful inflammation to subside. Shoe inserts can also reduce discomfort stemming from bunions, as can taping the foot in a “normal” position. In some instances, surgery known as a bunionectomy may be needed to relieve discomfort stemming from bunions. In such instances, this post-surgical soft shoe for broken foot care can be quite helpful. One may need to use crutches if a doctor recommends a period of limited or non-weight bearing. This walking boot for foot fracture care can also double as an orthotic for dealing with foot ulcers. Wearing this foot injury walking boot reduces pressure on the foot, allowing the open sore known as an ulcer to heal. Ulcers can stem from diabetes or other conditions that cause poor circulation. Ulcers can be quite problematic if they become infected. Therefore, it is important to see a doctor if one develops an ulcer. Besides wearing a foot orthotic for plantar ulcers, treatment may also involve trimming away any diseased tissue, taking antibiotics and wearing a special dressing.  BraceAbility Medical Foot Boot Details What kind of boot do you wear after suffering a broken foot bone? Well most would say they want a walking boot for a broken foot bone that protects and immobilizes the foot in a way that is as comfortable as possible. Where can you get such a medical boot? Look no further…  Following are more details about this support boot for a broken foot and more; Wide footbed of this cam boot for broken foot care allows for swelling and bunion treatment Wide footbed and open-toe design of these broken foot boots makes them more breathable and comfortable Arching rocker design promotes a smooth, energy-conserving gait, making this an ideal walking boot for a broken foot Durable polymer shell of this boot for a broken foot protects and supports the foot Polymer upright struts are molded and contoured to the leg Medical boots for broken foot treatment can also help with diabetic ulcers or after bunion surgery Broken foot boot has low-profile and lightweight design Short boot for broken foot is 11" tall Deluxe foam liner makes this a soft boot for broken foot care There is an extra broken foot Velcro boot strap at the ankle for added padding Closures are Velcro in this boot for broken foot, for easy adjustment and application Color: Black Surgical Walker Boot There are a number of injuries that require immobilization, protection and/or compression of the ankle or foot to heal, ranging from a broken toe to a stable stress fracture at the ankle to a plantar diabetic ulcer to the recovery period after a bunion removal. In all these scenarios, this BraceAbility pneumatic toe fracture boot fits the bill.  Functionally speaking, this lightweight and low-profile walker boot has adjustable air cells that provide compression as well as support. The outer part of this brace consists of durable, polymer-molded upright struts that conform to the shape of one’s legs. The arching rocker design of the support encourages a smooth, natural gait that is more efficient than an awkward limp or an outward swing of the leg. This is also beneficial toward making a speedy recovery. The soft liner of this bunion surgery boot acts as an effective buffer between the outer shell and the foot and ankle. It also leaves the toe area open, improving the breathability of the support. There is also a strap at the ankle that provides additional padding. Broken Toe Boot with a Number of Uses When dealing with a broken toe or a stress fracture injury, treatment is dependent upon what sort of break occurs. If it is a fracture where everything is in place, treatment of the stress fracture or toe break might simply involve a period of immobilization and pain management. For a toe, immobilization might involve “buddy taping” the injured one to a healthy toe and/or wearing a stiff bottomed foot support, such as this walking boot for foot injuries. In instances where the break or stress fracture is less stable and includes displaced bone fragments, surgery may be necessary. Following surgery, one might have to wear a cast and/or a post-operative boot. Again, this BraceAbility boot is an option as are other post-operative foot supports offered by the company. Its wide footbed and open toe area make this particular walker boot an appealing choice for toe injuries in specific. These roomy features also make it a popular walker boot after bunion surgery. Most bunions can be repaired without surgery by switching to shoes that fit properly and using orthotics such as a bunion regulator. But in some instances, this is not enough to address discomfort stemming from bunions and surgery may be warranted. After surgery, one will likely spend time in a cast, walking brace or special shoes, depending upon the extent of the repair and the individual. Limited or no weight bearing may be required for a limited period.   A lightweight walker boot is also helpful from the standpoint that it can reduce pressure on the foot when it comes to treating a diabetic ulcer on the foot. The wide footbed of the pneumatic support is also well suited for this condition as it allows space for bandages.  Special Features of Bunion Surgery Boot This pneumatic boot has a number of features that make it a popular choice for a variety of minor injuries to the foot or ankle. These selling points include:  Adjustable air cells for customized compression and stability Arching rocker bottom Lightweight material Low-profile fit Wide footbed Ankle strap for additional padding 618802151477 7661304709173 new 44.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10a1401-braceability-short-air-medical-walking-boot_grande.jpg?v=1527627433 641061980506 BraceAbility 10A1401M Walker Boots MUS Short Air Medical Walking Boot for Broken / Injured Foot http://www.braceability.com/products/short-medical-air-walker-boot?variant=7661304741941 Short Air Medical Walking Boot for Broken / Injured Foot L Comfortable Short Air Walking Boot This low-top walker boot features a durable but comfortable design that makes it a great solution for a number of less serious foot injuries where a period of rest and immobilization are needed. Some examples include: Stress fractures Foot or ankle sprains Diabetic ulcers After bunion surgery The polymer-molded upright struts of this fractured foot boot protect and support the foot and ankle. This material is molded to conform to the leg and its fit can be adjusted via three hook and loop (Velcro) closures that are quick and easy to adjust. This pneumatic surgical boot features an added strap for additional padding at the ankle, and an airpump that you can inflate or deflate depending on the fit and compression level you want. This along with the low top and relatively lightweight design makes the boot for foot fracture care more comfortable to move about in. Another component that is specifically geared toward improving the function of this walking foot brace is its arching rocker design. This encourages a smooth gait that takes less energy, making it easier to walk around when wearing this boot after a broken foot or some other injury. Another feature that sets this immobilizing boot apart from other boots for broken foot injuries is its wide foot bed. This diminishes the chance of any uncomfortable rubbing and it allows for swelling. When a less roomy fit is desired, one can simply tighten the lower strap closures. The wide footbed along with the open toe design of this foot injury boot also optimizes the orthotic for post bunion surgery use . These features also improve the breathability of the foot boot for fracture care. The liner of the boot for a sprained foot or ankle is made of a deluxe foam material that is soft against the skin as well as flexible. This lightweight material can stand up to wear. This along with the rough polymer struts makes it a durable broken foot walking boot.   Medical Boot for Broken Foot, Bunion or Ulcer Care A stress fracture is a common overuse injury among those who participate in sports. These tiny cracks in the bone are especially prevalent in sports such as: Tennis Track and field Basketball Gymnastics Another risk factor for stress fractures can be wearing shoes with poor support (think high heels) due to the uneven weight bearing they cause and the lack of support or shock absorption they supply. Osteoporosis or other diseases that weaken the bone can also make one prone to stress fractures. The most important component of stress fracture treatment is rest from the activity that caused the fracture in the first place or any other activities that cause pain. Wearing a lightweight walking cast boot for broken foot bones like this can help give the foot a rest, allowing the stress fracture to heal. Wearing broken foot boots will also help protect against further damage. Elevating the leg and applying ice can also help with the pain. This stress fracture boot works well with foot or ankle sprains  as well, since treatment is quite similar to that for small breaks to the bones of the foot. In some cases, this foot immobilizer boot may also help with a break to the ankle, though a doctor can give you a better gauge as to whether a high-top walking boot would be a better solution.  The wide footbed of this low boot brace makes it a favorite for the treatment of bunions . The abnormal bony bump that can form in the joint area at the base of one’s big or little toe (the latter is known as a bunionette or a tailor’s bunion) can develop as a result of wearing shoes that fit too tightly or that force uneven weight bearing. Bunions can also be the result of an inherited structural defect or certain medical conditions, like arthritis. Wearing roomy shoes or this BraceAbility walking boot that allows extra space for the toes is a common bunion treatment . While this does not address the underlying problem, it does provide relief by allowing painful inflammation to subside. Shoe inserts can also reduce discomfort stemming from bunions, as can taping the foot in a “normal” position. In some instances, surgery known as a bunionectomy may be needed to relieve discomfort stemming from bunions. In such instances, this post-surgical soft shoe for broken foot care can be quite helpful. One may need to use crutches if a doctor recommends a period of limited or non-weight bearing. This walking boot for foot fracture care can also double as an orthotic for dealing with foot ulcers. Wearing this foot injury walking boot reduces pressure on the foot, allowing the open sore known as an ulcer to heal. Ulcers can stem from diabetes or other conditions that cause poor circulation. Ulcers can be quite problematic if they become infected. Therefore, it is important to see a doctor if one develops an ulcer. Besides wearing a foot orthotic for plantar ulcers, treatment may also involve trimming away any diseased tissue, taking antibiotics and wearing a special dressing.  BraceAbility Medical Foot Boot Details What kind of boot do you wear after suffering a broken foot bone? Well most would say they want a walking boot for a broken foot bone that protects and immobilizes the foot in a way that is as comfortable as possible. Where can you get such a medical boot? Look no further…  Following are more details about this support boot for a broken foot and more; Wide footbed of this cam boot for broken foot care allows for swelling and bunion treatment Wide footbed and open-toe design of these broken foot boots makes them more breathable and comfortable Arching rocker design promotes a smooth, energy-conserving gait, making this an ideal walking boot for a broken foot Durable polymer shell of this boot for a broken foot protects and supports the foot Polymer upright struts are molded and contoured to the leg Medical boots for broken foot treatment can also help with diabetic ulcers or after bunion surgery Broken foot boot has low-profile and lightweight design Short boot for broken foot is 11" tall Deluxe foam liner makes this a soft boot for broken foot care There is an extra broken foot Velcro boot strap at the ankle for added padding Closures are Velcro in this boot for broken foot, for easy adjustment and application Color: Black Surgical Walker Boot There are a number of injuries that require immobilization, protection and/or compression of the ankle or foot to heal, ranging from a broken toe to a stable stress fracture at the ankle to a plantar diabetic ulcer to the recovery period after a bunion removal. In all these scenarios, this BraceAbility pneumatic toe fracture boot fits the bill.  Functionally speaking, this lightweight and low-profile walker boot has adjustable air cells that provide compression as well as support. The outer part of this brace consists of durable, polymer-molded upright struts that conform to the shape of one’s legs. The arching rocker design of the support encourages a smooth, natural gait that is more efficient than an awkward limp or an outward swing of the leg. This is also beneficial toward making a speedy recovery. The soft liner of this bunion surgery boot acts as an effective buffer between the outer shell and the foot and ankle. It also leaves the toe area open, improving the breathability of the support. There is also a strap at the ankle that provides additional padding. Broken Toe Boot with a Number of Uses When dealing with a broken toe or a stress fracture injury, treatment is dependent upon what sort of break occurs. If it is a fracture where everything is in place, treatment of the stress fracture or toe break might simply involve a period of immobilization and pain management. For a toe, immobilization might involve “buddy taping” the injured one to a healthy toe and/or wearing a stiff bottomed foot support, such as this walking boot for foot injuries. In instances where the break or stress fracture is less stable and includes displaced bone fragments, surgery may be necessary. Following surgery, one might have to wear a cast and/or a post-operative boot. Again, this BraceAbility boot is an option as are other post-operative foot supports offered by the company. Its wide footbed and open toe area make this particular walker boot an appealing choice for toe injuries in specific. These roomy features also make it a popular walker boot after bunion surgery. Most bunions can be repaired without surgery by switching to shoes that fit properly and using orthotics such as a bunion regulator. But in some instances, this is not enough to address discomfort stemming from bunions and surgery may be warranted. After surgery, one will likely spend time in a cast, walking brace or special shoes, depending upon the extent of the repair and the individual. Limited or no weight bearing may be required for a limited period.   A lightweight walker boot is also helpful from the standpoint that it can reduce pressure on the foot when it comes to treating a diabetic ulcer on the foot. The wide footbed of the pneumatic support is also well suited for this condition as it allows space for bandages.  Special Features of Bunion Surgery Boot This pneumatic boot has a number of features that make it a popular choice for a variety of minor injuries to the foot or ankle. These selling points include:  Adjustable air cells for customized compression and stability Arching rocker bottom Lightweight material Low-profile fit Wide footbed Ankle strap for additional padding 618802151477 7661304741941 new 44.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10a1401-braceability-short-air-medical-walking-boot_grande.jpg?v=1527627433 641061980513 BraceAbility 10A1401L Walker Boots LUS Bariatric Surgery Abdominal Binder after Tummy Tuck, Gastric Bypass & Liposuction http://www.braceability.com/products/tummy-tuck-abdominal-binder?variant=7672006869045 Bariatric Surgery Abdominal Binder after Tummy Tuck, Gastric Bypass & Liposuction XL Why Is This The Best Post-Bariatric Surgery Binder? Wearing a stomach binder can help tremendously after enduring a stomach surgery to lose weight. The support and level of compression this waist binder provides not only helps with discomfort, but can reduce swelling, help the incision site, and even hold in your hanging skin after surgery. This tummy support has numerous features that make it both a great and affordable option to buy after a bariatric surgery. Comfortable and lightweight design This tummy tuck binder is a premium panel elastic band, making it comfortable against your skin. The medical binder for weight loss is also low-profile, allowing you to wear it discreetly beneath or over your shirt and clothes, depending on your preference. It also comes in a neutral white color. Designed specifically for those considered obese This plus size abdominal belt comes in sizes ranging from XL all the way up to 4XL, fitting body circumferences from 32" to 100". This size variety helps individuals find the best fit for their body shape and size! The many different options also make it easy to order a smaller size once you’ve lost the extra weight in your stomach after your surgery. Easy application To secure the back brace, you simply attach the Velcro closures in front of your abdomen to your desired compression level. For those suffering from arthritis, these straps are easy to grab and apply. Stitching on the back prevents rolling The stitching located on the back of the brace helps prevent it from rolling over or bunching up. Great after a wide variety of surgeries This tummy binder for bariatric procedures can be worn after liposuction, gastric bypass surgery, gastric sleeve surgery, lap band surgery, and many other weight loss procedures. You can also wear this binder for abdominal strains or lower back pain related to obesity . Looking for another plus size brace? At BraceAbility, we have an extra large variety of bariatric braces for every injury or condition. How Does This Abdominal Binder After Weight Loss Surgery Help Me Recover From… A Tummy Tuck or Abdominoplasty Recovery? Receiving a tummy tuck, otherwise known as abdominoplasty surgery helps remove the extra fat and skin you’re carrying around. This surgical procedure also helps smooth out your muscles, making them tougher and stronger. There are many individuals that receive this procedure, for example, women who have had a baby or after birth, those who have lost an extreme amount of weight causing your stomach to sag or hang after being obese, or after a hysterectomy.  Wearing a woman tummy tuck binder is a great tool to help your recovery process! Applying compression to your abdomen will help promote healing and reduce the swelling that you’ll experience after your surgery. This tummy tuck compression garment will also help prevent fluid from accumulating in your incision site, reducing the chance of infection. Gastric Bypass Surgery? Gastric bypass today remains a very popular surgical option for weight loss. Gastric bypass surgery basically shrinks and slims down the size of your stomach, which in turn helps control the amount of food you intake daily. It also helps bypass part of your digestive tract, lowering the absorption of food. Those who have tried to lose weight but can’t, those with a body mass index (or BMI) is 40 or greater, or those suffering from type 2 diabetes may qualify for this surgery. Unsure what your BMI currently is? Use this easy calculator to find out! Wearing a stomach binder after gastric bypass surgery has many benefits such as improving circulation in your abdominal region, hold your sagging skin and tissues in place, and promote good posture , limiting the stress placed on your stomach. Liposuction Recovery? (Love Handle Removal) Liposuction is another common procedure to help obese men and women lose weight. This procedure removes excess fat using a suction mechanism. Your doctor will suction around your stomach in the regions that have the fattest deposits and get rid of them. Liposuction helps reshape your body and help those problem areas.  A liposuction bandage for men’s belly assists an individual throughout the recovery and healing process. Applying a liposuction binder post procedure helps with the swelling, discomfort, and bruising that occurs. Typically, you should wear this compression bandage for a few weeks after your procedure, depending on your condition and how your body responded to liposuction. Lap-Band Surgery? Lap-band surgery involves placing a silicone band around the first part of your stomach. This surgery helps diminish your food intake, reducing the amount of food your body will need or want. Lap band surgery is a popular procedure because it’s considered minimally invasive and typically doesn’t have many side effects. Your doctor can also adjust your waistband after the procedure to help maximize the benefits.  Wearing a male abdominal support during lap band recovery can help support your stomach muscles and bring comfort to your abdomen. Abdominal binders after lap band surgery are great because it places compression on the location of where your doctor placed the port inside your stomach, reducing your swelling. Gastric Sleeve Surgery? Gastric sleeve surgery is often compared to lap band surgery as both procedures involve reducing the amount of food your stomach intakes. Gastric sleeve surgery involves removing part of your stomach, leaving only a portion of the top of your stomach. This is an irreversible procedure. An abdominal girdle after gastric sleeve surgery is beneficial as it helps reduce edema (or swelling) while also helping the scar tissue form properly. Compression garments after gastric sleeve support your stomach muscles while you are recovering and trying to get back to normal. Frequently Asked Questions About This Tummy Tuck Belt What conditions does this hernia belt treat? This obesity wrap can be worn to help support your abdomen after liposuction, gastric bypass, abdominoplasty, panniculectomy, tummy tuck, love handle removal, lap band surgery, belly lifts, gastric sleeve, and other obesity-related waist surgeries.  How do I know which size to get? Using a fabric tape measurer, measure the circumference around the widest part of your body where you plan to wear this binder. This extra-wide binder fits body circumference of 32” up to 100”. Refer to the sizing chart. How do I put on the brace? Unfold the binder and lay it flat to identify the top and bottom of the brace, the bottom side is slightly wider. Position the binder behind your body, making sure the Velcro strip is facing inward. Fold in the side without Velcro. Wrap the other side of the corset around your body and secure the Velcro closure. Re-adjust as needed for comfort. What is the height of the belt? This binder is 12” tall. Can I wash the brace? Yes, hand wash the belt in warm water with mild soap. Do not bleach. Lay flat to air-dry. Do not use high temperatures to wash or dry.  620823937077 7672006869045 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10w0102-bariatric-surgery-abdominal-binder-after-tummy-tuck_grande.jpg?v=1527624696 641427944302 BraceAbility 10W0102XL Abdominal (Plus Size) XLUS Bariatric Surgery Abdominal Binder after Tummy Tuck, Gastric Bypass & Liposuction http://www.braceability.com/products/tummy-tuck-abdominal-binder?variant=7672040030261 Bariatric Surgery Abdominal Binder after Tummy Tuck, Gastric Bypass & Liposuction 2XL Why Is This The Best Post-Bariatric Surgery Binder? Wearing a stomach binder can help tremendously after enduring a stomach surgery to lose weight. The support and level of compression this waist binder provides not only helps with discomfort, but can reduce swelling, help the incision site, and even hold in your hanging skin after surgery. This tummy support has numerous features that make it both a great and affordable option to buy after a bariatric surgery. Comfortable and lightweight design This tummy tuck binder is a premium panel elastic band, making it comfortable against your skin. The medical binder for weight loss is also low-profile, allowing you to wear it discreetly beneath or over your shirt and clothes, depending on your preference. It also comes in a neutral white color. Designed specifically for those considered obese This plus size abdominal belt comes in sizes ranging from XL all the way up to 4XL, fitting body circumferences from 32" to 100". This size variety helps individuals find the best fit for their body shape and size! The many different options also make it easy to order a smaller size once you’ve lost the extra weight in your stomach after your surgery. Easy application To secure the back brace, you simply attach the Velcro closures in front of your abdomen to your desired compression level. For those suffering from arthritis, these straps are easy to grab and apply. Stitching on the back prevents rolling The stitching located on the back of the brace helps prevent it from rolling over or bunching up. Great after a wide variety of surgeries This tummy binder for bariatric procedures can be worn after liposuction, gastric bypass surgery, gastric sleeve surgery, lap band surgery, and many other weight loss procedures. You can also wear this binder for abdominal strains or lower back pain related to obesity . Looking for another plus size brace? At BraceAbility, we have an extra large variety of bariatric braces for every injury or condition. How Does This Abdominal Binder After Weight Loss Surgery Help Me Recover From… A Tummy Tuck or Abdominoplasty Recovery? Receiving a tummy tuck, otherwise known as abdominoplasty surgery helps remove the extra fat and skin you’re carrying around. This surgical procedure also helps smooth out your muscles, making them tougher and stronger. There are many individuals that receive this procedure, for example, women who have had a baby or after birth, those who have lost an extreme amount of weight causing your stomach to sag or hang after being obese, or after a hysterectomy.  Wearing a woman tummy tuck binder is a great tool to help your recovery process! Applying compression to your abdomen will help promote healing and reduce the swelling that you’ll experience after your surgery. This tummy tuck compression garment will also help prevent fluid from accumulating in your incision site, reducing the chance of infection. Gastric Bypass Surgery? Gastric bypass today remains a very popular surgical option for weight loss. Gastric bypass surgery basically shrinks and slims down the size of your stomach, which in turn helps control the amount of food you intake daily. It also helps bypass part of your digestive tract, lowering the absorption of food. Those who have tried to lose weight but can’t, those with a body mass index (or BMI) is 40 or greater, or those suffering from type 2 diabetes may qualify for this surgery. Unsure what your BMI currently is? Use this easy calculator to find out! Wearing a stomach binder after gastric bypass surgery has many benefits such as improving circulation in your abdominal region, hold your sagging skin and tissues in place, and promote good posture , limiting the stress placed on your stomach. Liposuction Recovery? (Love Handle Removal) Liposuction is another common procedure to help obese men and women lose weight. This procedure removes excess fat using a suction mechanism. Your doctor will suction around your stomach in the regions that have the fattest deposits and get rid of them. Liposuction helps reshape your body and help those problem areas.  A liposuction bandage for men’s belly assists an individual throughout the recovery and healing process. Applying a liposuction binder post procedure helps with the swelling, discomfort, and bruising that occurs. Typically, you should wear this compression bandage for a few weeks after your procedure, depending on your condition and how your body responded to liposuction. Lap-Band Surgery? Lap-band surgery involves placing a silicone band around the first part of your stomach. This surgery helps diminish your food intake, reducing the amount of food your body will need or want. Lap band surgery is a popular procedure because it’s considered minimally invasive and typically doesn’t have many side effects. Your doctor can also adjust your waistband after the procedure to help maximize the benefits.  Wearing a male abdominal support during lap band recovery can help support your stomach muscles and bring comfort to your abdomen. Abdominal binders after lap band surgery are great because it places compression on the location of where your doctor placed the port inside your stomach, reducing your swelling. Gastric Sleeve Surgery? Gastric sleeve surgery is often compared to lap band surgery as both procedures involve reducing the amount of food your stomach intakes. Gastric sleeve surgery involves removing part of your stomach, leaving only a portion of the top of your stomach. This is an irreversible procedure. An abdominal girdle after gastric sleeve surgery is beneficial as it helps reduce edema (or swelling) while also helping the scar tissue form properly. Compression garments after gastric sleeve support your stomach muscles while you are recovering and trying to get back to normal. Frequently Asked Questions About This Tummy Tuck Belt What conditions does this hernia belt treat? This obesity wrap can be worn to help support your abdomen after liposuction, gastric bypass, abdominoplasty, panniculectomy, tummy tuck, love handle removal, lap band surgery, belly lifts, gastric sleeve, and other obesity-related waist surgeries.  How do I know which size to get? Using a fabric tape measurer, measure the circumference around the widest part of your body where you plan to wear this binder. This extra-wide binder fits body circumference of 32” up to 100”. Refer to the sizing chart. How do I put on the brace? Unfold the binder and lay it flat to identify the top and bottom of the brace, the bottom side is slightly wider. Position the binder behind your body, making sure the Velcro strip is facing inward. Fold in the side without Velcro. Wrap the other side of the corset around your body and secure the Velcro closure. Re-adjust as needed for comfort. What is the height of the belt? This binder is 12” tall. Can I wash the brace? Yes, hand wash the belt in warm water with mild soap. Do not bleach. Lay flat to air-dry. Do not use high temperatures to wash or dry.  620823937077 7672040030261 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10w0102-bariatric-surgery-abdominal-binder-after-tummy-tuck_grande.jpg?v=1527624696 641427944319 BraceAbility 10W0102XXL Abdominal (Plus Size) 2XLUS Bariatric Surgery Abdominal Binder after Tummy Tuck, Gastric Bypass & Liposuction http://www.braceability.com/products/tummy-tuck-abdominal-binder?variant=7672040063029 Bariatric Surgery Abdominal Binder after Tummy Tuck, Gastric Bypass & Liposuction 3XL Why Is This The Best Post-Bariatric Surgery Binder? Wearing a stomach binder can help tremendously after enduring a stomach surgery to lose weight. The support and level of compression this waist binder provides not only helps with discomfort, but can reduce swelling, help the incision site, and even hold in your hanging skin after surgery. This tummy support has numerous features that make it both a great and affordable option to buy after a bariatric surgery. Comfortable and lightweight design This tummy tuck binder is a premium panel elastic band, making it comfortable against your skin. The medical binder for weight loss is also low-profile, allowing you to wear it discreetly beneath or over your shirt and clothes, depending on your preference. It also comes in a neutral white color. Designed specifically for those considered obese This plus size abdominal belt comes in sizes ranging from XL all the way up to 4XL, fitting body circumferences from 32" to 100". This size variety helps individuals find the best fit for their body shape and size! The many different options also make it easy to order a smaller size once you’ve lost the extra weight in your stomach after your surgery. Easy application To secure the back brace, you simply attach the Velcro closures in front of your abdomen to your desired compression level. For those suffering from arthritis, these straps are easy to grab and apply. Stitching on the back prevents rolling The stitching located on the back of the brace helps prevent it from rolling over or bunching up. Great after a wide variety of surgeries This tummy binder for bariatric procedures can be worn after liposuction, gastric bypass surgery, gastric sleeve surgery, lap band surgery, and many other weight loss procedures. You can also wear this binder for abdominal strains or lower back pain related to obesity . Looking for another plus size brace? At BraceAbility, we have an extra large variety of bariatric braces for every injury or condition. How Does This Abdominal Binder After Weight Loss Surgery Help Me Recover From… A Tummy Tuck or Abdominoplasty Recovery? Receiving a tummy tuck, otherwise known as abdominoplasty surgery helps remove the extra fat and skin you’re carrying around. This surgical procedure also helps smooth out your muscles, making them tougher and stronger. There are many individuals that receive this procedure, for example, women who have had a baby or after birth, those who have lost an extreme amount of weight causing your stomach to sag or hang after being obese, or after a hysterectomy.  Wearing a woman tummy tuck binder is a great tool to help your recovery process! Applying compression to your abdomen will help promote healing and reduce the swelling that you’ll experience after your surgery. This tummy tuck compression garment will also help prevent fluid from accumulating in your incision site, reducing the chance of infection. Gastric Bypass Surgery? Gastric bypass today remains a very popular surgical option for weight loss. Gastric bypass surgery basically shrinks and slims down the size of your stomach, which in turn helps control the amount of food you intake daily. It also helps bypass part of your digestive tract, lowering the absorption of food. Those who have tried to lose weight but can’t, those with a body mass index (or BMI) is 40 or greater, or those suffering from type 2 diabetes may qualify for this surgery. Unsure what your BMI currently is? Use this easy calculator to find out! Wearing a stomach binder after gastric bypass surgery has many benefits such as improving circulation in your abdominal region, hold your sagging skin and tissues in place, and promote good posture , limiting the stress placed on your stomach. Liposuction Recovery? (Love Handle Removal) Liposuction is another common procedure to help obese men and women lose weight. This procedure removes excess fat using a suction mechanism. Your doctor will suction around your stomach in the regions that have the fattest deposits and get rid of them. Liposuction helps reshape your body and help those problem areas.  A liposuction bandage for men’s belly assists an individual throughout the recovery and healing process. Applying a liposuction binder post procedure helps with the swelling, discomfort, and bruising that occurs. Typically, you should wear this compression bandage for a few weeks after your procedure, depending on your condition and how your body responded to liposuction. Lap-Band Surgery? Lap-band surgery involves placing a silicone band around the first part of your stomach. This surgery helps diminish your food intake, reducing the amount of food your body will need or want. Lap band surgery is a popular procedure because it’s considered minimally invasive and typically doesn’t have many side effects. Your doctor can also adjust your waistband after the procedure to help maximize the benefits.  Wearing a male abdominal support during lap band recovery can help support your stomach muscles and bring comfort to your abdomen. Abdominal binders after lap band surgery are great because it places compression on the location of where your doctor placed the port inside your stomach, reducing your swelling. Gastric Sleeve Surgery? Gastric sleeve surgery is often compared to lap band surgery as both procedures involve reducing the amount of food your stomach intakes. Gastric sleeve surgery involves removing part of your stomach, leaving only a portion of the top of your stomach. This is an irreversible procedure. An abdominal girdle after gastric sleeve surgery is beneficial as it helps reduce edema (or swelling) while also helping the scar tissue form properly. Compression garments after gastric sleeve support your stomach muscles while you are recovering and trying to get back to normal. Frequently Asked Questions About This Tummy Tuck Belt What conditions does this hernia belt treat? This obesity wrap can be worn to help support your abdomen after liposuction, gastric bypass, abdominoplasty, panniculectomy, tummy tuck, love handle removal, lap band surgery, belly lifts, gastric sleeve, and other obesity-related waist surgeries.  How do I know which size to get? Using a fabric tape measurer, measure the circumference around the widest part of your body where you plan to wear this binder. This extra-wide binder fits body circumference of 32” up to 100”. Refer to the sizing chart. How do I put on the brace? Unfold the binder and lay it flat to identify the top and bottom of the brace, the bottom side is slightly wider. Position the binder behind your body, making sure the Velcro strip is facing inward. Fold in the side without Velcro. Wrap the other side of the corset around your body and secure the Velcro closure. Re-adjust as needed for comfort. What is the height of the belt? This binder is 12” tall. Can I wash the brace? Yes, hand wash the belt in warm water with mild soap. Do not bleach. Lay flat to air-dry. Do not use high temperatures to wash or dry.  620823937077 7672040063029 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10w0102-bariatric-surgery-abdominal-binder-after-tummy-tuck_grande.jpg?v=1527624696 641427944326 BraceAbility 10W0102XXXL Abdominal (Plus Size) 3XLUS Bariatric Surgery Abdominal Binder after Tummy Tuck, Gastric Bypass & Liposuction http://www.braceability.com/products/tummy-tuck-abdominal-binder?variant=7672040095797 Bariatric Surgery Abdominal Binder after Tummy Tuck, Gastric Bypass & Liposuction 4XL Why Is This The Best Post-Bariatric Surgery Binder? Wearing a stomach binder can help tremendously after enduring a stomach surgery to lose weight. The support and level of compression this waist binder provides not only helps with discomfort, but can reduce swelling, help the incision site, and even hold in your hanging skin after surgery. This tummy support has numerous features that make it both a great and affordable option to buy after a bariatric surgery. Comfortable and lightweight design This tummy tuck binder is a premium panel elastic band, making it comfortable against your skin. The medical binder for weight loss is also low-profile, allowing you to wear it discreetly beneath or over your shirt and clothes, depending on your preference. It also comes in a neutral white color. Designed specifically for those considered obese This plus size abdominal belt comes in sizes ranging from XL all the way up to 4XL, fitting body circumferences from 32" to 100". This size variety helps individuals find the best fit for their body shape and size! The many different options also make it easy to order a smaller size once you’ve lost the extra weight in your stomach after your surgery. Easy application To secure the back brace, you simply attach the Velcro closures in front of your abdomen to your desired compression level. For those suffering from arthritis, these straps are easy to grab and apply. Stitching on the back prevents rolling The stitching located on the back of the brace helps prevent it from rolling over or bunching up. Great after a wide variety of surgeries This tummy binder for bariatric procedures can be worn after liposuction, gastric bypass surgery, gastric sleeve surgery, lap band surgery, and many other weight loss procedures. You can also wear this binder for abdominal strains or lower back pain related to obesity . Looking for another plus size brace? At BraceAbility, we have an extra large variety of bariatric braces for every injury or condition. How Does This Abdominal Binder After Weight Loss Surgery Help Me Recover From… A Tummy Tuck or Abdominoplasty Recovery? Receiving a tummy tuck, otherwise known as abdominoplasty surgery helps remove the extra fat and skin you’re carrying around. This surgical procedure also helps smooth out your muscles, making them tougher and stronger. There are many individuals that receive this procedure, for example, women who have had a baby or after birth, those who have lost an extreme amount of weight causing your stomach to sag or hang after being obese, or after a hysterectomy.  Wearing a woman tummy tuck binder is a great tool to help your recovery process! Applying compression to your abdomen will help promote healing and reduce the swelling that you’ll experience after your surgery. This tummy tuck compression garment will also help prevent fluid from accumulating in your incision site, reducing the chance of infection. Gastric Bypass Surgery? Gastric bypass today remains a very popular surgical option for weight loss. Gastric bypass surgery basically shrinks and slims down the size of your stomach, which in turn helps control the amount of food you intake daily. It also helps bypass part of your digestive tract, lowering the absorption of food. Those who have tried to lose weight but can’t, those with a body mass index (or BMI) is 40 or greater, or those suffering from type 2 diabetes may qualify for this surgery. Unsure what your BMI currently is? Use this easy calculator to find out! Wearing a stomach binder after gastric bypass surgery has many benefits such as improving circulation in your abdominal region, hold your sagging skin and tissues in place, and promote good posture , limiting the stress placed on your stomach. Liposuction Recovery? (Love Handle Removal) Liposuction is another common procedure to help obese men and women lose weight. This procedure removes excess fat using a suction mechanism. Your doctor will suction around your stomach in the regions that have the fattest deposits and get rid of them. Liposuction helps reshape your body and help those problem areas.  A liposuction bandage for men’s belly assists an individual throughout the recovery and healing process. Applying a liposuction binder post procedure helps with the swelling, discomfort, and bruising that occurs. Typically, you should wear this compression bandage for a few weeks after your procedure, depending on your condition and how your body responded to liposuction. Lap-Band Surgery? Lap-band surgery involves placing a silicone band around the first part of your stomach. This surgery helps diminish your food intake, reducing the amount of food your body will need or want. Lap band surgery is a popular procedure because it’s considered minimally invasive and typically doesn’t have many side effects. Your doctor can also adjust your waistband after the procedure to help maximize the benefits.  Wearing a male abdominal support during lap band recovery can help support your stomach muscles and bring comfort to your abdomen. Abdominal binders after lap band surgery are great because it places compression on the location of where your doctor placed the port inside your stomach, reducing your swelling. Gastric Sleeve Surgery? Gastric sleeve surgery is often compared to lap band surgery as both procedures involve reducing the amount of food your stomach intakes. Gastric sleeve surgery involves removing part of your stomach, leaving only a portion of the top of your stomach. This is an irreversible procedure. An abdominal girdle after gastric sleeve surgery is beneficial as it helps reduce edema (or swelling) while also helping the scar tissue form properly. Compression garments after gastric sleeve support your stomach muscles while you are recovering and trying to get back to normal. Frequently Asked Questions About This Tummy Tuck Belt What conditions does this hernia belt treat? This obesity wrap can be worn to help support your abdomen after liposuction, gastric bypass, abdominoplasty, panniculectomy, tummy tuck, love handle removal, lap band surgery, belly lifts, gastric sleeve, and other obesity-related waist surgeries.  How do I know which size to get? Using a fabric tape measurer, measure the circumference around the widest part of your body where you plan to wear this binder. This extra-wide binder fits body circumference of 32” up to 100”. Refer to the sizing chart. How do I put on the brace? Unfold the binder and lay it flat to identify the top and bottom of the brace, the bottom side is slightly wider. Position the binder behind your body, making sure the Velcro strip is facing inward. Fold in the side without Velcro. Wrap the other side of the corset around your body and secure the Velcro closure. Re-adjust as needed for comfort. What is the height of the belt? This binder is 12” tall. Can I wash the brace? Yes, hand wash the belt in warm water with mild soap. Do not bleach. Lay flat to air-dry. Do not use high temperatures to wash or dry.  620823937077 7672040095797 new 34.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10w0102-bariatric-surgery-abdominal-binder-after-tummy-tuck_grande.jpg?v=1527624696 641427944333 BraceAbility 10W0102XXXXL Abdominal (Plus Size) 4XLUS Sleeping Stretch Boot for Plantar Fascia, Achilles Tendonitis & Heel Spur Treatment http://www.braceability.com/products/plantar-fasciitis-stretching-night-splint?variant=7677020373045 Sleeping Stretch Boot for Plantar Fascia, Achilles Tendonitis & Heel Spur Treatment S Ease Pain & Accelerate Healing: Sleeping Stretch Boot for Achilles Tendonitis Treatment Experiencing severe tenderness or sharp pain around your heel with your first steps in the morning? During the day, connective foot tissues, know as your plantar fascia and Achilles tendon, commonly develop microtears. Then, while you sleep, unknowingly pointing your toes, your foot begins to heal. So when you take your first steps in the morning, you instantly stretch out and retear these tissues, causing stabbing pains. Luckily, this versatile stretching splint is specifically designed to hold your foot at a 90-degree angle or less, allowing your foot to heal properly overnight to make for a more pleasant experience when you get out of bed. Supporting a neutral foot position, this soft orthopedic night splint reduces irritation and pain caused by foot conditions including: Plantar fasciitis Achilles tendonitis Heel Spurs Although these conditions might seem similar, they have different symptoms and causes. Below are the various symptoms and causes of each condition: Plantar Fasciitis : Pain and stiffness in the bottom of the heel, usually in the morning. Pain can inflame again during the day after prolonged activity or exercise. This condition can be from being plus size, having high arches or flat feet, or being a long distance runner. Achilles Tendonitis : Pain, swelling, tenderness in the back of your foot above your heel. This pain can be a result of overuse activity, increasing your physical activity too quickly, wearing the wrong shoes (high heels), having flat feet, or if your muscles are too tight. Heel Spurs: This condition often doesn’t have any symptoms. You may have chronic pain from walking, jogging, or running and inflammation may develop in the area. Heel spurs are from calcium deposits built up from the heel bone and can occur over many months. They are a result of strains on the foot muscles and ligaments. Wearing this boot at night also provides a stretch to tight calf muscles, preventing legs cramps, muscle spasms, and charley horses. Looking for a brace to wear during the day? Shop our plantar fasciitis day brace or daytime Achilles tendonitis support . Can This Night Splint Help Prevent Foot Drop in Bed? Although there are no products currently that can “cure” or "fix" drop foot, wearing this rigid bed shoe at night or while resting will help reduce the pains and symptoms associated with drop foot. Your doctor may also recommend physical therapy to strengthen your muscles or surgery to minimize harm to your nerves or transfer weight to healthier muscles. Unsure whether you have foot drop? Take this foot drop test to find out! 5 Reasons Why People Love This Plantar Fasciitis Brace for Sleeping Lightweight, Low-profile Fit This bedtime support brace has a low-profile and open design, keeping patients cool and dry for better quality sleep. Its lightweight fit makes it a more comfortable option compared to standard, plantar fasciitis boots. Soft Padded Lining The drawback to many braces for plantar fasciitis is that they can be confining, uncomfortable, and interfere with your sleep, which is counterproductive when it comes to healing. This splint is generously padded with a breathable foam and covered with an ultra soft fabric for optimal comfort. Removable for washing, the extra soft lining eliminates skin irritations, preventing blisters and abrasions, making our night splint much more comfortable than many rigid AFO alternatives for sleeping. Regardless of the comfortable padded lining, please understand that wearing a boot to sleep in will likely take some adjusting to. For at least the first week, some podiatrists discourage their patients from trying to sleep with it on. Instead, wear it while lounging. After you feel comfortable you can start wearing the boot at night and gradually increasing dorsiflexion stretch. Removable Foam Stretch Wedge Holding your ankle in gentle dorsiflexion, this splint keeps your foot at a 90° angle to your leg. For an even greater stretch, you can add the soft, foam dorsiwedge insert, which elevates your foot to better relieve inflammation. The wedge should be inserted under the padded liner beneath your toes. Customizable, dual tension straps from your toe to calf also provide increased dorsiflexion for optimal pain relief. Versatile Design Sized for both men and women, the comfortable night splint can be used on either your left or right foot, with or without a sock. The soft night boot is secured with three quick-release buckles and medical-grade Velcro. These wide and adjustable wrap-around straps allow you to adjust the tightness of the brace to your own specifications. This device is easy to put on and strap up in bed or while sitting down, making your nightly routine quick and easy. Hard Shell & Non-Slip Tread Its durable exterior shell provides additional support to ensure proper foot positioning throughout the night, making this boot one of the best remedies for heel pain. The slip-resistant sole is suitable for walking short distances without removing, such as trips to the bathroom in the middle of the night. However, we strongly recommend removing the splint if you plan on walking further than a few steps around the house. Frequently Asked Questions About This Achilles Tendon Stretcher What conditions / injuries does this ankle brace treat? This nighttime boot is the perfect foot support for many different conditions including plantar fasciitis, Achilles tendonitis, heel spurs, and foot drop. How does it work? This splint for foot drop and plantar fasciitis helps prevent the painful tearing that you endure after you wake up and take your first steps. It holds your foot at a 90-degree angle or less while you sleep, gently stretching your plantar fascia, Achilles tendon, and calf muscle. When should I wear it? This plantar fasciitis stretching boot is meant to be worn while sleeping or kicking your feet back on the couch. It is not intended to be worn while walking long distances. Please remove this brace if you plan on walking further than a few steps around the house. What is it made of? This latex-free night splint is made of polyethylene, nylon, spandex, polyester, polyurethane, EVA, and polyoxymethylene. Who can wear this boot? Men and women of all ages can benefit from the stretch provided by this nighttime boot. What size should I buy? Please refer to our sizing chart (the second image above) to select your size. How do I put it on? Unhook buckles on 3 straps across front. With splint resting on floor, place foot into splint, sliding heel snugly against back. Place optional wedge underneath liner for extra stretch. Attach bottom strap and adjust until snug. Continue by attaching remaining 2 straps, adjusting for tightness. Over time, gradually adjust side, dorsiflexion straps for greater stretch. How tall is this brace? About 15 inches tall. Washing Instructions: Remove liner from boot. Hand wash liner in warm water with mild soap. Allow liner to air dry completely before reapplying. Wipe plastic shell with a damp cloth. Other features: Can be worn on your right or left foot, with or without socks Includes optional, soft foam wedge Highly adjustable, 3-strap system for a secure fit Color: Black. 621509312565 7677020373045 new 27.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10a0102-nighttime-stretching-plantar-fasciitis-boot_grande.jpg?v=1536245518 641427943268 BraceAbility 10A0102S Foot - Plantar Fasciitis SUS Sleeping Stretch Boot for Plantar Fascia, Achilles Tendonitis & Heel Spur Treatment http://www.braceability.com/products/plantar-fasciitis-stretching-night-splint?variant=7677033938997 Sleeping Stretch Boot for Plantar Fascia, Achilles Tendonitis & Heel Spur Treatment M Ease Pain & Accelerate Healing: Sleeping Stretch Boot for Achilles Tendonitis Treatment Experiencing severe tenderness or sharp pain around your heel with your first steps in the morning? During the day, connective foot tissues, know as your plantar fascia and Achilles tendon, commonly develop microtears. Then, while you sleep, unknowingly pointing your toes, your foot begins to heal. So when you take your first steps in the morning, you instantly stretch out and retear these tissues, causing stabbing pains. Luckily, this versatile stretching splint is specifically designed to hold your foot at a 90-degree angle or less, allowing your foot to heal properly overnight to make for a more pleasant experience when you get out of bed. Supporting a neutral foot position, this soft orthopedic night splint reduces irritation and pain caused by foot conditions including: Plantar fasciitis Achilles tendonitis Heel Spurs Although these conditions might seem similar, they have different symptoms and causes. Below are the various symptoms and causes of each condition: Plantar Fasciitis : Pain and stiffness in the bottom of the heel, usually in the morning. Pain can inflame again during the day after prolonged activity or exercise. This condition can be from being plus size, having high arches or flat feet, or being a long distance runner. Achilles Tendonitis : Pain, swelling, tenderness in the back of your foot above your heel. This pain can be a result of overuse activity, increasing your physical activity too quickly, wearing the wrong shoes (high heels), having flat feet, or if your muscles are too tight. Heel Spurs: This condition often doesn’t have any symptoms. You may have chronic pain from walking, jogging, or running and inflammation may develop in the area. Heel spurs are from calcium deposits built up from the heel bone and can occur over many months. They are a result of strains on the foot muscles and ligaments. Wearing this boot at night also provides a stretch to tight calf muscles, preventing legs cramps, muscle spasms, and charley horses. Looking for a brace to wear during the day? Shop our plantar fasciitis day brace or daytime Achilles tendonitis support . Can This Night Splint Help Prevent Foot Drop in Bed? Although there are no products currently that can “cure” or "fix" drop foot, wearing this rigid bed shoe at night or while resting will help reduce the pains and symptoms associated with drop foot. Your doctor may also recommend physical therapy to strengthen your muscles or surgery to minimize harm to your nerves or transfer weight to healthier muscles. Unsure whether you have foot drop? Take this foot drop test to find out! 5 Reasons Why People Love This Plantar Fasciitis Brace for Sleeping Lightweight, Low-profile Fit This bedtime support brace has a low-profile and open design, keeping patients cool and dry for better quality sleep. Its lightweight fit makes it a more comfortable option compared to standard, plantar fasciitis boots. Soft Padded Lining The drawback to many braces for plantar fasciitis is that they can be confining, uncomfortable, and interfere with your sleep, which is counterproductive when it comes to healing. This splint is generously padded with a breathable foam and covered with an ultra soft fabric for optimal comfort. Removable for washing, the extra soft lining eliminates skin irritations, preventing blisters and abrasions, making our night splint much more comfortable than many rigid AFO alternatives for sleeping. Regardless of the comfortable padded lining, please understand that wearing a boot to sleep in will likely take some adjusting to. For at least the first week, some podiatrists discourage their patients from trying to sleep with it on. Instead, wear it while lounging. After you feel comfortable you can start wearing the boot at night and gradually increasing dorsiflexion stretch. Removable Foam Stretch Wedge Holding your ankle in gentle dorsiflexion, this splint keeps your foot at a 90° angle to your leg. For an even greater stretch, you can add the soft, foam dorsiwedge insert, which elevates your foot to better relieve inflammation. The wedge should be inserted under the padded liner beneath your toes. Customizable, dual tension straps from your toe to calf also provide increased dorsiflexion for optimal pain relief. Versatile Design Sized for both men and women, the comfortable night splint can be used on either your left or right foot, with or without a sock. The soft night boot is secured with three quick-release buckles and medical-grade Velcro. These wide and adjustable wrap-around straps allow you to adjust the tightness of the brace to your own specifications. This device is easy to put on and strap up in bed or while sitting down, making your nightly routine quick and easy. Hard Shell & Non-Slip Tread Its durable exterior shell provides additional support to ensure proper foot positioning throughout the night, making this boot one of the best remedies for heel pain. The slip-resistant sole is suitable for walking short distances without removing, such as trips to the bathroom in the middle of the night. However, we strongly recommend removing the splint if you plan on walking further than a few steps around the house. Frequently Asked Questions About This Achilles Tendon Stretcher What conditions / injuries does this ankle brace treat? This nighttime boot is the perfect foot support for many different conditions including plantar fasciitis, Achilles tendonitis, heel spurs, and foot drop. How does it work? This splint for foot drop and plantar fasciitis helps prevent the painful tearing that you endure after you wake up and take your first steps. It holds your foot at a 90-degree angle or less while you sleep, gently stretching your plantar fascia, Achilles tendon, and calf muscle. When should I wear it? This plantar fasciitis stretching boot is meant to be worn while sleeping or kicking your feet back on the couch. It is not intended to be worn while walking long distances. Please remove this brace if you plan on walking further than a few steps around the house. What is it made of? This latex-free night splint is made of polyethylene, nylon, spandex, polyester, polyurethane, EVA, and polyoxymethylene. Who can wear this boot? Men and women of all ages can benefit from the stretch provided by this nighttime boot. What size should I buy? Please refer to our sizing chart (the second image above) to select your size. How do I put it on? Unhook buckles on 3 straps across front. With splint resting on floor, place foot into splint, sliding heel snugly against back. Place optional wedge underneath liner for extra stretch. Attach bottom strap and adjust until snug. Continue by attaching remaining 2 straps, adjusting for tightness. Over time, gradually adjust side, dorsiflexion straps for greater stretch. How tall is this brace? About 15 inches tall. Washing Instructions: Remove liner from boot. Hand wash liner in warm water with mild soap. Allow liner to air dry completely before reapplying. Wipe plastic shell with a damp cloth. Other features: Can be worn on your right or left foot, with or without socks Includes optional, soft foam wedge Highly adjustable, 3-strap system for a secure fit Color: Black. 621509312565 7677033938997 new 27.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10a0102-nighttime-stretching-plantar-fasciitis-boot_grande.jpg?v=1536245518 641427943275 BraceAbility 10A0102M Foot - Plantar Fasciitis MUS Sleeping Stretch Boot for Plantar Fascia, Achilles Tendonitis & Heel Spur Treatment http://www.braceability.com/products/plantar-fasciitis-stretching-night-splint?variant=7677033971765 Sleeping Stretch Boot for Plantar Fascia, Achilles Tendonitis & Heel Spur Treatment L Ease Pain & Accelerate Healing: Sleeping Stretch Boot for Achilles Tendonitis Treatment Experiencing severe tenderness or sharp pain around your heel with your first steps in the morning? During the day, connective foot tissues, know as your plantar fascia and Achilles tendon, commonly develop microtears. Then, while you sleep, unknowingly pointing your toes, your foot begins to heal. So when you take your first steps in the morning, you instantly stretch out and retear these tissues, causing stabbing pains. Luckily, this versatile stretching splint is specifically designed to hold your foot at a 90-degree angle or less, allowing your foot to heal properly overnight to make for a more pleasant experience when you get out of bed. Supporting a neutral foot position, this soft orthopedic night splint reduces irritation and pain caused by foot conditions including: Plantar fasciitis Achilles tendonitis Heel Spurs Although these conditions might seem similar, they have different symptoms and causes. Below are the various symptoms and causes of each condition: Plantar Fasciitis : Pain and stiffness in the bottom of the heel, usually in the morning. Pain can inflame again during the day after prolonged activity or exercise. This condition can be from being plus size, having high arches or flat feet, or being a long distance runner. Achilles Tendonitis : Pain, swelling, tenderness in the back of your foot above your heel. This pain can be a result of overuse activity, increasing your physical activity too quickly, wearing the wrong shoes (high heels), having flat feet, or if your muscles are too tight. Heel Spurs: This condition often doesn’t have any symptoms. You may have chronic pain from walking, jogging, or running and inflammation may develop in the area. Heel spurs are from calcium deposits built up from the heel bone and can occur over many months. They are a result of strains on the foot muscles and ligaments. Wearing this boot at night also provides a stretch to tight calf muscles, preventing legs cramps, muscle spasms, and charley horses. Looking for a brace to wear during the day? Shop our plantar fasciitis day brace or daytime Achilles tendonitis support . Can This Night Splint Help Prevent Foot Drop in Bed? Although there are no products currently that can “cure” or "fix" drop foot, wearing this rigid bed shoe at night or while resting will help reduce the pains and symptoms associated with drop foot. Your doctor may also recommend physical therapy to strengthen your muscles or surgery to minimize harm to your nerves or transfer weight to healthier muscles. Unsure whether you have foot drop? Take this foot drop test to find out! 5 Reasons Why People Love This Plantar Fasciitis Brace for Sleeping Lightweight, Low-profile Fit This bedtime support brace has a low-profile and open design, keeping patients cool and dry for better quality sleep. Its lightweight fit makes it a more comfortable option compared to standard, plantar fasciitis boots. Soft Padded Lining The drawback to many braces for plantar fasciitis is that they can be confining, uncomfortable, and interfere with your sleep, which is counterproductive when it comes to healing. This splint is generously padded with a breathable foam and covered with an ultra soft fabric for optimal comfort. Removable for washing, the extra soft lining eliminates skin irritations, preventing blisters and abrasions, making our night splint much more comfortable than many rigid AFO alternatives for sleeping. Regardless of the comfortable padded lining, please understand that wearing a boot to sleep in will likely take some adjusting to. For at least the first week, some podiatrists discourage their patients from trying to sleep with it on. Instead, wear it while lounging. After you feel comfortable you can start wearing the boot at night and gradually increasing dorsiflexion stretch. Removable Foam Stretch Wedge Holding your ankle in gentle dorsiflexion, this splint keeps your foot at a 90° angle to your leg. For an even greater stretch, you can add the soft, foam dorsiwedge insert, which elevates your foot to better relieve inflammation. The wedge should be inserted under the padded liner beneath your toes. Customizable, dual tension straps from your toe to calf also provide increased dorsiflexion for optimal pain relief. Versatile Design Sized for both men and women, the comfortable night splint can be used on either your left or right foot, with or without a sock. The soft night boot is secured with three quick-release buckles and medical-grade Velcro. These wide and adjustable wrap-around straps allow you to adjust the tightness of the brace to your own specifications. This device is easy to put on and strap up in bed or while sitting down, making your nightly routine quick and easy. Hard Shell & Non-Slip Tread Its durable exterior shell provides additional support to ensure proper foot positioning throughout the night, making this boot one of the best remedies for heel pain. The slip-resistant sole is suitable for walking short distances without removing, such as trips to the bathroom in the middle of the night. However, we strongly recommend removing the splint if you plan on walking further than a few steps around the house. Frequently Asked Questions About This Achilles Tendon Stretcher What conditions / injuries does this ankle brace treat? This nighttime boot is the perfect foot support for many different conditions including plantar fasciitis, Achilles tendonitis, heel spurs, and foot drop. How does it work? This splint for foot drop and plantar fasciitis helps prevent the painful tearing that you endure after you wake up and take your first steps. It holds your foot at a 90-degree angle or less while you sleep, gently stretching your plantar fascia, Achilles tendon, and calf muscle. When should I wear it? This plantar fasciitis stretching boot is meant to be worn while sleeping or kicking your feet back on the couch. It is not intended to be worn while walking long distances. Please remove this brace if you plan on walking further than a few steps around the house. What is it made of? This latex-free night splint is made of polyethylene, nylon, spandex, polyester, polyurethane, EVA, and polyoxymethylene. Who can wear this boot? Men and women of all ages can benefit from the stretch provided by this nighttime boot. What size should I buy? Please refer to our sizing chart (the second image above) to select your size. How do I put it on? Unhook buckles on 3 straps across front. With splint resting on floor, place foot into splint, sliding heel snugly against back. Place optional wedge underneath liner for extra stretch. Attach bottom strap and adjust until snug. Continue by attaching remaining 2 straps, adjusting for tightness. Over time, gradually adjust side, dorsiflexion straps for greater stretch. How tall is this brace? About 15 inches tall. Washing Instructions: Remove liner from boot. Hand wash liner in warm water with mild soap. Allow liner to air dry completely before reapplying. Wipe plastic shell with a damp cloth. Other features: Can be worn on your right or left foot, with or without socks Includes optional, soft foam wedge Highly adjustable, 3-strap system for a secure fit Color: Black. 621509312565 7677033971765 new 27.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10a0102-nighttime-stretching-plantar-fasciitis-boot_grande.jpg?v=1536245518 641427943282 BraceAbility 10A0102L Foot - Plantar Fasciitis LUS Bariatric Low Back Obesity Support Belt Girdle for Hips up to 69" http://www.braceability.com/products/bariatric-back-support-for-obesity?variant=7609908166709 Bariatric Low Back Obesity Support Belt Girdle for Hips up to 69" XL Bariatric Back Support Belt This plus-size back belt is a great brace for many different conditions and injuries. For example, it helps relieve moderate pain in the lower back, lumbar muscle weakness, and sprains or strains to your back. In addition, this bariatric belt is very beneficial for those who may be overweight or are considered an obese individual. Read more below about the different features, conditions it helps treat, and why it’s the best brace for you! Features of This Supportive Plus Size Lower Back Belt Crisscross Overlay The crisscross overlay of this plus-size back belt help hold the back in proper position and it covers a wide expanse of the back, providing support and stability to lessen the strain on the tissues of the back. An additional benefit of these straps is that they apply compression to your abdominal region, which can be helpful for reducing any painful inflammation or swelling. The double-pull elastic tension straps are also helpful for getting the ideal amount of compression and support. Comfortable, Elastic Material This big plus-size back support is composed of premium-quality elastic that hugs the body so that it fits well under your clothes or garments while permitting motion. But don’t fear—the flexible anti-roll stays prevent the XXXL back support from bunching up and slipping out of position. The obesity belt can be worn during the day as well as at night when you’re sleeping, depending on your condition. This bariatric back brace comes in a discreet white color, also making it easy to wear beneath clothes. Easily Applied & Adjusted The simple contact closure on the XXL back brace makes it easy for someone struggling with back pain to apply and adjust the back support for large people. Since the band closes in the front of your stomach, you don’t have to worry about twisting or turning which could further injure your back. The Velcro closures are also easy to grab, especially for those who may have arthritis of the hands. It also comes with four plastic stays located on the back side of the brace that you can remove if you wish to decrease the amount of support that is provided by the brace. For those who are trying to wean their dependency of wearing such belts for big and tall individuals, this component is essential in helping you do so. Highly Versatile In comparison to all the many products out there for sale, this brace not only treats numerous different conditions but is great for all shapes and sizes of individuals. This core support belt works on both men and women and comes in sizes xl, 2xl, 3xl, and 4xl. You no longer have to worry about struggling to find the right lower back girdle that fits just right. Aside from this brace having an array of sizes, you can wear it anytime of the day. If you’re someone who enjoys moderate physical activity, you can keep the corset brace on your waist the whole time giving you maximum relief. Since it is lightweight and discreet, you can wear it at work, home, standing all day, etc. Why Do I Need This Bariatric Back Belt For My Back Pain? Low back pain is one of the most debilitating and expensive conditions in America. According to ABC News, 80% of Americans will suffer back pain at some point in their lives and this condition costs more than $90 billion each year in terms of lost productivity and days of work.  There are a number of things to blame for chronic or acute lumbar back pain. For example, some include general degeneration of the discs, vertebrae, joints, a sedentary lifestyle, poor posture (especially when sitting), improper lifting form, wearing shoes with overly high heels or carrying a heavy purse can all contribute to lower back pain. I Have Muscle Strain, Sprain, or Weakness. Will This Brace Help? Yes! This xl or 4x brace is great for those who are suffering from a muscle strain, sprain, or weakness in their back. Since all of these are very likely to recur, it’s extremely essential to provide your back with the support it needs during the recovery process.  Back muscle strains, sprains, and pulls are caused by many different factors. Some that may make you more prone to such injuries include lifting heavy objects frequently, partaking in high contact sports, having poor posture , and being overweight. Wearing extra large supports such as this one can help tremendously with your pain. By wearing lumbosacral obesity braces, the pressure or strain that otherwise would be placed on your spine will be relieved. Girdles like this one for back pain, help apply that compression you need to heal your strain, sprain, or muscle pull.  In addition to those conditions, this extra wide back brace can help you get the relief you need if you’re suffering from degenerative disc disease , herniated discs , and bulging discs . If I’m Oversized, Does This Discreet Brace Fully Support Me? This brace definitely helps those who are heavy or xlarge as the many Velcro closures completely support your belly. This men’s back brace allows you to completely customize the level of compression you’d like. You can adjust it throughout the day depending on what you’re doing or you can tighten it to increase the level of support. If you are overweight, this plus-size back brace for the low back can enable you to partake in a more active lifestyle by supporting the lumbar back and applying compression to reduce inflammation that is often the source of pain.  There have been many studies that have shown a correlation between being overweight and lower back pain. The excess weight or fat that is being carried around by a larger individual directly results how much pressure is placed on your spine. The more the weight, the more the strain or work your spine has to endure to keep your body upright. This ultimately leads those individuals prone to many different back conditions from obesity , including moderate or mild back pain. You can read more about how obesity is related to back issues and injuries here .  Do you think you’re considered obese? Take this quick BMI test to figure out. Frequently Asked Questions About The Plus Size Back Support How do I know which size to get? Using a fabric tape measure, measure the circumference around the widest part of your buttocks. This brace fits body circumference of 46” up to 69”  How do I adjust the brace? Grab the double-pull tension straps (located on the outside of the brace) and adjust them to make it either tighter or looser, then re-apply the Velcro closures. How do I put on the brace? Unhook all Velcro closures and lay the brace flat on the floor to identify the top side. The top has openings, which allow you to remove the plastic stays. Next, position the brace behind your body so it’s centered on your back with the bottom of the brace sitting at the widest part of your body. Fold the left side of the brace towards the middle of your stomach. Do the same with the right side but pull firmly and secure the Velcro closure. Repeat this process with the double-pull tension straps for your desired compression level. Can I wash the brace? To wash the brace, first, remove stays and close all Velcro closures. Hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Do not use bleach. The brace should be air-dried. Do not use high temperatures to wash or dry. Can I sleep in the brace? Thanks to the lightweight, latex-free material make it possible for you to sleep comfortably in this brace. It’s advised to speak with a medical professional before wearing a brace for an extended amount of time. What conditions does it help treat? This belly support band can help treat moderate lower back pain, muscle strains, tears, or pulls, bulging discs, herniated discs, and hip pain. It can also help those who are obese individuals suffering from excess pain in their lumbar back. 609050034229 7609908166709 new 39.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03b0201-logo-baratric-low-back-support-belt-main_grande.jpg?v=1527620268 641061975489 BraceAbility 03B0201XL Back Braces (Plus Size) XLUS Bariatric Low Back Obesity Support Belt Girdle for Hips up to 69" http://www.braceability.com/products/bariatric-back-support-for-obesity?variant=7609908199477 Bariatric Low Back Obesity Support Belt Girdle for Hips up to 69" 2XL Bariatric Back Support Belt This plus-size back belt is a great brace for many different conditions and injuries. For example, it helps relieve moderate pain in the lower back, lumbar muscle weakness, and sprains or strains to your back. In addition, this bariatric belt is very beneficial for those who may be overweight or are considered an obese individual. Read more below about the different features, conditions it helps treat, and why it’s the best brace for you! Features of This Supportive Plus Size Lower Back Belt Crisscross Overlay The crisscross overlay of this plus-size back belt help hold the back in proper position and it covers a wide expanse of the back, providing support and stability to lessen the strain on the tissues of the back. An additional benefit of these straps is that they apply compression to your abdominal region, which can be helpful for reducing any painful inflammation or swelling. The double-pull elastic tension straps are also helpful for getting the ideal amount of compression and support. Comfortable, Elastic Material This big plus-size back support is composed of premium-quality elastic that hugs the body so that it fits well under your clothes or garments while permitting motion. But don’t fear—the flexible anti-roll stays prevent the XXXL back support from bunching up and slipping out of position. The obesity belt can be worn during the day as well as at night when you’re sleeping, depending on your condition. This bariatric back brace comes in a discreet white color, also making it easy to wear beneath clothes. Easily Applied & Adjusted The simple contact closure on the XXL back brace makes it easy for someone struggling with back pain to apply and adjust the back support for large people. Since the band closes in the front of your stomach, you don’t have to worry about twisting or turning which could further injure your back. The Velcro closures are also easy to grab, especially for those who may have arthritis of the hands. It also comes with four plastic stays located on the back side of the brace that you can remove if you wish to decrease the amount of support that is provided by the brace. For those who are trying to wean their dependency of wearing such belts for big and tall individuals, this component is essential in helping you do so. Highly Versatile In comparison to all the many products out there for sale, this brace not only treats numerous different conditions but is great for all shapes and sizes of individuals. This core support belt works on both men and women and comes in sizes xl, 2xl, 3xl, and 4xl. You no longer have to worry about struggling to find the right lower back girdle that fits just right. Aside from this brace having an array of sizes, you can wear it anytime of the day. If you’re someone who enjoys moderate physical activity, you can keep the corset brace on your waist the whole time giving you maximum relief. Since it is lightweight and discreet, you can wear it at work, home, standing all day, etc. Why Do I Need This Bariatric Back Belt For My Back Pain? Low back pain is one of the most debilitating and expensive conditions in America. According to ABC News, 80% of Americans will suffer back pain at some point in their lives and this condition costs more than $90 billion each year in terms of lost productivity and days of work.  There are a number of things to blame for chronic or acute lumbar back pain. For example, some include general degeneration of the discs, vertebrae, joints, a sedentary lifestyle, poor posture (especially when sitting), improper lifting form, wearing shoes with overly high heels or carrying a heavy purse can all contribute to lower back pain. I Have Muscle Strain, Sprain, or Weakness. Will This Brace Help? Yes! This xl or 4x brace is great for those who are suffering from a muscle strain, sprain, or weakness in their back. Since all of these are very likely to recur, it’s extremely essential to provide your back with the support it needs during the recovery process.  Back muscle strains, sprains, and pulls are caused by many different factors. Some that may make you more prone to such injuries include lifting heavy objects frequently, partaking in high contact sports, having poor posture , and being overweight. Wearing extra large supports such as this one can help tremendously with your pain. By wearing lumbosacral obesity braces, the pressure or strain that otherwise would be placed on your spine will be relieved. Girdles like this one for back pain, help apply that compression you need to heal your strain, sprain, or muscle pull.  In addition to those conditions, this extra wide back brace can help you get the relief you need if you’re suffering from degenerative disc disease , herniated discs , and bulging discs . If I’m Oversized, Does This Discreet Brace Fully Support Me? This brace definitely helps those who are heavy or xlarge as the many Velcro closures completely support your belly. This men’s back brace allows you to completely customize the level of compression you’d like. You can adjust it throughout the day depending on what you’re doing or you can tighten it to increase the level of support. If you are overweight, this plus-size back brace for the low back can enable you to partake in a more active lifestyle by supporting the lumbar back and applying compression to reduce inflammation that is often the source of pain.  There have been many studies that have shown a correlation between being overweight and lower back pain. The excess weight or fat that is being carried around by a larger individual directly results how much pressure is placed on your spine. The more the weight, the more the strain or work your spine has to endure to keep your body upright. This ultimately leads those individuals prone to many different back conditions from obesity , including moderate or mild back pain. You can read more about how obesity is related to back issues and injuries here .  Do you think you’re considered obese? Take this quick BMI test to figure out. Frequently Asked Questions About The Plus Size Back Support How do I know which size to get? Using a fabric tape measure, measure the circumference around the widest part of your buttocks. This brace fits body circumference of 46” up to 69”  How do I adjust the brace? Grab the double-pull tension straps (located on the outside of the brace) and adjust them to make it either tighter or looser, then re-apply the Velcro closures. How do I put on the brace? Unhook all Velcro closures and lay the brace flat on the floor to identify the top side. The top has openings, which allow you to remove the plastic stays. Next, position the brace behind your body so it’s centered on your back with the bottom of the brace sitting at the widest part of your body. Fold the left side of the brace towards the middle of your stomach. Do the same with the right side but pull firmly and secure the Velcro closure. Repeat this process with the double-pull tension straps for your desired compression level. Can I wash the brace? To wash the brace, first, remove stays and close all Velcro closures. Hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Do not use bleach. The brace should be air-dried. Do not use high temperatures to wash or dry. Can I sleep in the brace? Thanks to the lightweight, latex-free material make it possible for you to sleep comfortably in this brace. It’s advised to speak with a medical professional before wearing a brace for an extended amount of time. What conditions does it help treat? This belly support band can help treat moderate lower back pain, muscle strains, tears, or pulls, bulging discs, herniated discs, and hip pain. It can also help those who are obese individuals suffering from excess pain in their lumbar back. 609050034229 7609908199477 new 39.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03b0201-logo-baratric-low-back-support-belt-main_grande.jpg?v=1527620268 641061975472 BraceAbility 03B0201XXL Back Braces (Plus Size) 2XLUS Bariatric Low Back Obesity Support Belt Girdle for Hips up to 69" http://www.braceability.com/products/bariatric-back-support-for-obesity?variant=7609908232245 Bariatric Low Back Obesity Support Belt Girdle for Hips up to 69" 3XL Bariatric Back Support Belt This plus-size back belt is a great brace for many different conditions and injuries. For example, it helps relieve moderate pain in the lower back, lumbar muscle weakness, and sprains or strains to your back. In addition, this bariatric belt is very beneficial for those who may be overweight or are considered an obese individual. Read more below about the different features, conditions it helps treat, and why it’s the best brace for you! Features of This Supportive Plus Size Lower Back Belt Crisscross Overlay The crisscross overlay of this plus-size back belt help hold the back in proper position and it covers a wide expanse of the back, providing support and stability to lessen the strain on the tissues of the back. An additional benefit of these straps is that they apply compression to your abdominal region, which can be helpful for reducing any painful inflammation or swelling. The double-pull elastic tension straps are also helpful for getting the ideal amount of compression and support. Comfortable, Elastic Material This big plus-size back support is composed of premium-quality elastic that hugs the body so that it fits well under your clothes or garments while permitting motion. But don’t fear—the flexible anti-roll stays prevent the XXXL back support from bunching up and slipping out of position. The obesity belt can be worn during the day as well as at night when you’re sleeping, depending on your condition. This bariatric back brace comes in a discreet white color, also making it easy to wear beneath clothes. Easily Applied & Adjusted The simple contact closure on the XXL back brace makes it easy for someone struggling with back pain to apply and adjust the back support for large people. Since the band closes in the front of your stomach, you don’t have to worry about twisting or turning which could further injure your back. The Velcro closures are also easy to grab, especially for those who may have arthritis of the hands. It also comes with four plastic stays located on the back side of the brace that you can remove if you wish to decrease the amount of support that is provided by the brace. For those who are trying to wean their dependency of wearing such belts for big and tall individuals, this component is essential in helping you do so. Highly Versatile In comparison to all the many products out there for sale, this brace not only treats numerous different conditions but is great for all shapes and sizes of individuals. This core support belt works on both men and women and comes in sizes xl, 2xl, 3xl, and 4xl. You no longer have to worry about struggling to find the right lower back girdle that fits just right. Aside from this brace having an array of sizes, you can wear it anytime of the day. If you’re someone who enjoys moderate physical activity, you can keep the corset brace on your waist the whole time giving you maximum relief. Since it is lightweight and discreet, you can wear it at work, home, standing all day, etc. Why Do I Need This Bariatric Back Belt For My Back Pain? Low back pain is one of the most debilitating and expensive conditions in America. According to ABC News, 80% of Americans will suffer back pain at some point in their lives and this condition costs more than $90 billion each year in terms of lost productivity and days of work.  There are a number of things to blame for chronic or acute lumbar back pain. For example, some include general degeneration of the discs, vertebrae, joints, a sedentary lifestyle, poor posture (especially when sitting), improper lifting form, wearing shoes with overly high heels or carrying a heavy purse can all contribute to lower back pain. I Have Muscle Strain, Sprain, or Weakness. Will This Brace Help? Yes! This xl or 4x brace is great for those who are suffering from a muscle strain, sprain, or weakness in their back. Since all of these are very likely to recur, it’s extremely essential to provide your back with the support it needs during the recovery process.  Back muscle strains, sprains, and pulls are caused by many different factors. Some that may make you more prone to such injuries include lifting heavy objects frequently, partaking in high contact sports, having poor posture , and being overweight. Wearing extra large supports such as this one can help tremendously with your pain. By wearing lumbosacral obesity braces, the pressure or strain that otherwise would be placed on your spine will be relieved. Girdles like this one for back pain, help apply that compression you need to heal your strain, sprain, or muscle pull.  In addition to those conditions, this extra wide back brace can help you get the relief you need if you’re suffering from degenerative disc disease , herniated discs , and bulging discs . If I’m Oversized, Does This Discreet Brace Fully Support Me? This brace definitely helps those who are heavy or xlarge as the many Velcro closures completely support your belly. This men’s back brace allows you to completely customize the level of compression you’d like. You can adjust it throughout the day depending on what you’re doing or you can tighten it to increase the level of support. If you are overweight, this plus-size back brace for the low back can enable you to partake in a more active lifestyle by supporting the lumbar back and applying compression to reduce inflammation that is often the source of pain.  There have been many studies that have shown a correlation between being overweight and lower back pain. The excess weight or fat that is being carried around by a larger individual directly results how much pressure is placed on your spine. The more the weight, the more the strain or work your spine has to endure to keep your body upright. This ultimately leads those individuals prone to many different back conditions from obesity , including moderate or mild back pain. You can read more about how obesity is related to back issues and injuries here .  Do you think you’re considered obese? Take this quick BMI test to figure out. Frequently Asked Questions About The Plus Size Back Support How do I know which size to get? Using a fabric tape measure, measure the circumference around the widest part of your buttocks. This brace fits body circumference of 46” up to 69”  How do I adjust the brace? Grab the double-pull tension straps (located on the outside of the brace) and adjust them to make it either tighter or looser, then re-apply the Velcro closures. How do I put on the brace? Unhook all Velcro closures and lay the brace flat on the floor to identify the top side. The top has openings, which allow you to remove the plastic stays. Next, position the brace behind your body so it’s centered on your back with the bottom of the brace sitting at the widest part of your body. Fold the left side of the brace towards the middle of your stomach. Do the same with the right side but pull firmly and secure the Velcro closure. Repeat this process with the double-pull tension straps for your desired compression level. Can I wash the brace? To wash the brace, first, remove stays and close all Velcro closures. Hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Do not use bleach. The brace should be air-dried. Do not use high temperatures to wash or dry. Can I sleep in the brace? Thanks to the lightweight, latex-free material make it possible for you to sleep comfortably in this brace. It’s advised to speak with a medical professional before wearing a brace for an extended amount of time. What conditions does it help treat? This belly support band can help treat moderate lower back pain, muscle strains, tears, or pulls, bulging discs, herniated discs, and hip pain. It can also help those who are obese individuals suffering from excess pain in their lumbar back. 609050034229 7609908232245 new 39.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03b0201-logo-baratric-low-back-support-belt-main_grande.jpg?v=1527620268 641061975465 BraceAbility 03B0201XXXL Back Braces (Plus Size) 3XLUS Bariatric Low Back Obesity Support Belt Girdle for Hips up to 69" http://www.braceability.com/products/bariatric-back-support-for-obesity?variant=7609908265013 Bariatric Low Back Obesity Support Belt Girdle for Hips up to 69" 4XL Bariatric Back Support Belt This plus-size back belt is a great brace for many different conditions and injuries. For example, it helps relieve moderate pain in the lower back, lumbar muscle weakness, and sprains or strains to your back. In addition, this bariatric belt is very beneficial for those who may be overweight or are considered an obese individual. Read more below about the different features, conditions it helps treat, and why it’s the best brace for you! Features of This Supportive Plus Size Lower Back Belt Crisscross Overlay The crisscross overlay of this plus-size back belt help hold the back in proper position and it covers a wide expanse of the back, providing support and stability to lessen the strain on the tissues of the back. An additional benefit of these straps is that they apply compression to your abdominal region, which can be helpful for reducing any painful inflammation or swelling. The double-pull elastic tension straps are also helpful for getting the ideal amount of compression and support. Comfortable, Elastic Material This big plus-size back support is composed of premium-quality elastic that hugs the body so that it fits well under your clothes or garments while permitting motion. But don’t fear—the flexible anti-roll stays prevent the XXXL back support from bunching up and slipping out of position. The obesity belt can be worn during the day as well as at night when you’re sleeping, depending on your condition. This bariatric back brace comes in a discreet white color, also making it easy to wear beneath clothes. Easily Applied & Adjusted The simple contact closure on the XXL back brace makes it easy for someone struggling with back pain to apply and adjust the back support for large people. Since the band closes in the front of your stomach, you don’t have to worry about twisting or turning which could further injure your back. The Velcro closures are also easy to grab, especially for those who may have arthritis of the hands. It also comes with four plastic stays located on the back side of the brace that you can remove if you wish to decrease the amount of support that is provided by the brace. For those who are trying to wean their dependency of wearing such belts for big and tall individuals, this component is essential in helping you do so. Highly Versatile In comparison to all the many products out there for sale, this brace not only treats numerous different conditions but is great for all shapes and sizes of individuals. This core support belt works on both men and women and comes in sizes xl, 2xl, 3xl, and 4xl. You no longer have to worry about struggling to find the right lower back girdle that fits just right. Aside from this brace having an array of sizes, you can wear it anytime of the day. If you’re someone who enjoys moderate physical activity, you can keep the corset brace on your waist the whole time giving you maximum relief. Since it is lightweight and discreet, you can wear it at work, home, standing all day, etc. Why Do I Need This Bariatric Back Belt For My Back Pain? Low back pain is one of the most debilitating and expensive conditions in America. According to ABC News, 80% of Americans will suffer back pain at some point in their lives and this condition costs more than $90 billion each year in terms of lost productivity and days of work.  There are a number of things to blame for chronic or acute lumbar back pain. For example, some include general degeneration of the discs, vertebrae, joints, a sedentary lifestyle, poor posture (especially when sitting), improper lifting form, wearing shoes with overly high heels or carrying a heavy purse can all contribute to lower back pain. I Have Muscle Strain, Sprain, or Weakness. Will This Brace Help? Yes! This xl or 4x brace is great for those who are suffering from a muscle strain, sprain, or weakness in their back. Since all of these are very likely to recur, it’s extremely essential to provide your back with the support it needs during the recovery process.  Back muscle strains, sprains, and pulls are caused by many different factors. Some that may make you more prone to such injuries include lifting heavy objects frequently, partaking in high contact sports, having poor posture , and being overweight. Wearing extra large supports such as this one can help tremendously with your pain. By wearing lumbosacral obesity braces, the pressure or strain that otherwise would be placed on your spine will be relieved. Girdles like this one for back pain, help apply that compression you need to heal your strain, sprain, or muscle pull.  In addition to those conditions, this extra wide back brace can help you get the relief you need if you’re suffering from degenerative disc disease , herniated discs , and bulging discs . If I’m Oversized, Does This Discreet Brace Fully Support Me? This brace definitely helps those who are heavy or xlarge as the many Velcro closures completely support your belly. This men’s back brace allows you to completely customize the level of compression you’d like. You can adjust it throughout the day depending on what you’re doing or you can tighten it to increase the level of support. If you are overweight, this plus-size back brace for the low back can enable you to partake in a more active lifestyle by supporting the lumbar back and applying compression to reduce inflammation that is often the source of pain.  There have been many studies that have shown a correlation between being overweight and lower back pain. The excess weight or fat that is being carried around by a larger individual directly results how much pressure is placed on your spine. The more the weight, the more the strain or work your spine has to endure to keep your body upright. This ultimately leads those individuals prone to many different back conditions from obesity , including moderate or mild back pain. You can read more about how obesity is related to back issues and injuries here .  Do you think you’re considered obese? Take this quick BMI test to figure out. Frequently Asked Questions About The Plus Size Back Support How do I know which size to get? Using a fabric tape measure, measure the circumference around the widest part of your buttocks. This brace fits body circumference of 46” up to 69”  How do I adjust the brace? Grab the double-pull tension straps (located on the outside of the brace) and adjust them to make it either tighter or looser, then re-apply the Velcro closures. How do I put on the brace? Unhook all Velcro closures and lay the brace flat on the floor to identify the top side. The top has openings, which allow you to remove the plastic stays. Next, position the brace behind your body so it’s centered on your back with the bottom of the brace sitting at the widest part of your body. Fold the left side of the brace towards the middle of your stomach. Do the same with the right side but pull firmly and secure the Velcro closure. Repeat this process with the double-pull tension straps for your desired compression level. Can I wash the brace? To wash the brace, first, remove stays and close all Velcro closures. Hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Do not use bleach. The brace should be air-dried. Do not use high temperatures to wash or dry. Can I sleep in the brace? Thanks to the lightweight, latex-free material make it possible for you to sleep comfortably in this brace. It’s advised to speak with a medical professional before wearing a brace for an extended amount of time. What conditions does it help treat? This belly support band can help treat moderate lower back pain, muscle strains, tears, or pulls, bulging discs, herniated discs, and hip pain. It can also help those who are obese individuals suffering from excess pain in their lumbar back. 609050034229 7609908265013 new 39.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03b0201-logo-baratric-low-back-support-belt-main_grande.jpg?v=1527620268 641061975458 BraceAbility 03B0201XXXXL Back Braces (Plus Size) 4XLUS Orthowedge Forefoot Off-Loading Healing Shoe http://www.braceability.com/products/orthowedge-off-loading-shoe?variant=7609861505077 Orthowedge Forefoot Off-Loading Healing Shoe S Orthowedge Shoe for Forefoot Off-loading Relief The key element that sets this bunion surgery shoe apart from other post-surgery boots or shoes is its 15° dorsi-angle bottom. This makes users shift their weight to the mid- and heel area of the foot. The lack of pressure on the front of the foot and toes reduces pain and gives the injured area a chance to heal correctly. See BraceAbility’s full line of braces for foot conditions . This lightweight and low-profile post surgery boot can help with a number of conditions, including: Ulcers Bunions or after a bunionectomy (surgery to repair a bunion) Infection Broken toes or forefoot fractures (including Lisfranc fractures ) Ball of foot pain from trauma or metatarsalgia The other components of this toe fracture shoe are also designed with healing and user comfort in mind. For one, the toe fracture sandal has a square toe design that is roomy and acts as a protective bumper against further damage. The bunionectomy shoe as a whole allows space for bandaging and swelling and the Velcro top closures of the medical shoe are adjustable so that one can cinch the shoe for toe fractures tighter once the swelling has subsided and/or the bandaging has been removed. See more orthotics for treating bunions . The EVA medical shoe insoles of the support provide durable and comfortable support to the mid-foot. EVA, or ethlylene vinyl acetate, is a foam material that consists of thousands of foam bubbles filled with gas that make the material lightweight and flexible. The tricot lining of the foam is comfortable against the skin as well as durable. Healing Shoe for Broken Toe, Post Surgery & Ulcerations There are a number of conditions for which treatment requires limited or no weight bearing on the front of the foot. Obviously, this is a difficult task and one that compromises one’s mobility. While using crutches can get the job done, it can also result in one’s muscles wasting away in the meantime. A preferable alternative in some cases is wearing a wedged orthotic such as this medical shoe that forces one to keep weight off the front of the foot by shifting pressure to the mid-foot and sole. The lightweight, flexible EVA insole helps support the foot so one feels stable moving about on the wedged orthotic. And the square-toe design and highly adjustable fit of the sandal for toe fractures means the support can easily accommodate a swollen or bandaged foot. Post Bunion Surgery Walking Shoe to Protect Toe This convenient shoe for bunions, fractures, ulcers and more enables one to conveniently rest the front of the foot and toes. Some of its features that enable the medical shoe to do so include the following: Orthowedge design with 15° dorsi-angle bottom This keeps pressure off the forefoot and toes and shifts weight bearing to the mid-foot and heel Square-toe design Wide, open toe area acts as a protective bumper Open design for breathability Velcro straps can accommodate changes in bandaging and swelling Two straps for a secure fit EVA foam insole for lightweight support and comfort Durable tricot lining Black color Treats: ulcers, bunions, infections, forefoot pain, fractures of the toes or forefoot bones, post-surgical care Intended to be worn while healing from a broken toe or other issue where you don't want your toes from hitting the ground when walking. Very adjustable, lightweight and can be worn on either foot4 sizes which fit kids and adults Doctor recommended medical / hospital grade post-surgery or post-injury healing shoe that you can use at home during recovery. 609035780149 7609861505077 new 24.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03a12-orthowedge-shoe-helps-after-bunion-surgery_grande.jpg?v=1539029605 641061980070 BraceAbility 03A1201S Post-op Shoes SUS Orthowedge Forefoot Off-Loading Healing Shoe http://www.braceability.com/products/orthowedge-off-loading-shoe?variant=7609861537845 Orthowedge Forefoot Off-Loading Healing Shoe M Orthowedge Shoe for Forefoot Off-loading Relief The key element that sets this bunion surgery shoe apart from other post-surgery boots or shoes is its 15° dorsi-angle bottom. This makes users shift their weight to the mid- and heel area of the foot. The lack of pressure on the front of the foot and toes reduces pain and gives the injured area a chance to heal correctly. See BraceAbility’s full line of braces for foot conditions . This lightweight and low-profile post surgery boot can help with a number of conditions, including: Ulcers Bunions or after a bunionectomy (surgery to repair a bunion) Infection Broken toes or forefoot fractures (including Lisfranc fractures ) Ball of foot pain from trauma or metatarsalgia The other components of this toe fracture shoe are also designed with healing and user comfort in mind. For one, the toe fracture sandal has a square toe design that is roomy and acts as a protective bumper against further damage. The bunionectomy shoe as a whole allows space for bandaging and swelling and the Velcro top closures of the medical shoe are adjustable so that one can cinch the shoe for toe fractures tighter once the swelling has subsided and/or the bandaging has been removed. See more orthotics for treating bunions . The EVA medical shoe insoles of the support provide durable and comfortable support to the mid-foot. EVA, or ethlylene vinyl acetate, is a foam material that consists of thousands of foam bubbles filled with gas that make the material lightweight and flexible. The tricot lining of the foam is comfortable against the skin as well as durable. Healing Shoe for Broken Toe, Post Surgery & Ulcerations There are a number of conditions for which treatment requires limited or no weight bearing on the front of the foot. Obviously, this is a difficult task and one that compromises one’s mobility. While using crutches can get the job done, it can also result in one’s muscles wasting away in the meantime. A preferable alternative in some cases is wearing a wedged orthotic such as this medical shoe that forces one to keep weight off the front of the foot by shifting pressure to the mid-foot and sole. The lightweight, flexible EVA insole helps support the foot so one feels stable moving about on the wedged orthotic. And the square-toe design and highly adjustable fit of the sandal for toe fractures means the support can easily accommodate a swollen or bandaged foot. Post Bunion Surgery Walking Shoe to Protect Toe This convenient shoe for bunions, fractures, ulcers and more enables one to conveniently rest the front of the foot and toes. Some of its features that enable the medical shoe to do so include the following: Orthowedge design with 15° dorsi-angle bottom This keeps pressure off the forefoot and toes and shifts weight bearing to the mid-foot and heel Square-toe design Wide, open toe area acts as a protective bumper Open design for breathability Velcro straps can accommodate changes in bandaging and swelling Two straps for a secure fit EVA foam insole for lightweight support and comfort Durable tricot lining Black color Treats: ulcers, bunions, infections, forefoot pain, fractures of the toes or forefoot bones, post-surgical care Intended to be worn while healing from a broken toe or other issue where you don't want your toes from hitting the ground when walking. Very adjustable, lightweight and can be worn on either foot4 sizes which fit kids and adults Doctor recommended medical / hospital grade post-surgery or post-injury healing shoe that you can use at home during recovery. 609035780149 7609861537845 new 24.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03a12-orthowedge-shoe-helps-after-bunion-surgery_grande.jpg?v=1539029605 641061980087 BraceAbility 03A1201M Post-op Shoes MUS Orthowedge Forefoot Off-Loading Healing Shoe http://www.braceability.com/products/orthowedge-off-loading-shoe?variant=7609861570613 Orthowedge Forefoot Off-Loading Healing Shoe L Orthowedge Shoe for Forefoot Off-loading Relief The key element that sets this bunion surgery shoe apart from other post-surgery boots or shoes is its 15° dorsi-angle bottom. This makes users shift their weight to the mid- and heel area of the foot. The lack of pressure on the front of the foot and toes reduces pain and gives the injured area a chance to heal correctly. See BraceAbility’s full line of braces for foot conditions . This lightweight and low-profile post surgery boot can help with a number of conditions, including: Ulcers Bunions or after a bunionectomy (surgery to repair a bunion) Infection Broken toes or forefoot fractures (including Lisfranc fractures ) Ball of foot pain from trauma or metatarsalgia The other components of this toe fracture shoe are also designed with healing and user comfort in mind. For one, the toe fracture sandal has a square toe design that is roomy and acts as a protective bumper against further damage. The bunionectomy shoe as a whole allows space for bandaging and swelling and the Velcro top closures of the medical shoe are adjustable so that one can cinch the shoe for toe fractures tighter once the swelling has subsided and/or the bandaging has been removed. See more orthotics for treating bunions . The EVA medical shoe insoles of the support provide durable and comfortable support to the mid-foot. EVA, or ethlylene vinyl acetate, is a foam material that consists of thousands of foam bubbles filled with gas that make the material lightweight and flexible. The tricot lining of the foam is comfortable against the skin as well as durable. Healing Shoe for Broken Toe, Post Surgery & Ulcerations There are a number of conditions for which treatment requires limited or no weight bearing on the front of the foot. Obviously, this is a difficult task and one that compromises one’s mobility. While using crutches can get the job done, it can also result in one’s muscles wasting away in the meantime. A preferable alternative in some cases is wearing a wedged orthotic such as this medical shoe that forces one to keep weight off the front of the foot by shifting pressure to the mid-foot and sole. The lightweight, flexible EVA insole helps support the foot so one feels stable moving about on the wedged orthotic. And the square-toe design and highly adjustable fit of the sandal for toe fractures means the support can easily accommodate a swollen or bandaged foot. Post Bunion Surgery Walking Shoe to Protect Toe This convenient shoe for bunions, fractures, ulcers and more enables one to conveniently rest the front of the foot and toes. Some of its features that enable the medical shoe to do so include the following: Orthowedge design with 15° dorsi-angle bottom This keeps pressure off the forefoot and toes and shifts weight bearing to the mid-foot and heel Square-toe design Wide, open toe area acts as a protective bumper Open design for breathability Velcro straps can accommodate changes in bandaging and swelling Two straps for a secure fit EVA foam insole for lightweight support and comfort Durable tricot lining Black color Treats: ulcers, bunions, infections, forefoot pain, fractures of the toes or forefoot bones, post-surgical care Intended to be worn while healing from a broken toe or other issue where you don't want your toes from hitting the ground when walking. Very adjustable, lightweight and can be worn on either foot4 sizes which fit kids and adults Doctor recommended medical / hospital grade post-surgery or post-injury healing shoe that you can use at home during recovery. 609035780149 7609861570613 new 24.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03a12-orthowedge-shoe-helps-after-bunion-surgery_grande.jpg?v=1539029605 641061980094 BraceAbility 03A1201L Post-op Shoes LUS Orthowedge Forefoot Off-Loading Healing Shoe http://www.braceability.com/products/orthowedge-off-loading-shoe?variant=7609861603381 Orthowedge Forefoot Off-Loading Healing Shoe XL Orthowedge Shoe for Forefoot Off-loading Relief The key element that sets this bunion surgery shoe apart from other post-surgery boots or shoes is its 15° dorsi-angle bottom. This makes users shift their weight to the mid- and heel area of the foot. The lack of pressure on the front of the foot and toes reduces pain and gives the injured area a chance to heal correctly. See BraceAbility’s full line of braces for foot conditions . This lightweight and low-profile post surgery boot can help with a number of conditions, including: Ulcers Bunions or after a bunionectomy (surgery to repair a bunion) Infection Broken toes or forefoot fractures (including Lisfranc fractures ) Ball of foot pain from trauma or metatarsalgia The other components of this toe fracture shoe are also designed with healing and user comfort in mind. For one, the toe fracture sandal has a square toe design that is roomy and acts as a protective bumper against further damage. The bunionectomy shoe as a whole allows space for bandaging and swelling and the Velcro top closures of the medical shoe are adjustable so that one can cinch the shoe for toe fractures tighter once the swelling has subsided and/or the bandaging has been removed. See more orthotics for treating bunions . The EVA medical shoe insoles of the support provide durable and comfortable support to the mid-foot. EVA, or ethlylene vinyl acetate, is a foam material that consists of thousands of foam bubbles filled with gas that make the material lightweight and flexible. The tricot lining of the foam is comfortable against the skin as well as durable. Healing Shoe for Broken Toe, Post Surgery & Ulcerations There are a number of conditions for which treatment requires limited or no weight bearing on the front of the foot. Obviously, this is a difficult task and one that compromises one’s mobility. While using crutches can get the job done, it can also result in one’s muscles wasting away in the meantime. A preferable alternative in some cases is wearing a wedged orthotic such as this medical shoe that forces one to keep weight off the front of the foot by shifting pressure to the mid-foot and sole. The lightweight, flexible EVA insole helps support the foot so one feels stable moving about on the wedged orthotic. And the square-toe design and highly adjustable fit of the sandal for toe fractures means the support can easily accommodate a swollen or bandaged foot. Post Bunion Surgery Walking Shoe to Protect Toe This convenient shoe for bunions, fractures, ulcers and more enables one to conveniently rest the front of the foot and toes. Some of its features that enable the medical shoe to do so include the following: Orthowedge design with 15° dorsi-angle bottom This keeps pressure off the forefoot and toes and shifts weight bearing to the mid-foot and heel Square-toe design Wide, open toe area acts as a protective bumper Open design for breathability Velcro straps can accommodate changes in bandaging and swelling Two straps for a secure fit EVA foam insole for lightweight support and comfort Durable tricot lining Black color Treats: ulcers, bunions, infections, forefoot pain, fractures of the toes or forefoot bones, post-surgical care Intended to be worn while healing from a broken toe or other issue where you don't want your toes from hitting the ground when walking. Very adjustable, lightweight and can be worn on either foot4 sizes which fit kids and adults Doctor recommended medical / hospital grade post-surgery or post-injury healing shoe that you can use at home during recovery. 609035780149 7609861603381 new 24.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03a12-orthowedge-shoe-helps-after-bunion-surgery_grande.jpg?v=1539029605 641061983354 BraceAbility 03A1201XL Post-op Shoes XLUS Adjustable Lower Back & Spine Pain Lumbosacral Corset Brace http://www.braceability.com/products/adjustable-lower-back-brace?variant=7562122919989 Adjustable Lower Back & Spine Pain Lumbosacral Corset Brace Default Title This lower back brace for spinal pain and injuries provides superior compression and support that is easy to fit and even easier to wear. The low-profile design incorporates a hi-tech mesh material that helps manage heat and moisture for all-day comfort. Why You Need This This Lumbosacral Corset for Lower Back Pain As we age, our spine wears down, making us more susceptible to injuries and elderly back pain. Unfortunately, simply playing sports like tennis or golf, or being plus size can speed up this degeneration process. This universal support belt offers superior stabilization from your L1 through L5 vertebrae, reducing lower back motion and helping alleviate and prevent spinal pain among young and old men and women alike. View our full line of lumbosacral (LSO) braces . By wrapping the brace around your waist you create pressure, reducing the amount of force on your lumbosacral spine, otherwise known as the small of your back. This compression helps transfer stress away from your lumbar spine, easing the pain, protecting against further damage, and promoting healing. These qualities and more make this orthopedic device great for treating many conditions that cause lower back pain, including: Lower back pain, sprains, or strains Spinal stenosis Spondylosis Degenerative disc disease Bulging or herniated discs Facet syndrome Arthritis 5 Reasons Why People Love Adjustable Sports Back Brace for Golfers Wearing a simple spine corset brace is a good alternative to surgery. (If you do need back surgery, here’s what you should expect afterward .) And this affordable compression back brace for youthful and elderly men or women is one of the best on market, thanks to several of its unique and high-tech features. Dual Power Pulley System The patented pulley system of this back brace applies targeted support and compression to your L1 through L5 vertebrae, similar to the pulley system found on Cybertech back braces . The mechanical pulley system makes it easy to activate the compression feature of this brace. It multiplies your force, so you can easily generate a lot of compression, which is great for lower back pain treatment with very little effort. Simply, slide your thumbs through the pull tab holes and pull them away from your body. The right pull tab controls lower compression and the left pull tab controls upper compression. Velcro all the way around the lumbosacral support makes putting on and adjusting the belt simple. All it takes to loosen or tighten the belt as you move from a seated to standing position is a simple adjustment of the pull tabs. This Back Brace is One Size Fits All The stabilization belt is one size fits all, which eliminates the hassle of trying to select the correct size. This universal brace fits body circumferences ranging from 28 inches to 60 inches. Use the two D-ring buckles for quick and easy belt length adjustment. CoolMesh Material for a More Flexible, Streamlined Fit This hip and back alignment corrector is ultra lightweight and breathable. Outside of the pulley system and Velcro closures, the remainder of the lumbar wrap is made out of a hi-tech nylon mesh fabric. This material helps manage heat and moisture for enhanced all-day comfort while driving, walking, working, etc. Our Flexible, Breathable Support Belt is Great for Athletic Use Are you an athlete seeking a low-profile fitting back brace? This waist trainer for back pain features a flexible and streamlined fit that’s perfect for exercise and sports like golf. Why does my back hurt after golf? Similar to any other sport, golf can produce injuries to your low back and spine. A very common golf injury is low back pain caused by muscle strains and sprains that occur when swinging a golf club. Chronic or recurrent episodes of lumbar pain can be frustrating if the pain hinders your ability to play golf. Fortunately, this spine support helps eliminate low back pain and prevents golf and sport-related injuries. See more of our golf support braces . Perfect Lower Back Support for Elderly Women and Men Innovative hand loops assist in independent application and removal for seniors and people with limited upper body strength or trouble gripping due to arthritis. Most other lower back belts depend on how tightly you can wrap the brace around your hips for compression. Our dual power pulley brace comes at a far more attractive price and delivers controlled compression with minimal effort. Frequently Asked Questions About This Athletic Corset Support for Lumbar Spine Pain What conditions/injuries does this back stabilizer treat? It can help with many injuries to the lower back, including (but not limited to) acute and chronic low back pain, lumbar muscle weakness, lumbar strains and sprains, postural support and disc herniation. How does it work? The belt supports your lower back, thanks to its superior pulley system, which applies comfortable compression, transferring stress away from your spine. This also stabilizes the lower-back, which is great for conditions like SPD and SI joint pain where too much movement creates alignment issues and pain. When should I wear it? You should always follow a doctor’s instructions regarding usage. But generally speaking, you can safely wear this belt whenever you need extra support, protection, and pain relief.   What is it made of? Constructed out of a latex-free, lightweight and breathable nylon CoolMesh material. Its edges are finished and a layer of Velcro goes around the entire brace so you can attach the pull tabs wherever it suits you. The mechanical pulley system is composed of a high-quality, polyester perma core thread (parachute cord). Who can wear this brace? Men and women of all ages can benefit from this belt, so long as the circumference of their body falls within a range of 28 inches to 60 inches. We also offer plus size back braces and maternity support belts , if you don’t fall within that measurement range. What size should I buy? That’s an easy one with this universal, one size fits most, back brace. Just make sure the circumference around the area where you plan to wear this brace falls within the 28 to 60-inch sizing range. To check, wrap a soft, flexible tape measure around the widest part of your body, most likely your hips. If your measurement was wider than 60 inches, you should check out a plus size belt . How do I put it on? Adjust length accordingly and position brace behind your body centered on your lower back. With your left hand, wrap the left side of the brace around your lower abdomen. Then fold in the right side of the brace and secure Velcro closure. Unattach left pull tab, pulling it away from your body until your desired level of compression is reached. Reattach the left pull tab to the Velcro fastener band. Repeat with right pull tab. Note that right pull tab controls lower compression and left pull tab controls upper compression. How tall is this brace? The belt portion of the brace is 6 inches tall, and the back panels are 8 inches tall. Washing Instructions: Hand wash with warm water and detergent for delicate fabrics, repeatedly rinse, and line-dry only. Do not use bleach or place in a dryer. Do not immerse brace in liquids. Other features: The belt is flexible, lightweight and breathable, which is great for active use. The dual power pulley system amplifies your force, making it easy to apply compression. Color: Black. 603102314549 7562122919989 new 64.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/03b0301-adjustable-lower-back-and-spine-pain-corset-brace_grande.jpg?v=1536333055 641427945101 BraceAbility 03B0301 Back Braces Dorsal Night Splint for Foot Drop & Plantar Fasciitis http://www.braceability.com/products/dorsal-night-splint?variant=7660883804213 Dorsal Night Splint for Foot Drop & Plantar Fasciitis S/M Why You Need This Dorsal Night Splint for Plantar Fasciitis, Achilles Tendonitis & Foot Drop During the day, connective tissues in your foot develop microtears. Then, while you sleep, unknowingly pointing your toes, these tissues begin to heal in this tight, pointed position. So, when you take your first steps in morning, you stretch out and retear these tissues, causing sharp pains. This dorsal night splint holds your foot upright throughout the night for a gentle, consistent dorsiflexion stretch to your plantar fascia (the tissue that connects your heel bone to your toes), Achilles tendon and calf muscle, easing pain and discomfort caused by Achilles tendonitis , plantar fasciitis , and foot drop without any surgery. If you has a child who is struggling with idiopathic toe walking, this splint can be a helpful part of their treatment regiment, along with wearing special shoes during the day. By wearing this splint at night, it trains the foot and ankle to maintain the correct position, and gently stretches the calf muscle and achilles tendon.  Kids or adults who show signs of excess plantar flexion (toe walking),  tandem gait (heel to toe walking), lack of control over ankle movements,  Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease, or abnormal hyperextension of the knee - can benefit from a comfortable ambulation splint like this one to improve range of motion in the ankle. If the early signs of these conditions are not addressed, the midfoot can collapse or the calf muscles can permanently shorten, causing all sorts of problems such as pes plano-valgus (flexible flatfoot), limb misalignment, and drop foot. What Exactly is Foot Drop & What Causes It? Foot drop is a medical condition that causes difficulty in lifting the front of your foot. When you walk, it is possible you will drag the front of your foot on the ground if you don’t have the proper brace to help support it. Check out our entire foot drop brace selection . Foot drop can be either permanent or temporary, depending on your specific case. There are many different causes for this condition and can vary in severity. Below are some common causes that lead to foot drop: Nerve Injury Muscle or nerve disorders Brain and spinal cord disorders (Stroke) Damage to peroneal nerve Top 4 Reasons Why You'll Love This Foot Brace for Plantar Fasciitis Treatment and More It’s low cost and extra padding makes it a favorite for everyone. This versatile night splint has many different features that make it so popular: Lightweight, Low-profile Fit This bedtime support brace can be worn all night, allowing you to sleep on your side, back, or stomach comfortably. Plus, it is less bulky than most Achilles tendon and plantar fasciitis splints on the market for better quality sleep. It works for both men and women, fitting your left or right foot and can be worn with or without a sock on. Comfortable, Open Heel Design Only covering the top of your foot, this dorsal night splint leaves your toes, heel, and ankle open. Thus, making it more comfortable than a standard, plantar fasciitis boot. However, you are going to be comparing it to sleeping with nothing on, so it will not be entirely comfortable at first. Please give yourself a few nights to get used it! Soft, Cushioned Padding You can easily relax in this brace, thanks to its comfortable, padded cushioning. Plus, the material is super lightweight and breathable, making this night splint much more comfortable than many rigid AFO alternatives for sleeping.   Convenient, Wrap-Around Style This removable dorsal splint is easy to put on and strap up in bed or while sitting down, making your nighttime routine quick and easy. Just slip it onto your foot and secure the brace with its 3 adjustable, wrap-around straps. Each Velcro closure is Medical-grade, making it 10X stronger than standard, retail-grade Velcro for a secure fit throughout the night. However, if you are a very restless sleeper and would like a tighter fit, we recommend using medical bandage . Simply wrap it around your calf and foot for an even more secure fit throughout the night. Frequently Asked Questions About This Achilles Tendon Stretching Brace for Sleeping What conditions / injuries does this ankle stabilizer treat? This nighttime foot brace is the perfect support for many different conditions including foot drop, plantar fasciitis, and Achilles tendonitis. How does it work? This splint for foot drop and plantar fasciitis helps reduce the painful tightening that you endure after you wake up and take your first steps. It holds your foot at a 90-degree angle while you sleep, stretching your fascia, Achilles tendon, and calf muscle. When should I wear it? This plantar fasciitis brace is only meant to be worn while sleeping or kicking your feet back on the couch. It is not meant to be worn while walking. Please remove this brace if you plan on walking further than a few steps around the house. We also offer a different foot support for daytime use . What is it made of? This latex-free night splint is made out of a rigid ABS plastic shell, soft foam-like padding, polyester / nylon blended straps, and medical-grade Velcro closures. Who can wear this brace? Men and women of all ages can benefit from the stretch provided by this nighttime dorsal foot splint. What size should I buy? Size S/M fits Women’s US shoe sizes from 6-10 and Men’s US shoe sizes 5-9. (For children, the S/M generally will fit youth / kids shoe sizes 4-7). Size L/XL fits Women’s US shoe sizes ranging from 10.5-15 and Men’s US shoe sizes ranging from 9.5-14. Fits your left or right foot. How do I put it on? To apply this brace, undo all of the Velcro straps. Then, while sitting on the edge of a chair or on your bed, slide your foot through the elastic foot band. With your toes pulled up, firmly wrap and secure the calf strap. Next, pull and secure each foot strap, one at a time, for a snug, yet comfortable fit. Make sure both sides are even. How tall is this brace? The S/M is 9” tall and the L/XL is 11” tall. Washing Instructions: Hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Allow Achilles tendon stretcher to air dry completely before reapplying. Do not remove the plastic shell. Other features: Can be worn with or without socks Breathable, open-heel design Highly adjustable, 3-strap system for a secure fit Color: Black. 618700374069 7660883804213 new 24.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10a1201-dorsal-night-splint-for-foot-drop_grande.jpg?v=1527626557 641061975687 BraceAbility 10A1201S Foot - Plantar Fasciitis S/MUS Dorsal Night Splint for Foot Drop & Plantar Fasciitis http://www.braceability.com/products/dorsal-night-splint?variant=7660922634293 Dorsal Night Splint for Foot Drop & Plantar Fasciitis L/XL Why You Need This Dorsal Night Splint for Plantar Fasciitis, Achilles Tendonitis & Foot Drop During the day, connective tissues in your foot develop microtears. Then, while you sleep, unknowingly pointing your toes, these tissues begin to heal in this tight, pointed position. So, when you take your first steps in morning, you stretch out and retear these tissues, causing sharp pains. This dorsal night splint holds your foot upright throughout the night for a gentle, consistent dorsiflexion stretch to your plantar fascia (the tissue that connects your heel bone to your toes), Achilles tendon and calf muscle, easing pain and discomfort caused by Achilles tendonitis , plantar fasciitis , and foot drop without any surgery. If you has a child who is struggling with idiopathic toe walking, this splint can be a helpful part of their treatment regiment, along with wearing special shoes during the day. By wearing this splint at night, it trains the foot and ankle to maintain the correct position, and gently stretches the calf muscle and achilles tendon.  Kids or adults who show signs of excess plantar flexion (toe walking),  tandem gait (heel to toe walking), lack of control over ankle movements,  Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease, or abnormal hyperextension of the knee - can benefit from a comfortable ambulation splint like this one to improve range of motion in the ankle. If the early signs of these conditions are not addressed, the midfoot can collapse or the calf muscles can permanently shorten, causing all sorts of problems such as pes plano-valgus (flexible flatfoot), limb misalignment, and drop foot. What Exactly is Foot Drop & What Causes It? Foot drop is a medical condition that causes difficulty in lifting the front of your foot. When you walk, it is possible you will drag the front of your foot on the ground if you don’t have the proper brace to help support it. Check out our entire foot drop brace selection . Foot drop can be either permanent or temporary, depending on your specific case. There are many different causes for this condition and can vary in severity. Below are some common causes that lead to foot drop: Nerve Injury Muscle or nerve disorders Brain and spinal cord disorders (Stroke) Damage to peroneal nerve Top 4 Reasons Why You'll Love This Foot Brace for Plantar Fasciitis Treatment and More It’s low cost and extra padding makes it a favorite for everyone. This versatile night splint has many different features that make it so popular: Lightweight, Low-profile Fit This bedtime support brace can be worn all night, allowing you to sleep on your side, back, or stomach comfortably. Plus, it is less bulky than most Achilles tendon and plantar fasciitis splints on the market for better quality sleep. It works for both men and women, fitting your left or right foot and can be worn with or without a sock on. Comfortable, Open Heel Design Only covering the top of your foot, this dorsal night splint leaves your toes, heel, and ankle open. Thus, making it more comfortable than a standard, plantar fasciitis boot. However, you are going to be comparing it to sleeping with nothing on, so it will not be entirely comfortable at first. Please give yourself a few nights to get used it! Soft, Cushioned Padding You can easily relax in this brace, thanks to its comfortable, padded cushioning. Plus, the material is super lightweight and breathable, making this night splint much more comfortable than many rigid AFO alternatives for sleeping.   Convenient, Wrap-Around Style This removable dorsal splint is easy to put on and strap up in bed or while sitting down, making your nighttime routine quick and easy. Just slip it onto your foot and secure the brace with its 3 adjustable, wrap-around straps. Each Velcro closure is Medical-grade, making it 10X stronger than standard, retail-grade Velcro for a secure fit throughout the night. However, if you are a very restless sleeper and would like a tighter fit, we recommend using medical bandage . Simply wrap it around your calf and foot for an even more secure fit throughout the night. Frequently Asked Questions About This Achilles Tendon Stretching Brace for Sleeping What conditions / injuries does this ankle stabilizer treat? This nighttime foot brace is the perfect support for many different conditions including foot drop, plantar fasciitis, and Achilles tendonitis. How does it work? This splint for foot drop and plantar fasciitis helps reduce the painful tightening that you endure after you wake up and take your first steps. It holds your foot at a 90-degree angle while you sleep, stretching your fascia, Achilles tendon, and calf muscle. When should I wear it? This plantar fasciitis brace is only meant to be worn while sleeping or kicking your feet back on the couch. It is not meant to be worn while walking. Please remove this brace if you plan on walking further than a few steps around the house. We also offer a different foot support for daytime use . What is it made of? This latex-free night splint is made out of a rigid ABS plastic shell, soft foam-like padding, polyester / nylon blended straps, and medical-grade Velcro closures. Who can wear this brace? Men and women of all ages can benefit from the stretch provided by this nighttime dorsal foot splint. What size should I buy? Size S/M fits Women’s US shoe sizes from 6-10 and Men’s US shoe sizes 5-9. (For children, the S/M generally will fit youth / kids shoe sizes 4-7). Size L/XL fits Women’s US shoe sizes ranging from 10.5-15 and Men’s US shoe sizes ranging from 9.5-14. Fits your left or right foot. How do I put it on? To apply this brace, undo all of the Velcro straps. Then, while sitting on the edge of a chair or on your bed, slide your foot through the elastic foot band. With your toes pulled up, firmly wrap and secure the calf strap. Next, pull and secure each foot strap, one at a time, for a snug, yet comfortable fit. Make sure both sides are even. How tall is this brace? The S/M is 9” tall and the L/XL is 11” tall. Washing Instructions: Hand wash in warm water with mild soap. Allow Achilles tendon stretcher to air dry completely before reapplying. Do not remove the plastic shell. Other features: Can be worn with or without socks Breathable, open-heel design Highly adjustable, 3-strap system for a secure fit Color: Black. 618700374069 7660922634293 new 24.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10a1201-dorsal-night-splint-for-foot-drop_grande.jpg?v=1527626557 641061975694 BraceAbility 10A1201L Foot - Plantar Fasciitis L/XLUS Post-op Broken Foot & Toe Fracture Medical Walking Shoe http://www.braceability.com/products/post-op-shoe?variant=7660762988597 Post-op Broken Foot & Toe Fracture Medical Walking Shoe Female / S Why You Need This Post Op Shoe for Toe & Foot Fractures After foot surgery, freely moving around can easily undo the repairs your surgeon made. Therefore, post-op recovery from foot surgery typically involves a period of immobilization, followed by several weeks of progressive weight bearing and motion, including the use of a walking boot or a medical shoe for broken foot care. Eventually, you will likely need to go through a physical therapy treatment to return strength, flexibility, and balance to the affected foot, ankle, or leg. This broken toe shoe was specifically designed to provide mobility, protection, and support for day-to-day activities following toe and foot injuries or surgeries, including: Broken toes Bunions Hammer toes Lisfranc fractures Plantar fasciitis Heel fractures Morton's neuroma 5th metatarsal break What If I Sprained or Broke My Ankle? We recommend our short, cam walking boot or air walker after you sprain or break your ankle. For these boots provide compression and stabilization around your ankle. Depending on how tall you are, as well as the location and severity of your ankle injury, a tall walking boot might be ideal compared to short walking boot. Anybody 6’ or taller should purchase a tall walking boot for proper support, protection, and immobilization of their foot and ankle. In addition to ankle sprains and fractures, tall walking boots can help with some lower leg fractures. 5 Reasons Why People Love This Broken Foot Walking Cast Boot Finding the right shoes following surgery for a broken or injured foot can be a daunting task. This post-operative walking shoe offers unbeatable support and protection after a foot fracture or plantar surgery. Following is a list of outstanding features that make this post-op shoe a good choice in comparison to other surgical shoes on the market: Wide Footbed & Square-Toe Design What makes this one of the best post-op shoes? For one, this orthopedic surgical shoe has a wide footbed and square-toe design, which acts as a bumper to provide extra protection and prevent your toes, especially your pinky and big toe, from rubbing against the brace or some other surface. This orthotic is available as both a women’s post-op shoe and one for men. The difference is that the foot fracture splint for women is a bit narrower. However, each version of these versatile shoes for broken foot treatment comes in a variety of sizes, which can be worn on your left or right foot thanks to its squared footbed. Deluxe EVA Foam Insole Soft, padded lining along the inner portion of the shoe and a lightweight foam insole makes this broken foot cast shoe comfortable for extended periods of use. The EVA material that our insoles are made of is a dense foam polymer known as Ethylene Vinyl Acetate. The durable material has a superior shock absorbing quality, making our flat-bottomed shoe for broken toes ideal to walk or stand on. The insole on this post-surgical shoe can be removed, which is convenient for instances where the use of a pressure-relieving insole or arch support is needed. Plus, the padded heel area of this particular post-op shoe helps prevent slippage. Rigid Rocker Sole & Non-Skid Tread The hard, rocker sole and traction tread at the bottom of this stiff soled shoe for a broken foot is also smart features both in terms of user comfort and safety. A rocker-bottom sole supports your arch, which can help relieve pain and pressure on your forefoot, heel, and ankle during recovery. It also promotes a more natural gait, allowing you to step with ease. The non-slip, traction grooves provide extra stability while walking, making movement easier and safer to prevent re-injury. Adjustable Velcro Straps Three customizable Velcro straps help accommodate post-surgical bulk, bandaging, and swelling after sustaining a foot or toe injury. Immediately after surgery, you will need more space due to swelling and dressings. But eventually, you will no longer need to wear bandaging and inflammation will subside. You can simply reposition the adjustable Velcro hook pieces, as well as tighten and trim the bottom two straps on top of your foot as swelling dissipates. Though it does not include an adjustable Velcro piece, you can also tighten and trim the top ankle strap on this post-op foot surgery shoe as needed. Another bonus of these short shoes for a broken foot is that these Velcro straps are much stronger than most. That is because they are medical-grade Velcro straps, which are 10 times stronger than the retail-grade Velcro you’ll find on braces at CVS, Walgreens, or your local drugstore. Low-Profile and Lightweight Fit A semi-open style and airflow-friendly material make these post-op sandals more breathable for all-day comfort. This surgical walking shoe has a relatively low-profile fit, allowing users to remain active and independent throughout the recovery process and continue daily activities such as driving, for example. Frequently Asked Questions About This Surgical Medical Shoe & Foot Brace What conditions / injuries does this post-op shoe treat? Perfect for use following toe, foot, and ankle surgery or injuries including broken toes, hairline stress fractures, post-op bunion removal (bunionectomy), hammertoe, Lisfranc fractures, plantar fasciitis, sprains, strains, bruised foot bones, metatarsal fractures, general foot pain, and more. How does it work? This post-op foot splint is designed to provide mobility, protection, and support for day-to-day activities following toe, foot, ankle, and leg surgery or trauma. Who can wear this brace? Available in sizes ranging from a SMALL - FEMALE to an XL - MALE, fitting a wide variety of adult women and men, as well as teenagers and youth. Will this fit my child? Certain sizes will fit kids (see our size chart for specifics). What size should I get?  View our sizing graphic in the images above. This table shows size conversions between men's, women's, and big kid's shoes. When choosing your size, select the corresponding male or female version according, regardless of your gender. This walking cast shoe is universal, so it will fit your right or left foot. When should I wear it? This toe, foot, and ankle brace can be worn throughout the day for post-op support. Ask your doctor before wearing this shoe while sleeping. What is it made of? This broken metatarsal treatment brace is made of a hard rubber sole, EVA foam insole, polyester lining, and medical-grade Velcro straps. Can I drive while wearing this orthopedic slipper for hairline fractures? Yes. How do I put it on? Undo the top strap. Loosen the bottom and middle straps. Place your affected foot inside the shoe, making sure to slide your heel to the back of the shoe. Fasten the bottom Velcro strap, repositioning the small, adjustable Velcro piece for a tighter fit. Reposition the small Velcro piece and fasten the middle strap. Slide the top strap through the plastic D-ring, tighten, and secure. Note that each strap can be trimmed, if necessary. However, once the straps have been trimmed, the brace cannot be returned. Washing Instructions: Made of a ridged rubber sole, EVA foam insole, polyester lining, and medical-grade Velcro closures. Other features: The non-skid tread provides extra stability while walking. Wide, square toe design acts as a buffer for protection. Rigid rocker sole allows for a more natural step. Color: Black. 618669342773 7660762988597 new 21.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10a1101-post-op-broken-foot-toe-fracture-shoe-for-women_1bb6f43f-8246-4855-adce-115899b083b9_grande.jpg?v=1536618447 641061983545 BraceAbility 10A1101SF Post-op Shoes SUS Post-op Broken Foot & Toe Fracture Medical Walking Shoe http://www.braceability.com/products/post-op-shoe?variant=7660763054133 Post-op Broken Foot & Toe Fracture Medical Walking Shoe Female / M Why You Need This Post Op Shoe for Toe & Foot Fractures After foot surgery, freely moving around can easily undo the repairs your surgeon made. Therefore, post-op recovery from foot surgery typically involves a period of immobilization, followed by several weeks of progressive weight bearing and motion, including the use of a walking boot or a medical shoe for broken foot care. Eventually, you will likely need to go through a physical therapy treatment to return strength, flexibility, and balance to the affected foot, ankle, or leg. This broken toe shoe was specifically designed to provide mobility, protection, and support for day-to-day activities following toe and foot injuries or surgeries, including: Broken toes Bunions Hammer toes Lisfranc fractures Plantar fasciitis Heel fractures Morton's neuroma 5th metatarsal break What If I Sprained or Broke My Ankle? We recommend our short, cam walking boot or air walker after you sprain or break your ankle. For these boots provide compression and stabilization around your ankle. Depending on how tall you are, as well as the location and severity of your ankle injury, a tall walking boot might be ideal compared to short walking boot. Anybody 6’ or taller should purchase a tall walking boot for proper support, protection, and immobilization of their foot and ankle. In addition to ankle sprains and fractures, tall walking boots can help with some lower leg fractures. 5 Reasons Why People Love This Broken Foot Walking Cast Boot Finding the right shoes following surgery for a broken or injured foot can be a daunting task. This post-operative walking shoe offers unbeatable support and protection after a foot fracture or plantar surgery. Following is a list of outstanding features that make this post-op shoe a good choice in comparison to other surgical shoes on the market: Wide Footbed & Square-Toe Design What makes this one of the best post-op shoes? For one, this orthopedic surgical shoe has a wide footbed and square-toe design, which acts as a bumper to provide extra protection and prevent your toes, especially your pinky and big toe, from rubbing against the brace or some other surface. This orthotic is available as both a women’s post-op shoe and one for men. The difference is that the foot fracture splint for women is a bit narrower. However, each version of these versatile shoes for broken foot treatment comes in a variety of sizes, which can be worn on your left or right foot thanks to its squared footbed. Deluxe EVA Foam Insole Soft, padded lining along the inner portion of the shoe and a lightweight foam insole makes this broken foot cast shoe comfortable for extended periods of use. The EVA material that our insoles are made of is a dense foam polymer known as Ethylene Vinyl Acetate. The durable material has a superior shock absorbing quality, making our flat-bottomed shoe for broken toes ideal to walk or stand on. The insole on this post-surgical shoe can be removed, which is convenient for instances where the use of a pressure-relieving insole or arch support is needed. Plus, the padded heel area of this particular post-op shoe helps prevent slippage. Rigid Rocker Sole & Non-Skid Tread The hard, rocker sole and traction tread at the bottom of this stiff soled shoe for a broken foot is also smart features both in terms of user comfort and safety. A rocker-bottom sole supports your arch, which can help relieve pain and pressure on your forefoot, heel, and ankle during recovery. It also promotes a more natural gait, allowing you to step with ease. The non-slip, traction grooves provide extra stability while walking, making movement easier and safer to prevent re-injury. Adjustable Velcro Straps Three customizable Velcro straps help accommodate post-surgical bulk, bandaging, and swelling after sustaining a foot or toe injury. Immediately after surgery, you will need more space due to swelling and dressings. But eventually, you will no longer need to wear bandaging and inflammation will subside. You can simply reposition the adjustable Velcro hook pieces, as well as tighten and trim the bottom two straps on top of your foot as swelling dissipates. Though it does not include an adjustable Velcro piece, you can also tighten and trim the top ankle strap on this post-op foot surgery shoe as needed. Another bonus of these short shoes for a broken foot is that these Velcro straps are much stronger than most. That is because they are medical-grade Velcro straps, which are 10 times stronger than the retail-grade Velcro you’ll find on braces at CVS, Walgreens, or your local drugstore. Low-Profile and Lightweight Fit A semi-open style and airflow-friendly material make these post-op sandals more breathable for all-day comfort. This surgical walking shoe has a relatively low-profile fit, allowing users to remain active and independent throughout the recovery process and continue daily activities such as driving, for example. Frequently Asked Questions About This Surgical Medical Shoe & Foot Brace What conditions / injuries does this post-op shoe treat? Perfect for use following toe, foot, and ankle surgery or injuries including broken toes, hairline stress fractures, post-op bunion removal (bunionectomy), hammertoe, Lisfranc fractures, plantar fasciitis, sprains, strains, bruised foot bones, metatarsal fractures, general foot pain, and more. How does it work? This post-op foot splint is designed to provide mobility, protection, and support for day-to-day activities following toe, foot, ankle, and leg surgery or trauma. Who can wear this brace? Available in sizes ranging from a SMALL - FEMALE to an XL - MALE, fitting a wide variety of adult women and men, as well as teenagers and youth. Will this fit my child? Certain sizes will fit kids (see our size chart for specifics). What size should I get?  View our sizing graphic in the images above. This table shows size conversions between men's, women's, and big kid's shoes. When choosing your size, select the corresponding male or female version according, regardless of your gender. This walking cast shoe is universal, so it will fit your right or left foot. When should I wear it? This toe, foot, and ankle brace can be worn throughout the day for post-op support. Ask your doctor before wearing this shoe while sleeping. What is it made of? This broken metatarsal treatment brace is made of a hard rubber sole, EVA foam insole, polyester lining, and medical-grade Velcro straps. Can I drive while wearing this orthopedic slipper for hairline fractures? Yes. How do I put it on? Undo the top strap. Loosen the bottom and middle straps. Place your affected foot inside the shoe, making sure to slide your heel to the back of the shoe. Fasten the bottom Velcro strap, repositioning the small, adjustable Velcro piece for a tighter fit. Reposition the small Velcro piece and fasten the middle strap. Slide the top strap through the plastic D-ring, tighten, and secure. Note that each strap can be trimmed, if necessary. However, once the straps have been trimmed, the brace cannot be returned. Washing Instructions: Made of a ridged rubber sole, EVA foam insole, polyester lining, and medical-grade Velcro closures. Other features: The non-skid tread provides extra stability while walking. Wide, square toe design acts as a buffer for protection. Rigid rocker sole allows for a more natural step. Color: Black. 618669342773 7660763054133 new 21.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10a1101-post-op-broken-foot-toe-fracture-shoe-for-women_1bb6f43f-8246-4855-adce-115899b083b9_grande.jpg?v=1536618447 641061983552 BraceAbility 10A1101MF Post-op Shoes MUS Post-op Broken Foot & Toe Fracture Medical Walking Shoe http://www.braceability.com/products/post-op-shoe?variant=7660763119669 Post-op Broken Foot & Toe Fracture Medical Walking Shoe Female / L Why You Need This Post Op Shoe for Toe & Foot Fractures After foot surgery, freely moving around can easily undo the repairs your surgeon made. Therefore, post-op recovery from foot surgery typically involves a period of immobilization, followed by several weeks of progressive weight bearing and motion, including the use of a walking boot or a medical shoe for broken foot care. Eventually, you will likely need to go through a physical therapy treatment to return strength, flexibility, and balance to the affected foot, ankle, or leg. This broken toe shoe was specifically designed to provide mobility, protection, and support for day-to-day activities following toe and foot injuries or surgeries, including: Broken toes Bunions Hammer toes Lisfranc fractures Plantar fasciitis Heel fractures Morton's neuroma 5th metatarsal break What If I Sprained or Broke My Ankle? We recommend our short, cam walking boot or air walker after you sprain or break your ankle. For these boots provide compression and stabilization around your ankle. Depending on how tall you are, as well as the location and severity of your ankle injury, a tall walking boot might be ideal compared to short walking boot. Anybody 6’ or taller should purchase a tall walking boot for proper support, protection, and immobilization of their foot and ankle. In addition to ankle sprains and fractures, tall walking boots can help with some lower leg fractures. 5 Reasons Why People Love This Broken Foot Walking Cast Boot Finding the right shoes following surgery for a broken or injured foot can be a daunting task. This post-operative walking shoe offers unbeatable support and protection after a foot fracture or plantar surgery. Following is a list of outstanding features that make this post-op shoe a good choice in comparison to other surgical shoes on the market: Wide Footbed & Square-Toe Design What makes this one of the best post-op shoes? For one, this orthopedic surgical shoe has a wide footbed and square-toe design, which acts as a bumper to provide extra protection and prevent your toes, especially your pinky and big toe, from rubbing against the brace or some other surface. This orthotic is available as both a women’s post-op shoe and one for men. The difference is that the foot fracture splint for women is a bit narrower. However, each version of these versatile shoes for broken foot treatment comes in a variety of sizes, which can be worn on your left or right foot thanks to its squared footbed. Deluxe EVA Foam Insole Soft, padded lining along the inner portion of the shoe and a lightweight foam insole makes this broken foot cast shoe comfortable for extended periods of use. The EVA material that our insoles are made of is a dense foam polymer known as Ethylene Vinyl Acetate. The durable material has a superior shock absorbing quality, making our flat-bottomed shoe for broken toes ideal to walk or stand on. The insole on this post-surgical shoe can be removed, which is convenient for instances where the use of a pressure-relieving insole or arch support is needed. Plus, the padded heel area of this particular post-op shoe helps prevent slippage. Rigid Rocker Sole & Non-Skid Tread The hard, rocker sole and traction tread at the bottom of this stiff soled shoe for a broken foot is also smart features both in terms of user comfort and safety. A rocker-bottom sole supports your arch, which can help relieve pain and pressure on your forefoot, heel, and ankle during recovery. It also promotes a more natural gait, allowing you to step with ease. The non-slip, traction grooves provide extra stability while walking, making movement easier and safer to prevent re-injury. Adjustable Velcro Straps Three customizable Velcro straps help accommodate post-surgical bulk, bandaging, and swelling after sustaining a foot or toe injury. Immediately after surgery, you will need more space due to swelling and dressings. But eventually, you will no longer need to wear bandaging and inflammation will subside. You can simply reposition the adjustable Velcro hook pieces, as well as tighten and trim the bottom two straps on top of your foot as swelling dissipates. Though it does not include an adjustable Velcro piece, you can also tighten and trim the top ankle strap on this post-op foot surgery shoe as needed. Another bonus of these short shoes for a broken foot is that these Velcro straps are much stronger than most. That is because they are medical-grade Velcro straps, which are 10 times stronger than the retail-grade Velcro you’ll find on braces at CVS, Walgreens, or your local drugstore. Low-Profile and Lightweight Fit A semi-open style and airflow-friendly material make these post-op sandals more breathable for all-day comfort. This surgical walking shoe has a relatively low-profile fit, allowing users to remain active and independent throughout the recovery process and continue daily activities such as driving, for example. Frequently Asked Questions About This Surgical Medical Shoe & Foot Brace What conditions / injuries does this post-op shoe treat? Perfect for use following toe, foot, and ankle surgery or injuries including broken toes, hairline stress fractures, post-op bunion removal (bunionectomy), hammertoe, Lisfranc fractures, plantar fasciitis, sprains, strains, bruised foot bones, metatarsal fractures, general foot pain, and more. How does it work? This post-op foot splint is designed to provide mobility, protection, and support for day-to-day activities following toe, foot, ankle, and leg surgery or trauma. Who can wear this brace? Available in sizes ranging from a SMALL - FEMALE to an XL - MALE, fitting a wide variety of adult women and men, as well as teenagers and youth. Will this fit my child? Certain sizes will fit kids (see our size chart for specifics). What size should I get?  View our sizing graphic in the images above. This table shows size conversions between men's, women's, and big kid's shoes. When choosing your size, select the corresponding male or female version according, regardless of your gender. This walking cast shoe is universal, so it will fit your right or left foot. When should I wear it? This toe, foot, and ankle brace can be worn throughout the day for post-op support. Ask your doctor before wearing this shoe while sleeping. What is it made of? This broken metatarsal treatment brace is made of a hard rubber sole, EVA foam insole, polyester lining, and medical-grade Velcro straps. Can I drive while wearing this orthopedic slipper for hairline fractures? Yes. How do I put it on? Undo the top strap. Loosen the bottom and middle straps. Place your affected foot inside the shoe, making sure to slide your heel to the back of the shoe. Fasten the bottom Velcro strap, repositioning the small, adjustable Velcro piece for a tighter fit. Reposition the small Velcro piece and fasten the middle strap. Slide the top strap through the plastic D-ring, tighten, and secure. Note that each strap can be trimmed, if necessary. However, once the straps have been trimmed, the brace cannot be returned. Washing Instructions: Made of a ridged rubber sole, EVA foam insole, polyester lining, and medical-grade Velcro closures. Other features: The non-skid tread provides extra stability while walking. Wide, square toe design acts as a buffer for protection. Rigid rocker sole allows for a more natural step. Color: Black. 618669342773 7660763119669 new 21.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10a1101-post-op-broken-foot-toe-fracture-shoe-for-women_1bb6f43f-8246-4855-adce-115899b083b9_grande.jpg?v=1536618447 641061983569 BraceAbility 10A1101LF Post-op Shoes LUS Post-op Broken Foot & Toe Fracture Medical Walking Shoe http://www.braceability.com/products/post-op-shoe?variant=7660689621045 Post-op Broken Foot & Toe Fracture Medical Walking Shoe Male / M Why You Need This Post Op Shoe for Toe & Foot Fractures After foot surgery, freely moving around can easily undo the repairs your surgeon made. Therefore, post-op recovery from foot surgery typically involves a period of immobilization, followed by several weeks of progressive weight bearing and motion, including the use of a walking boot or a medical shoe for broken foot care. Eventually, you will likely need to go through a physical therapy treatment to return strength, flexibility, and balance to the affected foot, ankle, or leg. This broken toe shoe was specifically designed to provide mobility, protection, and support for day-to-day activities following toe and foot injuries or surgeries, including: Broken toes Bunions Hammer toes Lisfranc fractures Plantar fasciitis Heel fractures Morton's neuroma 5th metatarsal break What If I Sprained or Broke My Ankle? We recommend our short, cam walking boot or air walker after you sprain or break your ankle. For these boots provide compression and stabilization around your ankle. Depending on how tall you are, as well as the location and severity of your ankle injury, a tall walking boot might be ideal compared to short walking boot. Anybody 6’ or taller should purchase a tall walking boot for proper support, protection, and immobilization of their foot and ankle. In addition to ankle sprains and fractures, tall walking boots can help with some lower leg fractures. 5 Reasons Why People Love This Broken Foot Walking Cast Boot Finding the right shoes following surgery for a broken or injured foot can be a daunting task. This post-operative walking shoe offers unbeatable support and protection after a foot fracture or plantar surgery. Following is a list of outstanding features that make this post-op shoe a good choice in comparison to other surgical shoes on the market: Wide Footbed & Square-Toe Design What makes this one of the best post-op shoes? For one, this orthopedic surgical shoe has a wide footbed and square-toe design, which acts as a bumper to provide extra protection and prevent your toes, especially your pinky and big toe, from rubbing against the brace or some other surface. This orthotic is available as both a women’s post-op shoe and one for men. The difference is that the foot fracture splint for women is a bit narrower. However, each version of these versatile shoes for broken foot treatment comes in a variety of sizes, which can be worn on your left or right foot thanks to its squared footbed. Deluxe EVA Foam Insole Soft, padded lining along the inner portion of the shoe and a lightweight foam insole makes this broken foot cast shoe comfortable for extended periods of use. The EVA material that our insoles are made of is a dense foam polymer known as Ethylene Vinyl Acetate. The durable material has a superior shock absorbing quality, making our flat-bottomed shoe for broken toes ideal to walk or stand on. The insole on this post-surgical shoe can be removed, which is convenient for instances where the use of a pressure-relieving insole or arch support is needed. Plus, the padded heel area of this particular post-op shoe helps prevent slippage. Rigid Rocker Sole & Non-Skid Tread The hard, rocker sole and traction tread at the bottom of this stiff soled shoe for a broken foot is also smart features both in terms of user comfort and safety. A rocker-bottom sole supports your arch, which can help relieve pain and pressure on your forefoot, heel, and ankle during recovery. It also promotes a more natural gait, allowing you to step with ease. The non-slip, traction grooves provide extra stability while walking, making movement easier and safer to prevent re-injury. Adjustable Velcro Straps Three customizable Velcro straps help accommodate post-surgical bulk, bandaging, and swelling after sustaining a foot or toe injury. Immediately after surgery, you will need more space due to swelling and dressings. But eventually, you will no longer need to wear bandaging and inflammation will subside. You can simply reposition the adjustable Velcro hook pieces, as well as tighten and trim the bottom two straps on top of your foot as swelling dissipates. Though it does not include an adjustable Velcro piece, you can also tighten and trim the top ankle strap on this post-op foot surgery shoe as needed. Another bonus of these short shoes for a broken foot is that these Velcro straps are much stronger than most. That is because they are medical-grade Velcro straps, which are 10 times stronger than the retail-grade Velcro you’ll find on braces at CVS, Walgreens, or your local drugstore. Low-Profile and Lightweight Fit A semi-open style and airflow-friendly material make these post-op sandals more breathable for all-day comfort. This surgical walking shoe has a relatively low-profile fit, allowing users to remain active and independent throughout the recovery process and continue daily activities such as driving, for example. Frequently Asked Questions About This Surgical Medical Shoe & Foot Brace What conditions / injuries does this post-op shoe treat? Perfect for use following toe, foot, and ankle surgery or injuries including broken toes, hairline stress fractures, post-op bunion removal (bunionectomy), hammertoe, Lisfranc fractures, plantar fasciitis, sprains, strains, bruised foot bones, metatarsal fractures, general foot pain, and more. How does it work? This post-op foot splint is designed to provide mobility, protection, and support for day-to-day activities following toe, foot, ankle, and leg surgery or trauma. Who can wear this brace? Available in sizes ranging from a SMALL - FEMALE to an XL - MALE, fitting a wide variety of adult women and men, as well as teenagers and youth. Will this fit my child? Certain sizes will fit kids (see our size chart for specifics). What size should I get?  View our sizing graphic in the images above. This table shows size conversions between men's, women's, and big kid's shoes. When choosing your size, select the corresponding male or female version according, regardless of your gender. This walking cast shoe is universal, so it will fit your right or left foot. When should I wear it? This toe, foot, and ankle brace can be worn throughout the day for post-op support. Ask your doctor before wearing this shoe while sleeping. What is it made of? This broken metatarsal treatment brace is made of a hard rubber sole, EVA foam insole, polyester lining, and medical-grade Velcro straps. Can I drive while wearing this orthopedic slipper for hairline fractures? Yes. How do I put it on? Undo the top strap. Loosen the bottom and middle straps. Place your affected foot inside the shoe, making sure to slide your heel to the back of the shoe. Fasten the bottom Velcro strap, repositioning the small, adjustable Velcro piece for a tighter fit. Reposition the small Velcro piece and fasten the middle strap. Slide the top strap through the plastic D-ring, tighten, and secure. Note that each strap can be trimmed, if necessary. However, once the straps have been trimmed, the brace cannot be returned. Washing Instructions: Made of a ridged rubber sole, EVA foam insole, polyester lining, and medical-grade Velcro closures. Other features: The non-skid tread provides extra stability while walking. Wide, square toe design acts as a buffer for protection. Rigid rocker sole allows for a more natural step. Color: Black. 618669342773 7660689621045 new 21.99 USD in stock http://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0011/7958/2517/products/10a11-men-post-op-broken-foot-and-toe-fracture-medical-walking-shoe-main_grande.jpg?v=1536618447 641061983583 BraceAbility 10A1101MM Post-op Shoes MUS Post-op Broken Foot & Toe Fracture Medical Walking Shoe http://www.braceability.com/products/post-op-shoe?variant=7660762824757 Post-op Broken Foot & Toe Fracture Medical Walking Shoe Male / L Why You Need This Post Op Shoe for Toe & Foot Fractures After foot surgery, freely moving around can easily undo the repairs your surgeon made. Therefore, post-op recovery from foot surgery typically involves a period of immobilization, followed by several weeks of progressive weight bearing and motion, including the use of a walking boot or a medical shoe for broken foot care. Eventually, you will likely need to go through a physical therapy treatment to return strength, flexibility, and balance to the affected foot, ankle, or leg. This broken toe shoe was specifically designed to provide mobility, protection, and support for day-to-day activities following toe and foot injuries or surgeries, including: Broken toes Bunions Hammer toes Lisfranc fractures Plantar fasciitis Heel fractures Morton's neuroma 5th metatarsal break What If I Sprained or Broke My Ankle? We recommend our short, cam walking boot or air walker after you sprain or break your